UDC

National Standard of the People's Republic of China GB

P GB 50010 – 2002

Code for Design of Concrete Structures

Released on February 20, 2002 Executed on April 1, 2002

Jointly Released by:

The Ministry of Construction of the People's Republic of China

National General Bureau of Quality Supervision, Inspection and

Quarantine
National Standard of the People's Republic of China

Code for Design of Concrete Structures

GB 50010-2002

Edited by: the Ministry of Construction of the People's Republic of China

Approved by: the Ministry of Construction of the People's Republic of

China

Enforcement Date: April 1, 2002

China Construction Industrial Publishing House

Beijing, 2002
 Notice about Release of the national standard Code for Design of
Concrete Structures

Document No. Jianbiao [2002] 47

The Code for Design of Concrete Structures revised by the Ministry of Construction jointly
with related departments upon the requirements of Notice about Releasing <Preparation
and Reversion Plan of Engineering and Construction Standards of 1997> (Document No.
Jianbiao [1997] 108) is approved as a national standard (Code no.: GB 50010-2002) after
a joint checkup by related departments. This Code is executed on April 1, 2002. In this
Code, Articles 3.1.8, 3.2.1, 4.1.3, 4.1.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 6.1.1, 9.2.1, 9.5.1, 10.9.3, 10.9.8,
11.1.2, 11.1.4, 11.3.1, 11.3.6, 11.4.12 and 11.7.11 are mandatory articles and must be
strictly executed. The original Code for Design of Concrete Structures GBJ 10-89 will be
abolished on December 31.

The Ministry of Construction is responsible for the control of this code and the
interpretation of those mandatory articles. Chinese Academy of Construction Science is
responsible to interpret the concrete technical contents. The Standard Rating Research
Institute of the Ministry of Construction is responsible to organize China Construction
Industrial Publishing House to publish and release this code.

The Ministry of Construction of the People's Republic of China

February 20, 2002

3
 Preface

This standard is revised and formulated jointly by Chinese Academy of Construction

Science and concerned universities/colleges, scientific research institutes, design units
and enterprises upon the requirements set forth in Document No. jianbiao [1997] 108 of
the Ministry of Construction.
During the revision process, the code revision team has studied various special subjects,
made wide survey and analysis, summarized the practical experiences of concrete
structure design in China in recent years, made it in accordance with the relating
standards and codes, and compared and international advanced standards and codes
and used them for reference. On the above-mentioned basis, we have extensively
consulted the relative units all over the country and made a trial design. It became the
final version after being revised on its main problems again and again.

This code mainly includes the following contents: basic design stipulations for concrete
structures, materials, structural analysis, computation of limiting state of bearing capacity
and check computation of normal -use limiting state, aseismic design of structures,
members and structural members and related appendixes.
It’s possible for this code to be modified partially in the future. The information and
contents of articles about the partial revision shall be published in the magazine
Standardization of Engineering and Construction.

The articles written in boldface are mandatory articles and must be strictly executed.

In order to improve the quality of this code, during the execution process of this code,
each unit should attentively summarize experiences in combination with the engineering
practice and post their opinions and suggestions to the GB Code for Design of Concrete
Structures management team of Chinese Academy of Construction Science addressed at
rd
the East Road No. 30, North 3 Ring, Beijing (Zip Code: 100013, E-mail:
code-ibs -cabr@263.net.cn).
This Code is mainly edited by the Chinese Academy of Construction Science.

Units participating in the edition of this Code are: Tsinghua University, Tianjin University,
Chongqing Construction University, Hunan University, Southeast University, Hehai
University, Dalian Engineering University, Harbin Construction University, Xi'an
Construction Science and Technology University, Construction Design Institute of
Construction Ministry, Beijing City Construction Design & Research Institute, Capital
Engineering Co., Ltd., Beijing Design Institute of China Light Industry, Professional
Design Institute under Ministry of Railway, Water Transport Planning & Design Institute
under the Ministry of Communications, Northwest Hydroelectricity Exploration & Design
Institute, and Prestressing force Committee of Metallurgy Material Trade Society.

4
Main drafters of this Code:

Li Mingshun, Xu Youlin
Bai Shengxiang, Bai Shaoliang, Sun Huizhong, Sha Zhiguo, Wu Xuemin, Chen Jian, Hu
Dexin, Cheng Maokun, Wang Zhendong, Wang Zhenhua, Guo Zhenhai, Zhuang Yanping,
Zhu Long, Zhou Yinsheng, Song Yupu, Shen Jumin, Di Xiaotan, Wu Peigang, Zhou Di,
Jiang Weishan, Tao Xuekang, Kang Guyi, Lan Zongjian, Gan Cheng, Xia Qili.

5
 Table of Contents

1 General Provisions...........................................................................1
2 Terms and Symbols ..........................................................................2
2.1 Terms ....................................................................................................... 2
2.2 Symbols ................................................................................................... 4
3 Fundamental Design Stipulations................................................ 9
3.1 General Stipulations ................................................................................................................ 9
3.2 Stipulations on Computation of Limiting State of Bearing Capacity................. 10
3.3 Stipulations on Checking Computation of Limiting State of Normal Use .......12
3.4 Stipulations on Durability....................................................................................................14
4 Materials ............................................................................................16
4.1 Concrete....................................................................................................................................16
4.2 Steel Bar ....................................................................................................................................18
5 Structure Analysis ..........................................................................23
5.1 Basic Principles ...................................................................................................................... 23
5.2 Linear Elastic Analysis Method ........................................................................................ 24
5.3 Other Analysis Methods ...................................................................................................... 25
6 Requirements for Computation of Prestressed Concrete
Structural Members........................................................................28
6.1 General Stipulations .............................................................................................................. 28
6.2 Computation of Loss of Prestressing Force............................................................... 35
7 Computation of Limiting State of Bearing Capacity..............41
7.1 General Stipulations for Computation of Bearing Capacity of Normal Section
....................................................................................................................................................... 41
7.2 Computation of Bending Bearing Capacity of Normal Section.......................... 44
7.3 Computation of Compression Bearing Capacity of Normal Section................ 48
7.4 Computation of Tension Bearing Capacity of Normal Section........................... 63
7.5 Computation of Bearing Capacity of Diagonal Section ......................................... 65
7.6 Computation of Bearing Capacity of Contorted Section .......................................75
7.7 Computation of Die-cut Bearing Capacity ...................................................................83
7.8 Computation of Local Compression Bearing Capacity.......................................... 87
7.9 Checking Computation of Fatigue .................................................................................. 90
8 Checking Computation of Normal-use Limiting State ..........99
8.1 Checking Computation for Crack Control ....................................................................99
8.2 Checking Computation of Bending Deflection of Flexural Member...............108
9 Construction Stipulations...........................................................112
9.1 Expansion Joint ....................................................................................................................112
9.2 Protective Layer of Concrete ..........................................................................................113
9.3 Anchoring of Steel Bar .......................................................................................................114
9.4 Connection of Steel Bar ....................................................................................................116
9.5 Minimum Reinforcement Rate of Longitudinal Bearing Steel Bars ................119
9.6 Construction Stipulations for Prestressed Concrete Member ..........................120

6
10 Basic Stipulations on Structural Members........................... 125
10.1 Plates ........................................................................................................................................125
10.2 Beams.......................................................................................................................................129
10.3 Pillars.........................................................................................................................................136
10.4 Nodes of Beams and Pillars ............................................................................................137
10.5 Wall ............................................................................................................................................141
10.6 Buildup Flex ural Member .................................................................................................145
10.7 Deep Flexural Member ......................................................................................................152
10.8 Corbel ........................................................................................................................................158
10.9 Embedded Parts and Hoisting Rings ..........................................................................160
10.10 Connection of Prefabricated Members .......................................................................163
11 Aseismic Design of Concrete Structural Member ..................... 165
11.1 General Stipulations ............................................................................................................165
11.2 Materials ..................................................................................................................................170
11.3 Frame Girder..........................................................................................................................170
11.4 Frame Pillar and Frame Support...................................................................................175
11.5 Hinged Trestle Stand Pillar ..............................................................................................183
11.6 Nodes of Frame Beam/Pillar and Embedded Parts..............................................185
11.7 Shearwall .................................................................................................................................191
11.8 Structural Member of Prestressed Concrete............................................................199
Appendix A Computation of Plain Concrete Structural Member........... 201
Appendix B Nominal Sectional Area, Area of Computation Section and
Theoretical Weight of Steel Bar ............................................... 206
Appendix C Multishaft Strength and Constitutive Relation of Concrete
.......................................................................................................... 208
Appendix D Prestressing Loss of Common Post-tensioned Prestressed
Tendon............................................................................................ 214
Appendix E Time -related Prestressing Loss............................................... 218
Appendix F Computation of Bearing Capacity of Normal Section of
Member on any Section ............................................................. 221
Appendix G Design Value of Equivalent Centralized Counterforce for
Computation of Plate and Pillar Nodes.................................. 225
Explanation to Terms and Expressions Used in This Code ..................... 230
Interpretation to Articles.................................................................................... 229

7
 1 General Provisions

1.0.1 In order to implement national technical and economic policies during the design
of concrete structures and for being technologically advanced, safe and
practicable, economically reasonable and guaranteeing the quality, we hereby
work out this Code.
1.0.2 This Code is applicable to the design of reinforced concrete structure,
prestressed concrete structure and plain concrete bearing structure of buildings
for houses common structures. This Code is not applicable to the design of
lightweight aggregate concrete structure and other special concrete structures.
1.0.3 In addition to meeting this Code, the design of concrete structure should comply
with the stipulations of existing concerned compulsory standards of the state.

1
 2 Terms and Symbols

2.1 Terms

2.1.1 Concrete Structure

It is a structure mainly made of concrete, including plain concrete structure,

reinforced concrete structure, prestressed concrete structure and so on.

2.1.2 Plain Concrete Structure

It is a structure made of non-reinforced concrete or concrete not configured for

bearing.
2.1.3 Reinforc ed Concrete Structure

It is a structure made of concrete reinforced by common steel bars, steel bar net
or reinforcing cage, which is configured for bearing.

2.1.4 Prestressed Concrete Structure

It is a structure made of concrete reinforced prestressing tendons configured for

bearing and applying prestressing force in form of tensioning or other ways.

2.1.5 Pretensioned Prestressed Concrete Structure

It is a structure that is made by grouting concrete after tensioning prestressing

tendons and by passing and providing prestressing force via cohesive force.

2.1.6 Post-tensioned Prestressed Concrete Structure

It is a concrete structure with prestressing force applied in it by tensioning
prestressing tendons and anchoring on the structure after the concrete reaches
the stipulated strength.
2.1.7 Cast-in-situ Concrete Structure

It is a concrete structure to be formed by erecting the formwork erected at the site

and then carrying out the one-piece casting.

2.1.8 Prefabricated Concrete Structure

It is a concrete structure assembled by prefabricated concrete members or

components through welding, bolt connecting and other ways.

2
2.1.9 Assembled Monolithic Concrete Structure

It is a monolithic structure made of prefabricated members or components

connected by steel bars, connecting pieces or prestressing parts, with concrete
grouted on the site.

2.1.10 Frame Structure

It is a bearing structure made of beams and poles connected through rigid

connection or hinge joint.
2.1.11 Shearwall Structure

It is a structure made of shearwall to bear vertical and horizontal forces.

2.1.12 Frame-Shearwall Structure

It is a structure with shearwall and frame jointly to bear vertical and horizontal
forces.

2.1.13 Deep Flexural Member

It is a flexural member with the span/height ratio less than 5.

2.1.14 Deep Beam

It refers to a single-span beam with the span/height ratio not higher than 2 and
the multi-span beam with the span/height ratio not higher than 2.5.

2.1.15 Ordinary Steel Bar

It is the general term of various non-prestressing tendons to be used in concrete

structural members.

2.1.16 Prestressing Tendon

It is the general term of the steel bars, steel wires and steel strands used in
concrete structural members for applying prestressing force.
2.1.17 Degree of Reliability

It refers to the probability of the structure to accomplish preset functions in given

time and under stipulated conditions.

2.1.18 Safety Class

It refers to the grade of structure or structural member classified according to the

severity of damage consequence.

2.1.19 Design Working Life

It is the working life that the design specifies, in which the structure or structural
member can be used to implement its preset goals without overhaul.

2.1.20 Load Effect

It refers to the reaction of structure or structural member caused by load, such as

internal force, deformation, crack and so forth.

3
2.1.21 Load Effect Combination

It refers to the combination of various simultaneously-occurring load effect design

values, which is stipulated to ensure the reliability of the structure when designing
the structure as per the limiting conditions.

2.1.22 Fundamental Combination

It refers to the combination of permanent load and variable load when computing
the limiting condition of bearing capacity.

2.1.23 Characteristic Combination

It refers to the combination to use standard values and combined values as

representative load values for variable load when check-computi ng the limiting
state of normal use.

2.1.24 Quasi-permanent Combination

It refers to the combination to use quasi -permanent value as the representative

value of the load when check-computing the limiting state of normal use.

2.2 Symbols

2.2.1 Performance of Materials

Ec Elastic modulus of concrete;

f
Ec Fatigue deformation modulus of concrete;

Es Elastic modulus of steel bar;

C20 Concrete strength grade with the standard cube strength value equal
2
to 20N/mm ;
ƒ'cu Compression strength of concrete cube with side length equal to
150mm during the construction stage;
ƒcu,k Standard value of compression strength of concrete cube with side
length equal to 150mm during the construction stage;
ƒck, ƒc Standard value and design value of compression strength of concrete
axle center;

ƒtk, ƒt Standard value and design value of tensile strength of concrete axle
center;
ƒ'ck, ƒ' tk Standard values of compression strength and tensile strength of
concrete axle center at construction stage;
ƒyk, ƒ ptk Standard strength values of ordinary steel bars and prestressing
tendon;
ƒy, ƒ' y Design values of tensile strength and compression strength of ordinary
steel bars.
ƒpy, ƒ' py Design values of tensile strength and compression strength of
prestressing tendons.

4
2.2.2 Action, Action Effect and Bearing Capacity
N Design value of axial force;

N k, Nq Values of axial forces to be computed as per standard combination

and quasi-permanent combination of load effect;
Np Resultant force of prestressing tendon and non-prestressing tendon of
post-tensioned members;

Np0 Resultant force of prestressing tendon and non-prestressing tendon

when the normal prestressing force of the concrete is zero;
Nu0 Design value of compression or tensile bearing force of axial center on
the cross section of member.

Nuk, N uy Design values of eccentric compression bearing force or eccentric

tensile bearing force that the axial force applies on x or y axle.

M Design value of bending moment.

Mk, Mq Values of bending moments to be computed as per characteristic
combination and quasi -permanent combination of load effect.

Mu Design value of bending bearing force of the normal section of

member.
Mcr Bending moment value when the normal section of flexural member
dehisces.

T Design value of twisting torque.

V Design value of shear force.

Vcs Design value of shearing bearing capacity of concrete and web
reinforcement on the diagonal section of member.

Fl Design value of partial load or centralized counterforce.

s ck, s cq Normal stress of concrete at the edge for check-computing the rupture
strength under the standard combination and quasi-permanent
combination of load effect;
s pc Normal stress of concrete produced by pre-applied force;

s tp, s cp Principal tensile stress and principal compression stress in concrete;

f f
s c,max, s c,min Maximum and minimum stress of fiber concrete at the edge of
tensile area or compression area when check-computing fatigue.

s s, s p Stress of longitudinal steel bar / prestressing tendon in the

computation of bearing capacity of the normal section;

s sk Stress of longitudinal tensile steel bar to be computed as per the

characteristic combination of load effect or equivalent stress;
s con Tensile control stress of prestressing tendon;

s p0 Stress of prestressing tendon when the normal stress of the concrete

at the resultant force point of the prestressing tendon.
s pe Effective prestressing force of prestressing tendon;

5
 '
s l, s l Prestressing force loss of prestressing tendon in the tensile /
compression area at the corresponding stage;
τ Shearing stress of concrete;

ωmax Maximum crack width to be computed as per characteristic combination

of load effect while considering the influence of long-duration action.
2.2.3 Geometric Parameters

α, α' Distance from resultant force point of longitudinal tensile / compression

steel bar to proximal edge on the section;

αs, α's Distance from resultant force point of longitudinal non-prestressed

tensile / compression steel bar to proximal edge of the section;

αp, α' p Distance from resultant force point of longitudinal prestressing tendon in
tensile -/compression area to proximal edge of the section;
b Width of rectangle section, or width of web plate of T-shaped / I-shaped
section;
'
b f, b f Width of wing edge of tension / compression area in T-shaped or
I-shaped section;

d Diameter of steel bar or width of circular section;

c Thickness of protective layer of concrete;

e, e' Distance of application point of axial force to resultant force point of
longitudinal tensile-/compression steel bar;
e0 Eccentric distance of axial force to gravity center of the section;
ea Additional eccentric distance;

ei Initial eccentric distance;

h Height of section;
h0 Effective height of section;

hf, h'f Height of wing edge of tension / compression area of T-shaped or

I-shaped section;
i Turing radius of section;

rc Curvature radius ;
la Anchoring length of longitudinal tension steel bar;
l0 Computed span of beam plate or computed length of pole;

s Spacing interval of transverse steel bar along the axial direction of

member, spacing interval of spiral reinforcement or spacing interval of
web reinforcement;

6
 x Height of compression area of concrete;
y 0, yn Distance from gravity center of transformer section / net section gravity
center to computed fiber;

z Distance between resultant force point of longitudinal tension steel bar

to resultant force point of compression point of concrete;
A Area of section of member;

A0 Area of transformer section of member;

An Area of net section of member;

As, As' Section area of non -prestressing tendon of tension / compression area;

Ap, Ap' Section area of prestressing tendon of tension / compression area;

Asv1, Ast1 Section area of single web reinforcement in shearing / twisting
computation;

Astl Section area of all twisted longitudinal non-prestressing tendon taken in

the twisting computation;
Asv, A sh Area of all sections of each vertical / horizontal web reinforcement or
distributed steel bar in the same section;

Asb, A pb Section area of non-prestressed / prestressed bend-up steel bar in the

same bend-up plane;
Al Partial compression area of concrete;
Acor Core area of concrete in internal surface of steel bar net, spiral tendon
or web reinforcement;

B Section rigidity of flexural member;

W Elastic resistance moment of tension edge of section;

W0 Elastic resistance moment of tension edge of transformer section;

Wn Elastic resistance moment of tension edge of net section;

Wt Tension plastic resistance moment of section;

I Inertia moment of section;

I0 Inertia moment of transformer section;

In Inertia moment of net section.

2.2.4 Computation Coefficients and Others

a1 Ratio of the stress value of rectangle stress diagram of concrete in
compression area to the design value of compression strength of axle
center of concrete;

aE Ratio of elastic modulus of steel bar to elastic modulus of concrete;

ßc Influence coefficient of concrete strength;
ß1 Ratio of the height of compression area in the rectangle stress diagram
to the height of neutral axis (distance from neutral axis to edge of

7
 compression area);
ßl Improvement coefficient of concrete strength when partially compressed;

? Plastic influence coefficient of resistance moment of section of concrete

member;
? Augmenting factor of eccentric moment of axial force of eccentric
compression member considering second-order bending torque;
? Shear -span ratio of computing section;

µ Friction coefficient;
? Reinforcement ratio of longitudinal reinforcing bar;

?sv, ? sh Reinforcement ratio of vertical web reinforcement, horizontal web

reinforcement or vertical / horizontal distributed steel bar;
?v Volume reinforcement ratio of indirect steel bar or web reinforcement;

f Stabilization factor of compression member of axial center;

? Influence coefficient of long-duration action of load to bendin g deflection

argumentation;
? Strain asymmetric coefficient of longitudinal tension steel bar between
cracks;

8
 3 Fundamental Design Stipulations

3.1 General Stipulations

3.1.1 This Code adopts the limit state design technique based on probability theory,
uses reliability indexes to measure the reliability of structural member and adopts
the design expression of breakdown coefficient for design.
3.1.2 If the whole or a part of the structure exceeds a specific state, it cannot meet the
requirement for a certain function that the design stipulates. This specific state is
called as the limiting state of that function. There are two types of limiting states
as follows:

1. Limiting state of bearing capacity: a structure or a structural member at this

state will reach the extreme bearing capacity to appear as fatigue damage or
deformation unsuitable for bearing again.
2. Limiting state of normal use: it represents that the structure or structural
member reaches a certain stipulated limit value for normal use or of lasting
quality.

3.1.3 Any structural member should be computed and check-computed as per the
following stipulations according to the requirements for limiting state of their
bearing capacity and their normal use limiting state:
1. Bearing capacity and stabilization: computation of bearing capacity (including
instability) must be conducted for all structural members; when necessary, the
overturn, slippage and floating check-computations should be made for the
structure;
For any structure of aseismic requirement, the aseismic bearing capacity of
the structural member should be additionally check -computed.

2. Fatigue: a checking computation should be made for any member to be

hoisted directly by hoist; however, it is unnecessary to make fatigue checking
computation for any structural member to be hoisted directly by installation or
maintenance hoist depending on their service conditions and the design
experience;

3. Deformation: a deformation checking computation should be made for any

structural member the use of which needs to control the deformati on value;
4. Crack resistance and crack width: As for any structural member that requires
no crack when being used, the tensile stress checking computation of
concrete should be made; as for any structural member that allows for cracks
when being used, the crack width should be check-computed; as for any
superposition flexural member, a tensile stress checking computation should
be made for the steel bar.

9
3.1.4 Computation of bearing capacity (including instability) of structure and structural
member and overturn, slippage and floating checking computations all should
adopt the load design values; corresponding representative values should be
adopted for fatigue, deformation, crack resistance and crack width
checking-computation; when computing bearing capacity and check -computing
fatigue and crack resistance, the power coefficient of the load of the hoist should
be considered for any structural member that bears the hoist directly;

A checking computation for the construction stage should be made for any
prefabricated member as per the load values corresponding to their manufacture,
transportation and installation; when making the hoisting checking computation of
any prefabricated member, the dead weight of the member should be multiplied
by the power coefficient. The power coefficient can be 1.5; however, this
coefficient can be larger or smaller depending on the strained condition of the
member when it is being hoisted.

When necessary, a checking computation for the construction stage should be

made for any cast -in-situ structure;

When performing seismic design for a structural member, the action of

earthquake and other load values should be determined according to stipulations
in existing national standard Code for seismic design of buildings (GB50011).
3.1.5 The reinforcement ratios of reinforced concrete member and prestressed
concrete structural member should comply with the stipulations relating to the
minimum reinforcement ratio set forth in Chapters 9 and 10 of this Code;

Any plain concrete member should be computed according to the stipulations set
forth in Appendix A in this Code.

3.1.6 Any structure should be of global stability, and any partial damage of the structure
should not result in any large-scale collapse.
3.1.7 Within the designed lifetime and under normal maintenance conditions, any
structure or structural member should keep their use functions without any
overhaul operation for strengthening. The design life should be determined
according to the existing national standard United Standards for Reliability Design
of Building Structures (GB50068). If the construction unit has higher requirements,
the design life can be determined upon the requirement of the construction unit.
3.1.8 Without appraisement of technology or permit of design, any usage and
application environment of the structure should not be changed.

3.2 Stipulations on Computation of Limiting State of Bearing Capacity

3.2.1 Depending on the severity of damage consequence of building structure,

the architectures can be divided into three safety class. When designing,
appropriate safety class should be selected under the stipulations in Table
3.2.1 according to the actual situation.

10
 Table 3.2.1 Safety classes of Architectures

Safety class Damage Consequence Type of Building

Class 1 Very severe Important building

Class 2 Severe Common building

Class 3 Not severe Minor building

Note: As for any architecture that has special requirements, its safety class should
be separately determined according to actual situations.

3.2.2 The safety class of various structural members for a building had better be the
same as that of the whole structure. The safety class of part of structural
members can be suitably adjusted depending on their importance but should not
be less than Class 3.
3.2.3 As for the limiting state of bearing capacity, the structural member should adopt
the following limiting state design expressions according to the fundamental or
occasional combination of load effect:

γ0S ≤ R (3.2.3-1)

R = R(ƒ c, ƒ s, a k, ……) (3.2.3-2)

Where:

γ 0 – Important coefficient: As for any structural member with the safety class being
Class 1 or the design working life being 100 or more years, the importance
coefficient should not be less than 1.1; as for any structural member with
the safety class being Class 2 or the design working life being 50 yea rs, the
importance coefficient should not be less than 1.0; as for any structural
member with the safety class being Class 3 or the design working life being
5 or less years, the importance coefficient should not be less than 0.9. In
any seismic design, the importance coefficient shall not be considered for
the structural member.

S – The design value of load effect combination at limiting state of bearing

capacity, which is computed according to the stipulations set forth in the
existing national standard Code for load of building structure (GB50009)
and the existing national standard Code for seismic design of buildings
(GB50011).

R – Design value of bearing capacity of structural member; for any seismic

design, this value should be divided by the seismic adjustment coefficient of
bearing capacity, γ RE;
R(•) – Function of bearing capacity of structural member;

ƒ c, ƒs - Design value of strength of concrete / steel bar;

ak – Standard geometric parameter; when the variability of geometric parameter
has obviously adverse impact on the performance of the structure, an extra
value may be added or subtracted separately.

In each chapter of this Code, γ0S in formula (3.2.3-1) is expressed by internal

force design values (N, M, V, T, etc.); as for any prestressing concrete structure,
the prestressing effect should be additionally considered according to stipulations
set forth in Article 6.1.1 in this Code.

11
 3.3 Stipulations on Check-Computation of Normal-use Limiting State

3.3.1 As for the limiting state of normal use, the structural member should adopt the
following expressions of limiting state design respectively according to
quasi -permanent combination or standard combination of load effect:

S≤C (3.3.1)
Where,
S – Load effect combination value of limiting state of normal use;

C – Limit value of deformation, crack width, stress and so on stipulated for

any structural member meeting the normal use requirements.
The standard combination and quasi -permanent combination of load effect should
be computed according to the existing national standard Code for load of building
structure (GB50009).

3.3.2 The maximum bending deflection of flexural member should be computed as per
the characteristic combination of the load effect while considering the long-term
action and influence of load. Its computation value should not exceed the bending
deflection limit value stipulated in Table 3.3.2.
Table 3.3.2 Limit Values of Deflection of Flexural member

Type of Member Limit Value of Bending Deflection

Hoist beam: manual hoist l0/500

motor hoist l0/600

Roof, building cover and stair member:

When l0 < 7m, l0 /200 (l 0/250)

When 7m ≤ l0 ≤ 9m, l0/250 (l 0/300)

When l0 > 9m, l0/300 (l 0/400)

Notes:
1 l0 in the table is the computed span of the member;

2 Numbers in parentheses are suitable for the member the use of which
has relatively higher requirement for deflection;
3 If the structure is pre-arched when fabricating and its application
permits, the arched value should be subtracted from the computed
deflection value when check-computing the deflection; as for
prestressing concrete member, the counter-arching value produced by
the pre-applied force may also be subtracted.

4 When computing the deflection value of a cantilever member, the

computed span l0 should be twice of the actual cantilever length.

3.3.3 The crack control grades of normal section of structural member are divided into
three levels. The classification of crack control grade should comply with the
following stipulations:

Class 1 – The structure members, which strictly requires the member not to have

12
 crack to occur, when being computed as per the characteristic combination of
load effect, the concrete on the tension edge of them should not produce tensile
stress;

Class 2 –the members that generally requires no crack occurring, when being
computed as per the standard combination of load effect, the tensile stress in the
concrete on the tension edge of them should not be larger than the standard
value of tensile strength of the concrete at the axial center; when being computed
as per the quasi-permanent combination of load effect, they are unsuitable for the
concrete on the tension edge of the member to produce tensile stress; the
requirement can be lower if there is appropriate reliable experience.

Class 3 – A member with crack is allowed. When being computed as per the
characteristic combination of load effect and considering the long-term action and
influence, the maximum crack width of the member should not exceed the
maximum crack width limit value stipulated in Table 3.3.4.
3.3.4 As for a structural member, different crack control grades and the maximum crack
width limit value wlim should be selected depending on the type of the structure,
environment type set forth in Table 3.4.1 in this Code and according to the
stipulations in Table 3.3.4.
Table 3.3. 4 Crack Control Grade and Max. Crack Width Limit Value
ofStructural Member

Prestressed Concrete
Reinforced Concrete Structure
Environment Structure
Type Crack control Crack control
wlim(mm) wlim(mm)
grade grade
? ? 0.3(0.4) ? 0.2

? ? 0.2 ? -

? ? 0.2 ? -
Notes:
1 Stipulations in this table are suitable for reinforced concrete member adopting hot rolled steel bar
and prestressed concrete member adopting prestressed steel wire, steel strand and heat-treated
steel bar; when adopting other types of steel wire or steel bar, their crack control requirement can
be determined as per special standards.
2 As for any flexural member under Type? environment in the area with annual average relative
humidity less than 60%, their maximum crack width limit value may use the figures in
parentheses;
3 As for any reinforced concrete roof, support and hoist beam needing fatigue check computation
in a Type? environment, the maximum crack width limit value should be 0.2mm; as for
reinforced concrete roof beam and bracket, the maximum crack width limit value should be
0.3mm.
4 Any prestressed concrete roof beam, joist, roof truss, bracket, roof board and floor slab in Type?
environment should be check-computed as per Class? crack control grade; any prestressed
concrete hoist beam needing fatigue checking computation in Class? or Class? environment
should be check-computed as per Class ? crack control grade;
5 The crack control classes and maximum crack width limit values stipulated in the table for
prestressed concrete member are only applicable for the checking computation of normal
sections; the crack control checking computation of declined section of prestressed concrete
member should comply with the requirements set forth in Chapter 8 of this Code.
6 As for chimney, silo and any structural member under the pressure of liquid, their crack control
requirement should meet related stipulations in the special standards.
7 As to any structural member used in Type ? or Type ? environment, their crack control
requirement should comply with related stipulations in the special standards.

13
 8 The maximum crack width limit values set forth in this table are applicable only for
check-computing the maximum crack width due to the action of the load.

3.4 Stipulations on Durability

3.4.1 The durability of concrete structure should be designed depending on the

environment type in Table 3.4.1 as well as the design working life.

Table 3.4.1 Environment Type of Concrete Structure

Environment Type Conditions

? Normal indoor environment

Indoor moist environment; open environment in non-frosty
a and non-cold regions; environment directly touching
? non -aggressive water or soil
Open environment in frosty and cold regions; environment
b
directly touching non-aggressive water or soil
Environment using deicing salt; frosty/cold regions’
? environment in which the water level changes in winter;
coastal outdoor environment

? Seawater environment

Environment affected by artificial or natural aggressive

?
substance
Note: The division of frosty and cold regions should comply with the stipulations set forth in the
existing national standard Heat Engineering Design Specifications for Civil Buildings (JGJ 24).

3.4.2 Any structural concrete in Type? ,? and ? environment and with the design
working life of 50 years should comply with the stipulations in Table 3.4.2.
Table 3.4.2 Basic Requirements for Durability of Structure Concrete
Min Lowest Max
Max Max alkali
Environment cement concrete chlorion
water-cement content
Type content strength content
ratio 3 (kg/m 3)
(kg/m ) class (%)
? 0.65 225 C20 1.0 No limitation

a 0.60 250 C25 0.3 3.0

?
b 0.55 275 C30 0.2 3.0

? 0.50 300 C30 0.1 3.0

Notes:

1 The chlorion content refers to the percentage that it covers the cement content;
2 The max chlorion content in prestressed member concrete is 0.06 percent and the minimum cement
content 300kg/m3; two grades should be raised for the minimum concrete strength grade as per the
stipulations in the table;
3 The minimum cement content of the plain concrete member should not be less than the value after
subtracting 25kg/m3 from the figure in table;
4 When adding active admixture or other additive agent that can improve the durability into the concrete,
the minimum cement content can be suitably reduced;
5 When there is reliable engineering experience, one grade can be reduced for the minimum concrete
strength in Type? and ? environment;

14
 6 When active non-alkali aggregate is used, no limit can be made for alkali content in the concrete.
3.4.3 In any Type? environment, the design structural concrete with 100-year working
life should comply with the following stipulations:
1 The minimum concrete strength class of reinforced concrete structure
should be C30; the minimum concrete strength class of the prestressed
concrete structure should be C40;

2 The maximum chlorion content in concrete is 0.06%;

3 It is suitable to adopt non-alkali aggregate; when adopting active alkali
3
aggregate, the maximum alkali content in the concrete should be 3.0kg/m .

4 The thickness of protective layer of the concrete should rise by 40%

according to Table 9.2.1 in this Code; when effective surface protection
measures are taken, the thickness of protective layer of the concrete can
be suitably reduced;
5 During the application, periodical maintenance should be performed.

3.4.4 As for any concrete structure with the design working life of 100 years in Type ?
and ? environment, some special and effective measures should be taken.

3.4.5 In any moist environment in a frosty / cold region, the structural concrete should
comply with the frost-resisting requirement and the frost-resisting grade of the
concrete should meet requirements in related standards.
3.4.6 As for any concrete structure that has infiltration-resisting requirement, their
concrete infiltration-resisting grade should comply with requirements in related
standards.

3.4.7 The reinforcing bar of any structural member in Type ? environment had better
adopt web reinforcement coated by epoxy; special protection measures should
be taken for any prestressing tendon, anchoring and connector.
3.4.8 The durability requirement of the concrete structure in Type? and? environments
should comply with the stipulations in related standards.

As for any temporary concrete structure, the designer may consider no durability
requirement of the concrete.

15
 4 Materials

4.1 Concrete

4.1.1 The strength grade of concrete should be determined as per the standard value
of cube compression strength. The standard cube compression strength value
refers to the compression strength of a cube sample part that is made and
maintained in a standard way and has the side length of 150mm, which is
measured by using the standard experiment method for 28d period and has 95%
of guarantee ratio.
4.1.2 The concrete strength grade of reinforced concrete structure should not be lower
than C15; when HRB335 steel bar is used, the concrete strength grade had
better not be lower than C20; when adopting HRB400 and RRB400 steel bars
and members bearing repeated loads, the strength grade of the concrete should
not be lower than C20.

The concrete strength grade of any prestressed concrete structure should not be
lower than C30; when using steel strand, steel wire and heat-treated steel bar as
the prestressing tendon, the strength grade of the concrete had better not be
lower than C40.
Note: when adopting pit-sand concrete and blast furnace slag concrete, stipulations in special
standards should be met additionally.

4.1.3 Standard values of compression / tensile strength of the axial center of the
concrete, ƒck and ƒtk, should be selected as per Table 4.1.3.
2
Table 4.1.3 Standard Values of Concrete Strength (N/mm )
Concrete Strength Class
Strength
Type

C15 C20 C25 C30 C35 C40 C45 C50 C55 C60 C65 C70 C75 C80

ƒ ck 10.0 13.4 16.7 20.1 23.4 26.8 29.6 32.4 35.5 38.5 41.5 44.5 47.4 50.2
ƒ tk 1.27 1.54 1.78 2.01 2.20 2.39 2.51 2.64 2.74 2.85 2.93 2.99 3.05 3.11

4.1.4 The design values of compression strength and tensile strength of the axial
center of concrete, ƒc and ƒ t, should be selected according to Table 4.1.4.

16
 2
Table 4.1.4 Design Values of Concrete Strength (N/mm )
Concrete Strength Class

Strength
Type

C15 C20 C25 C30 C35 C40 C45 C50 C55 C60 C65 C70 C75 C80

ƒc 7.2 9.6 11.9 14.3 16.7 19.1 21.1 23.1 25.3 27.5 29.7 31.8 33.8 35.9
ƒt 0.91 1.10 1.27 1.43 1.57 1.71 1.80 1.89 1.96 2.04 2.09 2.14 2.18 2.22

Notes:

1 When computing the axial- center / eccentric compression member of cast-in-situ

reinforced concrete, if the longer side of the section or its diameter is less than
300mm, the design value of the concrete shown in the table should be multiplied by
a coefficient, 0.8; when the quality of the member (such as concrete molding,
section and axis size and so on) is surely guar anteed, it may not be limited by this.

2 The design value of centrifugal concrete should be taken as per the appropriate
standards.

4.1.5 The elastic compression or tension modulus of concrete, E c, should be selected

according to Table 4.1.5.
Table 4.1.5 Elastic Modulus of Concrete (x104N/mm 2)

Strength
class of C15 C20 C25 C30 C35 C40 C45 C50 C55 C60 C65 C70 C75 C80
concrete

Ec 2.20 2.55 2.80 3.00 3.15 3.25 3.35 3.45 3.55 3.60 3.65 3.70 3.75 3.80

4.1.6 The design values of center compression and tension fatigue strength of axial
ƒ ƒ
center of concrete, ƒ c and ƒ t, should be the product of concrete strength design
values in Table 4.1.4 multiplied by appropriate fatigue strength correction
coefficient γρ. The correction coefficient, γρ, should be taken depending on
ƒ
different fatigue stress ratio, ρ c, and referring to Table 4.1.6.
ƒ
The fatigue stress ratio of concrete, ρ c, should be computed according to the
following formula:
σƒc,min
ρ ƒc = --------------- (4.1.6)
σƒc,max
ƒ ƒ
Where, σ c,min, σ c,max – Respectively the minimum and maximum stress of
concrete in the same fiber in the section when check-computing the fatigue of the
member.

Table 4.1.6 Correction Coefficient of Concrete Fatigue Strength

ρ ƒc ρ ƒc < 0.2 ƒ
0.2 ≤ ρ c < 0.3
ƒ
0.3 ≤ ρ c < 0.4
ƒ
0.4 ≤ ρ c < 0.5 ρ ƒc ≥ 0.5
γp 0.74 0.80 0.86 0.93 1.0

When using steam for protective maintenance, the protective maintenance temperature
0
had better not exceed 60 C; otherwise, the needed design value of concrete strength
when computing should be increased by 20%.

17
 ƒ
4.1.7 The fatigue deformation modulus of concrete, E c, should be selected according
to Table 4.1.7.
4 2
Table 4.1.7 Fatigue Deformation Modulus of Concrete (X10 N/mm )

Strength
class of C20 C25 C30 C35 C40 C45 C50 C55 C60 C65 C70 C75 C80
concrete

Eƒc 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.7 1.75 1.8 1.85 1.9
0 0
4.1.8 When the temperature is within the range from 0 C to 100 C, the linear expansion
coefficient of concrete, αc, can be taken as 1x10 / C.
-5 o

The poisons ratio of concrete, νc, can be taken as 0.2.

The shearing deformation modulus of concrete, Gc, can be 40% of the concrete
elastic modulus as shown in Table 4.1.5.

4.2 Steel Bar

4.2.1 Steel bars for reinforced concrete structure and prestressed concrete structure
should be selected according to the following stipulations:
1 Common steel bars had better adopt HRB400 and HRB335 steel bars, or
adopt HPB235 and RRB400 steel bars;

2 Prestressing tendons had better adopt prestressed steel strand or steel

wire, or adopt heat-treated steel bars.
Note:

1 Common steel bars refer to steel bars to be used in reinforced concrete structure
and non- prestressing tendons to be used in prestressed concrete structure;

2 HRB400 and HRB335 steel bars refer to HRB400 and HRB335 steel bars specified
in the existing national standard Hot Rolled Web Reinforcement for Reinforced
Concrete (GB1499); HPB235 steel bar refers to Q235 steel bar specified in the
existing national standard Hot-rolled Finished Circular Steel Bar for Reinforced
Concrete (GB13013); RRB400 steel bar refers to KL400 steel bar specified in the
existing national standar d Steel Bar Heated by Remaining Heat for Reinforced
Concrete (GB13014);

3 Prestressed steel wire refers to the steel wire that is specified in the existing national
standard Steel Wire for Prestressed Concrete (GB/T5223) and has polished surface,
spiral web, steel wire with three planes scotched and stress removed;

4 When adopting any cold- processed steel bar or other steel bar that is not listed in
this article but meets the strength and extension coefficient requirements, that steel
bar should comply with the stipulation set forth in the special standard.

18
4.2.2 The standard strength value of steel bar should have an assurance factor
not less than 95%.
The standard strength value of hot-rolled steel bar is determined depending
on yield strength and expressed in ƒyk. The standard strength value of
prestressed steel strand, steel wire and heat-treated steel bar is determined
depending on the ultimate tensile strength and expressed in ƒptk.
The standard strength value of common steel bar should be selected
according to Table 4.2.2-1; the standard strength value of prestressing
tendon should be selected according to Table 4.2.2-2.
The nominal section area, computation section area and theoretical weight
of any steel bar, steel strand and steel wire of different diameters should be
determined by referring to Appendix B.
Table 4.2.2-1 Standard Strength Values of Common Steel Bars (N/mm2)

Type Symbol d(mm) ƒ yk

HPB235 (Q235) Φ 8-20 235

Hot-rolle HRB335 (20MnSi) Φ 6-50 335

d steel HRB400 (20MnsiV, 20MnSiNb,
? 6-50 400
bar 20MnTi)
RRB400 (K20MnSi) ?R 8-40 400

Note: 1 Diameter of hot-rolled steel bar refers to nominal diameter;

2 When adopting the steel bar with diameter larger than 40mm, reliable
engineering experience should be available.
2
Table 4.2.2-2 Standard Strength Values of Prestressing tendons (N/mm )

Type Symbol d(mm) ƒ ptk

8.6, 10.8 1860, 1720, 1570
1x3
12.9 1720, 1570
Steel strand φs 9.5, 11.1,
1860
1x7 12.7
15.2 1860, 1720

Spiral steel wire 4, 5 1770, 1670, 1570

Steel wire φp
with finished 6 1670, 1570
with stress surface φH
removed 7, 8, 9 1570
Scotched steel wire φI 5, 7 1570

40Si2Mn 6
Heat-treated
48Si2Mn φ HT 8.2 1470
steel bar
45Si2Cr 10

Notes:
1 Diameter of steel strand, d, refers to the diameter of circumscribed circle of
the steel strand, i.e., the nominal diameter, Dg, specified in the existing
national standard Steel Strand for Prestressed Concrete (GB/t5224), and the
diameter of steel wire and heat-treated steel bar, d, refers to the nominal
diameter;
2 The diameter of the steel wire with polished surface and stress removed, d, is
4-9mm, and the diameter of the spiral steel bar with stress removed, d, is 4-8mm.

19
4.2.3 The design value of tensile strength of common steel bar, ƒ'y, should be
selected as per Table 4.2.3-1; the design values of tensile strength of
prestressing tendon (ƒ py) of prestressing tendon and its compression
strength (ƒ'p y) should be selected as per Table 4.2.3-2.
When the structure has different types of steel bars, each type of steel bar
should adopt their respective designed strength values.
2
Table 4.2.3-1 Design Value of Strength of Common Steel Bar (N/mm )

Type Symbol ƒy ƒ’y

HPB 235 (Q235) Φ 210 210
HRB 335 (20MnSi) Φ 300 300

Hot-rolled
HRB 400
steel bar ? 360 360
(20MnSiV, 20MnSiNb, 20MnTi)

RRB 400 (K20MnSi) ?R 360 360

Note: In a reinforced concrete structure, when the designed tension strength

value of steel bar in axial-center tension member and small eccentric tension
2 2
member is larger than 300N/mm , the value still should be 300N/mm .
2
Table 4.2.3-2 Design Value of Strength of Prestressing tendon (N/mm )

Type Symbol ƒ ptk ƒ py ƒ’py

1860 1320
1x3
1720 1220 390

Steel strand φs 1570 1110

1x7 1860 1320
390
1720 1220

Spiral steel bar 1770 1250

φp
Steel wire with polished 1670 1180 410
surface φH
with stress 1570 1110
removed
Scotched steel
φI 1570 1110 410
bar
40Si2Mn
Heat -treated
48Si2Mn φ HT 1470 1040 400
steel bar
45Si2Cr

Note: When the standard strength values of prestressed steel strand and steel wire do not
meet the stipulations in Table 4.2.2- 2, the design value of its strength should be converted.

20
4.2.4 Elastic modulus of steel bar, Es, should be selected by referring to Table 4.2.4.
Table 4.2.4 Elastic Modulus of Steel Bar (X105N/mm 2)

Type Es
HPB 235 steel bar 2.1
HRB335 steel bar, HRB400 steel bar, RRB400 steel bar,
2.0
heat- treated steel bar
Steel wire with stress removed (steel wire with polished surface,
2.05
spiral-web steel wire, scotched steel wire)
Steel strand 1.95

Note: When necessary, actually measured elastic modulus can be adopted for steel strand.

4.2.5 The fatigue stress amplitude limit values of common steel bar and prestressing
ƒ ƒ
tendon, ? ƒ y and ? ƒ py, should be determined according to the fatigue stress ratio
ƒ ƒ
of steel bar, ρ s and ρ p and respectively referring to Table 4.2.5-1 and Table
4.2.5-2.
ƒ
The fatigue stress ratio of common steel bar, ρ s, should be computed by using
the following formula:
σƒs,min
ρ ƒs = --------------- (4.2.5-1)
σƒs,max
ƒ ƒ
where, σ s,min, σ s,max – Minimum and maximum stress of the steel bar in the same
layer when performing the fatigue checking computation of member.
σƒp,min
ρ ƒp = --------------- (4.2.5-2)
σƒp,max
ƒ ƒ
where, σ p,min, σ p,max – Minimum and maximum stress of the prestressing tendon
in the same layer when performing the fatigue checking computation of member.

Table 4.2.5-1 Fatigue Stress Amplitude Limit Value of Common Steel Bar
(N/mm2)
Fatigue ? ƒ ƒy
stress ratio HPB 235 steel bar HRB335 steel bar HRB400 steel bar
ƒ
-1.0≤ρ s<-0.6 160
ƒ
-0.6≤ρ s<-0.4 155
ƒ
-0.4≤ρ s<0 150
ƒ
0≤ρ s<0.1 145 165 165
ƒ
0.1≤ρ s<0.2 140 155 155

21
 (continue)
Fatigue ? ƒ ƒy
stress ratio HPB 235 steel bar HRB335 steel bar HRB400 steel bar
ƒ
0.2≤ρ s<0.3 130 150 150
ƒ
0.3≤ρ s<0.4 120 135 145
ƒ
0.4≤ρ s<0.5 105 125 130
ƒ
0.5≤ρ s<0.6 105 115
ƒ
0.6≤ρ s<0.7 85 95
ƒ
0.7≤ρ s<0.8 65 70
ƒ
0.8≤ρ s<0.9 40 45

Notes:

1 When using arc resistance butt-welding for tension steel bar, the fatigue
stress amplitude limit value at the joint should be the product of the value in
the table multiplied by the coefficient, 0.8.

2 After bring proved after the test, RRB400 steel bar can be used as the
member required for fatigue checking computation.

Table 4.2.5-2 Fatigue Stress Amplitude Limit Value of Prestressing tendon

2
(N/mm )
? ƒ ƒpy
Type ƒ ƒ
0.7≤ρ p<0.8 0.8≤ρ p<0.9
Steel wire with ƒ pk=1770, 1670 210 140
polished
Steel wire with
surface
ƒ pk=1570 200 130
stress
removed Scotched steel
wire
ƒ pk=1570 180 120

Steel strand 120 105

Note:

1 When ρƒp≥0.9, not allow for fatigue checking computation for steel bar.

2 When there is sufficient evidence, the fatigue stress amplitude limit value specified
in the table can be suitably adjusted.

22
 5 Structure Analysis

5.1 Basic Principles

5.1.1 When computing the structure as per the limit state of the bearing capacity and
check-computing it as per the limit state of normal use, the action (load) effect
analysis should be performed for the whole structure according to the action (load)
stipulated in the existing national standard; when necessary, more detailed
structural analysis should be carried out for any art with special bearing state in
the structure.
5.1.2 When the structure has several bearing states in different stages of the
construction and operation periods, separate structural analysis should be
performed respectively for each bearing state and the most unfavorable action
effect combination should be determined.

If it is possible for any structure to be subject to any occasional action such as fire,
explosion, knock and so forth, appropriate structural analysis should be
performed according to the requirements in related existing national standards.
5.1.3 Various geometric sizes that the structural analysis needs and the boundary
condition to be used for computation diagram, action value and combination,
computing indexes of material performance, initial stress and deformation state
and so on, should meet the actual working condition of the structure, while
appropriate structure assurance measures should be available.

Various simplified and approximated hypotheses to be used in the structural

analysis should have theoretic or experimental basis or have been proved in the
engineering practice. The exactness of the computation result should comply with
the requirements for engineering.
5.1.4 The structural analysis should com ply with the following requirements:
1 It should comply with the mechanical balance condition;

2 It should, to different extent, meet the deformation coordination conditions,

including constraint conditions of node and boundary;

3 It should adopt reasonable constitutive relations of materials or member

units.
5.1.5 When performing the structural analysis, you ought to select the following
methods depending on the structure type, arrangement of members, performance
of materials, bearing characteristics and so on:
- Linear elasticity analysis technique;
- Analysis method considering plastic internal force redistribution.

23
 - Plastic limit analysis method;
- Nonlinear analysis method;

- Testing analysis method.

5.1.6 The computerized processing programs used in the structural analysis should be
checked and validated and its technical conditions should comply with the
requirements set forth in this Code and related standards.

The computerized processing results should be judged and proofread and then
can be used for engineering only after their reasonability and validity have been
confirmed.

5.2 Linear Elastic Analysis Method

5.2.1 The linear elastic analysis method can be used for action and effect analysis of
bearing capacity limiting state and normal use limiting state of concrete
structures.
5.2.2 A whole structure analysis had better be performed for the bar -link structure by
regarding it as a spatial system and considering the influence of the bending,
axial deformation, shearing deformation and torsion deformation of the bar
imposed on the internal force of the structure.

When the following conditions are met, the analysis can be accordingly simplified:

1. Any spatial bar-link structure of regular shape can be divided into plane
structures of different directions along the column or wall axis for analysis, but
the spatial cooperation of the plane structure should be considered.
2. If the impact of axial, shearing and torsion deformations of the bar link to the
internal force of the structure, it can be ignored.

3. If the second-order effect of deformation of the structure or bar link to its

internal force, it can be ignored.
5.2.3 You had better adopt the following methods to determine the calculating charts of
the bar-link structure:

1. It is suitable to select the connecting line of the geometric center of the

section as the axis of the bar link.
2. The beam column nodes of cast-in-situ structure and assembled monolithic
structure, the connecting points of the column and foundation and so on can
adopt rigid connection; when beams, plates and their supporting members
are for one-piece casting, they can be hinged.
3. The calculating span or height of bar-link members had better be determined
according to the center distance or net distance of the supporting length of its
two ends and should be corrected according to the connecting rigidity of the
supporting nodes or the position of the supporting reaction.

4. When the rigidity of the connecting portion between bar-link members is

much larger than that of its central section, it can be inserted into the
calculating chart as a rigid dom ain.

24
5.2.4 The rigidity of the section of the bar-link member in the bar-link structure should
be determined according to the following methods:
1. The elastic modulus of concrete should be selected and applied according to
Table 4.1.5 of this Code.

2. The inertia moment should be calculated for the total cross section of the
homogenetic concrete.
3. It had better consider the effective width of the wing edge for the
cross-section inertia moment of any bar-link member of T-shaped section
when calculating. Or it can be determined by using the corrected inertia
moment of part of the area of the rectangle part of the section;

4. As for any bar-link member with ends baunch, the influence of its rigidity
change to the structure analysis should be considered.
5. As for the section rigidity of any bar-link member under different stressed
states, you had better consider to deduct the influence of the concrete
dehisce, creep strain and other factors.

5.2.5 Such analysis methods as analytic method, finite element method, differential
method and so had better be adopted for any bar-link member. As for any
structure of regular shape, an effective simplifying analysis method can be
adopted depending on their bearing characteristics and the types of action.

5.2.6 As for any beam column in which the supporting members are subject to
one-piece casting, the internal force value of the boundary section of the
abutment or node can be selected for design.
5.2.7 As for various two-way plates, when computing according to the limiting state of
bearing capacity and check computing according to the limiting state of normal
use, the linear elastic method can be adopted for their action and effect analysis.

5.2.8 As for any non-bar-link 2D or 3D structure, the elastic theoretical analysis method,
finite element analysis method or testing method can be adopted to determine
their elastic stress distribution, the required reinforcement amount and distribution
should be determined according to the area of the principal tensile stress diagram.
The multi-shaft strength and failure criterion of concrete can be computed
according to the stipulations of Appendix C.
When the structure is computed according to the limiting state of the bearing
capacity, its load and material performance indexes can be used as the design
values; when it is check-computed according to the limiting state of normal use,
its load and material performance indexes can be used as the standard value.

5.3 Other Analysis Methods

5.3.1 The continuous beam and continuous single-way plate of reinforced concrete in a
building should adopt the analysis method considering plastic internal force
recontribution. The values of the internal forces can be determined by using the
bending moment amplitude modulation method.

As for frame structure, frame-shearwall structure, two-way slab and so on, once
the internal force is obtained through the elastic analysis, the amplitude of the
bending moment of the abutment or node can be modulated, and the bending
moment in appropriate span can be determined.

25
 As to any structure and structural member to be designed by using the analysis
method considering the recontribution of plastic internal force, it should consider
to meet the requirements for normal-use limiting state or to take effective
construction measures.
As to any member directly bearing dynamic load and any structure that is
required not to have any crack appearing or under an erosive environment and so
on, the analysis method considering the recontribution of internal force.

5.3.2 As for any two-way rectangle plates with surrounding supported and bearing
symmetrically-distributed load, such plastic limit analysis methods as plastic
hinge line method or the stripe method and so forth can be adopted for the
bearing capacity limiting state design, while it should meet the requirement for
limiting state of normal use.
5.3.3 As for the plate / column system bearing symmetric load, depending on the layout
of the structure and the load characteristics, the bending moment coefficient
method or equivalent frame method can be adopted to compute the design value
of the internal force under the limiting state of bearing capacity.

5.3.4 As for any large bar-link structure, 2D and 3D structures that is especially
important or under special bearing state, when necessary, the whole or part of the
structure shall be subject to an additional nonlinear analysis for the whole bearing
process.
The nonlinear analysis of the structure had better follow the following principles:

1. The shape, size and boundary conditions of the structure and the strength
class of the used materials, the main reinforcement amount and so on should
be preset.

2. The average values of performance indexes should be taken for the material.
3. The nonlinear constitutive relations of the material, section, member or
various computing units had better be determined via test; the proved
mathematic model also can be used, but the values of its parameters must
have been demarcated or has reliable basis. The single-shaft stress~strain
relation and multi-shaft strength and failure criterion of concrete set forth in
Appendix C also can be adopted.

4. You had better take the adverse influence of geometric nonlinearity of the
structure to the action and effect into account.
5. When computing the limiting state of bearing capacity, the fundamental
combination of action and effect should be taken and appropriate correction
should be made according to the bearing conditions and failure state of the
structural member; when making the check computation of limiting state of
normal use, the characteristic combination and quasi-permanent combination
of actions and effects can be adopted.

5.3.5 As for any structure of complicated shape or under special bearing conditions or
any part of it, the testing method can be adopted to analyze or re-check the
normal-use limiting state and the bearing capacity limiting state of the structure.

26
5.3.6 When the temperature or humidity of the environment where the structure is
placed changes, or when the action and effect that such factors as shrinkage and
creepage of concrete may endanger the safety or normal use of the structure, a
special structure analysis should be performed.

27
 6 Requirements for Computation of Prestressed Concrete
Structural Members

6.1 General Stipulations

6.1.1 In addition to bearing capacity computation, deformation

check-computation, aseismic check-computation, crack width
check-computation and stress check computation, any prestressed
concrete structural member should be check-computed for their
manufacture, transportation, installation and other construction stages
according to actual situations.
When the prest ressing force is regarded as the load effect, its design value
is given in the formulas in concerned chapters and sections in this code. As
for the limiting state of bearing capacity, when the prestressing force effect
is favorable for the structure, the breakdown coefficient of prestressing
force should be taken as 1.0; when unfavorable for the structure, this
coefficient should be taken as 1.2. As for the normal-use limiting state, the
breakdown coefficient of prestressing force should be taken as 1.0.
6.1.2 When it is enough to make the member complying with the crack control
requirements just by applying prestressing force onto part of longitudinal
reinforced steel bars, the remaining longitudinal steel bars that the bearing
capacity computation needs can adopt non-prestressing tendons. HRB400 and
HRB335 steel bars are more suitable for non-prestressing tendon, and it also can
adopt RRB400 steel bar.

6.1.3 The tensioning control stress value of prestressing tendon, σcon, had better not
exceed that stipulated in Table 6.1.3 and should not be less than 0.4 ƒ ptk.

In any of the following cases, the tensioning control stress value in Table 6.1.3
can rise by 0.05ƒptk:
1. It is required to set prestressing tendons in the compression area in the
application stage so as to improve the crack resistance of the member in the
construction stage.
2. It is required to partially offset the loss of prestressing force produced by such
factors as stress relaxation, friction, batch-tensioning of steel bars,
temperature difference between prestressing tendons and stressing bed and
so on.
Table 6.1.3 Limit Values of Tensioning Control Stress
Tensioning Methods
Type of Steel Bars
Pretensioning Post-tensioning
Stress-relief steel wire, steel strand 0.75ƒ ptk 0.75ƒptk
Heat-treated steel bar 0.70ƒ ptk 0.65ƒptk

28
6.1.4 When applying prestressing force, the required concrete cube compression
strength should be determined through computation but is unsuitable to be less
than 75% of the designed value of concrete strength grade.
6.1.5 The normal stress of conc rete produced by the prestressing force and the
prestressing force of the prestressing tendon in the appropriate stage may be
respectively calculated according to the following formulas:

1. Pretensioned member
Normal concrete stress produced by the prestressi ng force:

N p0 N p 0 ep0
σ pc = ± y0 (6.1.5-1)
A0 I0

Effective prestressing force of prestressing tendon in corresponding stage:

σpe= σcon -σl -αEσpc (6.1.5-2)

Prestressing force of the prestressing tendon when the normal concrete
stress at the place where the prestressing tendon bears the joint force is
equal to zero:

σp0= σcon-σl (6.1.5-3)

2. Post-tensioned member

Normal concrete stress produced by the prestressing force:

Np N p e pn M2
σ pc = + yn ± yn (6.1.5-4)
An In In

Effective prestressing force of prestressing tendon in corresponding stage:

σpe= σcon-σl (6.1.5-5)

Prestressing force of the prestressing tendon when the normal concrete

stress at the place where the prestressing tendon bears the joint force is
equal to zero:

σp0= σcon-σl +αEσpc (6.1. 5-6)

Where,

An Net section area, i.e., the sum of the whole section area of the
concrete deducting pore passage, notch groove and other weakened
portions and the concrete section area converted by section area of
non-prestressing tendon; as for any section composed of concrete of
different strength grades, the section area should be converted into
that of the concrete of the same strength grade by using the elastic
modulus ratio of concrete.

29
 A0 Transformed section area: including transforming the net section area
and the section area of all longitudinal prestressing tendons into the
concrete section area.
I 0, I n Inertia moments of transformed section and net section.

ep0, e pn Distance from gravity center of transformed section and net section to
joint forc e point of prestressed/non-prestressing tendon, computed
according to stipulation set forth in Article 6.1.6 in this Code.
y 0, y n Distance from gravity center of transformed section / net section to
the fiber to be computed.

σl Loss of prestressing force in appropriate stage, computed according

to stipulations set forth in Articles 6.2.1~6.2.7 in this Code.
αE Ratio of elastic modulus of steel bar and elastic modulus of concrete:
α E = E s/E c, in which Es is taken from Table 4.2.4 in this code and E c is
taken from Table 4.1.5 in this code.

Np0, N p Joint force of prestressing tendon and non-prestressed bar of

pretensioned member and post-tensioned member, computed
according to Article 6.1.6 in this Code.

M2 Minor bending moment that prestressing force, Np, produces in the

hyperstatic structure of post-tensioned prestressed concrete,
computed according to stipulations in Article 6.1.7 in this Code.
Notes:

1. In formulas (6.1.5-1) and (6.1.5-4), Items 2, 3 and 1 on the right are

positive when the directions of the prestressing force are the same, and
negative when different; formulas (6.1.5-2) and (6.1.5-6) are suitable for
the case in which σpc is a compression stress, and when σpc is a tensile
stress, a negative value should be applied.
2. During design, some measures should be taken to avoid or reduce the
adverse impact that such constraint conditions as pillars and walls
impose onto prestressing force effects of beams and plates.

6.1.6 It is suitable to compute the joint force of prestressing tendon and

non-prestressing tendon and the eccentric distance (Figure 6.1.6) of working
point of the joint force according to the following formulas:
1. Pretensioned member

30
 N p0= σp0A p+ σ’ p0A’ p-σl 5A s-σ’l 5A’ s (6.1.6-1)

σ p 0 A p y p − σ ' p 0 A' p y' p −σ l 5 As ys + σ 'l 5 A's y 's

e p0 = (6.1.6-2)
σ p 0 A p + σ ' p 0 A' p −σ 'l 5 As − σ 'l 5 A' s

2. Post-tensioned member

N p= σpeA p+σ’peA’ p-σl 5As -σ’l 5A’s (6.1.6-3)

σ p e A p y pn − σ ' p e A' p y ' pn −σ l 5 As y sn + σ 'l 5 A' s y 'sn

e pn = (6.1.6-4)
σ p e Ap + σ ' p e A' p −σ 'l 5 As − σ 'l 5 A' s

where,

σp0, σ' p0 Prestressing force of prestressing tendon when the normal

concrete stress at the working point of the joint force of
prestressing tendon in the tension area / compression area si
equal to zero;

σpe, σ' pe Effective prestressing stress of prestressing tendon in tensile area

/ compression area;
Ap, A'p Section area of longitudinal prestressing tendon in tensile /
compression area;
As, A's Section area of longitudinal non-prestressing tendon in tensile /
compression area;

y p, y' p Distance from the working point of joint prestressing force in the
tensile / compression area to the gravity center of the transformed
section;
y s, y' s Distance from the gravity center of non-prestressing tendon in the
tensile / compression area to the gravity center of the transformed
section;

σl 5, σ'l 5 Prestressing force loss due to concrete shrinkage and creep

collapse of prestressing tendon of tensile / compression area at
their respective joint working points, computed according to
stipulations set forth in Article 6.2.5 in this Code.
y pn, y'pn Distance from the joint action point of prestressing force in tensile
/ compression area to the gravity center of the net section.

y sn, y' sn Distance from the gravi ty of non-prestressing tendon in the tensile
/ compression area to the gravity center of the net section.

Note: When A'p in Formulas (6.1.6-1) and (6.1.6- 4) is 0, σ'l5 in the expression may be 0.

31
 Figure 6.1.6 Joint Action Points of Prestressed / Non-prestressing tendons
(a) Pretensioned Member; (b) Post-tensioned Member

1 – Gravity Axis of Transformed Section; 2 – Gravity Axis of Net Section

6.1.7 As for the hyperstatic structure of post -tensioned prestressed concrete, when
carrying out the bending bearing capacity computation and the crack resistance
check computation for the normal section, the minor bending moment in the
design value should be considered into the combination; when carrying out the
shearing bearing capacity computation and the crack resistance check
computation for the diagonal section, the minor shearing force in the design value
should be considered into the combination.
The minor bending moment, minor shearing force, and the computation of
attending the combination should comply with the following stipulations:

1. When performing the elasticity analysis and computation, it is appropriate to

compute the minor bending moment M 2 according to the following formulas:
M2=Mr-M1 (6.1.7-1)

M1=N pe pn (6.1.7-2)

where,
Np Joint force of prestressed and non-prestressing tendons, computed
according to Formula (6.1.6-3) in this Code;

e pn Distance from gravity center of net section to application point of joint

force of prestressed and non-prestressing tendons, computed
according to Formula (6.1.6-4) in this Code;

M1 Bending moment that the pre-applied force N p produces to the

eccentricity of gravity center of net section.
Mr Bending moment that the equivalent load of the pre-applied force N p
produces on the section of the structural member.
It is appropriate to compute the minor shearing force according to the distribution
of minor bending moments on each section of the member and by using the
structural mechanics method.
2. When computing the bending and shearing bearing capacities for the section,
if the minor bending moment and the minor shearing force that are
considered into the combination is unfavorable for the structure, the
breakdown coefficient of the prestressing force should be taken as 1.2;
otherwise, it should be taken as 1.0.

32
 3. When check-computing the crack resistance when the section is bended and
sheared, the prestressing force breakdown coefficient of the minor bending
moment and minor shearing force considered into the combination should be
taken as 1.0.
6.1.8 As for any post-tensioned prest ressed concrete frame girder and continuous
beam, if they meet the minimum reinforcement ratio requirements that Section
9.5 in this Code stipulates for longitudinal reinforcing bars, when the height of the
relative compression area of the section ξ ≤ 0.3, the recontribution of internal
force can be considered; when ξ > 0.3, the reconstribution of internal force should
not be considered. Hereof ξ should be computed according to stipulations in
Chapter 7 of this Code.

6.1.9 The transfer length of prestressing force of the prestressing tendon in a

pre-tensioned member, l tr should be computed by using the following formula:

σ pe
ltr = α d (6.1.9)
f 'tk

where:
σpe Effective stress of prestressing tendon when tensioning;
d Nominal diameter of prestressing tendon, taken according to Appendix B
in this Code;

α External shape coefficient of prestressing tendon, taken from Table 9.3.1

in this code;
ƒ't k Standard tensile strength value of axis center corresponding to concrete
cube compression strength ƒ' cu when tensioning, determined by using the
linear interpolation method and according to Table 4.1.3 in this code.

When adopting the construction technology in which the prestressing tendon is

suddenly relaxed, the starting point of ltr should start from where 0.25l tr away from
the end of the member.
6.1.10 When computing the bending bearing capacity of the normal section and diagonal
section in the anchoring area at the end of the pre-tensioned prestressed
concrete member, the design value of the tensile strength of the prestressing
tendon within the range of the anchoring length should be taken as zero at the
starting anchoring point; at the end anchoring point, it should be taken as ƒ py, and
the value between the two points should be determined by using the linear
interpolation method. The anchoring length of the prestressing tendon, la, should
be determined according to Article 9.3.1 in this Code.

6.1.11 During the construction stage of the prestressed concrete structural member, in
addition to carrying out the check computation of limiting state of bearing capacity,
the normal stress of the boundary concrete of the section of any member that
crack is not allowed to appear in the pretensioning area or all the sections bear
the compression force when being preformed under the action of pre-applied
force, self weight and construction loads (dynamic coefficient should be
considered when necessary) should meet the following stipulations (Figure
6.1.11):
σct≤f’tk (6.1.11-1)
σcc≤0.8 f’ ck (6.1.11-2)

33
 The normal stress of the boundary concrete of the section should be computed
by using the following formula:

Nk M k
σcc OR σct= σ pc + ± (6.1.11-3)
A0 W0

where,

σcc, σct Concrete compression stress and tensile stress of boundary fiber of
computation section of appropriate construction stage;

ƒ't k, ƒ' ck Standard tensile strength and standard compression strength

corresponding to concrete cube compression strength ƒ' cu in each
construction state, determined by using the linear interpolation method
and according to Table 4.1.3 in this code;
N k, M k Axial force and bending moment that the standard combination of
self-weight of member and construction load produces on the
computation section;
W0 Elastic resisting moment of transformed section at the check-computation
edge.

Figure 6.1.11 Check Computation of Prestressed Concrete Member during Construction

(a) Pretensioned Member; (b) Post-tensioned Member

1 – Gravity Axis of Transformed Section; 2 – Gravity Axis of Net Section

Notes:

1. The pretensioning area refers to the section tension stress application area that is formed
when applying the prestressing force.

2. In Formula (6.1.11- 3), when σpc is a compression stress, it is positive; when σcc is a tension
stress, it is negative; when Nk is an axial compressive stress, it is positive, and when Nk is
an axial tensile stress, it is negative; when the boundary fiber stress that Mk produces is a
compression stress, the sign in the expression shall be "+", and when it is a compression
stress, the sign shall be "-".

6.1.12 During the construction stage of any prestressed concrete structural member, in
addition to check-computation of limiting state of bearing capacity, the normal
stress of the boundary concrete on the section of any member allowing cracks
appearing in the pretensioning area and not configured longitudinal prestressing
tendons in the pretensioning area should meet the following stipulations:

34
 σct≤2f’ tk (6.1.12-1)
σcc≤0.8 f’ ck (6.1.12-2)
where, σct and σcc shall be computed according to stipulations in Article 6.1.11 in
this Code.
6.1.13 The distribution of longitudinal steel bars in the pretensioning area of prestressed
concrete structural members should meet the following requirements:
1. As for any member that does not allow crack to appear in the pretensioning
area during the construction stage, the reinforcement ratio of longitudinal
steel bars in the pretensioning area (A's + A'p)/A should not be less than 0.2%.
As for any post -tensioned member, A'p should not be accounted. In this
expression, A is the section area of the member.
2. As for any member that allows cracks to appear in the pretensioning area
during the construction stage but does not configure longitudinal prestressing
tendons in the pretensioning area, when σct = 2ƒ' tk, the reinforcement ratio of
longitudinal steel bars in the pretensioning area should not be less than 0.4%;
when ƒ' tk < σct < 2ƒ' tk, the ratio should be determined between 0.2% and 0.4%
by using the linear interpolation method.
3. The diameter of longitudinal prestressing tendons of the pretensioning area
had better not exceed 14mm and they should be configured symmetrically
along the external edge of the pretensioning area of the member.

Note: as for any plate member that does not allow any crack to appear in the pretensioning
area during construction, the reinforcement ratio of longitudinal steel bars in the pretensioning
area should be determined depending on the actual situations and practice experience.

6.1.14 As for any pre-tensioned and post-tensioned prestressed concrete structural

member, the joint force Np0 of the prestressed and non-prestressing tendons
when the normal prestressing force of the used concrete is equal to zero and the
eccentric distance e p0 of the appropriate joint application point should be
computed by using Formulas (6.1.6-1) and (6.1.6-2). In this case, the stresses of
prestressing tendons of the pre-tensioned and post-tensioned member, σp0 and
σ' p0 should be computed according to the stipulations in Article 6.1.5 in this Code.

6.2 Computation of Loss of Prestressing force

6.2.1 The loss of prestressing force in any prestressing tendon can be computed
according to stipulations in Table 6.2.1.
When the total computed loss of prestressing force is less than the following data,
the following value should be selected:
2
Pre-tensioned member: 100N/mm ;
2
Post-tensioned member: 80N/mm .

35
 2
Table 6.2.1 Loss of Prestressing force (N/mm )
Factor to Cause Loss Symbol Pre-tensioned Member Post-tensioned Member
Computed according to
Anchorage deformation and steel Computed according to
stipulations in Articles
bar inward shrinkage at σl1 stipulat ions in Article 6.2.2
6.2.2 and 6.2.3 of this
tensioning end in this Code
Code
Computed according to
Friction on
Friction of -- stipulations in Article 6.2.4
passage wall
prestressing σl2 in this Code
tendon Friction at
Determined depending on actual situations.
steering device
Temperature difference between
the tensioned steel bar and the
σl3 2∆t --
tensioned device when heating
the concrete for protection
Prestressed steel wire, steel strand
Common relaxation:
σ con
0.4ψ( f ptk – 0.5)σcon
where, for linear tensioning: ψ = 1,
For supertension: ψ = 0.9

Low relaxation:
Stress relaxation of prestressing
σl4 When σcon ≤ 0.7 f ptk,
tendon
σ con
0.125( f ptk
– 0.5)σcon

When 0.7 f ptk ¸ σcon ≤ 0.8 f ptk,

σ con
0.2( f ptk
– 0.5)σcon

Heat- treated steel bar:

for linear tensioning: 0.05σcon.
For supertension: 0.035σcon
Shrinkage and creepage of Computed according to stipulations in Article 6.2.5 of
σl5
concrete this code
Local extrusion of concrete of
annular member using spiral
prestressing tendon for σl6 -- 30
reinforcement, when the
diameter d ≤ 3m
Notes:

1. ∆t in the table refers to the temperature difference (0C)between the tensioned prestressing
tendon and the tensioned device;

2. The tensioning process of supertension starts from where the stress is zero and ends when
1.03σcon; or starts from where the stress is zero and ends when 1.05 σcon , and after bearing the
load for 2 min, unloads to σcon .
σ con
3. When f ptk ≤ 0.5, the stress relaxation loss of prestressing tendon can be taken as zero.

36
6.2.2 The prestressing force loss of straight prestressing tendon due to deformation of
anchorage and inward shrinkage of prestressing tendon can be computed by
using the following formula:

σ l1 = α
l Es (6.2.2)

where,
α-----Value of anchorage deformation and steel bar inward shrinkage at the
tensioning end (mm), which can be taken according to Table 6.2.2.

l------Distance between the tensioning end to the anchoring end (mm).

Table 6.2.2 Anchorage Deformation & Steel Bar Inward Shrinkage Value α (mm)
Type of Anchorage α
Supporting anchorage (heading Nut gap 1
anchorage of steel wire beam, etc.) Gap of each packing plate 1
Conical anchorage (conical steel anchorage of steel wire beam, etc.) 5
With top pressure 5
Clamping anchorage
Without top pressure 6-8
Notes:

1. Anchorage deformation value and steel bar inward shrinkage value in the table also
can be determined according to the actual measurements.

2. Values of other types of anchorage deformation and steel bar inward shrinkage should
be determined according to the actual measurements.

As for any structure composed of blocks, its prestressing force loss should account the
performing deformation of the jointing materials among blocks. When adopting concrete
or mortar as the jointing materials, the performing deformation value of each jointing gap
can be taken as 1mm.
6.2.3 The prestressing loss of curvilinear or broken-line prestressing tendon of any
post-tensioned member due to deformation of anchorage and inward shrinkage of
prestressing tendon, σl 1, should be determined according to the condition that the
deformation value of the prestressing tendon within the affected range of the
reverse friction between the curvilinear or broken -line steel bar and the passage
wall, lf, is equal to the anchorage deformation and steel bar inward shrinkage
value. The reverse friction coefficient may be taken among the values in Table
6.2.4 of this Code.

In general, the prestressing force loss of the bunchy post-tensioned prestressing

tendons within the affection length fl of reverse friction, σl 1, may be computed
according to Appendix D of this Code.
6.2.4 The prestressing force loss caused by the friction between the prestressing
tendon and the passage wall, σl2 (Figure 6.2.4), had better be computed by using
the following formula:

 1 
αl 2 = σcon1 − ?? +µ?  (6.2.4-1)
 e 

When (κx + µθ) ≤ 0.2, σl2 can be computed by using the following approximate
formula:

37
 σl 2=(κχ+µθ)σcon (6.2.4-2)
where,

x---------Lengt h (m) of passage from tensioning end to computation section,

which can be the approximate projected length of this section of
passage on the longitudinal axis.
θ--------- Inclination (rad) from the tensioning end to the tangential line of the
passage portion of the computation section curve;
κ--------Friction coefficient considering partial deviation of each meter of
passage, taken according to Table 6.2.4.

µ--------Friction coefficient between prestressing tendon and passage wall,

taken according to Table 6.2.4.

Table 6.2.4 Friction Coefficients

Molding mode of passage κ µ
Embedded corrugated metal pipe 0.0015 0.25
Embedded steel pipe 0.0010 0.30
Rubber pipe or steel pipe coring molding 0.0014 0.55
Notes:

1. Coefficients in the table also can be determined depending on actual measurements;

2. When adopting steel conical anchorage of wire cable and similar anchorage, additional friction
loss at the mouth of the anchor ring should be considered, the value of which should be
determined according to the actual measurements.

Figure 6.2.4 Computation of Friction Loss of Prestressing Force

1 – Tensioning End; 2 – Computation Section

6.2.5 The prestressing force losses of longitudinal prestressing tendons caused by

concrete shrinkage and creep change in the tensile and compression areas, σl 5
and σ'l5, can be determined by using the following methods:
1. For general cases

38
Pre-tensioned member
σ pc
45 + 280
σ l5 =
f ' cu
(6.2.5-1)
1 + 15σ
σ ' pc
45 + 280
σ 'l 5 =
f 'cu
(6.2.5-2)
1 + 15σ '
Post-tensioned member
σ pc
35 + 280
σl5 =
f 'cu
(6.2.5-3)
1 + 15σ

35 + 280
' pc

σ 'l 5 =
f ' cu
(6.2.5-4)
1 + 15σ '
where,

σpc, σ'pc -------Normal compressive stress of concrete at the application

point of joint force of prestressing tendon in tensile area and
compression area;
ƒ'c u -------------Concrete cube compression strength when applying
prestressing force;

ρ, ρ'---------Reinforcement rate of prestressing tendon and

non-prestressing tendon in the tensile area and the
compression area: for pre-tensioned member, ρ = (A p +
As)/A 0, ρ' = (A'p + A's )/A 0; for post-tensioned member, ρ = (A p
+ As)/A n, ρ' = (A'p + A 's)/A n; as for any member with
prestressing tendons and non-prestressing tendons
symmetrically distributed, the reinforcement rates ρ and ρ'
should be computed by taking one half of the total section
area of the steel bars.
The normal compressive stress of the concrete at the application point of the
joint force of the prestressing tendons in the tensile / compression area, σpc and
σ' pc, should be computed according to the stipulations set forth in Articles 6.1.5
and 6.1.6 in this Code. In this case, only the loss before the concrete is
preformed (first batch) is accounted in the prestressing force loss and it's the
stress of its non-prestressing tendons, σl 5 and σ'l 5, should be taken to be zero;
values of σpc and σ' pc, should not be larger than 0.5ƒ'cu; when σ' pc is for tensile
stress, σ' pc in formulas (6.2.5-2) and (6.2.5-4) should be taken to be zero. When
computing the normal stress of the concrete, σpc and σ' pc, the impact of the
self- weight should be considered ac cording to the preparation of the member.
When the structure is under the environment the annual mean relative humidity
is lower than 40%, the values of σl5 and σ'l5 should be increased by 30%.

39
 2. As for any important structural member, when it is required to consider the
time-associated loss of prestressing force of concrete shrinkage, creepage and
stress relaxation of steel bar, it should be computed according to Appendix E of
this Code.
Notes: When adopting pumped concrete, the increment of prestressing force loss due to
concrete shrinkage and creepage should be considered according to the actual situation.

6.2.6 When the prestressing tendons for any post-tensioned member are tensioned in
batch, the impact of the elastic shrinkage (or elongation) of concrete caused by
the later tensioned steel bars on the previously-tensioned steel bars should be
considered, i.e., α Eσpci should be increased (or decreased) for the tension control
stress σcon of the previously-tensioned steel bars. σpc thereof is the normal
concrete stress that the later-tensioned steel bar produces at the gravity center of
the previously-tensioned steel bars.
6.2.7 The combination of prestressing force loss values of a prestressed member in
various stages had better comply with stipulations in Table 6.2.7.

Table 6.2.7 Combination of Prestressing Force Loss Values in Various Stages

Pre-tensioned Post-tensioned
Combination of Prestressing Force Loss
member member
Loss before concrete preformed (first batch) σl 1 + σl 2 + σl 3 + σl 4 σl 1 + σl 2
Loss after concrete preformed (second batch) σl 5 σl 4 + σl 5 + σl 6
Note: The proportion that the loss of a pre-tensioned member due to stress relaxation of steel bar, σl 4,
covers in the first and second batch of loss, if needed to differentiate, can be determined
according to the actual situations.

40
 7 Computation of Limiting State of Bearing Capacity

7.1 General Stipulations for Computation of Bearing Capacity of Normal

Section

7.1.1 The computation of normal section bearing capacity limiting state stipulated in
Sections 7.1 and 7.4 of this chapter is applicable to flexural members,
compression members and tensile members made of reinforced concrete and
prestressed concrete.
As for any deep flexural reinforced concrete member the span-height ratio of
which is less than 5, its bearing capacity should be computed according to the
stipulations in Section 10.7 of Chapter 10 in this Code.

7.1.2 The bearing capacity of the normal section should be computed according to the
following basic assumptions:
1. The section strain keeps plane;
2. Take no consideration of the tensile strength of the concrete;

3. The compression stress -strain relationship curve of concrete should comply

with the following stipulations:

When εc ≤ ε0,

εc n
σ c = f c [1 − (1 − ) ] (7.1.2-1)
ε0

when ε0 < εc ≤ εcu,

σc= fc (7.1.2-2)

n=2- 601 ( f cu , k − 50 ) (7.1.2-3)

ε=0.002+0.5(fcu,k-50)×10- 5 (7.1.2-4)
ε=0.0033(fcu,k-50)×10
-5
(7.1.2-5)
where,

σc-------Compressive stress of concrete when compressive strain of

concrete is equal to ε0;
ƒ c--------Design value of compression strength of concrete shaft center,
take according to Table 4.1.4 in this Code;
ε0-----------Compressive strain of concrete when compressive stress of
concrete just reaches ƒ c; when the computed ε0 value is less
than 0.002, it is taken to be 0.002.

εcu-------Limit compressive strain of concrete in the normal section;

when asymmetrically compressed, it is computed according to
Formula (7.1.2-5). When the computed value of εcu is larger
than 0.0033, it is taken to be 0.0033; when the shaft center is
compressed, it is taken to be ε0.

41
 ƒ'cu, k----Standard value of concrete cube compression strength, is
determined according to Article 4.1.1 in this Code.
n--------Coefficient, when the computed value of n is larger than 2.0, it is
taken to be 2.0.

4. The stress of longitudinal steel bar is taken to be the product of the steel bar
strain and its elastic modulus, but its absolute value should not be larger than
the appropriate design value of strength. The limit tensile strain of the
longitudinal tension steel bar is taken to be 0.01.
7.1.3 The stress diagram of concrete in the compression area of the normal section of
a flexural member and eccentric load -bearing member can be simplified as an
equivalent rectangle stress diagram.
The height x of the compression area of the rectangle stress diagram can be
taken to be equal to the production of the height of the neutral axis multiplied by
the coefficient β1, which is determined according to the assumption that the
section strain keeps plane. When the strength grade of the concrete does not
exceed C50, β1 is taken to be 0.8; when the strength grade of concrete is C80, β 1
is taken to be 0.74, determined by using the linear interpolation method.

The stress value of the rectangle stress diagram is taken to be the product of the
design value ƒc of axle center compression strength of concrete multiplied by the
coefficient α1. When the strength grade of the concrete does not exceed C50, α 1
is taken to be 1.0; when the strength grade of concrete is C80, α 1 is taken to be
0.94, determined by using the linear interpolation method.
7.1.4 The relative height of boundary compression area when longitudinal steel bar
yield and concrete damage of compression area occur simultaneously, ξb, should
be computed by using the following formula:

1 Reinforced concrete member

Steel bar with yield point

β1
ξb = (7.1.4-1)
fy
1+
E s ε cu

Steel bar without yield point

β1
ξb = (7.1.4-2)
0 .002 f
1+ + y
ε cu E s ε cu

42
 2 Prestressed concrete member

β1
ξb = (7.1.4-3)
0.002 f py − σ p 0
1+ +
ε cu E s ε cu

where,
ξb-------Relative height of boundary compression area: ξb = xb/ h0;

x b-------Height of boundary compression area;

h 0-------Effective height of section; distance from the application point of joint

force of longitudinal tensile steel bar to compression edge of the
section;
ƒ y-------Design value of tensile strength of ordinary steel bar, taken according
to Table 4.2.3-1 of this Code;

ƒ py------Design value of tensile strength of prestressed steel bar, taken

according to Table 4.2.3-2;

E s-------Elastic modulus of steel bar, taken according to Table 4.2.4 in this

code;
σp0------Stress of prestressing tendon when the normal stress of the concrete
at the application point of the joint force of the longitudinal
prestressing tendon in the tension area is equal to zero, computed
according to Formula (6.1.5-3) or (6.1.5-6) in this code.
εcu-------Limit compressive stress of concrete when compressed
asymmetrically, computed according to formula (7.1.2-5) in this code.
β 1-------Coefficient, computed according to stipulations in Article 7.1.3 in this
code.

Note: When there are steel bars of different types or of different prestressing force values
configured within the tension area of the section, the height of the relative boundary
compression area of the flexural member should be separately computed and the
smaller value should be taken.

7.1.5 The stress of longitudinal steel bar should be determined according to the
following stipulations:
1. Stress of longitudinal steel bar should be computed by using the following
formula:
For ordinary steel bar:
β1 h0 i
σ si = E s ε cu ( − 1) (7.1.5-1)
x
For prestressing tendon
β1 h0 i
σ pi = E s ε cu ( − 1) + σ p 0 i (7.1.5-2)
x
2. Stress of longitudinal steel bar can also be computed by using the following
approximate formula:

For ordinary steel bar:

43
 fy x
σ si = ( − β1 ) (7.1.5-3)
ξb − β1 h0 i

For prestressing tendon

f py − σ p 0i x
σ si = ( − β 1 ) + σ poi (7.1.5-4)
ξ b − β1 h 0i

3. The longitudinal prestressing tendon stress to be computed by using

Formulas (7.1.5-1) ~ (7.1.5-4) should meet the following conditions;

− f ' y ≤ σ si ≤ f y (7.1.5-5)

σ p 0i − f ' y ≤ σ pi ≤ f py (7.1.5-6)

When the computed σsi is a tensile stress and its value is larger than ƒ y, σsi =
ƒ y is taken; when σsi is a compression stress and its absolute value is larger
than ƒ' y, σsi = -ƒ' y. When the computed σpi is a tensile stress and its value is
larger than ƒpy, σpi = ƒpy is taken; when σpi is a compression stress and its
absolute value is larger than (σp0i - ƒ' py), σpi = σp0i -ƒ' py.
Where,

h 0i -------Distance from the gravity center of No. i layer of longitudinal steel bar
section to the compression edge of the section;
x---------Height of concrete compression area in the equivalent rectangle
stress diagram;

σsi, σpi Stress of Layer i longitudinal ordinary steel bar / prestressing tendon;
its positive value stands for tensile stress and its negative value
stands for compression stress;

ƒ' y, ƒ'py Design value of compression strength of longitudinal ordinary /

prestressing tendon, determined according to Tables 4.2.3-1 and
4.2.3-2 in this code;
σp0i Stress of prestressing tendon when the normal stress of the concrete
at the section gravity center of No. i layer of longitudinal prestressing
tendon is equal to zero, computed by using Formula (6.1.5-3) or
(6.1.5-6).

7.1.6 The bearing capacity of the normal section of any sectional member can be
computed according to Appendix F in this Code.

7.2 Computation of Bending Bearing Capacity of Normal Section

7.2.1 As for any flexural member of reverse-T section located on the tension edge of
the rectangle section or wing edge, the flexural bearing capacity of its normal
section should comply with the following stipulations (Figure 7.2.1):

44
 x
M ≤ α 1 f cbx(h0 − ) + f ' y A' s (h0 − α 's )
2
-(σ’p0-f ’py )A’p(h 0-α’p) (7.2.1-1)
The height of the compression area of the concrete should be defined according
to the following formula:

α1 f cbx = f y As − f ' y A's + f py Ap + (σ ' p 0 − f ' py ) A' p (7.2.1-2)

The height of the compression area of the concrete should satisfy the following
conditions:

x ≤ ξ b h0 (7.2.1-3)

x ≤ 2α ' (7.2.1-4)

Figure 7.2.1 Computation of Bending Bearing Capacity of Normal Section of Flexural

Member of Rectangle Section
Where,
M----------Design value of bending moment

α1---------Coefficient, computed according to stipulations in Article 7.1.3 in

this Code;
ƒc----------Design value of compression strength of axle center of concrete,
taken according to Table 4.1.4 of this Code;

As, A's----Section area of longitudinal ordinary steel bar in tensile area and
compression area;
Ap, A'p----Section area of longitudinal prestressing tendon in tensile area
and compression area;
σ' p0--------Stress of prestressing tendon when normal stress of the concrete
at the application point of joint force of longitudinal prestressed
steel bar in the compression area is equal to zero;
b-----------Width of rectangle section or web width of T-shaped section;

h0----------Effective height of section;

α's, α 'p----Distance from joint force application point of longitudinal ordinary /

prestressing tendon in the compression area to the compression
edge of the section;
α'----------Distance from the joint force application point of all steel bars in
the compression area to the compression edge of the section;

45
 when there is no longitudinal prestressing tendon configured in
the compression area or when the stress (α' p0 - ƒ' py) of the
longitudinal steel bar in the compression area is a tensile stress,
α' in Formula (7.2.1-4) is replaced with α' s.
7.2.2 As for any flexural member of T-shaped or I-shaped section (Figure 7.2.2) the
wing edge of which is in the compression area, the bending bearing capacity of
their normal sections should satisfy the following stipulations respectively:

1. When meeting the following condition:

fyA s+ fpyAp≤α 1fcb ’fh’f+f’yA’s-(σ’p0-f ’py)A’p (7.2.2-1)
it should be computed according to the rectangle section the width of which is
b'ƒ;
2. When not satisfying the condition in Formula (7.2.2-1),
x h' f
M ≤ α1 f c bx (h0 − ) + α1 f c (b' f −b)) h' f ( h0 − ) + f ' y A ' s (h0 −α 's ) − (σ ' p 0 − f ' py ) A ' p (h0 − α ' p )
2 2
(7.2.2-2)
the height of the compression area of the concrete should be determined
according to the following formula:
α1fc[bx+(b’f-b)h’f]=fyA s-f ’yA’s+ fpyA p+(σ’p0 -f ’p y)A’p (7.2.2-3)
where,

h' ƒ ------------Height of wing edge of the compression area of T-shaped /

I-shaped section;
b' ƒ ------------Computed width of wing edge of the compression area of
T-shaped / I-shaped section, determined according to the
stipulations in Article 7.2.3 in this code.

Figure 7.2.2 Height and Position of Compression Area of Flexural Member of

I-shaped section

(a) x ≤ h' ƒ; (b) x> h' ƒ

46
 When adopting the above formulas to compute the flexural member of a
T-shaped / I-shaped section, the height of the compression area of the concrete
still should comply with the requirements in Formulas (7.2.1-3) and (7.2.1-4).
7.2.3 The computed width of the wing edge in the compression area of the flexural
member of a T-shaped, I-shaped or reverse-L-shaped section, b' ƒ, should adopt
the minimum value as listed in Table 7.2.3.

Table 7.2.3 Computed Width of Wing Edge of Flexural Member of

T-shaped, I-shaped or Reverse -L-shaped Section, b'f
T-shaped, I-shaped Reverse-L-shaped
Section Section
Situations
Rib beam, Independent Rib beam, rib
rib plate beam plate
1 As per computed span l0 l0/ 3 l0/ 3 l0/ 6
As per net beam (vitta) distance
2 b + sn --- b + sn/ 2
sn
As per h' ƒ/ h0 ≥ 0.1 --- b + 12h'f ---
3 wing edge 0.1 > h' ƒ/h 0 ≥ 0.05 b + 12h'f b + 6h' f b + 5h' f
height h'ƒ h' ƒ/h 0 < 0.05 b + 12h'f b b + 5h' f
Notes:

1. b in the table is the web width;

2. If any transverse ribs with interval less than the interval of longitudinal ribs are set
within the span of the rib beam, the stipulation in Case 3 in the table may be not
followed;

3. As for any haunched T-shaped, -I shaped or reverse- L-shaped section, when the
haunch height of the compression area hh ≥ h'f and the haunch width bh ≤ 3hh, the
computed width of the wing edge of such section may be increased by 2bh (for
T-shaped, I-shaped section) and bh (for reverse- L-shaped section) according to the
stipulation set forth in Case 3 in the above table;

4. When the wing edge plate of the compression area of an independent beam is
possible to produce cracks along the direction of the longitudinal rib after check
computation, the computed width should be taken to be the web width b.

7.2.4 The computation of bending bearing capacity of the normal section of any flexural
member should satisfy the requirement of Formula (7.2.1-3) in this Code. When
the section area of the longitudinal tensile steel bar configured upon the tectonic
requirements or the requirements of normal -use limiting state check computation
is larger than the reinforcement area that the bending bearing capacity requires,
the height of the concrete compression area computed according to Formula
(7.2.1-2) or (7.2.2-3), x, can only consider the section area of the longitudinal
tensile steel bar that the bending bearing capacity condition requires.
7.2.5 When the computation considers the longitudinal ordinary steel bar, the condition
in Formula (7.2.1-4) in this code should be satisfied; when this condition is not
met, the bending bearing capacity of the normal section should satisfy the
following stipulations:

M ≤ f py A p ( h − α p − α ' s ) + f y As (h − α s − α ' s ) + (σ ' p 0 − f ' py ) A' p (α ' p −α ' s ) (7.2.5)

where,

α s, α p----------Distance fr om longitudinal ordinary / prestressing tendon in the

tension area to the tension edge.

47
7.2.6 The bending bearing capacity of normal section of a flexural member of annular
and circular section should be computed according to stipulations in Articles 7.3.7
and 7.3.8 in this code. However, when computing, the comparison operators in
Formulas (7.3.7-1), (7.3.7-3) and (7.3.8-1) should be replaced with the equal sign
and the design value of the axial force should be taken as zero (N=0); meanwhile,
Nη ei in Formulas (7.3.7-2), (7.3.7-4) and (7.3.8-2) should be replaced with the
design value of bending moment M.

7.3 Computation of Compression Bearing Capacity of Normal Section

7.3.1 When the configured web reinforcement of the axle-center compression member
of the reinforced concrete satisfies the stipulation in Section 10.3 of this Code, the
compression bearing capacity of its normal section should satisfy the following
stipulations (Figure 7.3.1):

N ≤ 0 .9ϕ ( f c A + f ' y A' s ) (7.3.1)

where,
N------Design value of axial compression force;

ϕ------Stability coefficient of reinforced concrete member, taken according to

Table 7.3.1;
ƒ c-----Design value of compression strength of concrete axle center, taken
from Table 4.1.4 in this Code;
A-----Section area of member;

A 's----Section area of all longitudinal steel bars.

When the reinforcement rate of longitudinal steel bars is larger than 3%, A in
Formula (7.3.1) should be replaced with (A – A's ).

Table 7.3.1 Stability Coefficient of Axle-center Compression Member of

Reinforcement Concrete
l0/ b ≤8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
l0/ d ≤7 8.5 10.5 12 14 15.5 17 19 21 22.5 24
l0/i ≤28 35 42 48 55 62 69 76 83 90 97
ϕ 1.00 0.98 0.95 0.92 0.87 0.81 0.75 0.70 0.65 0.60 0.56
l0/ b 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
l0/ d 26 28 29.5 31 33 34.5 36.5 38 40 41.5 43
l0/i 104 111 118 125 132 139 146 153 160 167 174
ϕ 0.52 0.48 0.44 0.40 0.36 0.32 0.29 0.26 0.23 0.21 0.19
Note: 0l in the above table is the computed length of the member. As for any reinforced
concrete pillar, this parameter should be taken according to the stipulation in Article 7.3.11 in
this code; b is the size of the shorter edge of the rectangle section; d is the diameter of the
circular section, and i is the minimum turning radius of the section.

48
 Figure 7.3.1 Axle-center Compression Member of Reinforced Concrete with
Reinforcement Configuration

7.3.2 As for an axle-center compression member of reinforced concrete, when the

configured spiral or welding-ring type indirect steel bars satisfy the stipulation in
Section 10.3 in this Code, the compression bearing capacity of its normal section
should satisfy the following stipulation (Figure 7.3.2):

N ≤ 0 .9( f c Acor + f ' y A's +2αf y A'ss 0 ) (7.3.2-1)

πd cor Ass1
Ass 0 = (7.3.2-2)
s
where,
ƒy----------Design value of tensile strength of indirect st eel bar;

Acor ------- Core section area of member: area of concrete in the range of the
inner surface in indirect steel bars;
Ass0-------Transformed section area of spiral or welding-ring type indirect
steel bar;

dcor--------Diameter of core section of member: distance between inner

surfaces of indirect steel bar;
Ass1-------Section area of single piece of spiral or welding-ring type indirect
steel bar;

49
 s-----------Distance of indirect steel bar along the axis direction of the
member;
α-----------Reduction coefficient of indirect steel bar against the constraint of
concrete: when the strength grade of concrete does not exceed
C50, it is taken to be 1.0; when the concrete strength grade is
C80, it is taken to be 0.85, which is determined by using the linear
interpolation method.
Notes:

1. The design value of the member compression bearing capacity to be computed in Formula
(7.3.2-1) should not be larger than 1.5 times of the design value to be computed in
Formula (7.3.1) of this Code;

2. In any of the following cases, the impact of indirect steel bar should not be considered into
but should be computed according to the stipulation in Article 7.3.1 in this code:

1) When l0/d>12;

2) When the compression bearing capacity computed by using Formula (7.3.2-1) is less
than that computed in Formula (7.3.1) in this code;

3) When the area of the transformed section of indirect steel bar, A ss0 is less than 25%
of all section area.

7.3.3 In the computation of bearing capacity of normal section of eccentric compression

member, additional eccent ric distance ea that the axial compression force exists
at the eccentric direction should be considered, the value of which should be
larger one between 20mm and 1/30 of maximum size of the section at the
eccentric direction.

7.3.4 The compression bearing capacity of the

normal section of the eccentric
compression member of the rectangle
section should satisfy the following
stipulation (Figure 7.3.4):

N ≤ α 1 f c bx + f ' y A' s −σ s As
- (σ ' p 0 − f ' py ) A' p −σ p Ap
(7.3.4-1)
Figure 7.3.2 Axle-center Compression
Member of Reinforced Concrete of
Configured Spiral Indirect Steel Bar

x
N ≤ α 1 f cbx(h0 − ) + f ' y A' s (h0 − α 's ) - (σ ' p 0 − f ' py ) A' p (h0 − α ' p )
2
(7.3.4-2)

50
 h
e = ηei + −α (7.3.4-3)
2
ei= e0+ ea (7.3.4-4)
where,

e-----------Distance from the application point of axial compression force to

the application point of joint force of longitudinal ordinary and
prestressed tension steel bars;

η-----------Eccentric distance augmenting factor due to axial compression

force of eccentric compression member while counting the
second-order bending moment, computed according to the
stipulation in Article 7.3.10 in this code;

σs, σp----Stress of longitudinal ordinary / prestressing tendons of the tension

edge or the minor compression edge;
ei ----------Initial eccentric distance;
α------- ---Distance from the joint force application point of the longitudinal
ordinary tension steel bar and prestressed tension steel bar;

e0----------Eccentric distance of gravity center of section due to axial

compression force: e0 = M/N;
ea----------Additional eccentric distance, determined according to Article
7.3.3 in this code.

When computing according to the above stipulations, the following requirements

also should be satisfied:
1 Stresses σs and σp of the steel bar can be computed according to the
following situations:

1) When ξ≤ξb, it is a compression member of larger eccentricity, σs=ƒ y

and σp= ƒ py, in which ξ is the relative height of the compression area,
ξ=x/h0;

2) When ξ> ξb, it is a compression member of lower eccentricity, σs

and σp shall be computed according to the stipulation in Article
7.1.5 in this code.
2 When the computation considers the longitudinal ordinary compression
steel bar, the height of the compression area should satisfy the condition in
Formula (7.2.1-4) in this code; when this condition is not met, the
compression bearing capacity of its normal section shall be computed
according to the stipulation in Article 7.2.5 in this code, and in this case, M
in Formula (7.2.5) in this code should be replaced with Ne' s, in which e's is
the distance from the application point of the axial compression force to the
application point of joint force of the longitudinal ordinary steel bar of the
compression area; in the computation, the growth coefficient of the
eccentric distance should be considered and the initial eccentric distance
should be determined according to Formula (7.3.4-4).

3 As for a compression member of low eccentricity with asymmetric

reinforcement on the rectangle section, when N > ƒc bh, a check
computation should be made by using the following formula:

51
 Figure 7.3.4 Computation of Compression Bearing Capacity of Normal
Section of Eccentric Compression member of Rectangle Section

1 – Gravity -center Axis of Section

h
Ne' ≤ f cbh(h' 0 − ) + f ' y As (h' 0 −α s )
2
- (σ p 0 − f ' py ) A p ( h' 0 −α p ) (7.3.4-5)

h
e' = − α '−(e0 − ea ) (7.3.4-6)
2
where,

e'----------Distance from the application point of the axial compression force

to the application point of joint force of longitudinal ordinary steel
bar and prestressing tendon of the compression area;
h' 0---------Distance from the application point of joint force of longitudinal
compression steel bar to the further edge of the section.

4 As for any compression member of reinforced concrete that has steel bars
distributed symmetrically on the rectangle section (A's = As) and has smaller
eccentricity, the section area of the longitudinal steel bar also can be
computed by using the following approximate formula:

Ne − ξ (1 − 0 .5ξ )α 1 f cbh02
A' s = (7.3.4-7)
f ' y (h0 − α 's )

In this formula, the relative height of the compression area, ξ, can be

computed by using the following formula:

N − ξ bα 1 f cbh0
ξ= + ξb (7.3.4-8)
Ne − 0 .43α 1 f c bh02
+ α 1 f c bh0
( β1 − ξ b )( h0 − α ' s )

7.3.5 The computed width b' f of the compression wing edge of eccentric compression
member of I-shaped section should be determined according to Article 7.2.3 in
this Code and the compression bearing capacity of its normal section should
comply with the following stipulations;

52
1. When the height of the compression area is less than or equal to h'f (x≤h' f),
the computed width of the compression wing edge b'f should be regarded as
the width for computation of the rectangle section.
2. When the height of the compression area x > h'f (as shown in Figure 7.3.5),
the following stipulations should be followed:

N ≤ α1 f c [bx + (b' f −b)h' f ] + f ' y A's −σ s As

− (σ ' p 0 − f ' py ) A' p −σ p A p (7.3.5-1)

x h' f
N ≤ α 1 f c [bx + (h0 − ) + (b ' f −b )h ' f (h0 − )]
2 2

+ f ' y A' s (h0 − α 's ) − (σ ' p 0 − f ' py ) A' p −σ p Ap (7.3.5-2)

The stresses σs and σp of steel bar in the formula and whether to consider the
action of longitudinal ordinary compression steel bar should be determined
according to related stipulations in Article 7.3.4 in this Code.

Figure 7.3.5 Computation of Compression Bearing Capacity of Normal

Section of Eccentric Compression Member of I-shaped Section

1 – Gravity Axis of Section

3. When x > (h - hf), the compression bearing capacity computation of its normal
section should consider the action of the wing edge compression part of the
lesser edge. In this case, the computed width bf of the wing edge of the lesser
compression edge should be determined according to Article 7.2.3 in this
Code.
4. As to any asymmetrically-reinforced compression member of small
eccentricity, when N > ƒcA, the check computation should be performed
according to the following formulas:

53
 h hf h' f
Ne' ≤ f c [bh(h '0 − ) + (b f − b )h f ( h '0 − ) + (b ' f −b )h ' f ( − α ' )]
2 2 2

+ f ' y As ( h'0 −α s ) − (σ p 0 − f ' py ) A p (h'0 −α p ) (7.3.5-3)

e' = y'−α '− (e0 − ea ) (7.3.5-4)

where, y'-----Distance from the gravity center of the section to the

compression edge on the side closer to the axial compression
force. When the section is symmetric, y' = h/2.
Note: For a T-shaped section with wing edge only on the side closer to the axial
compression force, bf = b; for a reverse- T section with wing edge only on the
side further away from the axial compression force, b' f = b.

7.3.6 As to any eccentric compression reinforced concrete member of rectangle,

T-shaped or I-shaped section and symmetrically reinforced with longitudinal steel
bars along the abdomen of the section (Figure 7.3.6), it is advisable to compute
the compression bearing capacity of its normal section according to the following
stipulations:

Figure 7.3.6 I-shaped Section with Steel Bars Symmetrically Placed along
Section Abdomen

N ≤ α1 f c [ξ bh0 + (b' f −b)h' f ]

+ f ' y A's −σ s As + N sw (7.3.6-1)

54
 h' f
Ne ≤ α 1 f c [ξ (1 − 0 .5ξ )bh02 + (b ' f −b ) h' f (h 0 − )
2

+ f ' y A's ( h0 − α ' s ) + M sw (7.3.6-2)

ξ 0 − β1
N sw = (1 + ) f yw Asw (7.3.6-3)
0.5β1ω

ξ0 − β1
N sw = (1 + ) f yw Asw (7.3.6-4)
0 .5 β 1ω

where,
A s w--------Section area of all longitudinal steel bars symmetrically placed along
the section abdomen;

ƒ yw---------Design value of strength of longitudinal steel bars symmetrically

placed along the section abdomen, taken from Table 4.2.3-1 in this
Code;

N s w------- -Axial compression force borne by longitudinal steel bars

symmetrically placed along the section abdomen; when ξ >β 1, ξ =
β1 shall be taken for computation;
ω-----------Ratio of the height h sw of the segment to symmetrically place
longitudinal steel bar and the effective height h0 of the section,
ω= hs w/ h 0, while hs w = h 0 - α's is advisable.
The stress σs in the steel bar As in the tensile edge or the minor compression
edge and whether to consider the action of the compression steel bar and the
compression part of wing edge of the minor compression edge into the
computation should be determined according to related stipulations in Articles
7.3.4 and 7.3.5 in this Code.
Note: This article is applicable for the case where the number of longitudinal steel bars
symmetrically placed along the section abdomen is not less than 4 on each side.

7.3.7 As for any eccentric compression member of annular section and with
longitudinal steel bars symmetrically placed around the periphery (Figure 7.3.7), it
is advisable that the compression bearing capacity of its normal section to satisfy
the following stipulations:

1. Reinforced concrete member

N ≤ αα 1 f c A + (α − α t ) f y As (7.3.7-1)

sin πα (sin πα + sin πα t )

Nηe i ≤ α 1 f c A(r1 + r2 ) + f y As r s (7.3.7-2)
2π π
2. Prestressed concrete member

55
 Figure 7.3.7 Annular Section with Steel Bars Symmetrically Placed around
Periphery

N ≤ αα1 f c A − σ p 0 Ap + α f ' py A p − α t ( f py − σ p 0 ) Ap (7.3.7-3)

sin πα sin πα
Nηe i ≤ α 1 f c A(r1 + r2 ) + f ' p y Ap r p
2π π
sin παt
+ ( f py − σ p 0 ) A p rp (7.3.7-4)
π
The coefficient and eccentric distance in above formulas should be computed
according to the following formulas:

αt = 1− 1.5α (7.3.7-5)

ei = e0 + ea (7.3.7-6)

where,

A---------Area of annular section;

As-------Section area of all longitudinal ordinary steel bars;

Ap-------Section area of all longitudinal prestressing tendons;

r1, r2-----Inner / outer radius of annular section;

rs ---------Radius of the circumference where the gravity centers of longitudinal

ordinary steel bars are located;
rp---------Radius of the circumference where the gravity centers of longitudinal
prestressing tendons are located;
e0--------Eccentric distance that the axial compression force produces to the
gravity center of the section;
ea--------Additional eccentric distance, determined according to Article 7.3.3 in
this Code;

α---------Ratio of concrete section area of the compression area and the whole
section area;

αt---------Ratio of the section area of longitudinal tensile steel bars and the
section area of all longitudinal steel bars; when α>2/3, α t=0

56
 3. When α < arcos(2r s/(r1+ r2))/ p , the eccentric compression member of the
annular section can be computed by using the formula that is stipulated in
Article 7.3.8 in this Code for computing the compression bearing capacity of
normal section of an eccentric compression member of circular section.
Note: This article is applicable when the number of longitudinal steel bars in the section is
not less than 6 and r1 /r2≥0.5.

7.3.8 As to any eccentric compression reinforced concrete member of circular section

and with longitudinal steel bars symmetrically configured along the periphery
(Figure 7.3.8), the compression baring capacity of its normal section should
satisfy the following stipulations:

Figure 7.3.8 Circular Section with Steel Bars Placed along Periphery

sin 2πα
N ≤ αα1 f c A(1 − ) + (α − α t ) f y As (7.3. 8-1)
2πα

2 sin 3 πα sin πα + sin πα t

Nηei ≤ α1 f c Ar + f y As rs (7.3.8-2)
3 π π

α t = 1 .25 − 2α (7.3.8-3)

ei= e0+e a (7.3.8-4)

where,
A---------Area of circular section

As-------Section of all longitudinal steel bars

r----------Radius of circular section;
rs---------Radius of t he circumference where the gravity center of the
longitudinal steel bar is located;

57
 e 0--------Eccentric distance of the section gravity center due to the axial
compression force;

e a--------Additional eccentric distance, determined according to Article 7.3.3

in this Code;
α---------Ratio of the central angle (rad) of concrete section area
corresponding to the compression area and 2p ;

αt---------Ratio of the section area of longitudinal tensile steel bars and the
section area of all longitudinal steel bars; when α>0.625, α t=0 is
taken.
Note: This article is applicable when the number of longitudinal steel bars in the
section is not less than 6.

7.3.9 As to an eccentric compression member in various concrete structures, the

additional internal force caused by lateral shift of the structure and the bending of
the member should be considered in the computation of the compression bearing
capacity of its normal section;

When determining the design value of the internal force of an eccentric

compression member, the influence of the second-order bending moment to the
eccentric distance caused by the axial compression force can be approximately
considered, and the initial eccentric distance caused by the axial compression
force to the gravity center of the section, ei, should be multiplied by the
augmenting factor η of eccentric distance set forth in Article 7.3.10 in this Code;
alternatively, you can, according to the corrected bending rigidity that Article
7.3.12 in this Code stipulates for the member and adopting the elas tic analysis
method considering the second-order effect, directly compute the internal force
design value of various control sections of the structural member, including the
design value of bending moment, and design the section of various members
according to appropriate design internal force.
7.3.10 As to any eccentric compression member of rectangle, T-shaped, I-shaped,
annular and circular section, the augmenting factor of their eccentric distance can
be computed by using the following formulas:

1 l
η =1+ ( 0 ) 2 ζ 1ζ 2 (7.3.10-1)
1400 ei / h0 h
0 .5 f c A
ζ1 = (7.3.10-2)
N
l
ζ 2 = 1 .15 − 0 .01 0 (7.3.10-3)
h
where,

l0----------Computational length of member, determined according to Article

7.3.11 in this Code;

h----------Height of section; for an annular section, the out diameter is taken

as the height; for a circular section, the diameter is taken as the
height;

58
 h 0---------Effective height of section; for an annular section, h0= r2+ rs; for a
circular section, h0=r+r s; r, r 2 and rs hereof are taken according to
stipulations in Articles 7.3.7 and 7.3.8 in this Code;
ζ1-------- Correction coefficient of section curvature of eccentric compression
member; when ζ1>1.0, ζ1=1.0 is taken;

A---------Section area of member; A=bh+2(b'f -b)h'f for T-shaped and I-shaped

sections;
ζ2---------Influence coefficient of length-diameter ratio of member to section
curvature; ζ2=1.0 when l0/h<15.

Note: η=1.0 can be taken when the length-diameter ratio of the eccentric
compression member l 0/i ≤ 17.5.
7.3.11 The computational length of the ax is compression and eccentric compression
pillars can be determined according to the following stipulations:

1. As for the trestle strand pillar of single-storied building of rigid roof, pillar of
open-air hoist, and trestle pillar, their computational l 0 can be taken from Table
7.3.11-1.

Table 7.3.11-1 Computational Length of Trestle Strand Pillar of

Single -storied Building of Rigid Roof, Pillar of Open-air Hoist and Trestle
Pillar
l0
Vertical trestle direction
Type of Pillar Direction of
With support Without support
Trestle
between pillars between pillars
Single span 1.5H 1.0H 1.2H
Pillar of house
Double and
without crane 1.25H 1.0H 1.2H
multiple span
Pillar of house Upper pillar 2.0Hu 1.25H u 1.5H u
with crane Lower pillar 1.0H l 0.8Hl 1.0H l
Open-air crane hoisting pillar and
2.0H l 1.0Hl -
trestle pillar
Notes:

1) H in the above table is the full pillar height starting from the foundation top surface; Hl
is the height of the lower part of the pillar from the top surface of the foundation to the
bottom surface of the assembled crane beam or the top surface of the cast-in-situ
crane beam; Hu is the height of the upper part of the pillar starting from the bottom
surface of the assembled crane beam or from the top surface of the cast-in-situ crane
beam;

2) When the computation does not consider the load of the crane, the computational
length of the trestle strand pillar of house with crane can adopt the computational
length of the pillar of house without crane, but the computational length of the upper
pillar can still adopt that for the house with crane;

3) The computational length of the upper pillar of the trestle strand pillar of house with
crane at the direction of the trestle strand is only applicable to the case when
Hu/Hl≥0.3; when Hu /Hl <0.3, it is advisable to take the computational length to be
2.5Hu.

59
 2. The central beam column of a multi -storied building generally is of
rigid -jointed frame structure and the computational length l0 of each layer of
pillars can be taken according to Table 7.3.11-2.

Table 7.3.11-2
Computational Length of Each Layer of Pillar of Frame Structure

Type of Building Roof Type of Pillar l0

Bottom pillar 1.0H
Cast-in-situ building roof
Pillar of other stories 1.25H
Bottom pillar 1.25H
Assembled building roof
Pillar of other stories 1.5H

Note: H for bottom pillar in the table is the height from the top surface of the foundation to the
top surface of the roof of the first storey; this value for the pillar of any other storey is the height
between the top surfaces of adjacent tw o stories.

3. When the design value of bending moment that the horizontal load produces
covers over 75% of the total design bending moment, the computational
length of the frame pillar can be computed by using the following two
formulas and the smaller computing result shall be taken:

l0 = [1+ 0.15(ψ u + ψ l )]H (7.3.11-1)

l0 = (2 + 0.2ψ min ) H (7.3.11-2)

where,
ψu, ψ l-------Ratio of rigidity sum of various pillar / column lines at the
interjunction of upper and lower nodes of pillars;

ψmin----------Lesser value among ratios of ψ u and ψ l;

H-------------Height of pillar, taken according to notes in Table 3.11-2.

7.3.12 When the elastic analysis method considering the second-order effect, it is
advisable to multiply the elastic bending rigidity E cI of the member in the structure
analysis by the following discounting factors: 0.4 for beam; 0.6 for pillar; and 0.45
for shearwall and core tunnel wall. In this case, in the related formulas in Section
7.3 in this Code for computing the compression bearing capacity of normal
section, ηei all should be replaced with (M/N+ea), in which M and N are the
design value of bending moment directly computed by using the elastic analysis
method considering second-order effect and the design value of the appropriate
axial force.
Not e: When the check computation proves that the normal section of the bottom
of the shearwall or the core tunnel wall does not crack, their rigidity discounting
factor can be taken to be 0.7.

60
7.3.13 As for the eccentric compression member, in addition to computing the
compression bearing capacity of the plane under the action of the bending
moment, it should be regarded as an axial compression member for a check
computation of compression bearing capacity for the plane vertical to the plane
under the action of bending moment. In this case, the action of the bending
moment can be ignored but the influence of the stability factor ϕ should be
considered.
7.3.14 As for a two-way eccentric compression reinforced concrete member with two
mutually-vertical symmetric axles on the section (Figure 7.3.14), the compression
bearing capacity of its normal section should be computed by using one of the
following two methods:

Figure 7.3.14 Section of Two-way Eccentric Compression Member

1 – Acting point of axial compression force; 2 – Compression area

1. Compute it by using the method described in Appendix F in this Code. In this

case, M x and My in Formulas (F.0.1-7) and (F.0.1-8) should be replaced
respectively with Nη xei x and Nη xei x, in which the initial eccentric distance
should be computed by using the following formulas:
eix= e0x+e ax (7.3.14-1)
ei y=e 0y+e ay (7.3.14-2)

where,

e0x, e 0y-------Eccentric distance of axial compression force to x axis and y

axis passing through the gravity center of the section:
e0x=M 0x/N, e0y=M 0y/N;

61
 M0x, M 0y-----Design value of the bending moment that the axial
compression force produces at the direction of x and y axis
when not considering the additional bending moment;
eax, eay--------Additional eccentric distance on x and y axis; determined
according to the stipulations in Article 7.3.3 in this code;

ηx, η y----------Augmenting factor of eccentric distance on x and y axis,

determined according to the stipulations in Article 7.3.10 in
this code.
2. Compute by using the following approximat e formula:

1
N≤ (7.3.14-3)
1 1 1
+ −
N ux N uy N u 0

where,
Nu0-------------Design value of axial compression bearing capacity of the
section of a member;

Nux-------------Design value of the eccentric compression bearing capacity

of the member that is computed for all longitudinal steel
bars after applying the axial compression force on x axis
and considering the appropriate computational eccentric
distance η xei x; herein η x should be computed according to
the stipulation in Article 7.3.10 in this code;

Nuy-------------Design value of the eccentric compression bearing capacity

of the member that is computed for all longitudinal steel
bars after applying the axial compression force on y axis
and considering the appropriate computational eccentric
distance η yei y; herein η y should be computed according to
the stipulation in Article 7.3.10 in this code;
The design value N u0 of the eccentric compression bearing capacity of the
member can be computed according to Formula (7.3.1) in this code, while the
sign should be equal sign and the N should be replaced with Nu0 but the
stability coefficient ϕ and the efficient 0.9 should not be considered.
The design value N ux of eccentric compression brearing capacity of the
member can be computed according to the following situations:
1) When longitudinal steel bars are placed along the two opposite edges
of the section, N ux can be computed according to stipulations in Article
7.3.4 or 7.3.5 in this code, but the equal sign should be taken and N
should be replaced with Nux.

2) When longitudinal steel bars are symmetrically placed along the

abdomen of the section, N ux can be computed according to the
stipulation in Article 7.3.6 in this code, but the equal sign should be
taken and N should be replaced with Nux.

The design value Nuy of eccentric compression bearing capacity of the member
can be computed by using the same method as that for N ux.

62
 7.4 Computation of Tension Bearing Capacity of Normal Section

7.4.1 The tension bearing capacity of normal section of an axial compression member
should sat isfy the following stipulation:

N ≤ f y As + f py A p (7.4.1)

where,

N----------Design value of axial tension;

As, A p---Area of all sections of longitudinal ordinary steel bars /
prestressed steel bars

7.4.2 The tensile bearing capacity of normal section of eccentric tension member of
rectangle section should satisfy the following stipulations:
1. Tension member of small eccentricity:

When the axial tension works between the joint force application point of A s
and A p and that of A's and A'p (as shown in Figure 7.4.2a):

Figure 7.4.2 Computation of Tension Bearing Capacity of Normal Section

of Eccentric Tension Member of Rectangle Section
(a) Tension member of small eccentricity; (b) Tension member of large eccentricity

63
 Ne ≤ f y A' s ( h0 − α ' s ) + f py A' p ( H 0 − α ' p ) (7.4.2-1)

Ne ≤ f y As (h0 − α s ) + f py A p ( H 0 − α p ) (7.4.2-1)

2. Tension member of large eccentricity:

When the axial tension does not act between the joint force application point
of A s and A p and that of A's and A'p (as shown in Figure 7.4.2b):

N ≤ f y As + f py Ap − f ' y A' s +(σ ' p0 − f ' py ) A p − α1 f c bx (7.4.2-3)

x
N ≤ α 1 f c bx( h0 − ) + f ' y As (σ ' p 0 − f ' py ) Ap − (h0 − α p ) (7.4.2-4)
2
In this case, the height of the compression area of concrete should satisfy the
requirements in Formula (7.2.1-3) in this code. When the computation
considers the longitudinal ordinary compression steel bar, the conditions in
the formula (7.2.1-4) in this code should be still met; if the conditions are not
met, it can be computed by using Formula (7.4.2-2).

3. As to any eccentric tension member of rectangle section and with symmetric

reinforcement placement, it can be com puted by using Formula (7.4.2-2) no
matter its eccentricity is small or large.

7.4.3 As to any eccentric tension member of reinforced concrete that has rectangle,
T-shaped or I-shaped section and has longitudinal steel bars symmetrically
placed along the abdomen of the section, the tension bearing capacity of its
normal section should satisfy the stipulation in Formula (7.4.4-1) in this code, in
which the design value Mu of the bending bearing capacity of normal section can
be computed by using Formulas (7.3.6-1) and (7.3.6-2) in this Code but the sign
in the formula should be equal sign while N should be taken to 0 and Ne should
be replaced with M u.
As for any eccentric tension member that has longitudinal steel bars
symmetrically placed along the circumference and has annular and circular
section, the tension bearing capacity of its normal section should satisfy the
stipulation of the Formula (7.4.4-1) in this code, in which the design value of M u of
bending bearing capacity of the normal section can be computed according to
Article 7.2.6 in this Code, but the equal sign should be selected and Nηei should
be replaced with M u.
7.4.4 As for any two-way eccentric tension member that has steel bars symmetrically
placed and is made of reinforced concrete of rectangle section, the tension
bearing capacity of its normal section should satisfy the following stipulation:

1
N≤ (7.4.4-1)
1 e
+ 0
N u0 M u

where,

Nu0-------------Design value of axial tension bearing capacity of the

member;

e0---------------Distance from the acting point of the axial tension to the

gravity center of the section;

64
 Mu--------------Design value of bending bearing capacity of normal section
to be computed on the basis of the acting plane of bending
moment passing the acting point of the axial tension.
The design value Nu0 of the axial tension bearing capacity of the member can
be computed according to Formula (7.4.1) in this code, while the sign should
be equal sign and the N should be replaced with Nu0. The design value of
bending bearing capacity of normal section to be computed on the basis of
the acting plane of bending moment pasting the acting point of the axial
tension can be computed according to the stipulation in Section 7.1 in this
Code.

e 0/M u in Formula (7.4.4-1) also can be computed by using the following

formula:

e0 e e0 y 2
= ( 0x ) 2 + ( ) (7.4.4-2)
Mu M ux M uy

where,
e0x, e 0y--------Eccentric distance caused by the axial tension against y axis
and x axis passing through the gravity center of the section;
Mux, M uy------Design value of bending bearing capacity of normal section
on x and y axis, computed according to the stipulation in
Section 7.2 in this code;

7.5 Computation of Bearing Capacity of Diagonal Section

7.5.1 As for a shear member of rectangle, T-shaped or I-shaped section, its shear
section should satisfy the following conditions:

When hw/b ≤ 4
V≤0.25 βc fc bh 0 (7.5.1-1)

When hw/ b≥6

V≤0.2β c fc bh0 (7.5.1-2)

When 4<hw/b<6, to be determined by using the linear interpolation method.

where,
V----------------Design value of maximum shearing force on diagonal
section of the member;

βc---------------Influence coefficient of concrete strength: when the strength

grade of the concrete does not exceed C50, β c should be
taken to be 1.0 (βc=1.0); when the strength grade of
concrete is C80, β c=0.8; which shall be determined by using
the linear interpolation method;
ƒ c---------------Design value of axial compression strength of concrete;
taken according to Table 4.1.4 in this code;

65
 b----------------Width of rectangle section, or web width of T-shaped or
I-shaped section;
h0---------------Effective height of section;

hw---------------Height of web plate of the section: effective height is taken

for rectangle section; effective height minus height of wing
edge is taken for T-shaped section; net height of web plate
is taken for I-shaped section;
Notes:

1. As to any simply supported bending member of T-shaped or I-shaped section, when

there is appropriate practice experience, the coefficient in Formula (7.5.1-1) can be
taken to be 0.3;

2. As to any member the tension edge of which is slanted, when there is appropriate
practice experience, the control condition of its shearing section can be appropriately
softened.

7.5.2 When computing the shearing bearing capacity of a diagonal section, the
computational section for its design shearing value should be taken according to
the following stipulations:

1. Section at the edge of the abutment (Section 1-1 in Figures 7.5.2a and b);

Figure 7.5.2 Computational Section for Design Value of Shearing Force of

Shearing Bearing Capacity of Diagonal Section
(a) Bent-up bar; (b) Web Reinforcement

1-1 Section at Edge of Abutment; 2-2 and 3- 3 Diagonal Sections at Bent- up Point of
Bent-up Steel Bar in Tension Area; 4-4 Diagonal Section at the point with Section Area or
Interval of Web Reinforcement Changed

2. Section at bent-up point of bent -up steel bar in tension area (Section 2-2 and
3-3 in Figure 7.5.2a);
3. Section with area or interval of web reinforcement changed (Section 4-4 in
Figure 7.5.2b);
4. Section at the point with web width changed.

Notes:

1. As to any bending member with the tension edge slanted, the section at the point
where the height of the beam starts to change, the section at the point where the
concentrated load works and other unfav orable section should be included;

66
 2. The web reinforcement interval and the distance from the bent-up point of the frontal
raw of bent-up steel bars (relative to abutment) to the end point of the end raw
should satisfy the construction requirements set forth in Articles 10.2.10 and 10.2.8.

7.5.3 As to any common plate-type bending member without web reinforcement and
bent-up bar placed, the shearing bearing capacity of its diagonal section should
satisfy the following stipulations:
V= 0.7β hftb h0 (7.5.3-1)

800 1 / 4
βh = ( ) (7.5.3-2)
h0

where,

V----------------Design value of maximum shearing force on diagonal

section of the member;
βh---------------Influence coefficient of section height: when h0<800mm,
h0=800mm; when h0>800, h 0=2000m;
ƒ t----------------Design value of axial tension strength of concrete; taken
according to Table 4.1.4 in this code;

7.5.4 As for common bending member of rectangle, T-shaped or I-shaped section, only
when configuring and placing web reinforcement, the shearing bearing capacity
of its diagonal section should satisfy the following stipulations:

V ≤ Vcs + V p (7.5.4-1)

Asv
V cs=0.7f tbh 0+1.25f yv s
h0 (7.5.4-2)

V p=0.05N p0 (7.5.4-3)
where,
V----------------Design value of maximum shearing force on diagonal
section of the member;
Vcs--------------Design value of shearing bearing capacity of concrete and
web reinforcement on diagonal section of the member;

Vp--------------Design value of the shearing bearing capacity of member

that is raised by the pre-applied force;

Asv--------------Area of all sections of various limbs of web reinforcement

placed in the same section: Asv=nA sv1, in which n is the
number of limbs of web reinforcement in the same section
and Asv1 is the section area of a single limb of web
reinforcement;
s----------------Interval of web reinforcement along the length direction of
the member;
ƒ yv--------------Design value of tension strength of web reinforcement, taken
according to ƒy in Table 4.2.3-1 in this code;

Np0-------------Joint force of longitudinal prestressing tendon and

non-prestressing tendon when the normal prestressing force
of the concrete on the computational section is equal to zero,

67
 computed according to Article 6.1.14 in this Code: when
Np0>0.3ƒcA0, Np0=0.3ƒ cA0, in which A0 is the transformed
section area of the member;
As for any independent beam under the action of a concentrated load (include the
action of several loads, among which the central load produces a shearing force
covering over 75% of the total shearing force to the abutment section or node
edge), when computing by using Formula (7.5.4-1), Formula (7.5.4-2) should be
changed as follows:

1 .75 A
Vcs = f t bh0 + f yv sv h0 (7.5.4-4)
λ +1 s
where,
λ----------------Ratio of shearing force and span of the computational
section. λ can be taken to be a/h0, i.e. λ=a/h0, in which a is
the distance from the application point of the concentrated
load to the abutment or the node edge; when λ<1.5, λ is
taken to be 1.5; when λ>3, λ is taken to be 3; between the
application point of the concentrated load and the abutment,
the web reinforcement should be symmetrically placed.
Notes:

1. As for any case that the section bending moment due to the joint force Np0 is
the same as the outer bending moment direction, and for prestressed concrete
continuous beam and simply supported prestressed concrete beam allowing
cracks, V p should be taken to be 0 (V p=0).

2. As for any pre-tensioned prestressed concrete member, the computation of joint

force Np0 should, according to the stipulations in Articles 6.1.9 and 8.1.8 in this
code, consider the influence of the transfer length of the prestressed steel bar.

7.5.5 As to any bending member of rectangle, T-shaped or -Ishaped section, when

placing web reinforcement and bent -up bars, the shearing bearing capacity of its
diagonal section should satisfy the following stipulation:

V ≤ Vcs + V p + 0.8 f y Asb sin α s + 0.8 f py A pb sin α p (7.5.5)

where,
V-------------Design value of shearing force at the point where the bent -up
bar is placed, taken according to stipulation in Article 7.5.6 in
this code;
Vp------------Design value of shearing bearing capacity of the member
raised by the pre-applied force, computed by using Formula
(7.5.4-3) in this code but not considering the action of the
prestressed bent -up bar when computing the joint force Np0.

Asb, A pb-----Section area of non-prestressed bent -up bar and prestressed

bending steel in the same bending plane;

αs, αp-------Inclination between the tangential line of the non-prestressed

and prestressed bent -up bar in the diagonal section and the
longitudinal axis of the member.

68
7.5.6 When computing the bent -up bar, the design value of its shearing force should be
taken according to the following stipulations (Figure 7.5.2a):
1. When computing the bent-up bars in the first row (relative to the abutment),
take the shearing force value at the edge of the abutment;

2. When computing each posterior raw of bent -up bar, take the shearing force
at the bent-up point of the previous raw (relative to the abutment) of the
bent -up steel bar.
7.5.7 As for any common bending member of rectangle, T-shaped or I-shaped section,
when it satisfies the requirements in the following formula:

V ≤ 0.7 f t bh0 + 0 .05 N p 0 (7.5.7-1)

As for any independent beam under the action of a concentrated load, when it
satisfies the requirement in the following formula:
1 .75
V ≤ f tbh0 + 0.05 N p 0 (7.5.7-2)
λ +1
It is feasible not to compute the shearing bearing capacity of the diagonal section
for them but just need to configure the web reinforcement according to related
stipulations in Articles 10.2.9, 10.2.10 and 10.2.11 in this code and the
construction requirements.

7.5.8 As for a bending member of rectangle, T-shaped and I-shaped section that the
tension edge is slanted, the shearing bearing capacity of its diagonal section
should satisfy the following stipulations (Figure 7.5.8):

V ≤ Vcs + Vs p + 0.8 f y Asb sin α s (7.5.8-1)

M − 0 .8 (Σf yv Asv zsv + Σf y Asb z sb )

Vsp = (7.5.8-2)
z + canβ
where,
V----------------Design value of maximum shearing force on the diagonal
section of the member;
M---------------Design value of bending moment at the end of the
compression area of the diagonal section of the member;

Vcs--------------Design value of the shearing bearing capacity of the

concrete and web reinforcement on the diagonal section of
the member, computed by using Formula (7.5.4-2) or
(7.5.4-4), in which h0 is the effective height of the vertical
section at the starting end of the compression area of the
diagonal section;

Vsp -------------Vertical project of design value of the joint force of

longitudinal non-prestressed and prestressed tension steel
bars aslope placed in the tension edge of the section of the
member: as for any bending member of reinforced concrete,
its value should not be larger than ƒ yA ssinβ; for any bending
member of prestressed concrete, its value should not be
larger than (ƒpyA p+ƒ yA s)sinβ and should not be less than
σpeA psinβ;

69
 zsv--------------Distance from the joint application point of web
reinforcement in the same section to the joint application
point of the compression area of the diagonal section;
zsb --------------Distance from the joint application point of bent -up bar in the
same bent-up plane to the joint application point of the
compression area of the diagonal section;

z----------------Distance from the horizontal component of the joint force of

the longitudinal tension steel bar at the starting end of the
tension area of the diagonal section to the application point
of the joint force of the compression area of the diagonal
section, it can be approximately taken to be z=0.9h 0;
β----------------Inclination of the longitudinal tension steel bar slanted at the
starting end of the tension area of the diagonal section;
c----------------Length of horizontal projection of the diagonal section, it can
be approximately taken to be h 0.

Note: At the point where the height of the beam section starts to change, the shearing bearing
capacity of the diagonal section should be computed by using related formulas for beams of
equal section height and variable section height and web reinforcement and bent-up bars
should be configured according to the more unfavorable situation.

Figure 7.5.8 Computation of Shearing Bearing Capacity of Diagonal Section of

Bending Member with Tension Edge Slanted

70
7.5.9 The bending bearing capacity of the diagonal section of the bending member
should satisfy the following stipulations (Figure 7.5.9):

Figure 7.5.9 Computation of Bending Bearing Capacity of Diagonal Section of

Bending Member

M ≤ ( f y As + f py Ap ) z + Σf y Asb z sb + Σf py A pb z pb + Σf yv Asv z sv (7.5.9-1)

In this case, the length c of the horizontal projection of the diagonal section can
be determined according to the following conditions:

V = Σf y Asb sin α s + Σf py Apb sin α p + Σf yv Asv (7.5.9-2)

where,

V----------------Design value of shearing force at the end of the

compression area of the diagonal section;
z----------------Distance from the application point of joint force of the
longitudinal non-prestressed and prestressed tension steel
bar to the application point of joint force of the compression
area, it can be approximately taken to be z=0.9h0;
z sb, z pb-------Distance from the application point of joint force of
non-prestressed and prestressed bent -up steel bars in the
same bent-up plane to the application point of the joint force
of the compression area of the diagonal section;
z sv--------------Distance from the application point of the joint force of the
web reinforcement in the same diagonal section to the
application point of the joint force of the compression area
of the diagonal section.

When computing the bending bearing capacity of the diagonal section in the
anchoring area at the end part of the pre-tensioned prestressed concrete member,
ƒ py in the formula should be determined according the following stipulations:
The design value of tension strength of longitudinal prestressing tendons in the
anchoring area should be taken to be zero at the starting anchoring point and be
ƒ py at the end anchoring point. This value between the two points can be
determined by using the linear interpolation method. In this case, the anchoring
length la of the longitudinal prestressing tendon should be determined according
to Article 9.3.1 in this code.

71
7.5.10 As for any longitudinal steel bar and web reinforcement placed in a bending
member, if they do not satisfy the construction requirements set forth in Articles
9.3.1~9.3.3, 10.2.2~10.2.4, 10.2.7 and 10.2.10 in this Code, the designer can
perform no bending bearing capacity computation for the diagonal section of the
member.
7.5.11 The shearing section of any rectangle, T-shaped or I-shaped eccentric
compression or tension member of reinforced concrete should satisfy the
stipulation in Article 7.5.1 in this Code;

7.5.12 The shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section of any rectangle, T-shaped or
I-shaped eccentric compression member made of reinforced concrete should
satisfy the following stipulation:

1.75 A
V≤ f t bh0 + f yv sv h 0 + 0 .07 (7.5.12)
λ +1 s
where,

λ----------------Shear-span ratio of computational section of eccentric

compression member;
N----------------Design value of axial compression force responding to
design value V of shearing force, which is taken to be
N=0.3ƒcA when N>0.3ƒ cA, where A is the section area of the
member.

The shear-span ratio of the computational section should be taken according to

the following stipulations:
1. As for any frame pillar of various structures, it is advisable to assign λ to be
M/(V h0) (i.e., λ=M/(Vh0)); as to the frame pillar in a frame structure, λ can be
assigned to be Hn/(2h 0) when its inflection point is in the range of the layer
height; when λ<1, λ=1 is taken; when λ>3, λ=3 is taken; herein, M is the
design value of the bending moment on the computational section that
responds to the shearing design value V, and Hn is the net height o the pillar.
2. As for other eccentric compression member, when they bear symmetric load,
λ=1.5 is taken for them; when they bear a concentrated load stipulated in
Article 7.5.4 in this code, λ=a/h0 shall be taken; when λ<1.5, λ=1.5 is taken;
when λ>3, λ=3 is taken; herein, a is the distance from the concentrated load
to the abutment or the node edge.

7.5.13 As for any rectangle, T-shaped or I-shaped eccentric compression member of

reinforced concrete, when it meets the requirements in the following formula:
1.75
V≤ f t bh0 + 0.07 N (7.5.13)
λ +1
The designer can perform no shearing bearing capacity computation for the
diagonal section but just need to configure the web reinforcement according to
the stipulation in Article 10.3.2 in this code and related construction requirements.
The shear-span ratio in the formula and the design value of axial compression
force should be determined according to Article 7.5.12 in this Code.

72
7.5.14 The shearing bearing capacity of the diagonal section of any rectangle, T-shaped
or I-shaped eccentric tension member made of reinforced concrete should satisfy
the following stipulation:

1.75 A
V≤ f t bh0 + f yv sv h 0 − 0.2 N (7.5.14)
λ +1 s

where,

N---------------Design value of axial tensile force responding to design

shearing value V;

λ---------------Shear-span ratio of computational section, determined

according to Article 7.5.12.
When the computed value at the right side of Formula (7.5.14) is less than
ƒ yv(A sv/s)h0, this value should be taken to be ƒ yv(A sv/s)h0 and the value of
ƒ yv(A sv/s)h0 should not be less than 0.36ƒt bh 0.

7.5.15 The shearing bearing capacity of the diagonal section of any bending member
and eccentric compression member that has circular section and made of
reinforced concrete should be computed according to Articles 7.5.1 and 7.5.13 in
this Code. In this case, the section width b and the effective section height h0 in
the above article and formula should be replaced with 1.76r and 1.6r respectively,
in which r is the radius of the circular section.

7.5.16 The shearing section of any reinforced concrete frame pillar that has rectangle
section and is sheared at two directions should satisfy the following conditions:

V x ≤ 0.25β c f cbh0 cos θ (7.5.16-1)

V x ≤ 0.25β c f c hb0 sin θ (7.5.16-2)

where,

Vx---------------Design value of shearing force at x-axis direction, the

responding effective section height of which is h0 and the
responding section width is b;

Vy---------------Design value of shearing force at y-axis direction, the

responding effective section height of which is b0 and the
responding section width is h;
θ----------------Inclination between the application direction of designed
inclined shearing value V and x-axis, θ=arctan(V y/V x).

7.5.17 The shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section of a reinforced concrete frame
pillar that has rectangle section and is sheared at two directions should satisfy the
following stipulation:

73
 Vux
Vx ≤ (7.5.17-1)
V tanθ 2
1 + ( ux )
Vuy

Vu y
Vy ≤ (7.5.17-2)
Vu y tanθ
1+ ( ) 2

Vu x
The design values of shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section at x-axis and
y-axis direction, V ux and Vuy should be computed by using the following formulas:

1 .75 A
Vux = f t bh p + f yv svx h 0 + 0 .07 N (7.5.17-3)
λx + 1 s

1.75 Asvy
Vu y = f t bh p + f yv h0 + 0 .07 N (7.5.17-4)
λy + 1 s

where,
λx, λy---------Computed shear-span ratio of frame pillar, determined
according to the stipulation in Article 7.5.12 in this code;

Asvx, Asvy------Total section area of various limbs of web reinforcement that

are placed in the same section and parallel to x-axis and
y-axis;
N----------------Design value of axial compression force responding to the
design value V of declined shearing force. When N>0.3ƒcA,
N=0.3ƒcA shall be taken, in which A is the section area of
the member.
When designing the section, Vux/V uy in Formulas (7.5.17-1) and (7.5.17-2) can be
approximately taken to be 1 (i.e., Vux/V uy=1) for direct computation.

7.5.18 As for any bi-directional shearing reinforced concrete frame pillar of rectangle
section, when it satisfies the following requirements:

1 .75
Vx ≤ ( f t bh0 + 0.07 N ) cos θ (7.5.18-1)
λx + 1

1.75
Vy ≤ ( f t bh0 + 0.07 N ) sin θ (7.5.18-2)
λy +1

The designer may perform no shearing bearing capacity computation for its
diagonal section, but only needs to configure the web reinforcement according to
the stipulation in Article 10.3.2 in this code and the construction requirements.

74
 7.6 Computation of Bearing Capacity of C ontorted Section

7.6.1 The section of any member of rectangle, T-shaped or I-shaped section with
hw/ b≤6 and any member of box -type section with hw/tw≤6 (Figure 7.6.1) under the
joint action of bending moment, shearing force and torsion moment should satisfy
the following conditions:

Figure 7.6.1 Section of Torsion Member

(a) Rectangle Section; (b) T-shaped or I-shaped section; (c) Box -type Section (tw ≤t'w)

1 – Action plane of bendi ng moment and shearing force

When h w/b (or h w/t w)≤4,

V T
+ ≤ 0.25β c f c (7.6.1-1)
bh0 0.8Wt

when hw/b (or h w/t w)=6,

V T
+ ≤ 0.2 β c f c (7.6.1-2)
bh0 0 .8Wt

when 4<hw/b (or hw/t w)<6, it should be determined by using the linear interpolation
method.
Where,

T----------------Design value of torsion moment;

b----------------Width of rectangle section, web width of T-shaped or

I-shaped section, total thickness 2t w of side wall of box-type
section;
h0---------------Effective height of section;

W t--------------Plastic torsion resisting moment of section of torsion

member, computed according to the stipulation in Article
7.6.3 in this code.

75
 hw--------------Web height of section: the effective height h0 is take for
rectangle section; the effective height minus the height of
wing edge is taken for T-shaped section; the net height of
the web plate is taken for the I-shaped and box -type section;
t w---------------Wall thickness of box -type section, the value of which should
not be less than bh/7, where bh is the width of the box-type
section.

Note: when hw/b (or hw/t w)>6, the computation of sizes of the section of the torsion
member and the bearing capacity of its torsion section should satisfy special
stipulations.
7.6.2 When any member under the joint action of bending moment, shearing force and
torsion moment (Figure 7.6.1) satisfies the requirements in the following formulas:

V T N p0
+ ≤ 0 .7 f t + 0.05 (7.6.2-1)
bh0 Wt bh0

or

V T N p0
+ ≤ 0 .7 f t + 0.07 (7.6.2-2)
bh0 Wt bh0

the designer can perform no shearing and torsion bearing capacity computation
for the member but only need to configure longitudinal steel bars and web
reinforcement according to the stipulations in Articles 10.2.5, 10.2.11 and 10.2.12
in this code and upon the construction requirements.

In the above formula:

Np0-------------Joint forc e of longitudinal prestressing tendon or

non-prestressing tendon when the normal prestressing force
of the concrete on the computational section is equal to zero,
computed according to the stipulation in Article 6.1.14 in this
code; when Np0>0.3ƒcA 0, N p0=0.3ƒcA 0 is taken, in which A 0 is
the area of the transformer section of the member.
N----------------Design value of axial compression force responding to the
design values of shearing force and torsion moment V and T;
when N>0.3ƒ cA, N=0.3>0.3ƒcA shall be taken, in which A is
the section area of the member.
7.6.3 The plastic torsion resisting moment of the section of any torsion member should
be computed according to the following stipulations:

1. Rectangle Section

b2
Wt = (3h − b ) (7.6.3-1)
6

where, b and h —— Size of shorter / longer edge of the rectangle section.

2. T-shaped / I-shaped section

76
 W t=W tw+W’tf+W tf (7.6.3-2)
The plastic torsion resisting moments of rectangle section of web plate,
compression wing edge and tension wing edge, Wtw, W'tf and Wtf, should be
computed according to the following stipulations:

1) Web plate

b2
Wtw = (3h − b ) (7.6.3-3)
6

2) Compression wing edge

h '2f
W 'tf = (b' f − b) (7.6.3-4)
6
3) Tension wing edge

h 2f
Wtf = (b f − b ) (7.6.3-5)
6
where,

b, h-------------Web width and section height;

b'ƒ, bƒ ----------Width of wing edge of compression / tension area of the
section;
h'ƒ, hƒ----------Height of wing edge of compression / tension area of the
section;
The wing edge width to be taken when computing should satisfy the
stipulation for h'ƒ ≤b+6b'ƒ and bƒ≤b+6bƒ.

3. Box -type section

b h2 (b − 2t w ) 2
Wt = (3 hh − b h ) − h [3h w − (bh − 2t w )] (7.6.3-6)
6 6
where, bh, h h —— Size of shorter / longer edge of box-type section.
7.6.4 The torsion bearing capacity of pure torsion member of rectangle section should
satisfy the following stipulations:

Ast1 Acor
T ≤ 0 .35 f tW t + 1.2 ζ f yv (7.6.4-1)
s

f y Astl s
ζ = (7.6.4-2)
f yv A stlu cor

As for any pure torsion member made of reinforced concrete, its ζ value should
satisfy the requirement for 0.6≤ζ≤1.7 when ζ>1.7, ζ=1.7 is taken.
As for any pure torsion member of prestressed concrete with eccentric distance
ep0≤h/6, when ζ≥1.7, the pre -applied force influence term, 0.05(N p0/A0)W t can be

77
 added in the right of Formula (7.6.4-1), the value of Np0 in which should satisfy
the stipulation in Article 7.6.2 in this code; in Formula (7.6.4-1), ζ is taken to be
1.7 (ζ=1.7).
Where,

ζ----------------Reinforcement strength ratio of longitudinal steel bar and

web reinforcement in torsion;
Astl--------------Section area of all longitudinal symmectrically-placed and
non-prestressing tendon in the torsion computation;
Ast1-------------Section area of single limb of web reinforcement placed
around the section in the torsion computation;

ƒ yv--------------Design value of tension strength of torsion web

reinforcement, taken according to the value of ƒy in Table
4.2.3-1 in this code;
Acor -------------Section of core portion of the section: Acor=bcor hcor , in which,
bcor and hcor are respectively the size of the shorter and
longer edge of the core portion of the section within the
inner surface of the web reinforcement.

ucor-------------Perimeter of the core portion of the section: ucor =2(b cor +h cor ).
Note: when ζ<1.7 or ep 0>h/6, you should not consider the pre-applied force
influence term but should perform the computation according to the pure torsion
member of reinforced concrete.

7.6.5 The section of any pure torsion member of T-shaped or I-shaped section can be
divided into several rectangle sections so as for separate torsion bearing capacity
computation according to Article 7.6.4 in this code.
The design torsion moment of each rectangle section should be computed
according to the following stipulation:
1. Web plate

Wtw
Tw = T (7.6.5-1)
Wt

2. Wing edge in compression

W 'tf
T'f = T (7.6.5-2)
Wt

3. Wing edge in tension

W tf
Tf = T (7.6.5-3)
Wt

where,
T----------------Design value of torsion moment that the section of the
member bears;

78
 Tw--------------Design value of the torsion moment that the web plate bears;

T' ƒ, Tf ----------Design value of torsion moment that the wing edge under
compression and tension bears.
7.6.6 The torsion bearing capacity of the pure torsion member that has box-type
section and is made of reinforced concrete should satisfy the following stipulation:

Ast1 Acor
T ≤ 0 .35α h f t Wt + 1.2 ζ f yv (7.6.6)
s

where, ah – Influence factor of wall thickness of box -type section: ah=2.5t w/b h;
when ah>1.0, it is taken to be 1.0;
The value of ζ herein should be computed by using Formula (7.6.4-2) in this code
and should satisfy the requirement for 0.6≤ζ≤1.7. When ζ>1.7, it is taken to be
1.7.

7.6.7 The torsion bearing capacity of the reinforced concrete member of rectangle
section under the joint action of the axial compression force and the torsion
moment should satisfy the following stipulation:

Ast1 Acor N
T ≤ 0 .35 f tW t + 1.2 ζ f yv + 0 .07 W t (7.6.7)
s A
where,

N----------------Design value of the axial compression force responding to

the design value T of torsion moment; when N>0.3ƒcA, N is
take to be 0.3ƒcA;
A----------------Section area of the member.

In this case, the value of ζ should be determined according to the stipulation in

Article 7.6.4 in this code.
7.6.8 The shear-torsion bearing capacity of the shear-torsion member of rectangle
section under the joint action of shearing force and torsion moment should satisfy
the following stipulations:
1. General shear-torsion member

1) Shear bearing capacity

Asv
V ≤ (1.5 − β t )(0 .7 f t bh0 + 0.05 N p 0 ) + 1.25 f yv h 0 (7.6.8-1)
s

1.5
βt = (7.6.8-2)
VWt
1 + 0.5
Tbh0

where,
Asv--------------Section area of web reinforcement that the shear bearing
capacity requires;

79
 βt----------------Decreasing coefficient of torsion bearing capacity of
concrete of common shear-torsion member: when βt<0.5, βt
is taken to be 0.5 (βt=0.5); when βt>1, βt is taken to be 1
(β t=1).
2) Torsion bearing capacity

N p0 Astl Acor
T ≤ β t (0.35 f t + 0 .05 )Wt + 1.2 ζ f yv (7.6.8-3)
A0 s

The value of ζ in this formula should be determined according to the

stipulation in Article 7.6.4 of this code.
2. Independent shear-torsion member under action of concentrated load

1) Shear bearing capacity

1.75 A
V ≤ (1.5 − β t )( f t bh0 + 0.05N p 0 ) + f yv sv h0 (7.6.4.8-4)
λ +1 s

1.5
βt = (7.6.4.8-5)
VWt
1 + 0 .2 (λ + 1)
Tbh0

where,
λ----------------Shear-span ratio of computational section, taken according
to the stipulation in Article 7.5.4 in this code;

βt----------------Decreasing coefficient of torsion bearing capacity of

concrete of shear-torsion member under the action of
concentrated load: when βt<0.5, βt is taken to be 0.5
(β t=0.5); when βt>1, βtit taken to be 1 (βt=1).
2) Torsion bearing capacity

The torsion bearing capacity should be computed by using Formula

(7.6.8-3) but βt in this formula should be computed by using Formula
(7.6.8-5).
7.6.9 The shear-torsion bearing capacity of the shear -torsion member of T-shaped or
I-shaped section should be computed according to the following stipulations:
1. The shear bearing capacity of a shear-torsion member should be computed
by using Formulas (7.6.8-1) and (7.6.8-2) or Formula (7.6.8-4) and (7.6.8-5),
but when computing, T and W t should be replaced with Tw and W tw
respectively.

2. According to the stipulation in Article 7.6.5 in this code, a shear-torsion

member can be divided into several rectangle sections to separately compute
its shear bearing capacity; the web place can be computed by using Formulas
(7.6.8-3) and (7.6.8-2) or Formulas (7.6.8-3) and (7.6.8-5), but in the
computation, T and Wt should be replaced with Tw and Wtw; the compression
wing edge and the tension wing edge can be computed according to the
stipulation of pure torsion member set forth in Article 7.6.4 in this Code, but
during computation, T and Wt should be replaced with T' ƒ and W'tƒ or Tƒ and
W tƒ.

80
7.6.10 The shear -torsion bearing capacity of reinforced concrete shear-torsion member
of box -type section should satisfy the following stipulations:

1 Common shear-torsion member

1) Shear bearing capacity

Asv
V ≤ 0.7 (1.5 − β t ) f t bh0 + 1.25 f yv h0 (7.6.10-1)
s
2) Torsion bearing capacity

Astl Acor
T ≤ 0 .35α h β t f t W t + 1 .2 ζ f yv (7.6.10-2)
s

In the above two formulas, the value of β t should be computed by using

Formula (7.6.8-2) in this code, but W t in the formula should be replaced with
αhW t; αh and ζ should be determined according to the stipulation in Article
7.6.6 in this code.

2 Independent shear-torsion member under action of concentrated load

1) Shear bearing capacity

1.75 A
V ≤ (1.5 − β t ) f t bh0 + f yv sv h 0 (7.6.10-3)
λ +1 s

The value of βt in this formula should be computed by using Formula

(7.6.8-5), but Wt should be replaced with α hW t.

2) Torsion bearing capacity

The torsion bearing capacity still should be computed by using Formula

(7.6.10-2), but the value of βt in this formula should be computed by
using Formula (7.6.8-5) while Wt should be replaced with α hW t.

7.6.11 The bearing capacity of any bending-shear-torsion member that is under the joint
action of bending moment, shearing force and torsion moment and has rectangle,
T-shaped, I-shaped or box -type section can be computed according to the
following stipulations:

1. When V≤0.35ƒt bh0 or V≤0.875ƒt bh0/(λ+1), the bearing capacity can be

computed respectively according to the bending bearing capacity of normal
section of a bending member and the torsion bearing capacity of a pure
torsion member;

81
 2. When V≤0.175ƒtW t or V≤0.175α hƒ tW t, the bearing capacity can be
respectively computed only according to the normal section bending bearing
capacity and the diagonal section bearing capacity of a bending member.
7.6.12 The section area of longitudinal steel bars of a bending-shear -torsion member of
rectangle, T-shaped, I-shaped or box -type section should be computed and
determined respectively according to the normal section bending bearing capacity
of a bending member and the torsion bearing capacity of a shear-torsion member
and such bending-shear-torsion member should be placed in appropriate
positions; the section area of web reinforcement should be computed and
determined respectively according to the shear bearing capacity and the torsion
bearing capacity of a shear-torsion member and the web reinforcement should be
placed in appropriate positions.

7.6.13 The shear-torsion bearing capacity of a frame pillar of reinforced concrete that is
under the joint action of axial compression force, bending moment, shearing force
and torsion moment and has rectangle section should satisfy the following
stipulations:
1. Shearing bearing capacity

1.75 A
V ≤ (1.5 − β t )( f t bh0 + 0 .07 N ) + f yv sv h0 (7.6.13-1)
λ +1 s
2. Torsion bearing capacity

N A A
T ≤ β t ( 0.35 f t + 0 .07 )W t + 1 .2 ζ f yv stl cor (7.6.13-2)
A s

where, λ---------Shear-span ratio of computational section, determined

according to Article 7.5.12 in this Code.

The value of βt in the above two formulas should be computed by using Formula
(7.6.8-5) in this code and the value of ζ should be determined according to the
stipulation in Article 7.6.4 in this Code.

7.6.14 When T≤(0.175ƒt+0.035N/A)W t, the frame pillar of reinforced concrete that is

under the joint action of axial compression force, bending moment, shearing force
and torsion moment and has a rectangle section can be respectively computed
only according to the normal section compression bearing capacity of an
eccentric compression member and the shear bearing capacity of diagonal
section of a frame pillar.
7.6.15 The section area of longitudinal steel bar of a frame pillar that is under the joint
action of axial compression force, bending moment, shearing force and torsion
moment and has a rectangle section should be respectively computed and
determined according to the compression bearing capacity of normal section of
an eccentric compression member and the torsion bearing capacity of a
shear-torsion member and the longitudinal steel bars should be placed on
appropriate positions; the section area of the web reinforcement should be
respectively computed and determined according to the shear bearing capacity
and the torsion bearing capacity of a s hear-torsion member and the web
reinforcement should be placed on appropriate positions.
7.6.16 As for any reinforced concrete structural member for coordinate retortion, it is
advisable to consider the redistribution of internal force for the torsion moment of
its supporting beam constrained by adjacent member.

82
 The bearing capacity of a supporting beam for which the redistribution of internal
force has been considered should be computed as a bending-shear-torsion
member, and the longitudinal steel bars and web reinforcement placed for it
should satisfy the stipulation in Articles 10.2.5, 10.2.11 and 10.2.12 in this code.

Note: Other design techniques can be taken if there is sufficient basis.

7.7 Computation of Die-cut Bearing Capacity

7.7.1 The die-cutting bearing capacity of any plate that is under the action of local load
or centralized counterforce and is not placed with web reinforcement or bent -up
steel bar should satisfy the following stipulation (Figure 7.7.1):

Figure 7.7.1 Computation of Die-cutting Bearing Capacity of Plate

(a) Under action of local load; (b) Under action of counterforce

1 – Diagonal section of cone damaged by die-cutting; 2 – Critical section;

3 – Perimeter of critical section; 4 – Bottom surface line of cone damaged by die-cutting

Fl ≤ (0.7 β h f t + 0.15σ pc , m )ηu m h0 (7.7.1-1)

The coefficient η in Formula (7.7.1-1) should be computed by using the following

two formulas and the minor result should be taken:

83
 1.2
η1 = 0 .4 + (7.7.1-2)
βs

α s h0
η 2 = 0 .5 + (7.7.1-3)
4u m

where,

Fl---------------Design value of local load or centralized counterforce; as for

the node of any plate column structure, this value is
interlayer difference of design value of the axial
compression force that the column bears MINUS the design
value of load that the plate bears within the range of the
cone damaged by die-cutting; when there is any unbalanced
bending moment, this value should be determined
according to the stipulation in Article 7.7.5 in this code;

βh---------------Influence coefficient of section height: when h≤800mm,

βh=1.0; when h≥2,000mm, β h=0.9; this value is to be taken
by using the linear interpolation method;
ƒ t---------------Design value of axis tension strength of concrete;
σpc, m-----------Length-weighted average of effective compressive pre-
stress of concrete at two direction on the perimeter of the
critical section; it is advisable to control its value to be within
2
the range of 1.0~3.5N/mm ;
um--------------Length of perimeter of the critical section: it refers to the
most unfavorable perimeter of the vertical section of the
place h0/2 away from the circumference of the area under
the action of local load or centralized counterforce;

h0---------------Effective height of section, for which the average of effective

heights of the section at two web reinforcement directions;

η1--------------Shape influence coefficient of the area under the action of

local load or centralized counterforce;
η2---------------Influence coefficient on the ratio of perimeter of the critical
section and effective height of section of the place;
βs---------------Ratio of longer edge and shorter edge when the action area
of the local load or centralized counterforce is a rectangle.
βs had better not be larger than 4; when βs<2, it is taken to
be 2 (βs=2); when the area is a circle, β s=2;

αs---------------Influence coefficient of column type in a plate column

structure: αs=40 for central column; α s=30 for side column;
αs=20 for corner column.
7.7.2 If on the plate there is any hole opened and the distance from the hole to the
edge of the working area of the local load or centralized counterforce is not larger
than 6h0, the perimeter um of the critical section to be selected in the computation
of die-cutting bearing capacity should deduct the length contained between the
two tangent lines from the center of the working area of local load or centralized
counterforce to the outer edge of the hole (Figure 7.7.2).

84
 Figure 7.7.2 Perimeter of Critical Section When Adjacent to Hole
1 – Acting surface of local load or centralized counterforce; 2 – Perimeter of critical section;

3 – Hole; 4 – Length that should be deducted

Note: when l1 >l2 in the figure, the hole edge length l2 should be replaced with √l1l 2

7.7.3 When the member is under the action of local load or centralized counterforce,
the die-cutting bearing capacity does not satisfy the requirements in Article 7.7.1
in this code and the thickness of the plate is limited, web reinforcement or bent -up
steel bars can be placed. In this case, the die-cutting section should satisfy the
following conditions:

Fl ≤ 1.05 f tηu m h0 (7.7.3-1)

The die-cutting bearing capacity of any place with web reinforcement or bent -up
steel bars configured should satisfy the following stipulations:
1. When web reinforcement is configured

Fl ≤ (0.35 f t + 0.15σ pc, m )η um h0 + 0.8 f yv Asvu (7.7.3-2)

2. When bent-up steel bars are configured

Fl ≤ (0.35 f t + 0.15σ pc , m )ηu m h0 + 0 .8 f yv Asbu sin α (7.7.3-3)

where,

Asvu-------------Section area of all web reinforcement intersecting with the

0
diagonal section of the 45 cones damaged by die cutting;
Asbu-------------Section area of all bent-up steel bars intersecting with the
0
diagonal section of the 45 cones damaged by die cutting;
α----------------Inclination between bent-up steel bar and the bottom
surface of the plate;

The die-cutting resisting web reinforcement or bent -up steel bar configured in
the plate should satisfy the construction stipulation in Article 10.1.10 in this
code.

85
 The section of outside the cone damaged by die-cutting and configured with
die-cutting steel bar should be subject to the computation of die-cutting
resisting bearing capacity according to the requirement in Article 7.7.1 in this
code. In this case, um should be taken to be the most unfavorable perimeter
0.5h 0 away from the outside of the die-cutting damaged cone with die-cutting
resisting steel bars configured.
Note: when there is appropriate basis, other effective modes of die-cutting resisting steel
bar (such as I bar, V-iron, shear -resistant anchor bolt, U flat steel hoop and so on) also can
be configured.

7.7.4 As for the trapezoid foundation of any pillar of rectangle section, the die-cutting
bearing capacity at the junction of the pillar and the foundation and at the point
where the ladder of the foundation changes should satisfy the following
stipulation (Figure 7.7.4):

Fl ≤ 0.7 β h f tηu m h 0 (7.7.4-1)

Fl = p s A (7.7.4-2)

bt + bb
bm = (7.7.4-3)
2
where,
h0---------------Effective height of the section at the junction of the pillar and
the foundation or at the point where the ladder of the
foundation changes. This value shall be taken to be the
average of the effective heights of the sections at the two
web reinforcement directions;

ps---------------Design value of counterforce of the bottom foundation of the

ground to be computed according to the fundamental
combination of the load effect and considering the
importance coefficient of the structure (the self weight of the
foundation and the weigh of the soil above it can be
deducted); when the foundation is eccentric and bears the
force, the design value of the maximum foundation
counterforce can be taken;
A----------------Area of the polygon to be taken when considering the
die-cutting load (the shaded area ABCDEF in Figure 7.7.4);

bt--------------- Length of the upper edge of the diagonal section on the most
unfavorable side of the cone damaged by die -cutting: when
computing the die-cutting bearing capacity at the junction of
the pillar and the foundation, the width of the pillar is taken;
when computing the die-cutting bearing capacity at the point
where the ladder of the foundation changes, the width of the
upper ladder is taken;
bb---------------Length of the lower edge of the diagonal section on the most
unfavorable side of the cone damaged by die cutting at the
junction of the pillar and the foundation or at the point where
the ladder of the foundation changes, bb= bt+2h 0.
7.7.5 When computing the die-cutting bearing capacity of a plate column structure

86
 Figure 7.7.4 Position of Section for Computing Die-cut Baring Capacity of
Trapezoid Foundation
(a) Junction between pillar and foundation; (b) Trapezoid change point
1 – Diagonal section on the most unfavorable side of die-cut failure cone; 2 – Bottom surface line of
die-cut failure cone

under the action of vertical load and horizontal load while considering the
unbalanced bending moment transferred by the shearing stress on the critical
section of in the plate column node and according to Article 7.7.1 or 7.7.3 in this
code, the design value of the centralized counterforce, Fl, should be replaced with
the design value of Fl,eq of the equivalent centralized counterforce, and Fl,eq
should be computed according to the stipulation in Appendix G in this code.

7.8 Computation of Local Compression Bearing Capacity

7.8.1 The section sizes of the local compression area of any concrete structural
member with indirect steel bars configured should satisfy the following
requirements:

Fl ≤ 1 .35 β C β L f C Aln (7.8.1-1)

Ab
βl = (7.8.1-2)
Al

where,
Fl----------------Design value of local load or local compression force
applied on the local compression surface; the design value
of the compression force in the local compression area of
the anchor head in the post -tensioned prestressed concrete
structure should be taken to be 1.2 times of the tension
control force;

87
 ƒ c---------------Design value of axial compression strength of concrete; In
the check computation for tensioning stage of a
post-tensioned prestressed concrete member, this value
should be determined by using the linear interpolation
method and based on the compression strength of the
concrete cone of the appropriate stage, ƒ' cu, and according
to the stipulation in Table 4.1.4 in this code;
βc---------------Influence coefficient of concrete strength, taken according to
the stipulation in Article 7.5.1 in this code;

βl---------------Strength augmenting factor of concrete when it is locally

compressed;
Al----------------Area of local compression area of concrete;

Aln--------------Net area of local compression concrete; as for a

post-tensioned structure, the areas of the pore passage and
the flute should be deducted from the area of the local
compression area of the concrete;
Ab---------------Area of computational basal surface in the local
compression area, determined according to Article 7.8.2 in
this code.

7.8.2 The area of the computational basal surface in the local compression area, Ab,
can be determined according to the local compression area and the
computational basal area and in the concentric and symmetric principles; in a
general situation, this value can be taken according to Figure 7.8.2.

Figure 7.8.2 Computation Basal Area under Local Compression

7.8.3 When the square-net or spiral indirect steel bars are placed and their core area
Acor ≥ Al (Figure 7.8.3), the local compression bearing capacity should satisfy the
following stipulations:

Fl ≤ 0.9 (β c β l f c + 2αρ v β cor f y ) Aln (7.8.3-1)

When the square-net steel bars are used (Figure 7.8.3a), its volumetric
reinforcement ratio ρ v should be computed by using the following formula:

88
 n1 As1l1 + n 2 As 2 l 2
ρv = (7.8.3-2)
Acors

In this case, the ratio of the section areas of the steel bars at the two directions of
the steel bar net within the unit length had better not be larger than 1.5.
When spiral steel bars are used for configuration (figure 7.8.3b), its volumetric
reinforcement ratio ρ v should be computed by using the following formula:

4 Ass1
ρv = (7.8.3-3)
d cor s

where,
βcor-------------Augmenting factor of local compression bearing capacity
with indirect steel bars configured. It is computed by using
Formula (7.8.1-2) in this code but Ab in this formula should
be replaced with Acor; when Acor >Ab, A cor should be taken to
be A b (A cor =A b);
ƒ y---------------Design value of tension strength of steel bar, taken
according to Table 4.2.3-1 i n this code;
α----------------Reduction coefficient of constraint of indirect steel bar to
concrete, taken according to the stipulation set forth in
Article 7.3.2 in this code;

Acor Core area of concrete within the range of the surface of

square-net or spi ral indirect steel bars. The gravity center of
the concrete should coincide with the gravity center of Al and
the value of core area should be taken in the concentric and
symmetric principle;

ρ v--------------Volumetric reinforcement ratio of indirect steel bars (volume

of indirect steel bars in a unit concrete volume within the
range of the core area A cor );
n1, As1---------Number of steel bars in the square net and at the direction of
l1 and section area of a single piece of steel bar;
n2, As2---------Number of steel bars in the square net and at the direction of
l2 and section area of a single piece of steel bar;

Ass1------------Section area of a single piece of indirect steel bar;

dcor-------------Diameter of concrete section in the range of the surface of
the spiral indirect steel bar;

s----------------As for interval of square-net or spiral indirect steel bar, it is

advisable to take the interval to be 30~80mm.

89
 Indirect steel bars should be placed within the range of the height, h stipulated in
Figure 7.8.3. The number of square-net steel bars should not be less than 4; the
number of turns for spiral steel bars should not be less than 4. For a column joint,
h should not be less than 5d (d is the diameter of longitudinal steel bar in the
pillar).

Figure 7.8.3 Indirect Steel Bar in Local Compression Area

(a) Bar Arrangement of Square- net Pattern; (b) Bar Arrangement of Spiral Pattern

7.9 Checking Computation of Fatigue

7.9.1 The fatigue stress of the normal section of any bending member subject to fatigue
check computation should be computed on the basis of the following
assumptions:
1. The section strain keeps a plane strain;

2. The diagram of the normal stress of the concrete in the compression area
adopts the triangular diagram;
3. The tension strength of the concrete in the tension area is not considered for
a reinforced concrete member and the tensile force is fully borne by the
tensile force; the diagram of normal stress of the concrete in the tension area
of a prestressed concrete member requiring no crack adopts the triangular
diagram;

4. The transformer section is adopted for computation.

90
7.9.2 In the fatigue check computation, the standard value is adopted for the load; the
load of the crane should be multiplied by the power coefficient and the power
coefficient of crane load should be selected according to the existing national
standard Code for Load of Architecture (GB50009). As for any crane beam the
span of which is not larger than 12m, the maximum crane load can be taken.
7.9.3 When check-computing the fatigue of the fiber at the edge of the compression
area of the normal section, the stresses of the following positions should be
computed:

1. The stress of the concrete of the edge fiber in the compression area of the
normal section and the stress amplitude of the longitudinal tensile steel bars;
2. Shear stress of concrete in the section and at the shaft and the stress
amplitude of the web reinforcement.

Note: Fatigue check computation can be not performed for longitudinal compression steel bars.

7.9.4 The fatigue stress of the normal section of reinforced concrete bending member
should satisfy the following requirements:

σ cf,max ≤ f cf (7.9.4-1)

∆σ sif ≤ ∆f yf (7.9.4-2)

where,
ƒ
σ c,max----------Compression
stress of the concrete of the edge fiber in the
compression area of the section when check-computing the
fatigue, computed by using Formula (7.9.5-1) in this code;
ƒ
∆σ si ------------Stress amplitude of No. i layer of longitudinal steel bars in
the tension area of the section when check-computing the
fatigue, computed by using Formula (7.9.5-2);
ƒ
ƒ c --------------Design value of axial compression fatigue strength of
concrete, determined according to Article 4.1.6 in this code;
ƒ
∆ƒ y-------------Limit value of fatigue stress amplitude of steel bar, taken
according to Table 4.2.5-1 in this code.

Note: when the longitudinal tension steel bars are the same type of steel, the check
computation can be made only for the stress amplitude of the outermost layer of steel bars.

7.9.5 The compression stress of concrete of the normal section of a reinforced

concrete bending member and the stress amplitude of the steel bar should be
computed by using the following formula:
1. Stress of concrete of the edge fiber of the compression area:
f
M max x0
σ cf, max ≤ f
(7.9.5-1)
I0

2. Stress amplitude of longitudinal tension steel bar:

91
 ∆σ sif = σ sif , max − σ sif , min (7.9.5-2)

f
M min (h 0i − x0 )
σ sif , min ≤ α Ef (7.9.5-3)
I 0f

f
M max (h 0i − x0 )
σ sif , max ≤ α Ef (7.9.5-4)
I 0f

where,
f f
M max, M min--------Maximum and minimum bending moment to be produced in
the same section and under the appropriate load
combination when performing check computation;
ƒ ƒ
σ si,min, σ si,max----Stress
of Layer i of longitudinal steel bars in the tension area
of the appropriate section caused by the bending moment
f f
M max and M min.

αƒ E-------------------Ratio of elastic modulus of steel bar and fatigue deformation

modulus of concrete: α ƒ E=Es/Eƒc;
f
I 0---------------------Inertia moment of transformation section when the
f f
appropriate bending moments Mmax and M min are of the
same direction in the fatigue check computation;
x0

---------------------Height of the compression area of the transformation section

f f
when the appropriate bending moments M max and M min are
of the same direction in the fatigue check computation;
h0i --------------------Distance from the edge of the section compression area
f f
when the bending moments M max and M min are of the same
direction to the gravity center of the section of Layer i of
longitudinal steel bar in the tension area.
f f
When the directions of bending moments M max and M min are of reverse directions,
f f
h0i, x 0 and I 0 in Formula (7.9.5-3) should be replaced with h0i, x0 and I0 at the
opposite position on the section.
7.9.6 During the check computation for the bending member of reinforced concrete, the
heights x0 and x'0 of the compression area of the transformation section and its
f f
inertia moments I 0 and I' 0 should be computed by using the following formulas:
1. For T-shaped section of with rectangle and wing edge located in the tension
area:

bx 02
+ α Ef A's ( x0 − α ' s ) − α Ef As ( h0 − x0 ) = 0 (7.9.6-1)
2

bx02
I 0f = + α Ef A' s ( x0 − α 's ) 2 + α Ef As (h 0 − x0 ) 2 (7.9.6-2)
3

2. For T-shaped section with I shape and wing edge located in the compression
area:

92
 1) When x 0>h' f (Figure 7.9.6),

Figure 7.9.6 Fatigue Stress Computation for Normal Section of Reinforced

Concrete Bending Member

b ' f x02 (b ' f − b)( x0 − h ' f ) 2

− + α Ef A' s −α Ef As ( h0 − x0 ) = 0 (7.9.6-3)
2 2

b' f x02 (b' f −b)( x0 − h' f ) 3

I 0f = − + α Ef A' s ( x0 − α 's ) 2 + α Ef As (h0 − x0 ) 2 (7.9.6-4)
3 3

2) When x 0≤h'f, it should be computed as per the rectangle section the width
of which is b'f.
f f
3. x' 0 and I ' 0 can be computed by using the above formulas for x0 and I0; when
f f
the directions of M mi n and M max are opposite, The positions of the
compression areas responding to x'0 and x 0 are respectively on the lower and
upper side of this section. When their directions are the same, x'0=x0 and
f f
I ' 0=I 0.
Notes:

1. When longitudinal steel bars are layered along the section height for
arrangement, A s and h0 in above formulas should be computed as per A si
and h0i of each layer;
2. The stress of longitudinal compression steel bar should satisfy α Eσ c ≤ƒ' y;
f f

when α Eσ c> ƒ' y; α EA 's in each formula in this article should be replaced
f f f

with ƒ'=A's/σ c, in which f' y is the design value of the compression strength
f

of the longitudinal steel bar and σ c is the concrete stress at the

f

application point of the joint force of longitudinal compression steel bars.

7.9.7 The fatigue c heck computation of diagonal section of reinforced concrete bending
member and the distribution of its shearing force should satisfy the following
stipulations;

1. As for the shearing stress in the section and at the axis, when satisfying the
following conditions:
τ ≤0.6ƒ t
f f
(7.9.7-1)
All the shearing force in this segment shall be borne by the concrete. In this

93
 case, web reinforcement can be configured upon the construction
requirements.
In the above formula,

τ -------------Shearing stress in the section and at the axis, computed according

f

to Article 7.9.8 in this code;

ƒ t -------------Design value of axial tension fatigue strength of concrete,
f

determined according to Article 4.1.6 in this code;

2. In the segment where the shearing stres s in the section and at the axis do not
satisfy Formula (7.9.9-1) in this code, its shearing stress should be borne
jointly by the web reinforcement and the concrete. In this case, the stress
amplitude of the web reinforcement ∆σfsv should satisfy the following
stipulations:

∆σ svf ≤ ∆ f yvf (7.9.7-2)

where,

∆σ sv---------Stress amplitude of web reinforcement, computed by using

f

Formula (7.9.9-1);

∆ƒ yv----------Limit value of fatigue stress of web reinforcement, taken as per

f

∆ƒ yv listed in Tabl e 4.2.5-1 in this code.

f

7.9.8 The shearing stress in the reinforced concrete bending member and at the axis
should be computed by using the following formula:
f
Vmax
τf = (7.9.8-1)
bz0

where,
f
V max---------Maximum shearing force of the check-comput ation section of the
member under the appropriate combined load when performing
the fatigue check computation;

b--------------Width of rectangle section, i.e., web width of T-shaped or I-shaped

section;
z0-------------Distance from the application point of the joint force in the
compression are to the application point of joint force of tensile
steel bars. Here the height x0 of the compression should be
computed by using Formula (7.9.6-1) or (7.9.6-3);
7.9.9 The stress amplitude of the web reinforcement on the di agonal section of the
reinforced concrete bending member should be computed by using the following
Formulas:

( ∆Vmax
f
− 0 .1η f t f bh0 ) s
∆σ svf ≤ (7.9.9-1)
Asv z 0

∆V max
f
= Vmax
f
− V min
f
(7.9.9-2)

94
 η = ∆V max
f f
/ Vmax (7.9.9-3)

where,
∆V max--------Maximum shearing force of the check-computation section of the
f

member when performing the fatigue check computation;

f
V min----------Minimum shearing force of the check-computation section of the
member under the appropriate load combination when performing
the fatigue check computation;
η--------------Relative value of maximum shearing force amplitude;
s--------------Distance of web reinforcement;

Asv-----------Area of all sections of various limbs of web reinforcement

configured in the same section.
7.9.10 The stresses of the following positions should be computed when performing the
fatigue check computation of the prestressed concrete bending member:
1. Stress of the concrete in the edge fiber of the tension area and the
compression area of the prestressed concrete and stress amplitude of
longitudinal prestressing tendon and non-prestressed steel bar in the tension
area;
2. Principal tension stress of the concrete at the gravity center of the section and
at the point where the section width acutely changes.
Note: Fatigue check computation can be not performed for the longitudinal steel bar in the
compression area.

7.9.11 The fatigue stress of the normal section of the reinforced concrete bending
member should satisfy the following stipulations:
1. Stress of concrete in the edge fiber in the tension or compression area
1) When it is a compression stress,

σ ccf , max ≤ f c f (7.9.11-1)

2) When it is a tension stress,

σ ctc
f
, max ≤ f t
f
(7.9.11-2)

2. Stress amplitude of the longitudinal prestressing tendon in the tension area

∆σ pf ≤ ∆f pyf (7.9.11-3)

3. Stress amplitude of the longitudinal non-prestressing tendon in the tension

area

∆σ sf ≤ ∆f yf (7.9.11-4)

where,

σ cc,max-------Maximum compression stress (absolute value) of edge fiber

f

concrete of the tension or compression area, determined by using

95
 Formula (7.9.12-1) or (7.9.12-2) in this code;
σ ct,max-------Maximum tension stress (absolute value) of edge fiber concrete of
f

the tension or compression area, determined by using Formula

(7.9.12-1) or (7.9.12-2) in this code;

∆σ p----------Stress amplitude of longitudinal prestressing tendon in the tension

f

area, computed by using Formula (7.9.12-3) in this code;

∆ƒ py----------Limit value of fatigue stress amplitude of prestressing tendon,
f

taken according to Table 4.2.5-2 in this code;

∆σfs ----------Stress amplitude of longitudinal non-prestressing tendon in the
tension area, computed by using Formula (7.9.12-6) in this code;

∆ƒ y-----------Fatigue tress amplitude of non-prestressing tendon, taken

f

according to Table 4.2.5-1 in this code.

Note: when the longitudinal prestressed and non-prestressing tendons in the tension area are
made of the same type of steel, check computation can be performed for the stress amplitude
of the outermost layer of steel bars only.

7.9.12 The minimum and maximum stress and stress amplitude of the concrete,
longitudinal prestressing tendon and non-prestressing tendon of the normal
section of any prestressed concrete bending member that requires no crack
should be computed by using the following formulas:
1. Stress of edge fiber concrete in the tension or compression area
f
M min
σ cf,min or σ cf,max = σp c + y0 (7.9.12-1)
I0

f
M max
σ cf,max or σ cf,min = σp c + y0 (7.9.12-2)
I0

2. Stress and stress amplitude of longitudinal prestressing tendon in the tension

area

∆σ pf = σ pf ,max − σ pf , min (7.9.12-3)

f
M min
σ pf ,min = σ pe + α pE y0 p (7.9.12-4)
I0

f
M max
σ pf ,max = σ pe + α pE y0 p (7.9.12-5)
I0

3. Stress and stress amplitude of longitudinal non-prestressing tendons in the

tension area

∆σ sf = σ sf,max − σ sf, min (7.9.12-6)

f
M min
σ sf,min = σ se + α E y0 s (7.9.12-7)
I0

96
 f
M max
σ sf,max = σ se + α E y 0s (7.9.12-8)
I0

where,

σf c,min, σf c,max-------Minimum and maximum stress of edge fiber concrete in the

tension or compression area when performing the fatigue
check com putation. The minimum and maximum stresses
shall be judged depending on their absolute values;

σpc-------------------Normal stress of concrete produced by the pre-applied force

at the edge fiber of the tension or compression area after
deducting all prestressing force loss, computed by using
Formula (6.1.5-1) or (6.1.5-4);
f f
M max, M min--------Maximum and minimum bending moment to be produced in
the same section and under the appropriate load
combination when performing check computation;
αpE-------------------Ratio of elastic modulus of prestressing tendon and elastic
modulus of concrete: α pE=Es/E c;
I0---------------------Inertia moment of transformation section;

y0---------------------Distance from the edge of the tension or compression area

to the gravity center of the transformation section;
σ p,min, σ p,max-------Minimum and maximum stresses of prestressing tendons in
f f

the layer of the tension area when performing the fatigue

check computation;

∆σ p------------------Stress amplitude of longitudinal prestressing tendon in the

f

tension area when performing the fatigue check

computation;
σpe-------------------Effective prestressing force of the prestressing tendon in the
tension area layer that is computed after deducting all the
prestressing force loss, computed by using Formula (6.1.5-2)
or (6.1.5-5) in this Code;

y0s, y 0p--------------Computed distance from the section gravity center of the

non-prestressed / prestressing tendons in the tension area
layer to the gravity center of the transformation section;

σ s,min, σ s,max------Minimum and maximum stresses of the non-prestressing

f f

tendon that is computed for the tension area layer when

performing the fatigue check computation;
∆σ s ------------------Stress amplitude of longitudinal non-prestressing tendon in
f

the tension area that is computed when performing the

fatigue check computation;

σse--------------------Stress that is computed under the action of

compression -reducing bending moment Mp0 and produced
in the non-prestressing tendon in the tension area layer; M p0
hereof is the appropriate bending moment when the normal
prestressing force of the concrete at the gravity center of the
non-prestressing tendon section in the tension area layer.

97
 Note: σpc, (M min/ I0)y 0 and (M max/I0)y 0 in Formulas (7.9.12-1) and (7. 9.12-2) should
f f

be positive when it is for tension stress and negative when it is for compression
stress; σse in Formulas (7.9.12-7) and (7.9.12-8) should be negative.
7.9.13 The key tension stress of the concrete in the diagonal section of the prestressed
concret e bending member should satisfy the following stipulation:

σ tpf ≤ f t f (7.9.13)

where,

σ tp
f
Principal tension stress of concrete the fiber for fatigue
check computation in the diagonal section of the
prestressed concrete bending member, computed by using
the formula in Article 8.1.6 in this code (the power coefficient
should be considered for crane load).

98
 8 Checking Computation of Normal-use Limiting State

8.1 Checking Computation for Crack Control

8.1.1 Any reinforced concrete member and prestressed concrete member should
satisfy the stipulation set forth in Article 3.3.4 in this code. Their appropriate crack
control grades and maximum crack width limit values should be determined
according to the type of the environment where they are used and the type of the
structure. The edge stress of the tension area and the crack width of the normal
section should be check -computed according to the following stipulations:
1. Class 1 — Member strictly requiring no crack to appear

In the characteristic combination of load effect, it should satisfy the following

stipulation:

σ ck − σ pc ≤ 0 (8.1.1-1)

2. Class 2 — Structural member generally requiring no crack to appear

In the characteristic combination of load effect, it should satisfy the following
stipulation:

σ ck − σ pc ≤ f tk (8.1.1-2)

In the quasi -permanent combination of load effect, it is advised to satisfy the

following stipulation:

σ cq − σ pc ≤ 0 (8.1.1-3)

3. Class 3 — Structural member allowing for crack to occur

The maximum crac k with that is computed according to the characteristic

combination of load effect and considering the influence of long-term action
should satisfy the following stipulation:

wmax ≤ wlim (8.1.1-4)

where,

σck, σcq --------Normal stresses of concrete at the edge for rupture check
computation under the characteristic and quasi-permanent
combination of load effect;

σpc--------------C ompressive pre-stress of concrete at the edge for rupture

check computation after deducting all the prestressing force loss,
computed by using Formula (6.1.5-1) or (6.1.5-4) in this code;

99
 ƒtk---------------Standard value of axial tension strength of concrete, taken
according to Table 4.1.3 in this code;
ωmax------------Maximum crack width to be computed according to the
characteristic combination of load effect and considering the
influence of long-term action, computed according to Article
8.1.2 in this code;

ωlim--------------Limit value of maximum crack width, taken according to Article

3.3.4 in this code.
Note: As for any prestressed concrete bending and large-eccentricity compression member, σpc
in Formulas (8.1.1-1) ~ (8.1.1- 3) should be multiplied by the coefficient 0.9 for the segment
which has cracks appear in the pre- tensioning area of such members.

8.1.2 In any reinforced concrete tension, bending and eccentric compression member
and prestressed concrete axial tension and bending member of rectangle,
T-shaped, reverse-T-shaped or -I shaped section, the maximum crack width (mm)
under the characteristic combination of load effect and considering the influence
of long-term action can be computed by using the following formulas:

σ SK d eq
wmax = α crψ (1 .9 c + 0 .08 ) (8.1.2-1)
Es ρ te

f tk
ψ = 1 .1 − 0.65 (8.1.2-2)
ρ teσ sk

Σ ni d i2
d eq = (8.1.2-3)
Σn i v i d i

As + Ap
ρt e = (8.1.2-4)
Ate

where,

αcr--------------Force coefficient of member, taken according to Table 8.1.2-1;

ψ----------------N on-uniformity coefficient of strain force of longitudinal tension

steel bar among cracks: when ψ<0.2, it is taken to be 0.2
(ψ=0.2); when ψ>1, it is taken to be 1 (ψ=1); for any member
directly bearing repeated load, ψ is taken to be 1 (ψ=1);

σsk--------------Stress of longitudinal tension steel bar of the reinforced concrete

member to be computed according to the characteristic
combination of load effect or equivalent stress of longitudinal
tension steel bar of a prestressed concrete member, computed
according to Article 8.1.3 in this Code;

100
 Es---------------Elastic modulus of steel bar, taken according to Table 4.2.4 in
this code;
c----------------Distance (mm) from the outer edge of the longitudinal tension
steel bar in the outermost layer to the bottom edge of the
tension area: when c<20, it is taken to be 20 (c=20); when c>65,
it is taken to be 65 (c=65);

ρ te---------------Reinforcement rat io of longitudinal tension steel bars to be

computed as per the effective area of the tension concrete
section; in the computation of maximum crack width, when
ρ te<0.01, it is taken to be 0.01 (ρ te=0.01);
Ate ---------------Effective area of tension concrete section: it is the section area
of the member for an axial tension member; for a bending,
eccentric compression and eccentric tension member,
A te=0.5bh+(bf-b)hf, here bf and hf is the width and height of the
tension wing edge;

As---------------Section area of longitudinal non-prestressing tendon in the

tension area;
Ap---------------Section area of longitudinal prestressing tendon in the tension
area;

deq--------------Equivalent diameter (mm) of longitudinal steel bar in the tension

area;

di ----------------Nominal diameter (mm) of No. i type of longitudinal steel bar in

the tension area;
ni ----------------Number of No. i type of longitudinal steel bars in the tension
area;

νI ----------------Relative cementing coefficient of No. i type of longitudinal steel

bar in the tension area, taken according to Table 8.1.2-2.
Notes:

1. As for any bending member that bears the load of the crane and needs no
fatigue check computation, the computed maximum crack width can be
multiplied by the coefficient 0.85.

2. Any eccentric compression member with e0/h0 ≤0.55 may need no check
computation for crack width.

Table 8.1.2-1 Characteristic Force Coefficients of Members

α cr
Type Reinforced concrete Prestressed concrete
member member
Bending and eccentric
2.1 1.7
compression member
Eccentric tension
2.4 --
member
Axial tension member 2.7 2.2

101
 Table 8.1.2-2 Characteristic Relative Cementing Coefficients of Steel Bars
Non-prestressed Post-tensioned
Pre-tensioned prestressing tendon
steel bar prestressing tendon
Type of
steel bar Ribbed Ribbed Notched Ribbed
Plain Spiral-rib Steel Plain
steel steel steel wire, steel
bar steel wire strand bar
bar bar steel strand bar
νi 0.7 1.0 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.8 0.5 0.4
Note: As for the ribbed bar with epoxy coating, its relative cementing coefficient should be
taken to be 0.8 times of that of the table.

8.1.3 Under the standard combination of load effect, the stress of the longitudinal steel
bar in the tension area of the reinforced concrete member or the equivalent stress
of the longitudinal steel bar in the tension area of the prestressed concrete
member can be computed by using the following formulas:

1. Stress of longitudinal steel bar in the tension area of the reinforced concrete
member
1) Axial tension member

Nk
σ sk = (8.1. 3-1)
As

2) Eccentric tension member

N k e'
σ sk = (8.1.3-2)
As (h0 − α 's )

3) Bending member

Mk
σ sk = (8.1.3-3)
0 .87 h0 As

4) Eccentric compression member

N k (e − z)
σ sk = (8.1.3-4)
As z

h0 2
z = [0 .87 − 0.12 (1 − γ ' f )( ) ] (8.1.3-5)
e

e = η s e0 + ys (8.1.3-6)

(b' f −b )h ' f
γ'f = (8.1.3-7)
bh0

1 l
ηs = 1 + ( 0 )2 (8.1.3-8)
4000 e0 / h 0 h

102
 where,
As---------------Section area of longitudinal steel bar in the tension area: the
section are of all longitudinal steel bars is taken for an axial
tension member; the section area of longitudinal steels on the
larger tension edge is taken for an eccentric tension member;
the section area of longitudinal steel bar in the tension area is
taken for any bending or eccentric compression member;

e'----------------Distance from the application point of axial tension force to the

application point of the joint force of the longitudinal tension
steel bars;
e----------------Distance from the application point of axial compression force to
the application point of joint force of longitudinal tension steel
bars;

z----------------Distance from the application point of joint force of longitudinal

tension steel bars to the application point of the section
compression area, not larger than 0.87h 0;
ηs---------------Augmenting coefficient of eccentric distance due to axial
compression force during the application stage. When l0/h≤14,
η s=1.0;

ys----------------Distance from the gravity center of the section to the application

point of joint force of longitudinal tension steel bars;

γ' f ----------------Ratio of Section area of the wing edge in compression and the
effective section area of the web plate;
b' f, h'f----------Width and height of wing edge of the compression area; in
Formula (8.1.3-7), when h'f>0.2h 0, h' f is taken to be 0.2h 0
(h' f=0.2h 0).

N k, M k---------Values of axial force or bending moment to be computed

according to the characteristic combination of load effect.
2. Equivalent stress of longitudinal steel bar in the tension area of prestressed
concrete member

1) Axial tension member

N k − N p0
σ sk = (8.1.3-9)
A p + As

2) Bending member

M k ± M 2 − N p0 ( z − e p )
σ sk = (8.1.3-10)
( Ap + As ) z

Mk ± M2
e = ep + (8.1.3-11)
N p0

where,

Ap---------Section area of longitudinal prestressing tendon in the tension

area: the section area of all the longitudi nal prestressing

103
 tendons is taken for an axial tension member; the section area
of longitudinal prestressing tendon in the tension area is taken
for a bending member;
z-----------Distance from the application of joint force of longitudinal
non -prestressed and prestressing tendons in the tension area to
the application point of joint force in the compression area of the
section, computed by using Formula (8.1.3-5), in which e is
computed by using Formula (8.1.3-11);

ep----------Distance of the application point of the joint force Np0 of all

longitudinal prestressed and non-prestressing tendons when the
normal prestressing force of concrete is equal to zero to the
application point of longitudinal prestressed and
non -prestressing tendons in the tension area;
M2---------Minor bending moment in the hyperstatic structure member of
post-tensioned prestressed concrete, determined according to
the stipulation in Article 6.1.7 in this code.
Note: In Formulas (8.1.3-10) and (8.1.3-11), when M2 and Mk has the same acting
direction, their signs should be the plus sign; when M2 and Mk has opposite acting
directions, their signs should be the minus sign.

8.1.4 In the standard and quasi-permanent combination of load effect, the normal
stress of concrete on the edge for rupture check computation should be
computed by using the following formula:
1. Axial tension member

Nk
σc k = (8.1.4-1)
A0

Nq
σccq = (8.1.4-2)
A0

2. Bending member

Mk
σc k = (8.1.4-3)
W0

Mq
σc cq = (8.1. 4-4)
W0

3. Eccentric tension member and eccentric compression member

Mk N k
σck = ± (8.1.4-5)
W0 A0

104
 Mq N q
σccq = ± (8.1.4-6)
W0 A0

where,

Nq, Mq---Value of axial force and bending moment to be computed

according to the quasi-permanent combination of load effect;

A0----------Area of transformation section of member;

W 0---------Elastic resisting moment of the tension edge of the

transformation section of the member.
Note: the sign of the right terms of Formulas (8.1.4-5) and (8.1.4-6) should be
PLUS when the axial force is a tension force and MINUS when it is compression
force.
8.1.5 As for any prestressed concrete bending member, check computation should be
performed for the principal tension stress and principal compression stress of the
concrete in the section respectively:

1. Principal tension stress of concrete

1) Class 1 — Any member that is strictly required not to appear crack
should satisfy the following stipulation:

σ t p ≤ 0.85 f tk (8.1.5-1)

2) Class 2 — Any member that is required generally not to appear crack

should satisfy the following stipulation:

σ tp ≤ 0.95 f tk (8.1.5-2)

2. Principal compression stress of concrete

Any member that is strictly or generally required not to appear crack should
satisfy the following stipulation:

σ cp ≤ 0.96 ck (8.1.5-3)

where, σtp, σcp — Principal stress / compression stress of concrete,

determined according to Article 8.1.6 in this code.
In this case, the most unfavorable position in the span should be selected for
check-computing the gravity center position of the transformation section of
that section and for check-computing the point where the section width
acutely changes.
Note: As for any crane beam that allows the appearance of crack, its static calculation
should satisfy the stipu lation of Formulas (8.1.5- 2) and (8.1.5- 3).

105
8.1.6 The principal tension stress and principal compression stress of concrete should
be computed by using the following formulas:

σ tp  σ x + σ y σ x − σ y 
2

= ±   +τ
2
(8.1.6-1)
σ cp  2  2 
M k y0
σ x = σ pc + (8.1.6-2)
I0

(V k − Σσ pe Apb sin α p ) S 0
τ= (8.1.6-3)
I 0b

where,
σx----------Normal stress of concrete that the pre-applied force and
bending moment M k produce at the computational fiber;
σy---------Vertical compression stress that the standard value F k of
concentrated load produces in the concrete;
τ-----------Shearing stress that the sharing force Vk and the pre-applied
force of prestressed bent-up steel bar products in the concrete
at the computational fiber; when there is torsion moment acts on
the computational section, the shearing force produced by the
torsion moment should be additionally considered; as for
hyperstatic structural member of post-tensioned prestressed
concrete, the minor shearing force produced by the pre-applied
force should be considered when computing the shearing
stress;

σpc ---------Normal stress that the pre-applied force produces to the

concrete at the computational fiber after deducting all
prestressed stress loss, computed by using Formula (6.1.5-1) or
(6.1.5-4);

y 0----------Distance from the gravity center of the transformation section to

the computational fiber;
I0-----------Inertia moment of transformation section;
Vk---------Shearing force to be computed according to the standard
combination of load effect;
S0----------Area moment of transformation section area above the
computational fiber to the gravity center of the transformation
section of the member;

σpe--------Effective prestressing force of prestressed bent -up steel bar;

Apb---------Section area of the prestressed bent-up steel bar on the

computational section and in the same bent-up plane;
αp----------Compute the inclination between the tangent line of the
prestressed bent -up steel bar on the computational section and
the longitudinal axis of the member;

106
 Note: σx, σy, σpe and Mky 0/I0 in Formulas (8.1.6- 1) and (8.1.6- 2) should be substituted by
positive values when the force is a tension stress and by negative values when the force is a
compression stress.

8.1.7 As for a crane beam of prestressed concrete, within the length range 0.6h away
from two sides of the application point of the centralized force, the simplified
distribution of vertical compression stress and shearing stress to be produced in
the concrete by the standard value Fk of the concentrated load can be
determined according to Figure 8.1.7 and the maximum value of its stress can be
computed by using the following formulas:

0.6 Fk
σ y , max = (8.1.7-1)
bh

τ l −τ r
τF = (8.1.7-2)
2

Vkl S 0
τl = (8.1.7-3)
I 0b

Vkr S 0
τr = (8.1.7-4)
I 0b

where,

τ , τ ----Shearing stress on the section 0.6h away from the left and right
l r

side of the application point of the standard value Fk of the

concentrated load;
τF----------Shearing stress of the acting section of the standard value Fk of
the concentrated load;
l r
V k, V k----Standard value of the shearing force on the left or right section
of the acting point of the standard value F k of the concentrated
load.

Figure 8.1.7 Stress Distribution by the Side of Acting point of

Concentrated Force of Prestressed Concrete Crane Beam
(a) Section; (b) Distribution of Vertical Compression Stress σy; (c) Distribution of
Shearing Stress τ

107
8.1.8 When performing the rupture strength check computation to the normal section
and diagonal section at the end of a pre-tensioned prestressed concrete member,
the change of actual stress of the prestressing tendon in the range of transfer
length ltr of its prestressing force. The actual stress of the prestressed steel bar
increases in a linear law, it is taken to be zero at the end of the member and be
the effective prestressing force σpe at the end of the transfer length of its
prestressing force (figure 8.1.8). The transfer length ltr of the prestressing force of
the prestressing tendon should be determined according to Article 6.1.9 in this
code.

Figure 8.1.8 Change of Effective Prestressing Value in the Range of Transfer

Length of Prestressing Force

8.2 Checking Computation of Bending Deflection of Flexural Member

8.2.1 The bending deflection of any reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete
flexural member at the limit state of normal use can be computed according to the
rigidity of the member and by using the structural mechanics method.

For members of identical section, it can be assumed that the rigidity in the
bending moment segment of the same sign is identical and the rigidity at the point
of the maximum bending moment in this segment shall be taken. When the
rigidity of abutment section in the computational span is not larger than twice or
less than a half of the section rigidity in the span, this span also can be regarded
as a member of identical rigidity for computation, and the rigidity of the section of
the maximum bending moment in the span can be taken as its member rigidity.
The bending deflection of a bending member should be computed depending on
the rigidity B under the standard combination of load effect and considering the
influence of the long-term action of the load. The computed bending deflection
should not exceed the limit value stipulated in Table 3.3.2 in this code.

8.2.2 The rigidity B of a bending member of rectangle, T-shaped, reverse-T-shaped and

I-shaped bending member can be computed by using the following formula:

108
 Mk
B= Bs (8.2.2)
M q (θ − 1) + M k

where,

Mk---------When computing the bending moment, according to the

standard combination of load effect, take the maximum value of
the computational segment;

Mq--------- When computing the bending moment, according to the

quasi -permanent combination of load effect, take the maximum
value in the computational segment;

Bs---------Short-term rigidity of bending member under the action of the

characteristic combination of load effect should be computed by
using the formulas described in Article 8.2.3 in this code;
θ-----------Coefficient of influence that long-term action of load to bending
deflection augmentation, should be taken according to Article
8.2.5 in this code.

8.2.3 The short-term rigidity Bs of a bending member under the characteristic

combination of load effect can be computed by using the following formula:
1. Bending member of reinforced concrete

E s As h02
Bs = (8.2.3-1)
6α E ρ
1.15ψ + 0.2 +
1 + 3.5γ ' f

2. Bending member of prestressed concrete

1) Member which cracks are not allowed
B s=0.85E cI 0 (8.2.3-2)
2) Member which allows cracks

0.85 Ec I 0
Bs = (8.2.3-3)
κ cr + (1 − κ cr )ω

M cr
κ cr = (8.2.3-4)
Mk

0 .21
ω = (1 .0 + )(1 + 0.45γ f ) − 0.7 (8.2.3-5)
αE ρ

M cr = (σ pc + γf tk )W0 (8.2.3-6)

109
 (b f − b) h f
γf = (8.2.3-7)
bh0

where,

ψ----------Non-uniformity coefficient of strain of longitudinal tension steel

bars between cracks, determined according to Art icle 8.1.2 in
this code;

αE---------Elastic modulus ratio of steel bar and concrete: α E=Es/E c;

ρ-----------Reinforcement ratio of longitudinal tension steel bars: ρ=A s/(bh 0)

is taken for bending member of reinforced concrete;
ρ=(A p+A s)/(bh 0) is taken for bending member of prestressed
concrete;
I0-----------Inertia moment of transformation section;
γf-----------Ratio of section area of tension wing edge and effective section
are of web plate;

bf, hf------Width and height of wing edge of tension area;

k cr---------- Ratio of cracking bending moment Mcr of normal section of
prestressed concrete bending member and the bending moment
Mk. when K cr>1.0, it is taken to be 1.0.

σpc --------Compressive pre-stress of concrete that is produced by the

pre-applied force at the edge of cracking check computation
after deducting all the prestressing force loss;
γ-----------Plastic influence coefficient of resisting moment of the section of
the concrete member, determined according to Article 8.2.4 in
this code.
Note: As for any member having cracks appear in the pretension area when being preformed,
Bs should be reduced by 10%.

8.2.4 The plastic influence coefficient of resisting moment of the section of a concrete
structure, γ can be computed by using the following formula:
120
γ = (0.7 + )γ m (8.2.4)
h
where,

γ m---------Basal value of plastic influence coefficient of resisting moment of

the section of the concrete member can be determined
according to the assumption that the strain of the normal section
keeps plane and while assuming that the stress diagram of the
concrete in the tension area is a trapezoid and the limit tension
strain of the concrete of the tension edge is 2ƒtk/Ec; As for any
common section shape, the value of γm can be taken according
to Table 8.2.4.

h-----------Section height (mm): when h<400, h=400 is taken; when h>600,

h=600 is taken; for a circular or annular section, h=2r, in which r
is the radius of the circular section or the outer radius of the
annular section.

110
 Table 8.2.4 Basal Value γm of Plastic Influence Coefficient of Resisting
Moment of Section
Item
1 2 3 4 5
No.
Reverse-T-shaped
Symmetric

Rectangle section
section with wing
Shape of section

T-shaped I-shaped or
edge located in
section with box-type section
tension area Circular or
wing edge
bf/b≤2, bf/b≤2, annular
located in
hf/h is hf/h is section
compression bf/b>2, bf/b>2,
an an
area hf/h<0.2 hf/h<0.2
arbitrary arbitrary
value value
γm 1.55 1.50 1.45 1.35 1.50 1.40 1.6-0.24r1/ r
Notes:

1. γ m for I-shaped section with b'f>bf can take the values from Item No. 2 to 3; γ m for I-shaped
section with bf'<bf can adopt the values selected from Item No. 3 to 4.

2. The coefficient b for a box -type section refers to the total width of various ribs.

3. r1 is the inner radius of the annular section and it is taken to be zero for a circular section.

8.2.5 Considering the influence of long -term action of the load to the augmentation of
bending deflection, the coefficient θ can be taken according to the following
stipulations:
1. Bending member of reinforced concrete

When ρ'=0, θ=2.0 is taken; when ρ'=ρ, θ=1.6 is taken; when ρ' is an
intermediate value, θ is taken by the linear interpolation method. In this case,
ρ '=A's/(bh 0) and ρ =A s/(bh 0).
As for a reverse-T-shaped section with the wing edge located in the tension
area, θ should be increased by 20%.

2. Prestressed concrete bending member, θ=2.0.

8.2.6 The antiarch value of pre-applied force of a prestressed concrete bending

member during the use stage can be computed by using the structural mechanics
method and depending on the rigidity Ec I0, while considering the influence of the
long-term action of the compressive pre-stress and multiplying the computed
antiarch value of the pre-applied force by an augmenting coefficient 2.0; in the
computation, all prestressing force loss should be deducted from the stress of the
prestressing tendon.
Notes:

1. The long-term antiarch value of any imported or special prestressed concrete

bending member can be analyzed and determined through dedicated
experiment or by using a reasonable shrinkage and creepage computation
method;

2. Unfavorable influence of a too large antiarch to the use should be considered

for any member the dead load of which is relatively small.

111
 9 Construction Stipulations

9.1 Expansion Joint

9.1.1 The maximum interval of the expansion joint of rei nforced concrete structure
should satisfy the stipulations in Table 9.1.1.
Table 9.1.1

Maximum Interval of Expansion Joint of Reinforced Concrete Structure (m)

Type of structure Indoor or in soil Open air
Bent structure Prefabricated 100 70
Prefabricated 75 50
Frame structure
Cast-in-situ 55 35
Prefabricated 65 40
Shearwall structure
Cast-in-situ 45 30
Breast wall, basement wall and Prefabricated 40 30
other similar structures Cast-in-situ 30 20
Notes:

1. The interval of expansion joint of any building of assembled monolithic structure should
adopt the values in the "Cast- in-situ" raw in the above table.

2. The expansion joint interval for any building of frame-shearwall structure or

frame~tube-shaped structure can adopt the values between those for frame structure and
those for shearwall structure according to the actual arrangement of the structure;

3. When there is no heat- preservation or heat- isolation measures on the roof, the expansion
joint interval of a frame structure or a shearwall structure should adopt the values listed in
the "Open air" column.

4. It is advisable that the expansion joint interval of any out-stretched structure such as
cast- in-situ creasing and awning should not be larger than 12m.

9.1.2 It is advisable that the maximum interval of expansion joint listed in Table 9.1.1 in
this code should be appropriately reduced for any of the following cases:
1. Bent structure the pillar height (starting from the top surface of the foundation)
of which is lower than 8m;

2. Bent structure without heat-preserva tion or heat -isolation measure on the

roof;
3. Any structure to be built in dry region, hot region or a region with frequent rain
or any structure frequently under high temperature;

4. Shearwall structure adopting slip -form construction technology;

5. When the materials have a relatively large shrinkage, the indoor structure will
be exposed in the air for relatively long time due to construction, and so on.
9.1.3 In the following cases, if there is sufficient basis and reliable measures, the
maximum expansion joint interval listed in Table 9.1.1 in this code can be
appropriately increased.

1. The concrete adopts the post -cast and staged construction;

2. Dedicated measures to pre-apply stress are taken.

112
 3. Measures that can help to reduce the temperature change or shrinkage of
concrete are taken.
When increasing the expansion joint interval, the influence of temperature change
and concrete shrinkage to the structure should be additionally considered.

9.1.4 As for any bent structure or frame structure of independent foundation, when
setting their expansion joint, the foundation of their two pillars can be not split.

9.2 Protective Layer of Concrete

9.2.1 The thickness (distance from outer edge of steel bar to the concrete surface)
of concrete protective layer of any ordinary steel bar and prestressin g
tendon bearing longitudinal force should not be less than the nominal
diameter of the steel bar and should satisfy the stipulation in Table 9.2.1.

Table 9.2.1

The minimum thickness of concrete protective layer of steel bars bearing

longitudinal force(mm)
Type of Plate, wall, shell Beam Pillar
environment ≤C20 C25~C45 ≥C50 ≤C20 C25~C45 ≥C50 ≤C20 C25~C45 ≥C50
I 20 15 15 30 25 25 30 30 30
a - 20 20 - 30 30 - 30 30
II
b - 25 20 - 35 30 - 35 30
III - 30 25 - 40 35 - 40 35
Note: In the foundation, the thickness of the concrete protection layer of a longitudinal
reinforcing bar should not be less than 40mm; this thickness should not be less than 70mm
w hen there is no packing layer.

9.2.2 As for any member prefabricated in the factory and to be used in Type I
environment, when the strength grade of the concrete is not less than C20, the
thickness of its protective layer can be reduced by 5mm according to the
stipulation in Table 9.2.1 in this code but the thickness of the protective layer of
prestressing tendon should not be less than 15mm; as to any member that is
prefabricated in the factory and is used in Type II environment, when there is
effective protection measures on their surface, the thickness of the protective
layer can be selected from the values for Type I environment listed in Table 9.2.1
in this code.
The thickness of the protective layer of the termination end of prefabricated
reinforced concrete bending member should not be less than 10mm; the
thickness of the protective layer of any main rib steel bar of prefabricated rib plate
should be taken as per the values for beams.
9.2.3 The thickness of the protective layer on steel bars distributed in plates, walls and
shells should not be 10mm less than the appropriate values listed in Table 9.2.1
in this code and should not be less than 10mm; that for web reinforcement and
constructional reinforcement in a beam or pillar should not be less than 15mm.

9.2.4 When the thickness of concrete protection layer of longitudinal reinforcing bar in a
beam or pillar is larger than 40mm, some effective anti-cracking structure
measures should be taken for the protective layer.

113
 As for any cantilever plate used in Type II and III environment, some effective
protection measures should be taken on its upper surface.
9.2.5 As to any building with fire-prevention requirements, the thickness of its concrete
protection layer should satisfy the requirements of related existing standards of
the state.

As for any building in Type IV and V environment, the thickness of its concrete
protection layer should additionally satisfy the requirements set forth in related
existing standards of the state.

9.3 Anchoring of Steel Bar

9.3.1 When computing the tension strength for taking full use of steel bars, the
anchoring length of the tension steel bar should be computed by using the
following formula:
Ordinary steel bar:

fy
la = α d (9.3.1-1)
ft

Prestressing tendon

f py
la = α d (9.3.1-2)
ft

where,
la-----------Anchoring length of tension steel bar

ƒ y, ƒ py----Design value of tension strength of ordinary steel bar and

prestressing tendon, taken according to Tables 4.2.3-1 and
4.2.3-2 in this code;
ƒ t-----------Design value of axial tension strength of concrete, taken
according to Table 4.1.4 in this code; when the concrete
strength grade si higher than C40, its value is selected while
regarding its strength grade as C40;
d-----------Nominal diameter of steel bar;

α-----------Appearance coefficient of steel bar, taken according to Table

9.3.1.
Table 9.3.1 Appearance Coefficient of Steel Bar
Type of Ribbed Notched Spiral ribbed Three-folded Seven-folded
Plain bar
steel bar steel bar steel wire steel wire steel strand steel strand
α 0.16 0.14 0.19 0.13 0.16 0.17
0
Note: Plain bar refers to HPB235 steel bar. a 180 hook should be produced at
the end of a plain bar and the length of the straight segment after producing the
hook should not be less than 3d; however, when it
is used as a compression steel bar, it is unnecessary to make the hook; ribbed
steel bar refers to HRB 335 and HRB 400 steel bar and RRB400 steel bar heated
by waste heat.

114
 When the following conditions are met, the computed anchoring length should be
modified and corrected.
1. When the diameter of HRB335, HRB400 or RRB400 steel bar is larger than
25mm, their anchoring length should be multiplied by a correction coefficient
1.1.

2. As for HRB335, HRB400 or RRB400 steel bar with epoxy coating, their
anchoring length should be multiplied by a correction coefficient 1.25.
3. When the steel bar is easy to encounter disturbance during the concrete
construction (such as slip-form construction), its anchoring length should be
multiplied by a correction coefficient 1.1.
4. When the thickness of the concrete protection layer of HRB335, HRB400 and
RRB400 steel bar in the anchoring area is larger than 3 times of the steel bar
diameter and some web reinforcement is configured, its anchoring length can
be multiplied by a correction coefficient 0.8.

5. Except the anchoring length that the structure requires, when the actual
reinforcement area of the longitudinal reinforcing bar is larger than it design
computational area, if there is sufficient basis and reliable measures, its
anchoring length can be multiplied by the ratio of the designed computational
area and the actual reinforcement area. However, any structural member that
has aseismic requirements and directly bear the power load should not adopt
this correction.
6. When adopting the construction technology that will suddenly relax the
prestressing tendon, the anchoring length of the post-tensioned prestressing
tendon should be computed starting from where is 0.25ltr away from the end
of the member. The ltr hereof is the transfer length of prestressing force and is
to be determined according to Article 6.1.9 in this code.

In general, the corrected anchoring length should not be less than 0.7 times of
the anchoring length to be computed by using Formulas (9.3.1-1) and (9.3.1-2)
and should not be less than 250mm.
9.3.2 When the ends of HRB335, HRB400 and RRB400 longitudinal tension steel bars
adopt mechanical anchoring measures, the anchoring length including the
additional anchoring end can be taken to be 0.7 times of the anchoring length to
be computed by using Formula (9.3.1-1) in this code.

The pattern of mechanical anchorage and the construction requirements should

be taken according to Figure 9.3.2.

Figure 9.3.2 Pattern and Construction Requirements of Mechanical Anchorage

of Steel Bars
(a) 1350 Hook at the end; (b) End and Steel Plate Perforated and Plug-welded; (c)End and
short steel bar welded on both sides

115
 When adopting the mechanical anchoring measures, the web reinforcement
within the range of anchoring length should not be less than 3 pieces, its diameter
should not be less than 0.25 times of the diameter of the longitudinal steel bar
and its interval should not be larger than 5 times of the diameter of the
longitudinal steel bar. When the thickness of the concrete protection layer of the
longitudinal steel bar is not less than 5 times of the nominal diameter of the steel
bar, the above-mentioned web reinforcement can be not configured.
9.3.3 When the computation takes full use of the compression strength of longitudinal
steel bars, its anchoring length should not be less than 0.7 times of the tension
anchorage length stipulated in Article 9.3.1 in this code.

9.3.4 As for any prefabricated member bearing repeated load, the end of the
longitudinal non-prestressed tension steel bar should be welded on the steel plate
or angle steel and the steel plate or angle steel should be reliably anchored in the
concrete. The sizes of the steel plate or angle steel should be determined after
computation and its thickness had better not be less than 10mm.

9.4 Connection of Steel Bar

9.4.1 The connection of steel bars can be divided into two types: colligation and
mechanical connection or welding. The types and quality of mechanical
connecting joint and welding joint should satisfy the stipulations in related existing
standards of the state.
It is advisable to set the joint of a reinforcing bar where the borne force is
relatively smaller. You had better set fewer joints on the same piece of steel bar.

9.4.2 Any longitudinal reinforcing steel bar of axial tension rod and a tension rod of
small eccentricity (such as tension bars of truss frame or arch) should not adopt a
colligation overlap joint.

When the diameter of the tension steel bar d > 28mm and the diameter of the
compression steel bar d > 32mm, it is advisable not to adopt the colligation
overlap joint.
9.4.3 It is advisable to stagger various colligation joints of adjacent reinforcing bars in
the same member.

The length of the segment that the colligation joint of steel bar connected is 1.3
times of the overlap length; any overlap joint the center point of which is within
the range of the length of the connected segment belongs to the same
connection area. The area percentage of longitudinal steel bar overlap joint in the
same connection area is the ratio of the section area of longitudinal reinforcing
steel that has an overlap joint in this segment and the section area of all
longitudinal reinforcing bar (as shown in Figure 9.4.3).
The area percentage of the overlap joint of tension steel bars in the same
connection segment should not be larger than 25% for beam, plate and wall
members; and not larger than 50% for any pillar member. When it is really
necessary for the works to increase the area percentage of the overlap joint of
the tension steel bar, its area percentage should not be larger than 50% for beam
member; this percentage for any plate, wall and pillar member can be widened
according to the actual situations.

116
 Figure 9.4.3 Colligation and Overlap Joint of Longitudinal Tension Steel Bar in
the same Connection Segment
Note: In the figure, there are two pieces of overlap steel bars in the same connection segment.
When the diameters of the steel bars are identical, the area percentage of the overlap joint of
the steel bar is 50%.

The overlap length of the colligation and overlap joint of longitudinal tension steel
bar should be computed according to the area percentage of the overlap joint of
steel bar in the same connection segment and by using the following formula:

ll = ζ la (9.4.3)

where,

ll-----------Overlap length of longitudinal tension steel bar;

la-----------Anchoring length of longitudinal tension steel bar, determined

according to Article 9.3.1 in this code;
ζ-----------Correction coefficient of overlap length of longitudinal tension
steel bar, taken according to Table 9.4.3.
In any circumstance, the overlap length of colligation and overlap joint of
longitudinal tension steel bar should not be less than 300mm.
Table 9.4.3 Correction Coefficient of Overlap Length of Longitudinal
Tension Steel Bar
Area percentage of overlap joint
≤25 50 100
of longitudinal steel bar (%)
ζ 1.2 1.4 1.6
9.4.4 When adopting the overlap connection, the compression overlap length of the
longitudinal steel bar in the member should not be less than 0.7 times of the
overlap length of longitudinal tension steel bar described in Article 9.4.3 in this
code and should not be less than 200mm in any case.

9.4.5 Within the range of the overlap length of longitudinal reinforcing bar, its diameter
should not be less than 0.25 times of the larger diameter of the overlapping steel
bar. When the steel bar is in compression, the interval between web
reinforcements should not be larger than 5 times of the lesser diameter of the
overlapping steel bar and should not be larger than 100mm; when the steel bar is
in compression, the web reinforcement interval should not be larger than 10 times
of the lesser diameter of the overlapping steel bar and should not be larger than
200mm. When the diameter of the compression steel bar d>25mm, two web
reinforcements should be set within the range 100mm away from the two ends of
the overlap joint.

117
9.4.6 It is advisable to stagger the mechanical connection joints of longitudinal
reinforcing bars. The length of the mechanical connection joint of the steel bar is
35d (d is the larger diameter of longitudinal reinforcing bar). Any mechanical
connection joint the center point of which is within the length range of this
connection segment belongs to the same connection segment.
When setting mechanical connection joint at the positio n where the force is
relatively larger, the area percentage of the connection joint of the longitudinal
tension steel bar in the same connection segment should not be larger than 50%.
The area percentage of the connection joint of the longitudinal compression steel
bar can be subject to no limit.

9.4.7 As for the mechanical connection joint in the structural member directly bearing
the power load, in addition to satisfying the antifatigue performance requirements
of the design, the area percentage of its longitudinal reinforcing bar connection
joint in the same connection segment should not be larger than 50%.

9.4.8 The thickness of the concrete protection layer of the connecting piece for the
mechanical connection joint should satisfy the minimum thickness requirement of
protection layer of longitudinal reinforcing bar. It is advisable that the transverse
net interval between connecting pieces should not be less than 25mm.

9.4.9 The welding joints of longitudinal reinforcing bars should be staggered from each
other. The length of the connection segment of welding joint of steel bar is 35d (d
is the larger diameter of longitudinal reinforcing bar) and is not less than 500mm.
All welding joints the center point of which is within the range of the length of this
segment belong to the same connection segment.
The area percentage of welding joints of longitudinal reinforcing bars in the same
connection segment should not be larger than 50% for a connection joint of
longitudinal tension steel bar. There can be no limit for the area percentage of a
connection joint of longitudinal compression steel bar.

Notes:

1. The above limitation is not necessarily suitable for any welding joint of longitudinal
reinforcing steel bar at the connection point of an assembled member;

2. As for any freely supported bending member bearing symmetric load, such as roof board,
floorslab, hardwood bar and so on, if the number of the longitudinal reinforcing bars
configured in the tension area is less than 3, a welding joint can be set one fourth span
away from each end.

9.4.10 The longitudinal tension steel bar of any member subject to fatigue check
computation should neither adopt colligation overlap joint nor adopt welding joint,
and it is forbidden to weld any auxiliary (except end anchorage).

118
 When the longitudinal tension steel bars of the reinforced concrete crane beam
directly bearing the crane load, the roof beam and bottom chord of roof truss
must adopt the welding connection joint, it should satisfy the following
stipulations:
1. It must adopt the flash resistance but welding and the spur and edge curl on
the connection joint must be removed.

2. The area percentage of the welding joint of longitudinal tension steel bar in
the same connection segment should not be larger than 25%. In this case,
the length of the connec tion segment of the welding joint should be taken to
be 45d (d is the larger diameter of the longitudinal reinforcing bar);
3. When performing the fatigue check computation, it should be, according to
the stipulation in Article 4.2.5 in this code, deducted ac cording to the limit
value of fatigue stress amplitude at the welding joint.

9.5 Minimum Reinforcement Rate of Longitudinal Reinforcing bars

9.5.1 The reinforcement rate of longitudinal reinforcing bar in the reinforced

concrete member should not be less than the va lue stipulation in Table
9.5.1.

Table 9.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement Rate of Longitudinal Reinforcing

Bars in Reinforced Concrete Structure (%)
Type of force Minimum reinforcement rate
Compression All longitudinal steel bar 0.6
member One -sided longitudinal steel bar 0.2
Tension steel bar on one side of bending member, Larger value among 0.2
eccentric tension member and axial tension member and 45ƒt/ƒ y
Notes:

1. When adopting HRB400 and RRB400 steel bars, 0.1 should be subtracted from the
minimum reinforcement rate of all longitudinal steel bars in a compression member
that is stipulated in the above table; when the concrete strength grade is over C60,
the value in the above table should increase by 0.1.

2. The compression in an eccentric tension member should be considered as per the

longitudinal steel bar on one side of the compression member;

3. The reinforcement rate of all longitudinal steel bars of a compression member and
the longitudinal steel bars on one side and the reinforcement rate of tension steel
bars on one side of the axial tension member and the tension member of small
eccentricity should be computed according to the section area (b' f-b)h' f that has
deducted the area of the compression wing edge from the full section area.

4. When steel bars are arran ged along the perimeter of the member section,
"one -sided longitudinal steel bar" refers to the longitudinal steel bars arranged
along one side in the two opposite sides at the stressed direction.

9.5.2 As for the concrete plate lying on the foundation, the minimum reinforcement rate
of tension steel bars in the plate can be appropriately reduced but should not be
less than 0.15%.

119
9.5.3 The reinforcement rate of longitudinal tension steel bars in a prestressed
concrete bending member should satisfy the following requi rement:

M u ≤ M cr (9.5.3)

where,
Mu---------Design value of bending bearing capacity of normal section of
the member. It is computed by using Formula (7.2.1-1), (7.2.2-2)
or (7.2.5) but the equal sign should be selected and M should
be replaced with M u.
Mcr--------Cracking bending moment of normal section of the member,
computed by using Formula (8.2.3-6) in this code.

9.6 Construction Stipulations for Prestressed Concrete Member

9.6.1 When it is difficult for pre-tensioned prestressed steel wires to implement the
single reinforcement method, steel wires of identical diameter can be adopted for
combined reinforcement. The equivalent diameter of the combined reinforcement
for double reinforcement combination should be taken to be 1.4 times of the
single reinforcement diameter and that for triple reinforcement combination
should be 1.7 times of the single reinforcement diameter.

The protection layer thickness, anchoring length, prestressing force transfer

length and normal -use limit state check computation of the combined
reinforcement should be considered as per the equivalent diameter.
Note: When adopting the combined reinforcement mode for prestressed steel strand and
heat-treated steel bars, some reliable construction measures should be taken.

9.6.2 The net interval between pre-tensioned prestressing tendon should be

determined according to the requirements for grouting concrete, applying
prestressing force, anchoring of steel bars and so on. The net interval between
prestressing tendons should not be less than 1.5 times of its nominal diameter or
equivalent diameter and should satisfy the following stipulation: not less than
15mm for heat-treated steel bars and steel wires; not less than 20mm for
three-folded steel strand; not less than 25mm for seven-folded steel strand.
9.6.3 As for pre-tensioned prestressed concrete steel bars, the following reinforcing
measures should be taken for the concrete around the end part of the
prestressing tendon:

1. For any singly-configured prestressing tendons, no less than 4 turns of spiral

reinforcements with length not less than 150mm are advisable to be set at
their ends. When there is reliable experience, steel dowels on abutment
packing plate can be used to replace the spiral reinforcements but the
number of steel dowels sho uld not be less than 4 and its length should not be
less than 120mm.

2. As for several dispersedly-set prestressing tendons, 3~5 pieces of steel bar

nets perpendicular to the prestressing tendon should be set within the range
10d (d is the nominal diameter of prestressing tendon) away from the end of
the member.

120
 3. As for any thin plate adopting prestressing steel wire for reinforcement, the
transverse steel bars should be densifed within the range 100mm away from
the plate end.

9.6.4 As for trough plate members, some transverse steel bars should be additionally
set within the range 100mm away from the plate end and along the plate surface
of the member and the number of added steel bars should not be less than 2.

As for prefabricated ribbed plates, some transverse ribs to strengthen its entirety
and transverse rigidity should be set. The reinforcing tendons of transverse end
ribs should be bent into the longitudinal ribs. When adopting the pre-tensioned
long-line method to produce prestressed concrete ribbed plates of transverse end
ribs, the design and manufacture should take effective measures to avoid the
transverse end ribs from producing cracks when relaxing the prestressing force.

9.6.5 At the position of the prestressed concrete roofing beam, crane beam and other
members and close to the abutment, where has relatively larger diagonal
principal tension stress, a part of prestressing tendons should be bent up.

9.6.6 As for any bending member all the prestressing tendons of which are bent up at
the tip of the member or any pre-t ensioned member adopting the straight bar
arrangement, when welding the tip of the member to the lower supporting
structure, the unfavorable influence that the shrinkage, creepage and
temperature variation of the concrete produces should be considered and it is
advisable to set enough non-prestressed longitudinal constructional
reinforcement at the position of the tip of the member where cracks may occur.

9.6.7 The patterns and quality of anchorage that the post-tensioned prestressing
tendons adopt should satisfy the stipulations in related existing standards of the
state.

9.6.8 The reserved pore passage of post-tensioned prestressed steel wire table and
steel strand beam should satisfy the following stipulations:

1. It is inappropriate for the horizontal net interval between pore passages for
prefabricated members to be less than 50mm; the net interval from the pore
passage to the edge of the member is inappropriate to be less than 30mm
and should not be less than half of the pore passage diameter.
2. In a frame beam, the net interval of the reserved pore passage at the vertical
direction should not be less than the outer diameter of the pore passage and
the net interval at the horizontal direction should not be less than 1.5 times of
the outer diameter of the pore passage; the thickness of the concrete
protection layer starting from the pore wall should not be less than 50mm for
the bottom of the beam or less than 40mm for the side of the beam.

3. The inner diameter of the reserved pore passage should be 10~15mm larger
than the outer diameter of the prestressing steel wire table or steel strand
beam and the outer diameter of the connector necessary to pass through the
pore passage;
4. Grout holes or vent hole should be set at the two ends of the member and in
the span, the hole interval should not be larger than 12m;

121
 5. As for any member that must be arched in advance when being
manufactured, the reserved pore passage should be arched simultaneously
together with the member.
9.6.9 In the anchoring area at the tip of a post-tensioned prestressed concrete member,
some indirect steel bars should be set according to the following stipulations:

1. The local compression bearing capacity should be computed according to the

stipulation in Section 7.8 in this code. Meanwhile, the indirect steel bars
should be set and its volumetric reinforcement rate should not be less than
0.5%.
2. Out of the area where local compression indirect steel bars are placed,
additional web reinforcements or webbigs should be symmetrically configured
in the additional reinforcement arrangement range in which the length l of the
member tip is not less than 3e (e is the distance from the application point of
joint force of the prestressing tendons above or below the gravity center line
of the section to the adjacent edge) but not larger than 1.2h (h is the height of
the tip section of the member), and its volumetric reinforcement rate should
not be less than 0.5% (Figure 9.6.9).

Figure 9.6.9 Range of Reinforcement for Avoiding Cracking along Pore

Passage
1 – Area to place local c ompression indirect steel bars; 2 – Additional Bar Arrangement
area; 3 End plane of member

9.6.10 It is appropriate to place steel bars at the tip of a post-tensioned prestressed

concrete member according to the following stipulations:
1. It is appropriate to bend up a part of prestressing tendons at where close to
the abutment and the bent -up prestressing tendons had better be
symmetrically placed along the tip of the member.

2. When the prestressing tendons at the tip of the member must be centralized
and placed in the lower part of the section or in the upper and lower parts,
some additional vertical welded mesh reinforcement, closed web
reinforcement or other types of constructional steel bars should be arranged
in the range 0.2h (h is the height of the tip section of the member) away from
the tip of the member;

3. The supplementary vertical steel bars had better adopt ribbed steel bars and
its section area should satisfy the following requirements:

122
 When e≤0.1h,

Np
Asv ≥ 0.3 (9.6.10-1)
fy

When 0.1h<e≤0.2h,

Np
Asv ≥ 0 .15 (9.6.10-2)
fy

When e>0.2h, constructional steel bars can be appropriately configured

according to the actual situations.
In the above formulas,
Np---------Joint force acting on the prestressing tendons above or below
the gravity center line of the tip section of the member. It can be
computed according to related stipulations in Chapter 6 of this
code but its value should be multiplied with a prestressing force
breakdown coefficient 1.2. In this case, only the prestressing
force los s before preforming the concrete is considered.
E-----------Distance from the application point of the joint force of the
prestressing tendon above or below the gravity center line of the
section to the closer edge of the section;

ƒ y----------Design value of tension strength of additional vertical steel bars,

taken according to Table 4.2.3-1 in this code.

When there area prestressing tendons

on both the upper or lower parts of the
tip section, the total section area of the
additional vertical steel bars should be
the superposed sum of the joint
prestressing forces computed
respectively for the upper and lower
parts. Figure 9.6.11 Constructional
Reinforcement at Recess of Tip
1 – Folded Constructional Steel Bar; 2 –
Vertical Constructional Steel bars

9.6.11 When the member has any local recess at the tip, appropriate folded
constructional bars (Figure 9.6.11) or other effective constructional bars should be
added.

9.6.12 When there is any special requirement for the tip of the post-tensioned
prestressed concrete member, it can be designed by using the finite element
analysis method.
9.6.13 In a post-tensioned prestressed concrete member, the curvature of any curved
prestressed steel wire cable and steel strand beam should not be less than 4m;
as for any member configured with folded steel bars, the curvature radius where
the prestressing tendon is folded can be appropriately reduced.

9.6.14 In the pre-tensioning area and pre -compression area of a post-tensioned

prestressed concrete member, some longitudinal non-prestressed constructional
steel bars should be placed; at the position where the prestressing tendons fold,
the web reinforcements should be densified or a mesh reinforcement should be

123
 placed on the inner side of the folding position.
9.6.15 Regarding the sizes of the tip of the member, you should consider the
arrangement of anchorage, sizes of tensioning devices and local compression
requirements. When necessary, they should be appropriately enlarged.

Under the prestressing tendon anchorage and at the supporting position of the
tensioning device, some embedded steel packing plates should be set and some
indirect steel bars and supplementary constructional steel bars should be set
according to the stipulations in Article 9.6.9 and 9.6.10 in this code.
Some reliable anti-rust measures should be taken for any outstretched metal
anchorage.

124
 10.Basic Stipulations on Structural Members

10.1 Plates

10.1.1 The thickness of a cast-in-situ reinforced concrete plate should not be less than
the values set forth in Table 10.1.1.

Table 10.1.1 Minimum Thickness (mm) of Cast -in-situ Reinforced Concrete

Category of plate Minimum thickness
Roof slab 60
One-way plate Floor plate of civil architecture 60
Floor plate of industrial architecture 70
Floor plate under driveway 80
Two-way plate 80
Rib interval ≤ 700mm 40
Dense-rib plat e
Rib interval > 700mm 50
Cantilever plate Jib length of plate ≤ 500mm 60
Jib length of plate > 500mm 80
Girderless floor plate 150

10.1.2 The concrete plate should be computed in the following principles:

1. Plates with two opposite edges as bearing edges should be computed as per
a one-way plate;

2. Plates with four edges as bearing edges should be computed according the
following stipulations:

1) When the length ratio of the longer and shorter edges is less than or
equal to 2.0, it should be computed as per a two-way plate;

2) When the length ratio of the longer and shorter edges is larger than 2.0
but less than 3.0, it is advisable to compute the plate as a two-way plate;
when it is computed as a one-way plate to bear the force along the
direction of shorter edge, enough number of constructional bars should
be arranged along the direction of the longer edge.

125
 3) When the length ratio of the longer and shorter edges is larger than or
equal to 3.0, it can be computed as a one-way plate to bear the force
along the direction of the shorter edge.

10.1.3 When a multi-span one-way plate or two-way plate adopts the separate-type
reinforcement arrangement, the positive-moment steel bar in the spans should be
stretched into the abutment wholly; the in-span extens ion length of the
negative -moment steel bars into the abutment should cover the negative -moment
diagram and satisfy the anchoring requirement of steel bars.

10.1.4 It is unsuitable for the interval of the reinforcing bars in the plate to be larger than
200m when the plate thickness h≤150mm or be larger than 1.5h when the plate
thickness H>150MM, and it should be not larger than 250mm.

10.1.5 The anchoring length that the longitudinal reinforcing bar in the lower part of the
simply-supported plate or continuous plate stretches into the abutment should not
be less than 5d (d is the diameter of the longitudinal reinforcing bar in the lower
part). When the temperature and shrinkage stress in the continuous plate is
relatively high, the anchoring length stretching into the abutment should be
appropriately increased.

10.1.6 When the reinforcing bars of the cast-in-situ plate are parallel to the girder, some
top constructional bars with interval not larger than 200mm and vertical to the
girder should be configured along the length direction of the girder, the diameter
of which should not be less than 8mm. Moreover, the total section are within the
unit length should not be less than one third of the section area of the reinforcing
bars within the unit width range of the plate. The length of this constructional bar
stretching into the plate for each side and starting from the girder edge should not
be less tan one fourth of the computational span l 0 of the plate (Figure 10.1.6).

Figure 10.1.6 Constructional Bars in Cast-in-situ Plat e and Vertical to Girder

1 – Principal Girder; 2 – Minor Girder; 3 – Reinforcing Bar of Plate; 4 – Top
Constructional Bar

10.1.7 As for the cast-in-situ concrete plate for one-piece casting together with the
supporting structure or built in the masonry bearing wall, some top constructional
bars should be placed along the supporting perimeter, the diameter should not be
less than 8mm, the interval should not be larger than 200mm and it should satisfy
the following stipulations:

126
 1. As for the single-way plate or two-way plate for one-piece casting together
with the concrete girder or concrete wall around the cast-in-situ roof, some
constructional bars vertical to the plate edge should be placed on the top of
the plate edge, the section area of which should not be less than one third of
the section area of longitudinal bar in the plate span and at the appropriate
direction; in a single-way plate, the length that this steel bar stretches into the
plate from the girder edge or wall edge should not less than one fifth of the
computational span of the plate at the bearing direction; that for a two-way
plate should not be less than one fourth of the computational span at the
direction of the shorter span of the plate; at the corners of the plate, such
steel bars should be placed along the two vertical directions or arranged
radially; When the pillar corner or the positive corner of the wall stretches into
the plat and the size is relatively large, some constructional bars should
additionally be placed along the pillar edge or the positive corner of the wall,
and the length of these constructional bars stretching into the plate should be
computed starting from the pillar edge or the wall edge. The above -mentioned
top constructional steel bars should be anchored into the girder, wall or pillar
as per tension steel bars.
2. As for the cast-in-situ concrete plate built in the masonry wall, the length that
the constructional bars vertical to the plate edge stretches into the plate,
starting from the wall edge, should not be less than one seventh of the
shorter-edge span of the plate; some two-way top constructional steel bars
should be placed in the plate corner part with both sides built in the wall, and
the length that these steel bars stretch into the plate, starting from the wall
edge, should not be less than one fourth of the shorter-edge span of the plate;
the section area of the top constructional bars to be placed along the bearing
direction of the plate should not be less than one third of the section area of
the reinforcing bars in the span at that direction; according to the practice
experience, the number of top constructional bars to be placed along the
direction not bearing the force can be suitably reduced.

10.1.8 When designing as per a single-way plate, in addition to setting reinforcing bars
along the direction under stress, some distributed steel bars also should be
arranged vertical to the direction under stress. The section area of distributed
steel bars in a unit length should not be less than 15% of the section area of the
reinforcing bars in a unit width and should not be less than the section are of the
plate at that direction; the interval of distributed steel bars should not be larger
than 250mm and the diameter should not be less than 6mm; when the
concentrated load is relatively large, the section area of distributed steel bars
should be appropriately increased and their interval should not be larger than
200mm.
Note: When there is some practical experience or reliable measures, the
limitation in this article may be not applicable to distributed steel bars in a
prefabricated one-way plate.

10.1.9 In the area of the cast-in-situ plate the temperature and shrinkage stress are
relatively high, the interval of steel bars should be taken to be 150~200mm and
some thermal contraction steel bars should be placed on the no-reinforcement
surface of the plate. The reinforcement rates for the longitudinal and transverse
directions on the top and bottom surfaces of the plate should not be lower than
0.1%.

The thermal contraction steel bars can be placed by using the original steel bars,
or by separately setting other mesh constructional reinforcement, and they should
be lap-jointed with the original steel bars upon the requirements for tension steel

127
 bars or anchored with the surrounding members.
10.1.10 When the die-cutting resisting web reinforcement or bent -up steel bars are to
be placed in the concrete plate, the following constructional requirements
should be satisfied:

1. The thickness of the plate should not be less than 150mm;

2. The web reinforcements required in the computation and appropriate
bearing bars should be set in the range the intersection angle between
0
which and the die-cutting failure cone is 45 . Meanwhile, the distribution
length outwards from the acting surface of the concentrated load or the
edge of the pillar section should not be less than 1.5h 0 (Figure 10.1.10a);
the steel bars should be enclosed, the diameter should not be less than
6mm and the interval should not be larger than h 0/3;

Figure 10.1.10 Arrangement of Die-c utting Resisting Steel Bars in Plate

(a) Use web reinforcement as die-cutting resisting steel bars; (b) Use
bent -up steel bars as die -cutting resisting steel bars
Note: the size in this figure is mm.

1 – Die-cutting failure section; 2 – Bearing bar; 3 – Web reinforcement; 4

– Bent-up steel bar

3. The bent -up angle of the bent-up steel bars required according to the
0
computation can be selected from the range of 30~40 according to the
thickness of the plate; the declining segment of the bent -up steel bars
should intersect the die-cutting failure cone (Figure 10.1.10b) and the
intersecting point should be within the range (1/2~2/3)h away from the
acting surface of the concentrated load or the pillar section edge. The
diameter of the bent-up steel bar should not be less than 12mm and at
each direction there should be no less than 3 pieces of bent -up steel
bars.

128
10.1.11 As for the raft foundation plate horizontally lying on the foundation, when the
thickness of the plate h>2m, in addition to placing longitudinal and transverse
steel bars along the top and bottom surfaces of the plate, some constructional
bar nets should be placed along the thickness direction of the plate, which
should have an interval not exceeding 1m and be parallel to the plate surface,
its diameter should not be less than 12mm and its longitudinal interval should
not be larger than 200mm.

10.1.12 When the plate adopts welding steel bar net for reinforcement arrangement, it
should satisfy the stipulations in related existing standards of the state.

10.2 Girders

10.2.1 The diameter of the longitudinal reinforcing steel bar in the reinforced concrete
girder should not be less than 10mm when the girder height h≥300mm and
should not be less than 8mm when h<300mm. The net interval of the longitudinal
steel bar in the top of the girder at the horizontal direction (minimum distance
between outer edges of the steel bar) should not be less than 30mm and 1.5d (d
is the maximum diameter of the steel bar); the horizontal net distance of the
bottom
longitudinal steel bar should not be
less than 25mm and d. When more
than two layers of longitudinal steel
bars are configured in the bottom
part of the girder, the horizontal
midrange of the steel bars above two
layers should be once larger than
that of the lower two layers. The net
Figure 10.2.2 Anchorage of
interval between various layers of
Longitudinal Reinforcing Bar Stretching
steel bars should not be less than
into Simply-supported Abutment of Girder
25mm and d.
The number of longitudinal reinforcing bars stretching into the abutment of the
girder should not be less than 2 when the girder width b≥100mm and not be less
than 1 when girder width d<100mm.

10.2.2 As for the bottom longitudinal reinforcing bars at the ends of a reinforced concrete
simply-supporting girder and continuous girder, the anchoring length l as (as
shown in Figure 10.2.2) that such steel bars stretch into the abutment of the
girder should satisfy the following stipulations:

1. When V≤0.7ƒtbh0,
las= 5d

2. When V>0.7ƒt bh0

For ribbed steel bars, las= 12d

For plain steel bars, las= 15d

d in the above expressions is the diameter of the longitudinal reinforcing bars.

129
 If the anchoring length of the longitudinal reinforcing bars stretching in the
abutment of the girder does not satisfy the above requirements, such effective
anchoring measures as adding welding anchoring steel plates on the steel bars
or welding the tip of the steel bar onto the embedded part at the end of the girder
should be taken.
As for a reinforced concrete independent girder supported on the masonry
structure, at least two web reinforcements should be placed within the range of
the anchoring length las of the longitudinal reinforcing bars, the diameter of which
should not be less than 0.25 times of the maximum diameter of the longitudinal
reinforcing bar and the interval of which should not be larger than 10 times of the
minimum diameter of the longitudinal reinforcing bar; when a mechanical
anchoring measure is taken, the interval between web reinforcement should not
be larger than 5 times of the minimum diameter of the longitudinal reinforcing bar.

Note: As for the simply-supported end of any simply-supported girder and

continuous girder the concrete strength grade of which is C25 or lower, when
there is a concentrated load within the range 1.5h away from the abutment and
V>0.7ƒtbh0, auxiliary anchoring measures should be taken for the ribbed bars or
the anchoring length should be l as ≥15d.

10.2.3 Any longitudinal tension steel bars of negative bending moment on the section of
the abutment of a reinforced concrete girder should not be cut in the tension area.
when it must be cut, it should satisfy the following stipulations:
1. When V≤0.7ƒt bh 0, it should be cut no less than 20d away from the useless
section determined according to the computation of normal section bending
bearing capacity. Moreover, the length stretched out from the section that the
said steel bar takes full use of should not be less than 1.2l a;

2. when V>.7ƒ tbh 0, the cutting position should be no less than ho or 20d away
from the useless section determined according to the computation of normal
section bending bearing capacity; moreover, the length stretched out from the
section that the said steel bar takes full use of should not be less than
1.2l a+h 0.
3. If the cutting point to be determined according to the above stipulations is still
in the tension area of negative bending moment, the cutting position should
be extended to where is not less than 1.3h0 or 20d away from the useless
section determined according to the computation of normal section bending
bearing capacity; moreover, the length stretched out from the section that the
said steel bar takes full use of should not be less than 1.2l a+1.7h 0.

10.2.4 In the reinforced concrete cantilever girder, there should be at least two pieces of
top steel bars stretching n i to the outer end of the cantilever girder and they
should be downwards bent for no less than 12d; other steel bars should not be
cut at the top of the girder but should be downwards bent at the bent -up point
according to the stipulation in Article 10.2.8 in this code and be anchored on the
lower edge of the girder according to the stipulation in Article 10.2.7 in this code.

10.2.5 The reinforcement rate ρ tl of longitudinal torsion steel bars in the girder should
satisfy the following stipulations:

130
 T ft
ρ tl ≥ 0.6 (10.2.5)
Vb f y
When T/(Vb)>2.0, T/(Vb)=2.0 is taken.

where,

ρ tl Reinforcement rate of longitudinal torsion steel bars: ρ tl=A stl/bh;

b Width of section in shear, taken according to the stipulation in

Article 7.6.1 in this code;
A stl Total section area of longitudinal torsion steel bars arranged along
the perimeter of the section.
The interval of longitudinal torsion steel bars placed along the perimeter of the
section should not be larger than 200mm and the length of the shorter edge of
the section of the girder; in addition that some longitudinal steel bars should be
placed at four corners of the section of the girder, other longitudinal torsion steel
bars should be symmetrically placed along the perimeter of the section. The
longitudinal torsion steel bar should be anchored into the abutment like the
tension steel bar.

In a bending-shear-torsion member, the section area of the longitudinal

reinforcing bars configured in the bending tension edge of the section should not
be less than the sum of the section area of steel bars to be computed on the
basis of the minimum reinforcement ratio stipulated in Article 9.5.1 in this code for
the tension steel bar of a bending member and the section area of steel bar to be
computed and distributed on the bending tension edge according to the
reinforcement ratio of longitudinal torsion steel bars in this article.
As for a member of box -type section, b mentioned in this article should be
replaced with bh.

10.2.6 When the end of the girder is partially constrained but be computed as a
simply-supported structure, some longitudinal constructional bars should be
placed in the top part of the abutment area, its section area should not be less
than one fourth of the section area that the longitudinal reinforcing bars in the
middle and lower parts of the girder span according to the computation, and the
number of required steel bars should not be less than 2. The length that the said
longitudinal constructional bars stretch out from the abutment edge into the span
should not be less than 0.2l0. l0 hereof mentioned is the computational span of the
said span.

10.2.7 In a concrete girder, it is advisable to use web reinforcement as the steel bars to
bear the shearing force.
When adopting a bent -up steel bar, its bent-up angle had better be taken to be
45 0 or 600. Outside the bending end point of the bent -up steel bar, an anchoring
length parallel to the axial direction of the girder should be reserved, and this
length should not be less than 20d in the tension area and not less than 10d in
the compression area. d hereof mentioned is the diameter of the bent -up steel
bar; the corner steel bar among the bottom steel bars of the girder should not be
bent up and the corner steel bars among the top steel bars should not be bent
down.

10.2.8 In the tension area of a concrete girder, the bent -up point of the bent-up steel bar
can be set in front of the section that does not need the said steel bar according
to the computation of bending bearing capacity of normal section, but the

131
 intersecting point of the bent -up steel bar and the centerline of the girder should
be located out of the section that does not need the said steel bar (as shown in
Figure 10.2.8); meanwhile, the distance from the bent -up point to the section that
takes full use of the section according to the computation should not be less than
h0/2.
When the computation results require to set bent -up steel bars, the distance from
the starting bending point of the frontal row (relative to abutment) to the end
bending point of the rear row should not be larger than the maximum web
reinforcement interval listed in the "V>0.7ƒt bh0+0.05N p0" column in Table 10.2.10
in this code.

The bent -up steel bar had better not adopt floating steel bar.

Figure 10.2.8 Relationship between Bent-up point of Bent -up Steel bar and
Bending Moment Diagram
1 – Bent -up section in tension area; 2 – Section not needing steel bar "b"
according to computation; 3 – Bending bearing capacity diagram of normal
section; 4 – Section taking full use of strength of steel bar "a" or "b" according to
computation; 5 – Section not needing steel bar "a" according to computation; 6 –
Centerline of girder

10.2.9 As for any girder that the computation results determine not needing web
reinforcement, web reinforcement should be placed along the whole length of the
girder when the section height h>300mm; when the section height
h=150~300mm, web reinforcement can be placed only within the range one
fourth away from each end of the member; however, when there is concentrated
load within the range one half away from the middle part of the member, web
reinforcement should be placed along the whole length of the girder; when the
section height h<150mm, web reinforcement is unnecessary to be placed.

132
10.2.10The web reinforcement interval in the girder should satisfy the following
stipulations:
1. The maximum interval of web reinforcement in the girder should satisfy the
stipulation in Table 10.2.10. when V>0.7ƒtbh0+0.05N p0, the reinforcement rate
of web reinforcement ρ sv (ρ sv=Asv/(bs)) should not be less than 0.24ƒ t/ƒyv;

2. When the longitudinal compression steel bars that the computation requires
are placed in the girder, the web reinforcement should be enclosed; in this
case, the web reinforcement interval should not be larger than 15d (d is the
minimum diameter of the longitudinal compression steel bar) and meanwhile
should not be larger than 400mm; when the number of longitudinal
compression steel bars in one layer is more than 5 and their diameter is
larger than 18mm, the web reinforcement interval should not be larger than
10d; when the girder width is larger than 400mm and the number of
longitudinal compression steel bars in one layer is more than 3, or when the
girder width is not larger than 400mm but the number of longitudinal
compression steel bars in one lay er is more than 4, some composite web
reinforcements should be set.
3. The interval of web reinforcements in the overlap length range of the
longitudinal steel bar in the girder should satisfy the stipulation in Article 9.4.5
in this code.

Table 10.2.10 Maximum Interval (mm) of Web Reinforcement in Girder

Girder height h V>0.7ƒ tbh 0+0.05N p0 V≤0.7ƒtbh0+0.05N p0
150<h≤300 150 200
300<h≤500 200 300
500<h≤800 250 350
H<800 300 400

10.2.11The web reinforcement diameter of any girder of section height h>800mm should
not be less than 8mm; such diameter for a girder of section height h≤800mm
should not be less than 6mm. When the longitudinal compression steel bars that
the computation requires are placed in the girder, the web reinforcement diameter
should not be less than 0.25 times of the maximum diameter of the longitudinal
compression steel bar.

10.2.12In a bending-shear-torsion member, the reinforcement ratio of web reinforcement

ρ sv (ρ sv=Asv/(bs)) should not be less than 0.28ƒ t/ ƒyv. The web reinforcement
interval should satisfy the stipulation described in Table 10.2.10 in this code, in
which the web reinforcement required for bearing the torsion force should be
enclosed when placing and should be arranged along the perimeter of the section;
when some composite web reinforcem ent is adopted, the web reinforcement in
the inside of the section should not be counted into the web reinforcement that
the torsion area requires; 1350 bending hook should made at the end of the web
reinforcement required for bearing torsion and the lengt h of the straight segment
of the end head of the hook should not be less than 15d (d is the diameter of the
web reinforcement).

133
 In a hyperstatic structure, the interval of web reinforcement that is configured
while considering the coordinate re-torsion should not be larger than 0.75b (b is
to be taken according to the stipulation in Article 7.6.1 in this code).
As for any member of box-type section, b mentioned in this article should be
replaced with bh.

10.2.13All the concentrated load in the range of the section bottom or the girder section
height should be borne by additional transverse steel bars (web reinforcement,
suspending steel bars). The additional transverse steel bars had better adopt web
reinforcement. Web reinforcement should be placed in the range the length of
which is equal to s (s=2h 1+3b) (as shown in Figure 10.2.13). When suspending
steel bars are adopted, its bent-up segment should be stretched onto the upper
edge of the girder and the length of the horizontal segment at the end should not
be less than the value stipulated in Article 10.2.7 in this code.

Figure 10.2.13 Arrangement of Additional Transverse Steel Bars when

Concentrated Load Acts in Height Range of Girder Section

(a) Additional web reinforcement; (b) Additional suspending reinforcement

Note: the unit in the diagram is mm.

1 – Position to transfer concentrated load; 2 – Additional web reinforcement; 3 –
Additional suspending steel bar

F
Asv ≥ (10.2.13)
f yv sin a

where,

A sv Total section area of additional transverse steel bars required to

bearing the concentrated load; when adopting additional
suspending steel bars. Asv should be the sum of the section areas
of the left and right bent -up segments;
F Design value of concentrated load acting in the lower part of the
girder or in the height range of the section of the girder.

134
 α Inclination between additional transverse steel bar and the axis of
the girder.

10.2.14When the inflexed corner of the member is in the tension area, additional web
reinforcement should be placed (as shown in 10.2.14). Such web reinforcement
should be able to bear the joint force of the longitudinal tension steel bars not
anchored in the compression area and in any case, its bearing capacity should
not be less than 35% of the joint force of all longitudinal steel bars. The joint force
of longitudinal tension steel bars borne by the web reinforcement can be
computed by using the following formula:

Figure 10.2.14 Reinforcement Placed at Inflexed Corner of Reinforced Concrete

Girder

1. Joint force of longitudinal tension steel bars not anchored in the compression
area is:
α
N s1 = 2 f y As1 cos (10.2.14-1)
2
2. 35% of the joint force of all longitudinal tension steel bars is as follows:
α
N s 2 = 0 .7 f y As 2 cos (10.2.14-1)
2
where,

As Section area of all longitudinal tension steel bars;

A sl Section area of longitudinal tension steel bars not anchored in the
compression area;

α Inflexed angle of member.

The web reinforcement to be computed according to the above conditions should
be placed in the range of the length s (s=htan(3α/8).

10.2.15The diameter of the erection bar in the girder should not be less than 8mm when
the span of the girder is less than 4m, not less than 100mm when the girder span
is 4~6mm, and not less than 12mm when the girder span is larger than 6m.

135
10.2.16When the web plate height of the girder hw≥450mm, some longitudinal
constructional bars should be placed on both sides of the girder and along the
height. The section area of the longitudinal constructional bar in each side
(excluding reinforcing bar and erection bar in the upper and lower parts of the
girder) should not be less than 0.1% of the web plate section area bh w and their
interval should not be larger than 200mm. The web plate height hw hereof shall be
taken according to the stipulation in Article 7.5.1 in this code.
10.2.17 As for any reinforced concrete thin-webbed girder or the reinforced concrete
girder needing fatigue check computation, longitudinal constructional steel bars
with diameter of 8~14mm and interval of 100~150mm should be confi gured along
the two sides of the web plate that is 1/2 of girder high, dense in the upper part
and loose in the lower part. In the web plate 1/2 of the girder and in the upper part,
the longitudinal constructional steel bars can be placed according to the
stipulation in Article 10.2.16 in this code.

10.3 Pillars

10.3.1 The longitudinal reinforcing bars in a pillar should satisfy the following
stipulations:

1. The diameter of the longitudinal reinforcing bar should not be less than 12mm
and the reinforcement rate of all longitudinal bars should not be larger than
5%; longitudinal steel bars in a circular pillar should be symmetrically placed
along the perimeter and the number of steel bars had better not be less than
8 and should not less than 6.
2. When the section height of the eccentric compression pillar h≥600mm, some
longitudinal constructional bars with diameter being 10~16mm should be
placed on the side surface of the pillar and some web reinforcements or tie
bars should be placed accordingly.

3. The net interval of longitudinal reinforcing bars in a pillar should not be less
than 50mm; the minimum net interval of longitudinal steel bars for a
prefabricated pillar horizontally placed can be taken according to the
girder-related stipulation in Article 10.2.1 in this code;
4. In an eccentric compression pillar, the midrange of the longitudinal reinforcing
bar on the side surface vertical to the acting plane of bending moment and
the longitudinal reinforcing bars in each edges of the axial compression pillar
should not be larger than 300mm.

10.3.2 Web reinforcement in a pillar should satisfy the following stipulations:

1. The surrounding web reinforcements in a pillar and other compression

members should be enclosed; the overlap length of the web reinforcement in
a circular pillar should not be less than the anchoring length stipulated in
0
Article 9.3.1 in this code and a 135 hook should be made at their ends, while
the length of the straight segment of the hook end should not be less than 5
times of the diameter of the web reinforcement.
2. The interval of web reinforcement should not be larger than 400mm and the
size of the shorter edge of the member section, and should not be larger than
15d (d is the minimum diameter of the longitudinal reinforcing bars);

136
 3. The diameter of the web reinforcement should not be less than d/4 and not
less than 6mm (d is the maximum diameter of longitudinal steel bar);
4. When the reinforcement rate of all longitudinal reinforcing bars in a pillar is
larger than 3%, the diameter of the web reinforcement should not be less
than 8mm and the interval should not be larger than 10 times of the minimum
diameter of the longitudinal reinforcing bar and should not larger than 200mm;
a 1350 hook should be at the end of each web reinforcement and the length
of the straight segment of the hook should not be less than 10 times of the
diameter of the web reinforcement; the web reinforcement also can be of an
enclosed ring type by welding;

5. When the size of the shorter edge of the section of a pillar is larger than
400mm and the number of longitudinal steel bars in each edge is more than 3,
or when the size of the shorter edge of the pillar section is not larger than
400mm but the number of longitudinal steel bars in each edge is more than 4,
some composite web reinforcements should be placed;
6. The interval of web reinforcements within the range of the overlap length of
longitudinal reinforcing bars in the pillar should satisfy the stipulation in Article
9.4.5 in this code.

10.3.3 In the pillar placed with spiral or welding-ring indirect steel bars, if the
computation considers the action of indirect steel bars, the interval of indirect
steel bars should not be larger than 80mm and dcor /5 (d cor is the diameter of the
core section to be determined as per the inner surface of the indirect steel bar)
and had better not less than 40mm; the diameter of the indirect steel bar should
satisfy the stipulation in Article 10.3.2 in this code.

10.3.4 The wing edge thickness of a pillar of I-shaped section had better not less than
120mm and the thickness of the web pl ate had better not be less than 100mm.
when pore is opened on the web plate, it had better place 2-3 pieces of
reinforcing bars with diameter not less than 8mm for each edge surrounding the
hole and the section area of the reinforcing bar at each direction had better not
less than the section area of the cut steel bar at that direction.

10.3.5 As for any pillar of I-shaped section and with pored web plate, when the
transverse size of the pore is less than one half of the section height of the pillar
and the vertical size of the pore is less than the net interval between two adjacent
pores, the rigidity of the pillar can be computed as per the I-shaped section pillar
with solid web, but when computing the bearing capacity, the weakened part of
the pore should be deducted. When the pore size exceeds the above stipulations,
the rigidity and bearing capacity of the pillar should be computed as per a
double-limb pillar.

10.4 Nodes of Girders and Pillars

10.4.1 When adopting the straight -line anchoring mode, the anchoring length that the
longitudinal steel bar stretches into the end node of the middle layer in the upper
part of the frame girder should not be les than l a and the length stretching through
the centerline of the pillar had better not be less than 5d (d is the diameter of the
upper longitudinal steel bar of the girder). When the section size of the pillar is in
sufficient, the upper longitudinal steel bars in the girder should stretch to the
opposite edge of the node and bent downwards, its horizontal projection length
including the bending arc segment should not be less than 0.4l a, and its vertical

137
 projection length including the bending arc segment should be taken to be 0.5l a
(as shown in Figure 10.4.1). la is the anchoring length of tension steel bar
stipulated in Articl e 9.3.1 in this code.

Figure 10.4.1 Anchoring of Top Longitudinal Steel Bars of Girder in End Node of
Middle Layer of Frame

The anchoring requirements for the end node of lower longitudinal steel bars in
the frame girder are the same as those for lower longitudinal steel bars at the
middle nodes stipulated in Article 10.4.2 in this code.

10.4.2 The upper longitudinal steel bars of a frame girder or a continuous girder should
go through the middle node or the middle abutment (as shown in Figure 10.4.2).
The position of the section of the said steel bar stretching from the node or
abutment edge into the span should comply with the stipulation in Article 10.2.3 in
this code.
The anchoring of lower longitudinal steel bars of a frame girder or a continuous
girder at the middle node or middle abutment should satisfy the following
requirements:

1. When the computation does not use the strength of the said steel bar, its
anchoring length stretching into the node or abutment should comply with the
stipulation for V>0. 1ƒt bh0 in Article 10.2.2 in this code;
2. When the computation takes full use of the tension strength of the steel bar,
the lower longitudinal steel bars should be anchored in the node or abutment.
In this case, the straight anchoring method can be adopted (as shown in
Figure 10.4.2a), the anchoring length of the steel bar should not be less than
the anchoring length l a that is determined for a steel bar in Article 9.3.1 in this
0
code; the lower longitudinal steel bar can be bent 90 for anchoring (as
shown in Figure 10.2.4b). Its vertical segment should be bent upwards, and
the horizontal projection length and the vertical projection length of the
anchoring end should not be less than the stipulated value in Article 10.4.1 in
0
this code for 90 bending anchoring of upper steel bar of the girder at the end
node; the lower longitudinal steel bar also can stretch through the node or
abutment and an overlap joint can be set where the bending moment in the
girder is relatively less (Figure 10.4.2c).

138
 3. When the computat ion takes full use the compression strength of the steel bar,
the lower longitudinal steel bar should be anchored in the middle node or
middle abutment as per a compression steel bar. In this case, its straight
anchoring length should not be less than 0.7l a; the lower longitudinal steel
bars also can be stretched through the node or abutment and an overlap joint
should be set where the bending moment in the girder is relatively less.

Figure 10.4.2 Anchoring and Overlap Joint of Lower Longitudinal Steel Bars of
Girder in Middle Node or Middle Abutment

(a) Straight -line Anchoring in Node; (b) Bending Anchoring in Node; (c) Overlap
Joint out of Node or Abutment

10.4.3 Longitudinal steel bars of a frame pillar should pass through the middle node and
end node of the middle layer and the joint of longitudinal steel bar in the pillar
should be set out of the node area.
The longitudinal steel bars of the pillar at the middle node in the top layer and the
longitudinal steel bars of the inner side pillar at the end node in the top layer can
be anchored into the node of the top layer by using the straight -line anchoring
method, their anchoring length starting from the beam bottom elevation should
not be less than the anchoring length l a stipulated in Article 9.3.1 in this code and
the longitudinal steel bars in the pillar must be stretched to the pillar top. When
the girder section height at the top node is insufficient, the longitudinal steel bar of
the pillar should be stretched to the top of the pillar and horizontally bent inward
the node. When the tension strength of the longitudinal steel bars of the pillar is
taken full use of, the vertical projection length of the anchoring segment of
longitudinal steel bar in the pillar before bending should not be less than 0.5la
and the horizontal projection length after bending had better not be less than 12d.
when in the top of the pillar there are some cast-in-situ plates and the plate
thickness is not less than 80mm and the concrete strength grade is not lower
than C20, the longitudinal steel bars of the pillar also can be bent outwards and
the horizontal projection length after bending had better not be less than 12d. d
hereof is the diameter of the longitudinal steel bar.

139
10.4.4 At the end node in the top layer of the frame, the appropriate part of the
longitudinal steel bar in the outer side of the pillar can be bent into the girder so
as to be used as upper longitudinal steel bars of the girder, or the upper
longitudinal steel bars in the girder can be lapped with the longitudinal steel bars
in the outer side of the pillar at the end node of its top layer and its nearby
position. It can adopt the following lap joints:
1. The lap joint can be arranged along the outer side of the top end node and
the top of the girder end (as shown in Figure 10.4.4a) and the lapping length
should not be less than 1.5l a, in which the section area of the longitudinal
steel bar of the outer-side pillar stretching into the girder had better be not
less than 65% of all the section are of the longitudinal steel bars in the
outer-side pillar; the longitudinal steel bars of the outer-side pillar out of the
girder width range had better be stretched to the inner side of the pillar along
the top of the node. When the longitudinal steel bars in the pillar are in the
first layer at the pillar top and it has be stretched to the inner side of the pillar,
it should be cut after it is downwards bent for no less than 8d; when the
longitudinal steel bars in the pillar goes to the second layer, it can not be bent
downwards. When there are some cast-in-situ plates and the plate thickness
is not less than 80mm and the strength grade of the concrete is not lower
than C20, the longitudinal steel bars in the out-side pillar out of the girder
width range can be stretched into the cast-in-situ plate, and its length is
identical to that of the longitudinal steel bar of the pillar stretched into the
girder. When the reinforcement rate of longitudinal steel bars in the outer-side
pillar is larger than 1.2%, the longitudinal steel bars in the pillar that are
stretched into the girder should satisfy the above -described stipulations and
had better be divided into two batches for cutting, and the distance between
two cutting points had better be not less than 20d. The longitudinal steel bars
in the top of the girder should be stretched to the outer side of the node and
bent downwards to the height of the lower edge of the girder and then cut. d
hereof is the diameter of the longitudinal steel bar in the outer side of the
pillar.

2. The lap joint also can be arranged along the outer side of the top of the pillar
(as shown in Figure 10.4.4b). In this case, the lapping length of the vertical
segment should not be less than 1.7la. When the reinforcement rate of the
longitudinal steel bars in the top part of the girder is larger than 1.2%, the
upper longitudinal steel bars in the girder that are bent into the outer side of
the pillar should satisfy the above-stipulated lapping length and they should
be divided into two batches for cutting. The distance between two cutting
points had better not be less than 20d (d is the diameter of the upper
longitudinal steel bar in the girder). The longitudinal steel bar in the outer side
of the pillar should be horizontally bent downward the inside of the node aft er
it is stretched to the top of the pillar, and the horizontal projection length of the
bending segment had better not be less than 12d (d hereof is the diameter of
the longitudinal steel bar in the outer side of the pillar).
10.4.5 The section are As of the upper longitudinal steel bar in the girder at the end node
of the top layer of the frame should satisfy the following stipulations:

0.35 β c f c bb h0
As ≤ (10.4.5)
fy

where,
bb Web width of girder;

h0 Effective height of section of girder.

140
 Figure 10.4.4 Lapping of Upper Longitudinal Steel Bars of Girder and
Longitudinal Steel Bars in Outer Side of Pillar at End Node of Top Layer
(a) Bending Lap Joint in Outer Side of Node and Top of Girder End; (b) Straight- line Lap Joint in
Outer Side of Pillar Top

The inner diameter of bending arch of upper longitudinal steel bar in girder and
longitudinal steel bar in outer side of pillar at the corner part of the node had
better not be less than 6d when the steel bar diameter d≤6d and had better not
be less than 8d when the steel bar diameter d>25mm.

10.4.6 In the frame node, horizontal web reinforcements should be set, and the web
reinforcement should satisfy the construction stipulations set forth in Article 10.3.2
in this code for web reinforcement in a pillar, but the interval had better not be
larger than 250mm. As for any middle node with four sides connected to girders,
can rectangle web reinforcements be set along the perimeter in the node only.
When in the end node of the top layer there are the lap joints of upper longitudinal
steel bars in the girder and longitudinal steel bars in the outer side of the pillar,
the horizontal web reinforcements in the node should satisfy the stipulation in
Article 9.4.5 in this code.

10.5 Wall

10.5.1 When the longer edge (length) of the s ection of the member is larger than 4 times
of its shorter edge (thickness), it had better be designed upon the requirements
for a wall.

The concrete strength grade of the wall had better not be lower than C20.

10.5.2 The thickness of the reinforced concrete shearwall should not be less than
140mm; as for a shearwall structure, the thickness of the wall had better not be
less than 1/25 of the floor height; as for a frame-shearwall structure, the wall
thickness had better not be less than 1/20 of the floor height.

141
 When adopting prefabricated floors, the length of the prefabricated floor to be
placed on the wall and the requirement for steel bars to vertically go through the
wall should be considered for the thickness of the wall.

10.5.3 Under the action of the horizontal load parallel to the wall surface and the vertical
load, the bearing capacity of the normal section of the reinforced concrete
shearwall had better be computed on the basis of the internal force obtained from
the structure analysis and according to related stipulations in Sections 7.3 and
7.4 in this code and respectively as per eccentric compression or eccentric
tension. Additionally, its shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section should be
computed according to the stipulations in Articles 10.5.4~10. 5.6 in this code. As
for the acting position of concentrated load, the local compression bearing
capacity should be performed according to Section 7.8 in this code.
In the computation of bearing capacity, the computational width of the wing edge
of the shearwall can be taken to be the minimum one among the following values:
interval of shearwall, width of wing wall between doors, windows and holes, sum
of shearwall thickness plus 6 times of wing wall thickness on both side, and 1/10
of total height of shearwall limb.

10.5.4 The shearing section of reinforced concrete shearwall should satisfy the following
condition:

V ≤ 0.25 β c f cbh (10.5.4)

where,
V Design value of shearing force;

βc Strength influence coefficient of concrete, determined according to

Article 7.5.1 in this code;

b Width of rectangle section or web width of T-shaped of I-shaped

section (thickness of wall);

h Section height (length of wall).

10.5.5 The shearing bearing capacity of the diagonal section of the reinforced concrete
shearwall when it is eccentrically under compression should satisfy the following
stipulation:

1 A Ah
V≤ (0.5 f t bh0 + 0.13 N w ) + f yv s h0 (10.5.5)
λ − 0 .5 A sv

where,

N Design value of axial compression force as consistent with shear

design value V. it is taken to be N=0.2ƒ cbh when N>0.2ƒc bh;
A Section area of shearwall, in which the effective area of the wing
edge can be determined according to the computational width of
wing edge stipulated in Article 10.5.3 in this code;

142
 Aw Section area of shearwall web plate of T-shaped or I-shaped
section, Aw=A for a shearwall of rectangle section;
Ash Total section area of steel bars horizontally distributed in the same
horizontal section;

sv Vertical interval of horizontally-distributed steel bars.

λ Shear -span ratio of computational section: λ=M/(Vh0); when λ<1. 5,
λ=1.5 is taken; when λ>2.2, λ=2.2 is taken; M hereof is the design
value of the bending moment as consistent with the shear design
value V; when the distance between the computational section
and the wall bottom is less than h0/2, λ should be computed on
basis of the bending moment and shearing force at where is h0/2
away from the wall bottom.
When the shear design value V is not larger than the first right term in Formula
(10.5.5), the horizontal steel bars should be placed upon the construction
requirements set forth in Articles 10.5.10~10.5.12 in this code.

10.5.6 The shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section of reinforced concrete

shearwall when it is under eccentric tension should satisfy the following
stipulations:

1 A Ah
V≤ (0 .5 f t bh0 − 0.13 N w ) + f yv s h 0 (10.5.6)
λ − 0 .5 A sv

When the computed value of the right part of the above expression is less than
ƒ yv=(A sh/s v)h0, it is taken to be ƒ yv=(A sh/s v)h0.
In this expression,

N Design value of axial tension as consistent with the shear design

value V;
λ Shear-span ratio of computational section, taken according to
Article 10.5.5 in this code.

10.5.7 As for a continuous girder at the hole mouth of the reinforced concrete shearwall,
the bending bearing capacity of its normal section can be computed according to
Section 7.2 in this code.
The shearing section of the continuous girder at the hole mouth of a shearwall
should satisfy the stipulation in Article 7.5.1 in this code. When the span-height
ratio ln/h>2.5, the shearing bearing capacity of its diagonal section had better
satisfy the follow ing stipulation:

Asv
V ≤ 0.7 f t bh0 + f yv h0 (10.5.7)
s
Note: As for any continuous girder at the hole mouth whose span-height ratio
ln/h≤2.5, the control conditions of its shearing section, computation method for
shearing bearing capacity of its diagonal section and the reinforcement
construction requirements can be determined according to special stipulations.
10.5.8 At the two ends of the shearwall limbs, some vertical reinforcing bars should be
configured and they should be, together with the vertically distributed steel bars in

143
 the wall, used for the computation of bending bearing capacity of normal section.
At each end, there had better not be less than 4 vertical reinforcing steel bars
with diameter being 12mm or 2 steel bars with diameter being 16mm; along the
direction of the said vertical steel bar, there should be configured with tie bars
with diameter not less than 6mm and interval being 250mm.
In addition to meeting the normal-section bending bearing capacity requirement
for a continuous girder at hole mout h, the number of the horizontal longitudinal
steel bars on the upper and lower sides of the shearwall hole also should not be
not less than 2 and their diameter should not be less than 12mm; the section area
of the steel bars had better not less than 1/2 of the total section area of the
horizontal steel bars cut at the hole mouth. The length that the longitudinal steel
bars stretch from the hole mouth to the wall should not be less than the anchoring
length of tension steel bar set forth in Article 9.3.1 in this code.

10.5.9 The reinforcement rates of horizontal and vertical steel bars of the reinforced
concrete shearwall, ρ sh (ρ sh=Ash/bs v, sv is the interval of horizontal steel bars) and
ρ sv (ρ sv=Asv/bs h, sh is the interval of vertical steel bars), should not be less than
0.2%. The reinforcement of horizontal and vertical steel bars in a shearwall in
important position of a structure had better be suitably increased.
For any position in the shearwall where the temperature and shrinkage stress are
relatively high, the reinforcement rate of horizontal steel bars had better be
suitably increased.
10.5.10The diameter of the horizontal and vertical steel bars in a reinforced concrete
shearwall should not be less than 8mm and the interval should not be larger than
300mm.

10.5.11For any shearwall the thickness of which is larger than 160mm, two rows of steel
bar nets should be arranged; as for any shearwall in the important position of the
structure, when its thickness is not larger than 160mm, two rows of steel bar nets
also should be configured.
The steel bar nets distributed in two rows should be arranged along two sides of
the wall and tied by tie bars; the diameter of the tie bar had better not be less
than 6mm and the interval had better not be larger than 600mm.

10.5.12The horizontal steel bars in the shearwall should be stretched into the wall end
and should be horizontally and inwards bent for 10d (d is the diameter of the
horizontal steel bar) and then cut.
When there are wing wall or corner wall at the end of the shearwall, the horizontal
steel bars on both sides of the inner wall and the horizontal steel bars in the inner
side of the outer wall should be stretched the outside of the wing wall or the
corner wall and should be cut after being bent horizontally toward both sides. The
horizontal folding length had better not be less than 15d. On the corner wall, the
horizontal steel bars on the outer side of the outer wall should be bent into the
wing wall at the outer corner at the wall end and lapped with the horizontal steel
bars in the outer side of the wing wall. The lapping length should satisfy the
stipulation in Article 10.1.13 in this code.

The horizontal and vertical steel bars in the shearwall with outer frame should be
stretched through the pillar or girder or anchored in the pillar of girder.

144
10.5.13The lapping length of horizontal steel bars in a shearwall should not be less than
1.2la. The net interval among lap joints of the horizontal steel bars in the same
row and among the lap joints of adjacent upper and lower horizontal steel bars
had better not be less than 500mm.
The vertical steel bars in the shearwall can be lapped at the same height and the
lapping length should not be less than 1.2l a.

10.5.14As for the hole-mouth continuous girder of a shearwall, the web reinforcements
should be configured along its whole length, while the diameter of the web
reinforcement should not be less than 6mm and the interval had better not be
larger than 150mm.
In the range of the anchoring length that the longitudinal steel bars of the top
hole-mouth continuous girder stretches into the wall, some web reinforcements
with interval not larger than 150mm should be placed, and the diameter of the
web reinforcement had better be identical to that of the web reinforcement in the
span of the continuous girder. Meanwhile, the vertical steel bars beside a door,
window or hole should be anchored in the range of the height of the top
continuous girder as per a tension steel bar.

10.5.15When adopting welding steel bar net in the wall, it should satisfy the stipulations
in related existing standards of the state.

10.6 Buildup Flexural Member

10.6.1 As for any buildup flexural member not to be supported during construction, the
buildup member and its prefabricated part should be computed separately; the
prefabricated part of the member should be computed according to the
stipulations for flexural member in Chapters 7 and 8 in this code; the buildup
member should be computed according to Articles 10.6.2~10.6.13 in this code.

Any buildup flexural member with reliable support set during construction can be
computed as per an ordinary flexural member, but the shearing bearing capacity
of diagonal section of the buildup member and the shearing bearing capacity of
the buildup surface should be computed according to Articles 10.6.4 and 10.6.5 in
this code. When h1/h<0.4, reliable supports should be set during construction, h1
in this expression is the section height of the prefabricated member and h is the
section height of the buildup member.

10.6.2 The internal force of any buildup flexural member without support during
construction should be divided into the following two stage for computation
respectively:
1. First stage: the stage before the later-cast buildup concrete does not meet the
design strength. The load shall be borne by the prefabricated member and
the prefabricated member shall be computed as per a simply-supported
member; the load includes the self weight of the prefabricated member, the
self weight of the prefabricated floor, the self weight of the buildup layer and
the active construction load in this stage.

145
 2. Second Stage: the stage after the concrete of the buildup layer meets the
strength that the design stipulates. The buildup member shall be computed as
an entire structure; the load shall be considered as per the following two
situations and the larger value shall be taken:
1) Construction stage: Counting the weight of the buildup member, the
weight of the prefabricated floor, self weight of the topping and ceiling
and the active construction load in this stage;

2) Use stage: counting the weight of the buildup member, the weight of the
prefabricated floor, self weight of the topping and the ceiling and the
variable load in the use stage.
10.6.3 The normal-section bending bearing capacity of a prefabricated member and a
buildup member should be computed according to Article 7.2.1 or 7.2.2, in which
the design value of the bending moment should be taken according to the
following stipulation:

Prefabricated member

M1 = M 1G + M 1Q (10.6.3-1)

Positive bending moment area of buildup member

M = M 1G + M 2G + M 2 Q (10.6.3-2)

Negative bending moment area of buildup member

M = M 2G + M 2Q (10.6.3-3)

where,
M 1G Design value of bending moment that the self weights of
prefabricated member, prefabricated floor and buildup layer
produce on the computational section;
M 2G Design value of bending moment that the self weights of topping
and ceiling produce on the computational section in the second
stage;

M 1q Design value of bending moment that the active construction load

in the first stage produces on the computational section;
M 2q Design value of bending moment that the variable load in the
second stage produces on the computational section; it takes the
larger one among the design values of bending moments that the
active construction load in this stage and the variable load in the
use stage produce on the computational section.

In the computation, the concrete strength grade of the segment of positive

bending moment is taken as per the buildup layer; that for the segment of
negative bending moment shall be taken according to the actual situation of the
compression area of the computational section.

146
10.6.4 The shearing bearing capacity of the diagonal section of a prefabricated member
and buildup member should be computed according to related stipulations in
Section 7.5 in this code, in which the design value of shearing force should be
taken according to the following stipulations:
For prefabricated member

V1 = V1G + V1Q (10.6.4-1)

For buildup member

V = V1G + V2 G + V2 Q (10.6. 4-2)

where,

V 1G Design value of shearing force that the self weights of

prefabricated member, prefabricated floor and buildup layer
produce on the computational section;
V 2G Design value of shearing force that the self weights of topping and
ceiling produce on the computational section in the second stage;

V 1q Design value of shearing force that the active construction load in

the first stage produces on the computational section;

V 2q Design value of shearing force that the variable load in the second
stage produces on the computational section; it takes the larger
one among the design values of shearing force that the active
construction load in this stage and the variable load in the use
stage produce on the computational section.
In the computation, the design value Vcs of the shearing bearing capacity of
concrete and web reinforcement on the diagonal section of the buildup member
should be computed as per the lower concrete strength grade in the buildup layer
and the prefabricated member, and should not be less than the design value of
the shearing bearing capacity of the prefabricated member. The favorable
influence of the prestressing force to the shearing bearing capacity shall be not
considered for any prestressed concrete buildup member, so V p=0.

10.6.5 When the buildup girder satisfy various construction requirements in Articles
10.2.10, 10.2.11 and 10.6.14, the shearing bearing capacity of its buildup surface
should satisfy the following stipulations:

Asv
V ≤ 1 .2 f t bh p + 0 .85 f yv h0 (10.6.5-1)
s

In this expressi on, the design value ƒt of tension strength of concrete is taken to
be the lower one of the values for buildup layer and the prefabricated member.
As for any buildup late without web reinforcement configured, when satisfying the
construction stipulation set forth in Article 10.6.15 in this code, the shearing
strength of its buildup surface should satisfy the requirement in the following
formula:

147
 V
≤ 0 .4 ( N / mm 2 ) (10.6.5-2)
bh0

10.6.6 The prefabricated member and buildup member of any buildup prestressed
concrete buildup flexural member is subject to the crack resisting
check-computation for normal section. In this case, under the characteristic
combination of load effect, the tension stress of the concrete subject to the crack
resisting check computation should not be larger than the standard value ƒtk off
the concrete tension strength of the prefabricated member. The normal stress of
the concrete of the edge subject to cracking resisting check-computation should
be computed by using the following formula:
For prefabricated member

M 1k
σ ck = (10.6.6-1)
W01

For buildup member

M 1Gk M 2 k
σ ck = + (10.6.6-2)
W01 W0

where,

M 1Gk Design value of bending moment that the standard value of self
weights of prefabricated member, prefabricated floor and buildup
layer produces on the computational section;

M 1k Bending moment on the computation section under the

characteristic combination of load effect in the first stage.
M1k=M 1GK+M1QK, in which M1QK is the bending moment that the
standard value of active c onstruction load in the first stage
produces on the computational section;

M 2k Bending moment on the computational section under the

characteristic combination of load effect in the second stage.
M2k=M 2GK+M2QK, in which M2QK is the bending moment that the
standard value of self weight of topping and ceiling produces on
the computational section; M2QK is the bending moment that the
standard value of variable load in the use stage produces on the
computational section;
W 01 Elastic resisting moment of the tension edge of transformer
section of the prefabricated member;
W0 Elastic resisting moment of the tension edge of transformer
section of the buildup member; in this case the concrete section
area of the buildup layer should be converted into the concrete
section area of the prefabricated member as per the elastic
modulus.
10.6.7 As for prestressed concrete buildup member, its diagonal section should be
subject to a cracking resisting check-computation according to the stipulation in
Article 8.1.5 in this code; the principal tension stress and principal compression
stress of the concrete should consider the bearing characteristics of the buildup
member and should be computed according to the stipulation in Article 8.1.6 in
this code.

148
10.6.8 Under the characteristic combination of load effect, the stress of the longitudinal
tension steel bar of a reinforced concrete buildup flexural member should satisfy
the following stipulation:

σ sk ≤ 0.9 f y (10.6.8-1)

σ sk ≤ σ s1 k + σ s 2 k (10.6.8-2)

Under the action of the bending moment M1GK, the stress of the longitudinal
tension steel bars in the prefabricated member, σs1k can be computed by using
the following formula:

M G1 k
σ s1 k = (10.6.8-3)
0 .87 As h 01

Where, h01 – Effective height of the section of the prefabricated member.

Under the action of the bending moment M2k, the stress increment σs2k in the
longitudinal tension steel bar of a buildup member can be computed by using the
following formula:

h1
0.5(1 + )M 2 k
σ s2k = h (10.6.8-4)
0 .87 As h0

When M1GK<0.35M 1u, the value of 0.5(1+h1/h) in Formula (10.6.8-4) should be

taken to be 1.0; M 1u hereof is the design value of the bending bearing capacity of
the normal section of the prefabricated member and should be computed
according to Article 7.2.1 in this code. However, the sign in the formula should be
taken to be equal sign and M should be replaced with M1u.

10.6.9 The crack width of a reinforced concrete buildup member is subject to check
computation. The maximum crack width w max to be computed under the
characteristic combination of load effect and considering the influence of the
long-term action should not exceed the limit value of maximum crack width
stipulated in Table 3.3.4 in this code.
The maximum crack width computed under the characteristic of load effect and
considering the influence of long-term action, w max, can be computed by using the
following formulas:

ψ (σ s1k + σ s 2 k ) d eq
ω max = 2 .2 (1.9 c + 0.8 ) (10.6.9-1)
Es ρ tel

0 .65 f tk1
ψ = 1 .1 − (10.6.9-2)
ρ te1σ s1k + ρt eσ s 2 k

where,
d eq Equivalent diameter of longitudinal steel bar in tension area,
comput ed according to the stipulation in Article 8.1.2 in this code;

149
 ρ te1, ρ te Reinforcement rate of longitudinal tension steel bars to be
computed as per the effective section area of concrete in tension
in a prefabricated member and a buildup member, computed
according to Article 8.1.2 in this code;
ƒ tk1 Standard value of longitudinal tension steel bars in a prefabricated
member, taken according to Table 4.1.3 in this code.

10.6.10The bending deflection check computation of the limit state for normal use should
be performed for a buildup member according to the stipulation in Article 8.2.1 in
this code. In the computation, the rigidity of the buildup flexural member under
characteristic combination of load effect and considering the influence of
long-term action can be computed by using the following formulas:

Mk
B= B s2 (10.6.10-1)
Bs 2
( − 1) M 1G k + (θ − 1) M q + M k
B s1
Mk=M 1Gk+M2k (10.6.10-2)
Mq= M1Gk+M2Gk+ ψqM2Qk (10.6.10-3)
where,

θ Influence coefficient considering the influence of long-term action

of load to the augment of bending deflection, taken according to
Article 8.2.5 in this code;

Mk Bending moment to the buildup member to be computed as per

the characteristic combination of load effect;

Mq Bending moment of a buildup member to be computed as per the

quasi -permanent combi nation of load effect;
Bs1 Short-term rigidity of prefabricated member, taken according to
Article 10.6.11 in this code;
Bs2 Short-term rigidity of buildup member in second stage, taken
according to Article 10.6.11 in this code;

ψq Coefficient of quasi -permanent value of variable load in the

second stage.
10.6.11Short-term rigidity of buildup flexural member under the characteristic
combination of load effect and in the positive bending moment area can be
computed according to the following stipulations:

1. Reinforced concrete buildup member

1) Short-term rigidity Bs1 of prefabricated member can be computed by
using Formula (8.2.3-1) in this code;

150
 2) Short-term rigidity of buildup member in the second stage can be
computed by using the following formula:

E s As h02
Bs 2 = (10.6.11-1)
h 4.5α E ρ
0 .7 + 0 .6 1 +
h 1 + 3.5γ ' f

where, α E – Ratio of elastic modulus of steel bar and elastic modulus of

concrete of buildup layer: α E=Es/Ec2.
2. Prestressed concrete buildup member

1) The short -term rigidity Bs1 of prefabricated member can be computed by

using Formula (8.2.3-2);
2) Short-term rigidity of buildup member for the second sage can be
computed by using the following formula:
Bs2=0.7E c1I0 (10.6.11-2)
where,
E c1 Elastic modulus of concrete of prefabricated member;

I0 Inertia moment of transformation section of buildup member,

in this case the section area of concrete in the buildup layer
should be converted into the section area of the concrete of
the prefabricated member on basis of the section area of the
concrete of the buildup layer.

10.6.12The second-stage short-term rigidity Bs2 in the negative bending moment area of
the buildup flexural member under the characteristic combination of load effect
can be computed by using Formula (8.2.3-1) in this code, in which the elastic
modulus ratio is taken to be α E=Es/E c1.

10.6.13 The prestressing force antiarch value of the prestressed concrete buildup member can
be computed by using the constructional mechanics method and as per the rigidity of
the prefabricated member. In the computation, all Prestressing Loss should be
deducted from the stress of the prestressing tendon; in consideration with the influence
of the long-term action of the prestressing force, the computed prestressing force
antiarch value can be multiplied by the augmenting coefficient 1.75.

10.6.14In addition to meeting the constructional requirement for an ordinary girder, the
buildup girder should satisfy the following stipulations:
1. The web reinforcements of the prefabricated girder all should be stretched
into the buildup layer and the length of the straight segment that various limbs
stretch into the buildup layer had better not be less than 10d (d is the
diameter of the web reinforcement);
2. In the buildup girder mainly bearing static load, the buildup surface of the
prefabricated member can adopt a natural rough surface the unsmooth size
of which is not less than 6mm.

3. The thickness of the concrete in the buildup layer had better not be less than
100mm and the concrete strength grade of the buildup layer should not be
less than C20.

151
10.6.15The surface of the prefabricated plate of the buildup plate should be moulded into
an artificial rough surface with unsmooth size not less than 4mm. The concrete
strength grade of the buildup layer should not be lower than C20. As for any
buildup plate to bear the heaviest load, some constructional steel bars stretching
into the buildup layer should be set in the prefabricated plate.

10.7 Deep Flexural Member

10.7.1 Any simply-supported reinforced concrete single-span girder or multi-span

continuous girder with l0/h<5.0 had better be designed as per the deep flexural
member. Among them, the simply-supported reinforced concrete single-span
girder with l 0/ h≤2 and the simply-supported reinforced concrete multi-span
continuous girder with l0/ h≤2.5 are called as deep beam. In addition to meeting
the general stipulat ions for the deep flexural member, the deep beam should
comply with the stipulations in Article 10.7.6 and 10.7.13 in this code. h
mentioned in this article is the section height of the beam; l0 is the computational
span of the beam, which can be taken to be the smaller one among the distance
between abutment centerlines and 1.15ln (ln is the net span of the beam).
10.7.2 The section of a simply-supported reinforced concrete single-span deep beam
can designed by using the internal force computed by using a common method;
the section of a reinforced concrete multi-span continuous deep beam should be
designed by using the internal force computed by using the 2D elasticity analysis
method.

10.7.3 The bending bearing capacity of normal section of a reinforced concrete deep
flexural member should satisfy the following stipulations:

M ≤ f y As z (10.7.3-1)

z = α d (h0 − 0.5x) (10.7.3-2)

l0
α d = 0 .80 + 0.04 (10.7.3-3)
h

when l0<h, the tension arm of the internal force z is taken to be 0.6l 0 (z=0.6l 0).
In the above expressions:

x Height of compression area of the section, computed by using

Formula (7.2.1-2) in this code; when x<0.2h0, x=0.2h 0;
h0 Effective height of section: when h0= h-as, in which h is the section
height; when l 0/ h≤2, the section in the span as is taken to be 0.1h,
and the abutment section as is taken to be 0.2h; when l 0/h>2, as is
to be taken as per the actual distance from the gravity center of
the section of the longitudinal steel bar of the tension area to the
tensioned edge.
10.7.4 The shearing section of the reinforced concrete deep flexural member should
satisfy the following conditions:

When h w/b≤4,

152
 1
V≤ (10 + l0 / h)β c f c bh0 (10.7.4-1)
60
When h w/b≥6,
1
V≤ (7 + l 0 / h) β c f c bh0 (10.7.4-2)
60
When 4<hw/b64,it shall be taken by using the linear interpolation method.
Where,

V Design value of maximum shearing force on the diagonal section

of the member;
l0 Computational span, when l 0<2h, l 0=2h;
b Width of rectangle section and web thickness of T-shaped or
I-shaped section;

h, h0 Section area and effective height of section;

hw Web height of section: the effective height h0 is taken for rectangle

section, the value of effective height minus the wing edge height
is taken for a T-shaped section; the net height of the web plate is
taken for any I-s haped section;
βc Concrete strength influence coefficient of concrete, taken
according to the stipulation in Article 7.5.1 in this code.
10.7.5 As for a deep flexural member of rectangle, T-shaped or I-shaped section, under
the action of symmetric load and when there are some vertical steel bars and
horizontal steel bars placed, the shearing bearing capacity of its diagonal section
should satisfy the following stipulation:

(8 − l 0 / h ) (8 − l 0 / h ) A (5 − l 0 / h ) A
V ≤ 0.7 f t bh0 + 1 .25 f yv sv h 0 + f yv sv h 0 (10.7.5-1)
3 3 sh 6 sv

As for any deep flexural member under the action of concentrated load (including
the deep flexural member under the action of several loads and the shearing
force that the concentrated load produces to the abutment section is over 75% of
the total shearing force), the shearing bearing capacity of its diagonal section
should satisfy the following stipulation:

1.75 (l / h − 2 ) A (5 − l 0 / h ) A
V≤ f t bh0 + 0 f yv sv h0 + f yh sh h0 (10.7.5-2)
λ +1 3 sh 6 sv

where,

λ Computational shear -span ratio: when l0/h≤2.0, λ is taken to be

0.25; when 2.0<l0/h<5.0, λ is taken to be a/h 0, in which a is the
horizontal distance from the conc entrated load to the abutment of
the deep flexural member; the upper limit value of λ is
(0.92l 0/h-1.58) and its lower limit value is (0.42l 0/h-0.58);

153
 l0/ h Span-height ratio, when l0/h<2.0, l 0/h is taken to be 2.0.

10.7.6 Any reinforced concrete deep beam generally not allowed crack should satisfy
the following condition:

Vk ≤ 0 .5 f tk bh0 (10.7.6)

where,
Vk Shearing force to be computed according to the characteristic
combination of load effect.

In this case, the shearing bearing capacity computation can not be performed for
the diagonal section, but it should be configured with distributed steel bars
according to the stipulations in Article 10.7.11 and 10.7.13.

10.7.7 The position in a reinforced concrete deep beam to bear the counterforce of the
abutment and the position to bear the concentrated load should be subject to the
computation of local compression bearing capacity according to the stipulation in
Section 7.8 in this code.

10.7.8 The section width of a deep beam should not be less than 140mm. when l0/ h≥1,
h/b had better not be larger than 25; when l0/h<1, l0/b had better not be larger
than 25. The concrete strength grade of a deep beam should not be lower than
C20. When the deep beam is supported on a reinforced concrete pillar, it is
advisable to stretch the pillar into the top of the deep beam. The top of the deep
beam should be reliably connected to such horizontal members as floor.

10.7.9 The longitudinal tension steel bars for a reinforced concrete deep beam had
better adopt a smaller diameter and they should be arranged according to the
following stipulations:

1. The lower longitudinal steel bars in a single-span deep beam and continuous
deep beam had better be symmetrically placed in the range 0.2h above the
lower edge of the beam (as shown in Figure 10.7.9-1 and Figure 10.7.9-2).
2. The longitudinal tension steel bars over the middle abutment section of a
continuous deep beam had better be symmetrically placed in the appropriate
height range as per the height range and reinforcement rate stipulated in
Figure 10.7.9-3. As for any continuous deep beam with l 0/ h≤1.0, the
reinforcement rate of longitudinal tension steel bars within the height range
from 0.2l 0 to 0.6l 0 had better not be less than 0.5%. The horizontal distributed
steel bars can be used as the upper longitudinal tension steel bars at the
abutment position, the insufficient portion can be supplemented by additional
horizontal steel bars, and the length that the additional horizontal steel bar
stretches from the abutment into the span had better not be less than 0.4l 0
(Figure 10.7.9-2).

154
 Figure 10.7.9-1 Arrangement of Steel Bars in Single-span Deep Beam

1 – Lower longitudinal tension steel bar and its bending anchoring; 2 – Horizontal and vertical
distributed steel bars; 3 – Tie bar; 4 – Densifying area of tie bar

Figure 10.7.9-2 Arrangement of Steel Bars in Continuous Deep Beam

1 – Lower longitudinal tension steel bar; 2 – Horizontal distributed bar; 3 – Vertical

distributed bar; 4 – Tie bar; 5 – Densifying area of tie bar; 6 - Additional hor izontal steel bar
in top of abutment section

10.7.10The lower longitudinal tension steel bars of a deep beam all should be stretched
into the abutment and should not be bent up or cut in the span. In the
simply-supported single-span abutment and the simply-supporting abutment at
the end of the continuous deep beam, the longitudinal tension steel bars should
be horizontally bent and anchored (as shown in Figure 10.7.9-3), and its
anchoring length should be the value of the anchoring length la of tension steel
bar stipulated in Article 9.3.1 in this code multiplied by the coefficient 1.1; when
the above anchoring length requirement is not satisfied, some effective anchoring
measures should be taken, such as additionally welding anchoring steel plates on
steel bars or welding the end of steel bar into an enclosed form. All lower
longitudinal tension steel bars of the continuous deep beam should be stretched
over the centerline of the intermediate abutment and its anchoring length starting
from the abutment edge should not be less than l a.

155
 Figure 10.7.9-3 Distribution Proportions of Longitudinal Tension Steel Bars in
Middle Abutment Section of Continuous Deep Beam in Different Height Ranges
(a) 1.5<l 0/h≤2.5; (b) 1<l 0/h≤1.5; (c) l0/h<1

10.7.11Two rows of mesh reinforcements should be placed for a deep beam, the
diameter of the horizontal and vertical distributed bars should not be less than
8mm and their interval should not be larger than 200mm.

When setting pillars along the vertical edge of the end of the deep beam, the
horizontal distributed bars should be anchored into the pillar. On the upper and
lower edges of the deep beam, the vertical distributed bars had better form an
enclosed shape.

Between the two rows of steel bars of the deep beam, tie bars should be set, the
interval of tie bars at the longitudinal and transverse directions had better not be
larger than 600mm. In the 0.4h-high and 0.4h-long range in the abutment area
(as shown in dash-line in Figures 10.7.9-1 and 10.7.9-2), the quantity of tie bars
should be increased appropriately.

10.7.12When there is a symmetric load acting on the whole span along the lower edge of
the deep beam, some additional vertical suspending bars should be
symmetrically along the whole span of the beam and the interval of suspending
bars had better not be larger than 200mm.

When there is a concentrated load acting in the lower range that is 3/4 high of the
deep beam height, the said concentrated load should be fully borne by the
additional suspending bar. The suspending bars adopt the vertical or declinate
arrange. The horizontal distribution length s of vertical suspending bars should be
determined by using the following formulas (Figure 10.7.12a);

When h 1≤h b/2,

156
 S=b b+hb (10.7.12-1)
When h 1>h b/2,
S=b b+2h 1 (10.7.12-2)
where,
bb Section width of the member to transfer concentrated load;

hb Section height of member to transfer concentrated load;

h1 Height from lower edge of deep beam to the bottom edge of
member to transfer concentrated load.

Figure 10.7.12 Additional Suspending Bar When Deep Beam Bears Concentrated
Load
(a) Vertical suspending bar; (b) Declinate suspending bar

Note: the unit of the sizes in the figure is mm.

Vertical suspending bar should be arranged along the two sides of the beam and
should be stretched from the bottom of the beam to the top and the should be of
an enclosed form in the top and bottom of the beam.

The total section area Asv of additional suspending bars should be computed by
using Formula (10.2.13) in this code, but the designed strength ƒ yv of suspending
bar should be the product of the bearing capacity multiplied by an additional
coefficient 0.8.

10.7.13The reinforcement rate of longitudinal tension steel bars of the deep beam, the
reinforcement rate of horizontal distributed bars and the reinforcement rate of
vertical distributed bars, ρ (ρ=As/bh), ρ sh (ρ sh=A sh/bs v, s v is the interval of
horizontal distributed bar) and ρ sv (ρ sv=A sv/bs h, s h is the interval of vertical
distributed bars), had better not be less than the values stipulated in Table
10.7.13.

157
 Table 10.7.13 Minimum Reinforcement Rate (%) of Steel Bars in Deep Beam
Longitudinal
Horizontal Vertical
Type of steel bars tension steel
distributed bar distributed bar
bar
HPB235 0.25 0.25 0.20
HRB335, HRB400, RRB400 0.20 0.20 0.15
Note: Whe n the concentrated load acts in the range 1/4 away from the upper part
of the continuous girder and l0/h>1.5, the minimum reinforcement rate of the
vertical distributed bars should be increased by 0.05 (%).

10.7.14As for any deep flexural member except deep beam , the construction stipulations
for their longitudinal reinforcing bars, web reinforcement and longitudinal
constructional bar are the same as those for ordinary beams, but the longitudinal
constructional bars to be placed in the range 1/2 of the height away from the
lower part of the section or 1/2 of the height away from the upper part of the
section of middle abutment had better be suitable reinforced stronger than those
for ordinary beams.

10.8 Corbel

10.8.1 The section sizes of pillar corbel (when a≤h 0) should satisfy the following
requirements (Figure 10.8.1):
1. Crack control requirement for corbel

Figure 10.8.1 External Appearance and Bar Arrangement of Corbel

Note: Dimensions in the figure adopt mm as the unit.

1 – Upper pillar; 2 – Lower pillar; 3 – Bent- up steel bar; 4 – Horizontal Bar

158
 Fhk f tkbh0
Fvk ≤ β (1 − 0 .5 ) (10.8.1)
Fvk α
0 .5 +
h0

where,

Fvk Value of vertical force acting on the top of the corbel and
computed according to the characteristic combination of load
effect;
Fhk Value of horizontal tension force acting on the top of the corbel
and computed according to the characteristic combination of load
effect.

β Crack control coefficient: it is taken to be 0.65 for corbel

supporting the crane beam and to be 0.80 for other corbel;
a Horizontal distance from acting point of vertical force to the edge
of the lower pillar, in this case the installation deviation 20mm
should be considered; when the acting point of the vertical force
considering the installation deviation 20mm is still in the section of
the lower pillar, a=0;
b Width of corbel;

h0 Effective height of the vertical section where the corbel intersects

0 0
the lower pillar: h0=h 1-a s+c⋅tana; when a>45 , a=45 is taken; c is
the horizontal length from the edge of the lower pillar to the outer
edge of the corbel.

2. The height of outer edge of corbel, h1, should not be less than h/3 and should
not be less than 200mm.
3. On the compression surface of the top surface of the corbel, the local
compression stress due to the vertical force F vk should not exceed 0.75ƒc.

10.8.2 In a corbel, The total section area of longitudinal reinforcing bars composed of the
section area of tension steel bars required to bear the vertical force and the
section area of anchor bars required to bear the horizontal force should satisfy
the following stipulation:

Fv a F
As ≥ + 1 .2 h (10.8.2)
0.85 f y h0 fy

In this case, when a<0.3h0, a=0.3h 0.

In the above formula

Fv Design value of vertical force acting on the top of corbel;

Fh Design value of horizontal tension force acting on the top of
corbel;

10.8.3 Longitudinal reinforcing bars configured along the top of the corbel had better
adopt HRB335 or HRB400 steel bars. All longitudinal reinforcing steel bars and

159
 bent-up steel bars had better be cut after stretching into the lower pillar
downwards for 150mm along the outer edge of the corbel (Figure 10.8.1). when
adopting the straight anchoring method, the anchoring length that the longitudinal
reinforcing bar and bent-up bar stretch into the upper pillar should not be les than
the anchoring length la that Article 9.3.1 in this code stipulates for the tension
steel bar; when the size of the upper pillar is insufficient, the anchoring of the
steel bar should satisfy the anchoring stipulation in Article 10.4.1 in this code,
which requires the steel bars in the upper part of the beam bend 90 0 in the end
node of the intermediate layer of the frame. In this case, the anchoring length
should be computed starting from the inside edge of the upper pillar.
The reinforcement rate of longitudinal reinforcing bars required for bearing the
vertical force, when computing as per the effective section of the corbel, should
not be less than 0.2% and 0.45ƒt/ ƒy and had better not be larger than 0.6%. The
number of steel bars had better not be less than 4 and the diameter had better
not be less than 12mm.

When the corbel is set in the top of the upper pillar, it is advisable to horizontally
bend the longitudinal reinforcing bars in the outer side of the pillar in the opposite
edge of the corbel into the corbel, so as to be used as the longitudinal tension
steel bars of the corbel; when the longitudinal tension steel bars in the top surface
of the corbel and the longitudinal steel bars in the outer side of the pillar in the
opposite edge of the corbel for configuration, the longitudinal tension steel bars in
the top of the corbel should be bent into the outer side of the pillar and should
satisfy the stipulations relating to lapping set forth in Article 10.4.4 in this code
(Figure 10.4.4b).

10.8.4 Horizontal web reinforcements should be set for the corbel, the diameter of the
horizontal web reinforcement had better be 6~12mm, the interval had better be
100~150mm and the total section area of the horizontal web reinforcement within
the range 2h 0/3 away from the upper part had better not be less than 1/2 of the
section are of the tension steel bars bearing the vertical force.

When the shear-span rate of the corbel a/h0≥0.3, it is advisable to set bent -up
steel bars. The bent -up steel bars had better adopt HRB335 or HRB400 steel
bars and the point at which it intersects the connecting line from the acting point
of the concentrated load and the lower end point of the diagonal edge of the
corbel had better be in the range l/6~l/2 away from the upper part of the corbel. l
hereof is the length of the said connecting line (Figure 10.8.1). Its section area
had better not be less than 1/2 of the section area of the tension steel bars to
bear the vertical force, the number of the said tension steel bars had better not be
less than 2 and the diameter had better not be less than 12mm. The longitudinal
tension steel bars shall not be concurrently used as bent -up steel bars.

10.9 Embedded Parts and Hoisting Rings

10.9.1 As to the reinforcing embedded part composed of anchor plates and

symmetrically-configured straight anchor bars, the total section are As of its
anchor bars should satisfy the following stipulations (Figure 10.9.1)

160
 Figure 10.9.1 Embedded Part Composed of Anchor Plate and Straight Bar
1 – Anchor plate; 2 – Straight anchor bar

1. When there is the joint action of shearing force, normal tension force and
bending moment, As should be computed as per the following two formulas
and the larger value should be adopted:

V N M
As ≥ + + (10.9.1-1)
α r α v f y 0.8α b f y 1 .3α rα b f y z

N M
As ≥ + (10.9.1-2)
0.8α b f y 0.4α r α b f y z

2. When there is the joint action of shearing force, normal compression force
and bending moment, it should be computed as per the following two
formulas and the larger value should be adopted:

V M − 0 .4 Nz
As ≥ + (10.9.1-3)
α r α v f y 1.3α r α b f y z

M − 0.4 Nz
As ≥ (10.9.1-4)
0.4α rα b f y z

When M<0.4N z, M=0.4N z.

Coefficients av and ab in the above formulas should be computed by using the
following formula:

fc
α v = (4 .0 − 0.08 d) (10.9.1-5)
fy

When a v>0.7, a v=0.7 is taken.

t
α b = 0 .6 + 0 .25 (10.9.1-6)
d
When the measures to avoid bending deformation of anchor plates are taken, ab
can be taken to be 1.0 (ab=1.0).
In these formula:

ƒy Design value of tension strength of anchor bar, taken according to

Table 4.2.3-1 in this code but should not be larger than
300N.mm 2;

161
 V Design value of shearing force;
N Design value of normal tension force or normal compression force.
The value of the normal compression force should not be larger
than 0.5ƒcA, A in which is the area of the anchor plate;

M Design value of bending moment;

ar Influence coefficient of layer number of anchor bars; when anchor
bars area arranged at equal interval: this coefficient is taken to be
1.0 for two layers, 0.9 for three layers and 0.85 for four layers;
av Shearing bearing capacity coefficient of anchor bar;

d Diameter of anchor bar;

ab Bending deformation discounting coefficient of anchor plate;

t Thickness of anchor plate;

z Distance between centerlines of the outmost layer of anchor bars
along the acting direction of the shearing force.

10.9.2 As for the embedded part in which the anchor plate and the
symmetrically-arranged buckling anchor bars and straight anchor bars jointly bear
the shearing force (Figure 10.9.2), the section area Asb of its buckling anchor
should satisfy the following stipulation:

Figure 10.9.2 Embedded Part Composed of Anchor Plate and Buckling Anchor
Bar and Straight Anchor Bar

V
Asb ≥ 1.4 − 1 .25α v As (10.9.2)
fy

The coefficient av in this formula is to be taken according to Article 10.9.1 in this

code. When straight anchor bars are set according to the construction
requirements, A s=0.
Note: the inclination between the buckling anchor bar and the steel plate had
0 0
better not be less than 15 nor larger than 45 .

10.9.3 Anchor bars for reinforcing embedded part should adopt HPB235, HRB335
or HRB400 steel bars, while any cold -treated steel bars are forbidden for
use.

10.9.4 The number of reinforcing straight anchor bars for embedded part had better not
be less than 4 nor more than 4 layers; their diameter had better not be less than
8mm nor larger than 25mm. The shearing embedded part can adopt 2 straight
anchor bars.

The anchor bar of embedded part should be located in the inner side of the
principal bar in the outer layer of the member.

10.9.5 The anchor plate of reinforcing embedded part had better adopt Q235 steel. The
straight anchor bar and the anchor plate should adopt the T-shaped welding

162
 method. When the diameter of the anchor bar is not larger than 20mm, it is
advisable to adopt the pressure submerged arc welding method; it is advisable to
adopt the perforation enclosed arch welding when the anchor bar diameter is
larger than 20mm. When adopting the hand welding, the height of the weld had
better not be less than 6mm and 0.5d (HPB235 steel bar) or 0.6d (HRB335,
HRB400 steel bar), (d is the diameter of the anchor bar).
10.9.6 The thickness of the anchor plate ought to be larger than 0.6 times of the anchor
bar diameter. In addition, the anchor plate thickness of the tension and bending
embedded part ought to be larger b/8 (b is the interval of anchor bars, Figure
10.9.1). The distance from the center of the anchor bar to the edge of the anchor
plate should not be less than 2d and 20mm.

As for the tension and bending embedded part, the intervals b and b1 of their
anchor bars and the distances c and c1 from the anchor bar to the edge of the
member should not be less than 3d and 45mm (Figure 10.9.1).
As to any shearing embedded part, the intervals b and b1 of their anchor bars
should not be larger than 300mm and b1 should not be less than 6d and 70mm;
the distance c1 from the anchor bar to the edge of the member should not be less
than 6d and 70mm and b and c should not be less than 3d and 45mm (Figure
10.9.1).

10.9.7 The anchoring lengths of the tension straight anchor bar and the buckling anchor
bar should not be less than the anchoring length of tension steel bar set forth in
Article 9.3.1 in this code; when the anchor bar adopt HPB235 steel bar, it should
additionally satisfy the stipulation relating to hook in the note of Table 9.3.1 in this
code. When the requirement for anchoring length cannot be satisfied, other
effective anchoring measures should be taken.

The anchoring length of shearing and compression straight anchor bar should not
be less than 15d (d is the diameter of the anchor bar).

10.9.8 The hoisting ring for prefabricated members should adopt HPB235 steel
bars fo r manufacture, any cold -treated steel bar is forbidden for this
purpose. The depth that the hoisting ring is buried into the concrete should
not be less than 30d and the hoisting ring should be welded or bound on
the reinforcing cage. Under the action of h t e standard self weight of the
member, the stress computed as per 2 sections for each hoisting ring
2
should not be larger than 30N/mm ; when 4 hoisting rings are set in one
member, only 3 hoisting rings should be selected for computation when
design.

10.10 Connection of Prefabricated Members

10.10.1The form of connecting joint of prefabricated member should be designed

according to the bearing performance and construction conditions of the structure
and should be of simple structure and able to transfer the force directly.

As for any rigid connecting joint that can transfer bending moment and other
internal forces, the section rigidity at the joint position should be designed to
approximate the rigidity of the prefabricated member adjacent to the joint.

10.10.2When the joints between pillars, between girder and pillar and between girder and
girder are designed according to the rigidity, the steel bar should adopt the
assembled monolithic joint of mechanical connection or welding connection.
During the installation process, temperature difference, concrete shrinkage and
other unfavorable impacts occurring during construction and use should be

163
 considered for the assembled structure, while it is advisable to increase more
constructional reinforcements than the cast-in-situ structure and the stress
concentration due to local weakening of member should be avoided. When
adopting welding joint for the steel bar, attention should be paid to the welding
procedures so as to select reasonable construction form and reduce the influence
of the welding stress. When the architecture and construction measures of the
joint can guarantee the joint to meet the requirement for transferring the force, the
steel bar of the assembled monolithic joint also can adopt other connection
methods.
10.10.3The design of an assembled monolithic joint should satisfy the requirements for
bearing capacity, stability and deformation in the construction and use stages.

10.10.4When the pillar adopts the assembled rabbet joint, the bearing capacity of the
section in the segment near the joint should be 1.3~1.5 times of the computed
bearing capacity required by the said section (computed as per the axial
compression bearing capacity). In this case, such measures as adding transverse
mesh reinforcement in the concrete around the joint and in its adjacent segment,
improving the strength grade of the later-cast concrete and setting additional
longitudinal steel bars can be taken.
10.10.5At the assembled monolithic node, the longitudinal steel bars in the pillar should
go through the node and the longitudinal steel bars of the girder should be
anchored in the node according to the stipulation in Article 10.4.1 in this code.
10.10.6As for the assembled member joint considering the transfer internal force when
computation, the strength grade of the pea gravel concrete to grout the seaming
should not be lower than C30 and some appropriate measures should be taken to
reduce the shrinkage of the concrete in the seaming. The seaming width between
the girder and pillar should not be less than 80mm. the member joint not
considering the transfer of internal force when computation should adopt the pea
gravel concrete with strength not lower than C20 to grout the seaming.

10.10.7As to a single-storeyed house or multi-storeyed building with height not larger

than 20m, the side edges of the prefabricated plates and roof boards of their
assembled roof should be moulded into a double-toothed edge form or other form
able to transfer shearing force. The edge joint between plates should adopt pea
gravel concrete with strength grade not lower than 20 for grouting, and the width
of the upper opening of the joint should not be less than 30mm. As for the
assembled roof board and roof requiring to transfer horizontal load and the
assembled roof board and roof of a multi-storeyed house with height not larger
than 20m, some measures should be taken to improve its entirety.

164
 11.Aseismic Design of Concrete Structural Member

11.1 General Stipulations

11.1.1 In addition to meeting the requirements set forth in Chapters 1~10 of this code,
any concrete structural member with aseismic requirement is subject to
aseismic design of structural member in the principle of aseismic design
principle stipulated in existing national standard Code for Aseismic Design of
Architecture (GB50011) and the stipulations in this chapter.

11.1.2 Aseismic check computation of the structure should satisfy the following
stipulations:

1. Any architecture of 6 degrees of aseismic intensity (except

high-rise building built in Class IV environment) should allow not to
be subject to aseisimic check computation of section but should
comply with related requirements for aseismic measures.
2. Any high-rise building of 6, 7 and higher degrees of aseismic
intensity and built in Class IV environment should be subject to
section aseismic check computation under the action of
frequently-occurred earthquake.

11.1.3 The maximum height applicable to cast-in-situ reinforced concrete buildings

should comply with the requirements listed in Table 11.1.3. As for any structure
irregular in plane or vertical direction or built over Class IV environment, the
maximum height applicable to the building should be suitably reduced.

Table 11.1.3 Maximum Height (m) Applicable to Cast-in-situ Concrete Building

Aseismic Intensity
Structure system
6 7 8 9
Frame structure 60 55 45 25
Frame-shearwall structure 130 120 100 50
Fully-floored
shearwall 140 120 100 60
structure
Shearwall
Partially
structure Should
frame-supported
120 100 80 not be
shearwall
taken
structure
Frame~core
150 130 100 70
Tube-shaped tube structure
structure Tube-in-tube
180 150 120 80
structure

165
 Notes:
1. The height of a building refers to the height from the outdoor floor
to the top of the principal floor board (not considering any locally
stretched part);

2. The frame ~ core tube structure refers to the structure c omposed

of surrounding sparse pillar frame and core tube;
3. The partially frame-supported shearwall structure refers to the
frame-supported shearwall structure in which the first floor or the
two bottom storeies are composed of frame and floor shearwall;

4. Whe n determining the maximum height of a Class A architecture,

the aseismic intensity required for the local region should be
increased by one degree for this purpose; when the aseismic
intensity reaches Degree 9, it is subject to special study; the
maximum height of any Class B and C building should be
determined as per the locally-required aseismic intensity.
5. Any architecture with height exceeding the height values listed in
the table should be designed according to related standards and
effective reinforcing measures should be taken.

11.1.4 The aseismic design of concrete structural member should adopt

different aseismic grades in Table 11.1.4 according to their aseismic
intensity, type of structure and building height and should satisfy
appropriate computation requirements and aseismic construction
measures.

Table 11.1.4 Aseismic Grade of Concrete Structure

Aseismic intensity
Structure system and type
6 7 8 9
Height (m) ≤30 >30 ≤30 >30 ≤30 >30 ≤30
Frame IV III III II II I I
Frame structure Theater, gymnasium
and other large-span III II I I
public building
Height (m) ≤60 >60 ≤60 >60 ≤60 >60 ≤60
Frame-shearwa
Frame IV III III II II I I
ll structure
Shearwall III III II II I I I
Shearwall Height (m) ≤80 >80 ≤80 >80 ≤80 >80 ≤80
structure Shearwall IV III III II II I I
Partially Frame-supported
II II II I I Should Should
frame-supporte frame
not be not be
d shearwall
Shearwall III II II II I used used
structure
Frame ~ Frame III II I I
core tube Core
II II I I
structure tube
Tube-shaped
Inner
structure Tube- in-tu III II I I
tube
be
Outer
structure III II I I
tube
Single-storey
workshop Hinged trestle stand IV III II I
structure

166
167
 Notes:
1. The aseismic grade for Class B building should determined as per
the local aseismic intensity and directly according to this table; the
aseismic intensity for any building of other aseismic intensity
should be adjusted according to the stipulations in existing national
standard Code for Aseismic Design of Architecture (GB50011) and
its aseismic grade should be then determined.

2. When the building site belongs to Class I, in addition to meeting the

6-degree aseismic intensity, it should allow take aseismic
construction measures according to the appropriate aseismic grade
after reducing the local aseismic intensity by one degree, but the
corresponding computation requirements should not be reduced;
3. As for a frame -shearwall structure, when computing the earthquake
action as per the basic earthquake type, if the earthquake
overturning moment borne by the frame portion is larger than 50%
of the total earthquake overturning moment of the structure, the
frame portion should be designed as per the appropriate aseismic
grade for frame structure listed in the table;

4. In a partially frame-supported shearwall structure, the aseismic

grade of any common position above the shearwall reinforcing
position should be determined on the basis of the shearwall in the
shearwall structure.

11.1.5 The height of the bottom reinforcing position of a shearwall of partially

frame-supported shearwall structure can be taken to be the height of the two
storeies above the frame storey of the frame-supporting layer or 1/8 of the total
height of the floor shearwall (the larger one is taken) but should not be larger
than 15m; this height for a shearwall of other structures can be taken to be 1/8
of the total height of the wall limb or the height of two bottom storeies (larger
one is taken) but should not be larger than 15m.

11.1.6 The section bearing capacity of any concrete structural member considering the
combination of earthquake action should be divided by an aseismic adjustment
coefficient λRE of bearing capacity, and this adjustment coefficient (λR E) should
be taken according to Table 11.1.6.

When only considering the combination of vertical earthquake action, λR E of

various types of structural members should be taken to be 1.0 (λRE =1.0).

168
 Table 11.1.6 Aseismic Adjustment Coefficient of Bearing Capacity
Computation
of bearing
Computation of bearing capacity of normal Computation
capacity of
Type of section of local
diagonal
structural compression
section
member bearing
Eccentric Eccentric Various capacity
Bending
compression tension Shearwall member and
member
pillar member frame node
λRE 0.75 0.8 0.85 0.85 0.85 1.0
Notes:
1. As for any eccentric compression pillar with axle load ratio less than 0.15,
its aseismic adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity λRE should be
taken to be 0.75 (λR E=0.75).

2. The aseismic adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity to be computed

according to the section of anchor bar of embedded part should be taken
to be 1.0 (λR E=1.0).
11.1.7 As to any concrete structural member with aseismic design requirement, in
addition to meeting the related stipulations in Sections 9.3 and 9.4 in this code,
the anchoring and connecting joint of its longitudinal reinforcing bars also
should satisfy the following requirements:

1. The aseismic anchoring length of longitudinal tension steel bar, laE,

should be computed by using the following formula:
For I and II aseismic grade,

l aE = 1.15l a (11.1.7-1)

For III aseismic grade,

l aE = 1 .05l a (11.1.7-2)

For IV aseismic grade,

l aE = l a (11.1.7-3)

where, l a — Anchoring length of longitudinal tension steel bar,

determined according to Article 9.3.1 in this code.
2. When adopting the lapping joint, the aseismic lapping length of
longitudinal tension steel bar, ll E, should be computed by using the
following formula:

llE = ζ l aE (11.1.7-4)

where, ζ — Correction coefficient of lapping length of longitudinal

tension steel bar, determined according to Article 9.4.3 in this code.
3. The connection of longitudinal reinforcing bars in a reinforced concrete
structural member can be divided into two categories: colligation lapping
connection; mechanical connection or welding. An appropriate
connection mode should be selected according to different situations;

169
 4. The position of the connecting joint of longitudinal reinforcing bar should
avoid the web reinforcement densifying area at the end of girder and
pillar; if the connecti on joint cannot avoid such area, a high-quality
mechanical joint satisfying the equivalent strength requirement should be
used and the area percentage of the steel bar joint should not exceed
50%.
0
11.1.8 A 135 hook should be made at the end of the web reinforcement and the
length of the straight segment of the end head of the hook should not be less
than 10 times of the diameter of the steel bar; as for the web reinforcement in
the lapping length range of the longitudinal reinforcing bar, its diameter should
not be less than 0.25 times of the larger diameter of the lapping steel bar and
its interval should not be larger than 5 times of the smaller diameter of the
lapping steel bar and should not be larger than 100mm.

11.2 Materials

11.2.1 The concrete strength grade of a conc rete structure of aseismic requirement
should satisfy the following requirements:

1. When the aseismic intensity is Degree 9, the concrete strength grade should
not exceed C60; when the aseismic intensity is Degree 8, the strength grade
of concrete should not exceed C70;
2. As for frame-supported girder, frame-supported pillar and the frame girder,
frame pillar and frame node with aseismic grade of Class I, the strength grade
of concrete should not be lower than C30; the strength grade of concrete in
various othe r types of structural members should not be lower than C20.

11.2.2 Ordinary reinforcing bars in a structural member should adopt HRB400 or

HRB335 steel bars; web reinforcement should adopt HRB335, HRB400 or
HPB235 steel bars. During construction, when it is requi red to replace the
longitudinal reinforcing bars in the original design with the steel bar of higher
strength grade, the replacement should be made in the principle that the design
values of the tension bearing capacity of the steel bars are equal and should
satisfy the requirements for normal-use limit state and aseismic construction
measures.

11.2.3 As to any longitudinal reinforcing bar in various frames designed as per Grade I
and II aseismic grade, when adopting ordinary steel bars, the actual measured
values via inspection should satisfy the following requirements:
1. The ratio of the actually -measured tension strength of the steel bar and the
actually-measured yield strength should not be less than 1.25;

2. The ratio of actually-measured yield strength of steel ba r and the standard

strength should not be higher than 1.3.

11.3 Frame Girder

11.3.1 The aseismic bending capacity of normal section of the frame girder
considering the earthquake effect combination should be computed
according to the stipulation in Section 7.2 in this code, but the right term in
the formula to compute the bending bearing capacity should be divided by
an appropriate aseismic adjustment coefficient λRE for bearing capacity.

170
 The height of compression of girder-end concrete of longitudinal
compression steel bar, considered into the computation, should satisfy the
following requirements:
For I aseismic grade,

x ≤ 0.25h0 (11.3.1-1)

For II and III aseismic grade,

x ≤ 0 .35 h0 (11.3.1-2)

Moreover, the reinforcement rate of longitudinal tension steel bars at the

end of the girder should not be higher than 2.5%.

11.3.2 The design of shearing force at the end of the frame girder considering the
earthquake effect combination, Vb, should be computed according to the following
stipulations:

1. For various frames of Degree 9 of aseismic intensity and frame structures of

Grade I of aseismic grade:
l
( M bua + M bua
r
)
Vb=1.1 +V Gb (11.3.2-1)
ln

moreover, the value should not be less than the Vb value to be obtained by
using Formula (11.3.1-2).
2. For other cases,
For Grade I aseismic grade:

( M bl + M br )
V b=1.3 +VGb (11.3.2-2)
ln

For Grade II aseismic grade:

( M bl + M br )
V b=1.2 +VGb (11.3.2-3)
ln

For Grade III aseismic grade:

( M bl + M br )
V b=1.1 +VGb (11.3.2-4)
ln

For Grade IV aseismic grade, this value is taken to be the design value of the
shearing force under the earthquake effect combination.
where,
l r
M bua, M bua Bending moments of left and right ends of the frame girder to be
computed as per the standard values of section area and
material strength of actual steel bars and corresponding to the
aseismic bending bearing capacity considering the aseismic

171
 adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity;
l r
M b, M b Design values of bending moments of left and right ends of
frame girder considering the earthquake effect combination;

V Gb Design value of shearing force produced by representative

value of gravity load when considering the earthquake effect
combination, determined by computation as per a
simply-supported girder;
ln Net span of girder.
In Formula (11.3.2-1), the sum of Mlbua and M rbua should be computed for the
clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction respectively and then
take the larger value. The value of Mbua at each end can be computed by
using relating formula in Section 7.2 in this code, but in the computation, the
design value of the material strength should be replaced with the standard
strength value, while the section area of actually-configured longitudinal steel
bar should be adopted, the sign of inequality should be changed to an equal
sign and the right term of the equation should be divided by the aseismic
adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity of normal section of the girder.
l r
In Formulas (11.3.2-2) ~ (11.3.2-4), the sum of Mb and M b should be the
larger one of their respective results computed for clockwise direction and
counterclockwise direction. As for any structure of Grade I aseismic grade,
when the bending moments at two ends are negative, the bending moment of
smaller absolut e value should be taken to be zero.
11.3.3 As for the frame girder considering the earthquake effect combination, when the
span-height ratio l0/h>2.5, its shearing section should satisfy the following
condition:

1
Vb ≤ (0 .20 β c f c bh0 ) (11.3.3)
γ RE

where,
βc Concrete strength influence coefficient: when the strength grade
of concrete does not exceed C50, βc is taken to be 1.0; when
the strength grade of concrete is C80, β c is taken to be 0.8; this
coefficient is to be determined by using the linear interpolation
method.

11.3.4 The shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section of a frame girder of rectangle,
T-shaped or I-shaped section and considering the earthquake effect combination
should satisfy the following stipulations:
1. For common frame girder

1 Asv
Vb ≤ [0 .42 f t bh0 + 1.25 f v h0 ) (11.3.4-1)
γ RE s

2. For any frame girder under the action of a concentrated load (including the
case that has several loads and the shearing force produced by the
concentrated load onto the node edge covers over 75% of the total shearing
force):

172
 1 1 .05 A
Vb ≤ [ f t bh0 + f yv sv h0 ) (11.3.4-2)
γ RE λ +1 s

where,

λ Shear -span ratio of computational section. λ can be taken to be

a/h0 (λ=a/h 0), in which a is the distance from the acting point of
concentrated load to the edge of the node; when λ<1.5, λ is
taken to be 1.5; when λ>3, λ is taken to be 3.

11.3.5 The section sizes of a frame girder should satisfy the following requirements:

1. The section width should not be less than 200mm;

2. The ratio of section height and width should not be larger than 4;
3. The ratio of net span and section height should not be larger than 4.

11.3.6 The steel bar arrangement of a frame girder should satisfy the following
stipulations:
1. The reinforcement rate of longitudinal tension steel bars should not be
less than the figure stipulated in Table 11.3.6-1;

Table 11.3.6-1 Minim um Reinforcement Rates (%) of Longitudinal Tension

Steel Bars in Frame Girder
Position in girder
Aseismic Grade
Abutment In span
Grade I Larger on among 0.4 and 80ƒt/ƒ y Larger on among 0.3 and 65 ƒ t/ƒ y
Grade II Larger on among 0.3 and 65ƒt/ƒ y Larger on among 0.25 and 55ƒt /ƒ y
Grade III/IV Larger on among 0.25 and 55ƒ t /ƒ y Larger on among 0.2 and 45 ƒ t/ƒ y
2. The ratio of section area of longitudinal reinforcing bars at the bottom
and top of the end section of frame girder should be determined
through computation and this ratio for Grade I aseismic grade should
not be less than 0.5 and that for Grade II and III should not be less than
0.3;
3. The length of densifying area of the girder-end web reinforcements, the
maximum interval of web reinforcements and their minimum diameter
should be taken according to Table 11.3.6-2; when the reinforcement
rate of longitudinal tension steel bars at the end of the girder is larger
than 2%, the minimum diameter of the web reinforcement listed in the
table should be increased by 2mm.
Table 11.3.6-2 Construction Requirements for Densifying Area of Web
Reinforcements at End of Frame Girder

Length of Minimum Interval

Aseismic Max Interval of Web Reinforcement of Web
Densifying Area
Grade (mm) Reinforcement
(mm) (mm)

Larger on Minimum one among following

among 2h and figures: 6 times of diameter of
Grade I 10
500 longitudinal steel bar, 1/4 of girder
height and 100

173
 Length of Minimum Interval
Aseismic Max Interval of Web Reinforcement of Web
Densifying Area
Grade (mm) Reinforcement
(mm) (mm)
Minimum one among following
figures: 8 times of diameter of
Grade II 8
longitudinal steel bar, 1/4 of girder
height and 100

Larger on Minimum one among following

among 1.5h figures: 8 times of diameter of
Grade III 8
and 500 longitudinal steel bar, 1/4 of girder
height and 150
Minimum one among following
figures: 8 times of diameter of
Grade IV 6
longitudinal steel bar, 1/4 of girder
height and 150
Note: h in the table is the section height.
11.3.7 At least two full-long longitudinal steel bars should be configured respectively on
the top and bottom surfaces of the girder along the full length of the girder. As for
Grade I and II aseismic grade, the diameter of steel bar should not be less than
14mm and their section areas should not be less than 1/4 of the larger section
area of longitudinal reinforcing steel bar on the top and bottom surfaces at both
ends of the girder respectively; as for Grade III and IV aseismic grade, the
diameter of steel bar should not be less than 12mm.

11.3.8 The limb distance of web reinforcement in the length range of the web
reinforcement densifying area of the girder should not be larger than the larger
value of 200mm and 20 times of the web reinforcement diameter for Grade I
aseismic grade, not larger than the larger value of 250mm and 20 times of the
web reinforcement diameter for Grade II and III aseismic grade and not larger
than 300mm for Grade IV aseismic grade.
11.3.9 The distance from the first piece of web reinforcement set at the end of the girder
to the edge of the frame node should not be larger than 50mm. The web
reinforcement interval in the area with web reinforcements not densified should
not be larger than 2 times of the web reinforcement interval of the densifying area.
The reinforcement rate of web reinforcements along the full length of the girder,
ρ sv, should satisfy the following stipulations;

For Grade I aseismic grade:

ft
ρ sv ≥ 0.30 (11.3.9-1)
f yv

For Grade II aseismic grade:

ft
ρ sv ≥ 0.28 (11.3.9-2)
f yv

For Grade III and IV aseismic grade:

ft
ρ sv ≥ 0.26 (11.3.9-3)
f yv

174
 11.4 Frame Pillar and Frame Support

11.4.1 The bearing capacity of aseismic normal section of a frame pillar or

frame-supported pillar considering the earthquake effect combination should be
computed according to the stipulations in Chapter 7 in this code. However, the
right term of the bearing capacity formula should be divided by the appropriate
aseismic adjustment coefficient λR E for bearing capacity of normal section.
11.4.2 As for a frame pillar considering the earthquake effect combination, the design
values of internal forces of the sections at the upper and lower ends of the node
and the sections at the upper and lower ends of the middle layer of the
frame-supported pillar should be computed by using the following formulas:

1. Design value of bending moment at upper/lower end of node

0
1) For various frames with 9 aseismic intensity and frame structures of
Grade I aseismic intensity:

ΣM c = 1 .2 ΣM b (11.4.2-1)

moreover, it should not be less than ΣMc obtained by using Formula

(11.4.2-2).

2) Other cases
For Grade I aseismic grade:

ΣM c = 1.4ΣM b (11.4.2-2)

For Grade II aseismic grade:

(11.4. 2-3)
For Grade III aseismic grade:

ΣM c = 1.1ΣM b (11.4.2-4)

For Grade IV aseismic grade, this value is taken to be the design value of the
bending moment under the earthquake effect combination.
where,
ΣMc Sum of design values of bending moments of the upper and
lower pillar ends of the node considering the earthquake effect
combination;

ΣMbua Larger one of bending moment sums of left and right ends in the
same node to be computed as per the standard values of
section area and material strength of actual steel bars and
corresponding to the aseismic bending bearing capacity
considering the aseismic adjustment coefficient of bearing
capacity; M bua at the end of the middle girder should be
computed according to related stipulations in Article 11.3.2 in
this code;
ΣMb Larger one of design values of bending moments to be
computed for left and right girder ends in the same node for the
clockwise and counterclockwise direction when considering the
earthquake effect combination; As for Grade I aseismic grade,

175
when the bending moments at the two ends are negative, the
bending moment of smaller absolute value should be taken to
be zero.

176
 When the inflecture point is not in the storey height range of the pillar, the
design value of bending moment at the pillar end of frame pillar of Grade I, II
or III aseismic grade should be determined by directly multiplying the design
values of the bending moments considering the earthquake effect
combination by the coefficients 1.4, 1.2 or 1.1; as for the top pillar of frame
and the pillar with axle load ratio less than 0.15, the design value of pillar -end
bending moment can be taken to be the design value of bending moment
under the earthquake effect combination.
2. Design value of axial force at the upper and lower pill ar end of the node
should be taken to be the design value of their axial force under the
earthquake effect combination.

11.4.3 As for Grade I, II or III aseismic grade, the designed bending moment of the lower
section of the bottom-storey pillar in a frame structure considering the earthquake
effect combination and that of the upper / bottom section of the top-storey pillar in
a frame-supported pillar should be the designed bending moment considering the
earthquake effect combination multiplied respectively by the coefficient 1.5, 1.25
or 1.15. The longitudinal steel bars of the bottom-storey pillar should be
configured depending on the unfavorable situations of the upper and lower ends
of the bottom-storey pillar.
Note: The bottom storey hereof refers to the first storey above the foundation
without basement or above the basement.

11.4.4 The design value of shearing force of frame pillar and frame-supported pillar
considering the earthquake effect combination, V c, should be computed by using
the following formulas:
0
1. For various frames with 9 aseismic intensity and frame structures of Grade I
aseismic intensity:
t
( M cua + M cua
b
)
Vc = 1.2 (11.4.4-1)
Hn

moreover, it should not be less than ΣM c obtained by using Formula

(11.4.4-2).
2. Other cases

For Grade I aseismic grade:

( M ct + M cb )
Vc = 1.4 (11.4.4-2)
Hn

For Grade II aseismic grade:

( M ct + M cb )
Vc = 1.2 (11.4.4-3)
Hn

For Grade III aseismic grade:

( M ct + M cb )
Vc = 1.1 (11.4.4-4)
Hn

For Grade IV aseismic grade, this value is taken to be the design value of the

177
 shearing force under the earthquake effect combination.
where,
t b
M cua, M cua Bending moments of upper and lower ends of the frame pillar to
be computed as per the standard values of section area and
material strength of actual steel bars and corresponding to the
aseismic bending bearing capacity of normal section
considering the aseismic adjustment coefficient of bearing
capacity;
t b
M c, M c Design values of bending moments of upper and lower ends of
frame pillar considering the earthquake effect combination and
after adjustment;
Hn Net height of pillar.
t b
In Formula (11.4.4-1), the sum of M cua and M cua should be computed for the
clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction respectively and then
t b
take the larger value. The values of M cua and M cua can be computed
according to the stipulation in Article 11.4.1 of this code, but in the
computation, the design value of material strength should be replaced with
the standard strength value, while the section area of actually-configured
longitudinal steel bar should be adopted, the sign of inequality should be
changed to an equal sign and the right term of the equation should be divided
by an appropriate aseismic adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity. In this
case, N can be taken to be the design value of the axial compression force
produced by the representative value of the gravity load.
t b
In Formulas (11.4.4-2) ~ (11.4.4-4), the sum of Mc and M c should be the
larger one of their respective results computed for clockwise direction and
t b
counterclockwise direction. The values of Mc and M c should satisfy the
stipulations given in Articles 11.4.2 and 11.4.3 in this code.

11.4.5 The centerline of the frame pillar should coincide with the frame-supported girder.
When the number of frame pillars is more than 10, the sum of the earthquake
shearing force borne by the frame pillars should not be less than 20% of the
earthquake shearing force borne by that storey; when this number is not more
than 10, the earthquake shearing force borne by each pillar should not be less
than 2% of that storey.
11.4.6 The additional axial force of a frame pillar of Grade I and II aseismic grade
produced by the earthquake effect should be multiplied by an augmenting
coefficient 1.5 and 1.2 respectively; when computing the axle load ratio, the
augmenting coefficient can be ignored.

11.4.7 As for any frame corner pillar with aseismic grade of Grade I, II and III, the design
values of their bending moments and shearing forces should be the products of
the adjusted design values of bending moments and shearing forces given in
Articles 11.4.3 and 11.4.4 in this code multiplied by an augmenting coefficient not
less than 1.1.
11.4.8 The shearing sections of a frame pillar and frame-supported pillar considering the
earthquake effect combination should satisfy the following conditions:
For frame pillar with shear-span ratio λ>2,

1
Vc ≤ (0 .2 β c f c bh0 ) (11.4.8-1)
γ RE

178
 For frame-supported pillar and frame pillar with shear-span ratio λ≤2,

1
Vc ≤ (0 .15 β c f c bh0 ) (11.4.8-2)
γ RE

11.4.9 The aseismic shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section of frame pillar and
frame-supported pillar considering the earthquake effect combination should
satisfy the following stipulation:

1 1 .05 A
Vc ≤ [ f t bh0 + f yv sv h0 + 0.056 N ] (11.4.9)
γ RE λ +1 s

where,

λ Computational shear-span ratio of frame pillar and

frame-supported pillar, λ=M/(Vb 0); λ herein should be taken to
be the larger one of the design bending moments of the upper
and lower ends of the pillar considering the earthquake effect
combination; V is the design value of the shearing force
corresponding to M; h0 is the effective height of the section of
the pillar; when the inflecture point of the frame pillar in the
frame structure is in the storey height range of the pillar, λ can
be taken to be equal to Hn/(2h0), in which Hn is the net height of
the pillar; when λ<1.0, λ is taken to be 1.0; when λ>3.0, λ is
taken to be 3.0.

N Design value of axial compression force of frame pillar or

frame-supported pillar considering the earthquake effect
combination. When N>0.3ƒ cA, N is taken to be equal to 0.3ƒcA
(N>0.3ƒcA).

11.4.10When the frame pillar and frame-supported pillar considering the earthquake
effect combination has tension force, the aseismic shearing bearing capacity of
their normal sections should satisfy the following stipulations:

1 1 .05 A
Vc ≤ [ f t bh0 + f yv sv h0 + 0.2 N ] (11.4.10)
γ RE λ +1 s

When the computed value of the expression in the parentheses on the right of the
above expression is less than ƒyv(A sv/s)h 0, it is taken to be equal to ƒyv(A sv/s)h0
and the value of ƒ yv(A sv/s)h 0 should not be less than 0.36ƒtbh0.

In the above formula, N — Design value of ax ial tension force of frame pillar
considering earthquake effect combination.

11.4.11The section sizes of the frame pillar should satisfy the following requirements:

1. The width and height of the section of the pillar should not be less than
300mm; the diameter of the section of the cylinder should not be less than
350mm;

2. The shear-span ratio of the pillar should not be less than 2;

3. The ratio of the section height and width of the pillar should not be less than
3.

179
11.4.12The arrangement of steel bars in a frame pillar and a frame-supported pillar
should satisfy the following Stipulations:
1. The reinforcement percentage of all longitudinal reinforcing bars in a
frame pillar or frame -supported pillar should not be less than the figure
given in Table 11.4.12-1; meanwhile, the re inforcement percentage for
each side should not be less than 0.2; for any high-rise buildings built
on Class IV site, the minimum reinforcement rate should 0.1 larger than
the figure listed in the table;

Table 11.4-12-1 Minimum Reinforcement Percentage (%) of All

Longitudinal Reinforcing Bars in Pillar
Aseismic Grade
Type of Pillar
Grade I Grade II Grade III Grade IV
Mid pillar and side pillar
1.0 0.8 0.7 0.6
of frame
Corner pillar of frame,
1.2 1.0 0.9 0.8
frame-supported pillar
Note: When adopting HRB400 steel bars, the minimum reinforcement
percentage of all longitudinal reinforcing bars in the pillar should be 0.1
less than the value given in the table.
2. The web reinforcements at the upper and lower ends of the frame pillar
and frame -supported pillar should be densified, and the maximum
interval of web reinforcements in the densified area and the minimum
diameter of web reinforcement should satisfy the stipulation in Table
11.4.12-2.
Table 11.4.12-2Construction Requirements for Densified Web
Reinforcement Area at Pillar End
Minimum
Aseismic diameter of web
Maximum Interval (mm) of Web Reinforcement
Grade reinforcement
(mm)
Lesser value of 6 times of diameter of
Grade I 10
longitudinal steel bar and 100
Lesser value of 8 times of diameter of
Grade II 8
longitudinal steel bar and 100
Lesser value of 8 times of diameter of
Grade III 8
longitudinal steel bar and 150 (100 for pillar root)
Lesser value of 8 times of diameter of
Grade IV 5 (8 for pillar root)
longitudinal steel bar and 150 (100 for pillar root)
3. As for any frame-supported pillar and the frame pillar with shear-span
ratio λ≤2, web reinforcements should be densified within the full height
range of the pillar and the interval of web reinforcement should not be
larger than 100mm;
4. As to any frame pillar with Grade II aseismic grade, when the diameter
of web reinforcement is not larger than 10mm and the limb interval is
not larger than 200mm, except for pillar root, the interval of web
reinforcement should be able to adopt 150mm; when the sectio n size of
any frame pillar requiring Grade III aseismic grade is not larger than
400mm, the minimum diameter of web reinforcement should be allowed
to use 6mm; when the shear-span ratio of a frame pillar requiring Grade
IV aseismic grade is not larger than 2, the diameter of web
reinforcement should not be less than 8mm.

180
11.4.13The reinforcement rate of all longitudinal reinforcing bars in a frame pillar or
frame-supported pillar should not be larger than 5%. Longitudinal steel bars in the
pillar should be symmetrically placed. The interval of longitudinal steel bars of a
pillar with section size not larger than 400mm should be larger than 200mm.
When designing as per Grade I aseismic grade and the shear-span ratio of pillar
λ≤2, the reinforcement rate of longitudinal steel bars on each side of the pillar
should not be larger than 1.2%.
11.4.14The length of the web reinforcement densifying area of a frame pillar should be
the maximum one of the following figures: size of longer edge of the section of
the pillar (or diameter of circular section), 1/6 of net height of pillar and 500mm.
As for any corner pillar requiring the aseismic grade of Grade I and II, the web
reinforcements should be densified along the full height.

11.4.15The web reinforcement limb distance in the web reinforcement densifying area in
the pillar should not be larger than 200mm for aseismic grade I, not larger than
250mm or 20 times of web reinforcement diameter (the larger one of two) for
aseismic grade II and III, and not larger than 300mm for aseismic grade IV. In
addition, between every two longitudinal steel bars a piece of web reinforcement
or tie bar should be placed at two directions for constraint. When tie bars are
adopted for this purpose, the tie bars should be laid closely against the
longitudinal steel bar and hook the enclosed web reinforcement.
11.4.16The axle load ratio N/(ƒcA) of frame pillar and frame-supported pillar of various
types of structures the aseismic grade of which is Grade I, II or III should not be
larger than the limit value stipulated in Table 11.4.16. As for any high-rise building
built on Class IV high side, the limit value of axle load of the pillar should be
suitably reduced.
Table 11.4.16 Limit Values of Axle Load of Frame Pillar
Aseismic Grade
Structure system
I II III
Frame structure 0.7 0.8 0.9
Frame-shearwall structure, tube-shaped structure 0.75 0.85 0.95
Partially frame-supported shearwall structure 0.6 0.7 -
Notes:
1. Axle load ration N/(ƒ cA) refers to the ratio of design value N of axial compression force of frame pillar and
frame-supported pillar considering the earthquake effect combination, and the product of entire section area
A of the pillar and the design value ƒc of axial compression strength of concrete. As for a structure not
requiring earthquake effect computation, the axle load ration is taken to be the design value of the axial force
under the earthquake effect combination;
2. When the concrete strength grade is C65~C70, the limit value of the axle load ratio should be 0.05 lower
than the value listed in the table; When the concrete strength grade is C75~C80, the limit value of the axle
load ratio should be 0.10 lower than the value listed in the table;
3. As for a pillar with the shear -span ratio λ≤2, the limit value of its axle load ratio should be 0.05 lower than the
given value in the table; As for a pillar with the shear-span ratio λ<1.5, the limit value of its axle load ratio
should is subject to a special study and some special construction measures should be taken;
4. When some net -shaped composite web reinforcements are used along the whole height of the pillar and the
interval of web reinforcement should not be larger than 100mm, the limb distance should not be larger than
200mm, and the diameter should not be less than 2mm; or, some composite spiral web reinforcements are
adopted along the whole height of the pillar, and the thread distance should not be larger than 100mm, the
limb distance should not be larger than 200mm and the diameter should not be less than 12mm; or, some
continuous composite rectangle spiral web reinforcements are used along the whole height of the pillar, and
the thread distance should not be larger than 80mm, the limb distance should not be larger than 200mm and
the diameter should not be less than 100mm, the limit value of the axle load ration should be 0.10 higher
than the given value in the table; the characteristic value of the web reinforcement for the above-said three
types of web reinforcements should be determined according to Table 11.4.17 and as per the increased axle
load ratio;
5. W hen the core pillar composed of additional longitudinal steel bars are set in the middle part of the section of
the pillar and the total area of the additional longitudinal steel bars should not be less than 0.8% of the
section area of the pillar, the limit value of the axle load ration should be 0.05 more than the given value in
the table. When this measure is taken simultaneously with the measure described in Note 4, the limit value of
the axle load ratio should be 0.15 more than the given value in the table, but the characteristic value λv of the
web reinforcement should be the axle load ration plus 0.10.
6. After the above reinforcing measures are taken for the pillar, the limit value of the final axle load ratio of the
pillar should not be larger than 1.05.

181
11.4.17The volumetric reinforcement rate of web reinforcements in the densifying area of
the pillar should satisfy the following stipulations:
1. The volumetric reinforcement rate of web reinforcement of the densifying area
of the pillar should satisfy the following stipulations:

fc
ρv ≥ λv (11.4.17)
f yv

where,
ρv Volumetric reinforcement rate of thee web reinforcement
densifying area of the pillar, computed according to the
stipulation in Article 7.8.3 in this code. In the computation, the
volume of the web reinforcement of the overlapped part should
be deducted;

ƒc Design value of axial compression strength of concrete; when

the strength grade is lower than C35, this value is to be taken
as per C35;
ƒ yv Design value of tension strength of web reinforcement and tie
bar;

λv Characteristic Value of minimum attached hoop, taken

according to Table 11.4.17.
Table 11.4.17 Characteristic Value λv of Minimum Attached Hoop of
Web Reinforcement in Densifying Area of Pillar
Axle load ratio
Aseismic
Grade

Type of web reinforcement

≤0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.05

Common hoop, composite

0.10 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.20 0.23 - -
Grade I

hoop
Spiral hoop, composite or
continuous composite 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.21 - -
rectangle spiral hoop
Common hoop, composite 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.19 0.22 0.24
Grad3e II

hoop
Spiral hoop, composite or
continuous composite 0.06 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.20 0.22
rectangle spiral hoop
Common hoop, composite 0.06 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.20 0.22
Grade III

hoop
Spiral hoop, composite hoop
or continuous composite 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.20
rectangle spiral hoop
Notes:
1. Common hoop refers to a single rectangle web reinforcement or a single circular web reinforcement;
spiral hoop refers to a single spiral web reinforcement; composite hoop refers to the web
reinforcement composed of rectangle, polygonal, circular web reinforcement or tie bar; composite
spiral hoop refers to the web reinforcement composed of spiral web reinforcement and rectangle,
polygonal, circular web reinforcement or tie bar; continuous composite rectangle spiral hoop refers to
the web reinforcement in which all spiral web reinforcements are processed from a steel bar;
2. When computing the volumetric reinforcement rate of composite spiral hoop, the volumetric
reinforcement rate of non-spiral web reinforcements should be multiplied by a conversion coefficient
0.8.
3. As for any pillar with Grade I, II, III or IV of aseismic grade, the volumetric reinforcement rate of web
reinforcements in its web reinforcement densifying area should not be less than 0.8%, 0.6%, 0.4% and
0.4% respectively.

182
 4. When the concrete strength grade is higher than C60, it is advisable to adopt composite hoop,
composite spiral hoop or continuous composite rectangle spiral hoop as the web reinforcement; when
the axle load ratio is not larger than 0.6, the characteristic value of the minimum attached hoop in its
densifying area should be the given figure in the table plus 0.02; when the axle load ratio is larger than
0.6, the given figure should be plus 0.03.

2. The frame-supported pillar should adopt composite spiral hoop or grid-type

composite hoop, the characteristic value of its minimum attached hoop should
be the appropriate value in Table 11.4.17 plus 0.02 and the volumetric
reinforcement rate should not be less than 1.5%.

3. When the shear-span ratio λ≤2, the pillar requiring Grade I, II or III of
aseismic grade should adopt composite spiral hoops or grid-type composite
hoop, and the volumetric reinforcement rate of its web reinforcement should
not be less than 1.2%; when the structure has 90 aseismic intensity, the
volumetric reinforcement ratio should not be less than 1.5%.
11.4.18Outside the densifying area of web reinforcement of the pillar, the volumetric
reinforcement of web reinforcement should not be less than 1/2 of the
reinforcement rate of the densifying area; as for any structure with the aseismic
grade being Grade I or II, the interval of web reinforcement should not be larger
than 10d; as to any structure with aseismic grade being Grade III or IV, the
interval of web reinforcement should not be larger than 15d. In this article, d is the
diameter of longitudinal steel bar.

11.5 Hinged Trestle Stand Pillar

11.5.1 Longitudinal reinforcing bars and web reinforcements in a hinged trestle stand
pillar should be computed and determined as per the design values of bending
moment and shearing force under the earthquake effect combination and
according to the stipulations in Section 11.4 in this code. Its construction should
comply with related stipulations in Chapter 9, Chapter 10, Section 11.1 and
Section 11.2 in this code.
11.5.2 As for any hinged trestle stand pillar with aseismic design requirement, its web
reinforcement densifying area should satisfy the following stipulations:

1. Length of web reinforcement densifying area

1) This length for the top segment of the pillar is 500mm below the pillar top
and should not less than the height of the top section of the pillar;
2) This value for the crane girder segment is 300mm from the root of the
upper pillar over to the top of the crane girder;
3) This value for the pillar root segment is 500mm from the top of the
foundation over to the indoor terrace;
4) This value for corbel segment is the full height of the corbel;

5) This value for the node between pilar-t o-pilar support and pillar
connection and the constrained position of the pillar is 300mm
respectively above or below the node.

2. The maximum interval between web reinforcements in the web reinforcement

densifying area is 100mm; the diameter of web reinforcement should satisfy
the stipulation in Table 11.5.2.

183
 Table 11.5.2 Minimum Diameter (mm) of Web Reinforcement in Web
Reinforcement Densifying Area of Hinged Trestle Stand Pillar
Aseismic Grade and Type of Sites
Grade I Grade II Grade II Grade III Grade III Grade IV
Segment of Densifying
Class III Class III
Area Various Class I Class I Various
and IV and IV
sites and II site and II site sites
site site
General pillar top and roof
8(10) 8 6
segment
Top of corner pillar 10 10 8
Crane girder, corbel
segment and supported 10 8 8
pillar root segment
Supported pillar top
segment and constrained 10 10 8
position of pillar
Note: The figure in parentheses is used for pillar root.
11.5.3 When the hinged trestle stand is laterally constrained and the length l from the
constrained point to the pillar top is not larger than twice of the length of the edge
of the pillar section at that direction (trestle stand plane: l≤2h, plane vertical to
trestle stand: l≤2b), the construction of the embedded steel plates i n the top of the
pillar and the densifying area of web reinforcements in the top of the pillar should
additionally satisfy the following requirements:

1. The length of the embedded steel plate in the top of the pillar along the trestle
plane direction should be the height h of the section of the pillar top, but in
any case, should not be less than h/2 and 300mm;

2. When the eccentric distance e0 of the axial force in the top of the pillar
produced in the trestle stand plane is within the range of h/6 ~ h/4, the
volumetric reinforcement rate of web reinforcements in the web reinforcement
densifying area of the pillar top should not be less than 1.2% for the structure
with Grade I aseismic grade; not less than 1.0% for Grade II and not less than
0.8% for Grade III or IV.
11.5.4 Under the action of vertical force and horizontal tension force in the earthquake
effect combination, the pillar corbel supporting the low-span roofing girder, roof
truss and other workshop roof structures of unequal heights should, in addition to
be subject to computation and reinforcement according to stipulations in Chapter
10 in this code, satisfy the following requirements:
1. For anchor bars to bear the horizontal tension force: there should be no less
than 2 φ16mm steel bars for Grade I (aseismic grade), no less than 2 φ14
steel bars for Grade II, or no less than 2 φ12mm steel bars for Grade III or IV.
2. The anchoring measures and anchoring length of longitudinal tension steel
bars and anchor bars in the corbel should satisfy the stipulations in Section
10.8 in this code, but the anchoring length l a of the tension steel bar should
be replaced with l aE.

3. The minimum diameter of horizontal web reinforcement of the corbel is 8,mm

and the maximum interval is 100mm.

184
 11.6 Nodes of Frame Girder/Pillar and Embedde d Parts

11.6.1 Any frame with aseismic grade being Grade I or II should be subject to
computation of aseismic shearing bearing capacity for the core area of the node.
The core area of the node of a frame with aseismic grade being Grade III or IV
may not be subjec t to such computation, but it should satisfy the requirement of
the aseismic construction measures. The method of aseismic shearing bearing
capacity computation and aseismic construction measures for nodes in the
middle layer of the frame-supported layer are the same as those for the nodes in
the middle layer of the frame.

11.6.2 The design shear value V j of the core area of the node of a frame girder or pillar
should be computed according to the following stipulations:

1. Various frames of 90 aseismic intensity and frame structure with aseismic

grade being Grade I
1) Middle node and end node of top layer
l
( M bua + M buar
)
V j = 1 .15 (11.6.2-1)
hb 0 − α 's

and should not be less than the Vj value to be computed by using

Formula (11.6.2-3).
2) Middle and end nodes of other layers

l
( M bua + M buar
) h −α ' s
V j = 1 .15 (1 − b 0 ) (11.6.3-2)
hb 0 − α ' s H c − hb

and should not be less than the Vj value to be computed by using

Formula (11.6.2-4);

2. Other cases
1) For Grade I aseismic grade
For middle and end nodes of top layer

(M bl + M br )
V j = 1 .35 (11.6.2-3)
h b 0 − α 's

For middle and end nodes of other layer

( M bl + M br ) h − α 's
V j = 1 .35 (1 − b 0 ) (11.6.2-4)
hb 0 − α ' s H c − hb

2) For Grade II aseismic grade

185
 For middle and end nodes of top layer

(M bl + M br )
V j = 1 .2 (11.6.2-5)
h b 0 − α 's

For middle and end nodes of other layer

(M bl + M br ) h − α's
V j = 1 .2 (1 − b 0 ) (11.6.2-6)
h b 0 − α 's H c − hb

where,
l r
M bua, M bua Bending moments of left and right ends of the frame node to be
computed as per the standard values of section area and
material strength of actual steel bars and corresponding to the
aseismic bending bearing capacity considering the aseismic
adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity;
l r
M b, M b Design values of bending moments of left and right ends of
frame node considering the earthquake effect combination;
h bo, hb Effective height of frame section and section height. When the
girder heights at two sides of the node are different, their
average is taken;

Hc Distance between the inflecture points of the upper and lower

pillars of the node;

a' s Distance from the application point of joint force of longitudinal

compression steel bar of the pillar to the near edge of the
section.
l r l r
(M bua+M bua) in Formulas (11.6.2-1) and (11.6.2-2) and (M b+M b) in Formulas
(11.6.2-3) and (11.6.2-4) should be taken according to the stipulation in Article
11.3.2 in this code.
11.6.3 The horizontal shearing section in the core area of the node of a frame girder /
pillar should satisfy the following conditions:

1
Vj ≤ (0.3η j β c f c b j h j ) (11.6.3)
γ RE

where,

hj Section height of the core area of the frame node. It can be

taken to be the height of the pillar section at the check
computation direction, i.e. hj= hc.
bj Effective check computation width of the section in the core
area of the frame node. When bb≥bc/2, bj= bc, when bb< bc/2, bj is
equal to the lesser value of (bb+0.5hc ) and bc. when the
centerlines of the girder and the pillar does not coincide and the
eccentric distance e0≤b c/4, it can be taken to be the minimum
value among (0.5bb+0.5b c+0.25h c-e 0), (bb+0.5hc ) and bc; b b
hereof is the width of the section of the girder at the check
computation direction and bc is the width of the section of the
side pillar.

186
 ηj Constraint influence coefficient of orthonormal girder to the node:
when the floor plates are cast-in-situ plates, the centerlines of
girder and pillar coincides, the widths of various girder sections
on four sides do not less than 1/2 of the section width of that
side pillar and the girder height at the orthonormal direction is
not less than 3/4 of the height of the higher frame girder, ηj can
be taken to 1.5. As for a structure requiring 90 aseismic intensity,
η j=1.25; when the above constraint conditions are not be
satisfied, ηj=1.0.
11.6.4 The aseismic shearing bearing capacity of the nodes of frame girder / pillar
should satisfy the following stipulations:

1. For a structure requiring 90 aseismic intensity

1 hb 0 − α ' s
Vj ≤ [0.9η j f c b j h j + f yv Asvj ) (11.6.4-1)
γ RE s

2. For other cases

1 bj hb 0 − α ' s
Vj ≤ [1.1η j f cb j h j + 0.05η j N + f yv Asvj ) (11.6.4-2)
γ RE bc s

where,

N Design value of axial force in the bottom of the upper pillar at

the node corresponding to the design value of shearing force
considering the earthquake effect combination: when N is a
compression force, it is taken to be the lesser value of the
design values of axial compression forces; moreover, when
N>0.5ƒc b chc, N=0.5ƒcb chc; when N is a tension force, N=0;
A svj Area of all sections of various limbs of web reinforcements
within the effective check computation width range of the core
area and at the same section check computation direction.
h b0 Effective height of girder section. When the section heights on
both sides of the node are not equal, N is taken to be their
average.

11.6.5 When the gi rder centerline coincides with the pillar centerline, the horizontal
shearing section of the girder/pillar node of the cylinder frame should satisfy the
following condition:

1
Vj ≤ (0.3η j β c f c A j ) (11.6.5)
γ RE

where,
Aj Effective section area of the core area of the node: when the
girder width b b≥0.5D, Aj is taken to be 0.8D , when
2

0.4D≤bb<0.5D, A j is taken to be 0.8D(bb+0.5D);

D Diameter of cylinder section;

187
 bb Section width of girder;
ηj Constraint influence coefficient of orthonormal girder to the node,
taken according to Article 11.6.3 in this code.

11.6.6 When the girder centerline coincides with the pillar centerline, the aseismic
shearing bearing capacity of the girder / pillar node of cylinder frame should
satisfy the following stipulations:
0
1. For 9 aseismic intensity

1 hb 0 − α ' s h −α ' s
Vj ≤ [1 .2η j f c A j + 1.57 f yv Ash + f yv Asvj b 0 ) (11.6.6-1)
γ RE s s

2. Other cases

1 N h − α's h − α 's
Vj ≤ [1 .5η j f c A j + 0 .05η j + A j + 1.57 f yv Ash b 0 f yv Asvj b 0 )
γ RE D 2
s s
(11.6.6-2)
where,

h b0 Effective height of girder section

A sh Section area of a single circular web reinforcement;

A svj Area of all sections of tie bars in the same section check
computation direct and various limbs of non-circular web
reinforcements.

11.6.7 The anchoring and lapping joint of longitudinal reinforcing bars of frame girder
and frame pillar made in the node area of the frame should satisfy the following
requirements:
1. At the middle node of the middle layer of the frame, the upper longitudinal
steel bars of the frame girder should go through the middle node; the
anchoring length that the lower longitudinal steel bar of the girder stretch into
the middle node should not be less than laE for Grade I or II aseismic grade
and the length stretched over the centerline should not be less than 5d (as
shown in Figure 11.6.7a). As for any structure with aseismic being Grade I or
II, the diameter of each longitudinal steel bar going through the center pillar in
the girder should not be larger than 1/20 of the section size at that direction;
as for a cylinder section, this diameter should not be larger than 1/20 of the
chord length of the pillar section where the longitudinal steel bars are located.

188
2. At the end node of the middle layer of the frame, when the upper longitudinal
steel bars in the frame girder are anchored into the end node by means of
straight -line anchoring, in addition that its anchoring length should not less
than laE, it should be stretched over the centerline of the pillar for no less than
5d. d hereof is the diameter of the upper longitudinal steel bar of the girder.
When the anchoring length of the horizontal straight line is in sufficient, the
upper longitudinal steel bar of the girder should be stretched to the outer
edge of the pillar and be bent downwards. The horizontal projection length
before bending should not be less than 0.4laE, and the vertical projection
length after bending is taken to be 5d (as shown in Figure 11.6.7b). The
anchoring measures for lower longitudinal steel bars of the girder taken in the
end nodes of the middle layer are the same as those for upper longitudinal
steel bars of the girder, but its vertical segment should be upwards bent into
the node.

Figure 11.6.7 Anchoring and Lapping Joint of Longitudinal Reinforcing Bars of

Frame Girder and Frame Pillar in the Node Area

(a) Middle node of middle layer; (b) End node of middle layer; (c) Middle node of top layer; (d)
End node (I) of top layer; (e) End Node (II) of top layer

3. At the end node of top layer of the frame, the longitudinal steel bars of the
pillar should be stretched into the top of the pillar. When the straight -line
anchoring method is used, the anchoring length starting from the bottom edge
of the girder should not be less than laE; when the anchoring length of the
straight -line segment is insufficient, these longitudinal steel bars can be
inwards bent after they have stretched to the pillar top. The vertical projection
length of the anchoring segment before bending should not be less than
0.5l aE and it horizontal projection length after bending should be taken to be
12d. when the building roof is made of cast-in-situ concrete, the concrete
strength of the plate is not lower than C20 and the plate thickness is not less
than 80mm, the steel bars can be bent outwards and the horizontal projection
length after bending is taken to be 12d (Figure 11.6.7c). As for any structure
requiring the aseismic grade being Grade I or II, the diameter of the upper
longitudinal steel bars of the girder going through the middle node of the top

189
 layer should not be larger than 1/25 of the section size at that direction. The
anchoring measures of the lower longitudinal steel bars of the girder taken for
the middle node of the top layer are the same as those for the lower
longitudinal steel bars of the girder taken for the middle node of the middle
layer.
4. At the end node of the top layer of the frame, the longitudinal steel bars on
the outer side of the pillar can be connected to the upper longitudinal steel
bars of the girder along the outer side of the node and the upper edge of the
girder through lapping joint (as shown in Figure 10.6.7d). The lapping length
should not be less than 1.5laE and the section area of the longitudinal steel
bars stretching into the girder on the outer side of the pillar should not be less
than 65% of the area of all sections of the longitudinal steel bars in the outer
side of the pillar. The outside longitudinal steel bars that cannot be stretched
into the girder should be stretched into the inner edge o the pillar along the
top of the pillar; when the steel bars of that pillar are located in the first layer
of the top, it can be cut after stretched into the pillar; d hereof is the diameter
of the longitudinal steel bar in the outside pillar; when any cast-in-situ plates
area used and their concrete strength grade is not lower than C20 and the
plate thickness is not less than 80mm, the longitudinal steel bar of the pillar
out of the girder width range can be stretched into the plate and its stretched
length is identical to the length that the longitudinal steel bar of the pillar
stretches into the girder. The upper longitudinal steel bars of the girder should
be stretched to the outer edge of the pillar and then downwards bent to the
elevation of the girder bottom. When the reinforcement rate of longitudinal
steel bars in the outer side of the pillar is larger than 1.2%, the longitudinal
steel bars of the pillar stretched into the girder should satisfy the above
stipulations and should be divided into two batched for cutting. The distance
between two cutting points should not be less than 20d. d hereof is the
diameter of the upper longitudinal steel bar of the girder.

When the reinforcement rates of the girder and pillar are relatively high, the
lapping joint of the upper longitudinal steel bars of the girder at the end node
of the top layer and the longitudinal steel bars in the outer side of the pillar
can be set along the outer edge of the pillar (as shown in Figure 11.6.7e) and
the lapping length should not be less than 1.7aE. The longitudinal steel bars
in the outer side of the pillar should be stretched into the top of the pillar and
inwards bent, while the horizontal projection length of the bent segment
should not be less than 12d.
When the diameter of the steel bar d≤25mm, the inner radius of the arc of the
upper longitudinal steel bar of the girder and the outer longitudinal steel bar of
the pillar at the upp er corner of the end node of the top layer should not be
less than 6d; when d>25mm, it should not be less than 8d. When the
reinforcement rate of the upper longitudinal steel bar of the girder is larger
than 1.2%, the upper longitudinal steel bars of the girder bent into the outer
side of the pillar should be divided into two batched for cutting in addition to
meeting the lapping length requirement and the distance between two cutting
points should not be less than 20d (d is the diameter of the upper longitudinal
steel bar of the girder).

190
 The anchoring measures taken in the end node of the top layer for the lower
longitudinal steel bars of the girder are the same as those taken in the end
node of the middle layer for the upper longitudinal steel bars of the girder. The
anchoring measures taken in the end node of the top layer for the longitudinal
steel bars in the inner side of the pillar are the same as those taken in the
middle node of the top layer for longitudinal steel bars of the pillar. When
reinforcements are symmetrically arranged for the pillar, the requirements for
anchoring at the end node of the top layer set for the longitudinal steel bars in
the inter side of the pillar can be suitably loosened, but the longitudinal steel
bars in the inner side of the pillar should be stretched to the top of the pillar.
5. The longitudinal steel bars of the pillar should not be cut in the node of
various middle layers.

11.6.8 The maximum interval and minimum diameter of web reinforcement in the core
area of the frame node should be taken according to Table 11.4.12-2 in this code.
As for the core area of frame nodes with aseismic grade being Grade I, II or III,
the characteristic value λ v of web reinforcement should not be less than 0.12,
0.10 and 0.08 respectively and the volumetric reinforcement ratios of their web
reinforcements should not be less than 0.6%, 0.5% and 0.4% respectively. The
characteristic value of the web reinforcement in the core area of the frame node
with the frame pillar shear-span ratio λ≤2 should not be4 less than the larger
value of the characteristic values of the web reinforcements in the upper and
lower pillar ends of the core area.

11.6.9 The section area of the straight -anchored steel bars of any embedded parts
considering the earthquake effect combination can be computed according to the
stipulations in Chapter 10 of this code, but the section area of the actual anchor
bars should be 25% higher the computational value and the thickness of the
anchor plate should be accordingly adjusted. The anchoring length of the anchor
bar should be taken according to the stipulations in Chapter 10 of this code; when
it cannot satisfy the given conditions, some effective measures should be taken.
At where close to the anchor plate, there should be set with a piece of enclosed
web reinforcement the diameter of which is not less than 10mm.

The straight anchor bar of the embedded part at the top of the hinged trestle
stand pillar should satisfy the following requirements: when Grade I aseismic
grade is required, 4 pieces of φ16mm straight anchor bars should be placed;
when Grade II aseismic grade is required, 4 pieces of φ14mm straight anchor
bars should be used.

11.7 Shearwall

11.7.1 The aseismic bearing capacity of normal section of a shearwall considering the
earthquake effect combination should be computed according to the
stipulations in Chapter 7 and Article 10.5.3 of this Code, but the right term of the
normal section bearing capacity formula should be divided by an appropriate
bearing aseismic adjustment coefficient γR E.

11.7.2 As to the design value of bending moment of various wall limb sections of a
shearwall considering the earthquake effect combination: it should be taken on
the basis of the design value of bending moment of the bottom section of the
wall limb considering the earthquake effect combination for the reinforcing

191
 position of the bottom of the shearwall of Grade I aseismic grade and the above
layer, and for other position, this value can be the product of the design value of
bending moment considering the earthquake effect combination multiplied by
the augmenting coefficient 1.2.
11.7.3 The shear design value Vw of the shearwall considering the earthquake effect
combination should be computed according to the following stipulations:

1. Reinforcing position at the bottom

0
1) For 9 aseismic intensity

M wua
Vw = 1 .1 V (11.7.3-1)
M

and should not be less than the shear design value Vw to be computed
by using Formula (11.7.3-2).
2) Other cases

For Grade I aseismic grade

Vw = 1.6V (11.7.3-2)

For Grade II aseismic grade

Vw = 1.4V (11.7.3-3)

For Grade III aseismic grade

Vw = 1.2V (11.7.3-4)

For Grade IV aseismic grade, the design value of shearing force

under the earthquake effect combination should be taken.
2. For other positions

Vw = V (11.7.3-5)

where,
M wua Bending moments of bottom section of shearwall to be
computed as per the standard values of section area and
material strength of actual steel bars and corresponding to the
aseismic bending bearing capacity considering the aseismic
adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity;
M Design values of bending moments of bottom section of
shearwall considering the earthquake effect combination;
V Design value of shearing force considering the earthquake
effect combination;

Mwua in Formula (11.7.3-1) can be taken according to the stipulation in Article

7.3.6 of this code and determined by using the same method as that is sued to
compute Mcua value of the frame pillar in Article 11.4.4 of this Code, but its γR E
value should adopt the adjustment coefficient of the normal section bearing
capacity of shearwall.

192
11.7.4 The shearing section of shearwall considering the earthquake effect
combination should satisfy the following conditions:
When the shear-span ratio λ>2.5,

1
Vw ≤ (0 .2 β c f c bh0 ) (11.7.4-1)
γ RE

When the shear-span λ≤2.5,

1
Vw ≤ (0 .15 β c f c bh0 ) (11.7.4-2)
γ RE

11.7.5 The aseismic shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section of an eccentric

compression shearwall considering the earthquake effect combination should
satisfy the following stipulation:

1 1 A A
Vw ≤ [ (0.4 f t bh0 + 0.1N w ) + 0.8 f yv sv h0 ] (11.7.5)
γ RE λ − 0 .5 A s

where,
N Lesser one among design values of axial compression force of
shearwall considering the earthquake effect combination; when
N>0.2ƒc b h, N=0.2ƒ cbh is taken;
λ Shear -span ratio at computational section (λ=M/(Vh0); when
λ<1.5, λ=1.5 is taken; when λ>2.2, λ is taken to be 2.2; M
hereof is the design value of bending moment corresponding to
the shear design value V; when the distance between the
computational section and the wall bottom is less than h0/2, λ
should be computed as per the design values of bending
moment and shearing force at where h0/2 away from the wall
bottom.
11.7.6 The aseismic shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section of shearwall when
its is eccentrically in tension should satisfy the following stipulations:

1 1 A A
Vw ≤ [ (0.4 f t bh0 + 0.1N w ) + 0.8 f yv sh h0 ] (11.7.6)
γ RE λ − 0 .5 A s

When the computed value in the parentheses in the right of Formula (11.7.6) is
less than 0.8ƒ yv(A sh /s)h0, it is taken to be 0.8ƒ yv(A sh/s)h0.
In the above formula, N is the larger value among design values of axial tension
forces of shearwall considering the earthquake effect combination.
11.7.7 The shearing bearing capacity of the shearwall requiring Grade I aseismic
grade at its horizontal construction joint should satisfy the following stipulations:

193
 When the construction joint bears an axial compression force,

1
Vw ≤ (0 .6 f y As + 0 .8 N ) (11.7.7-1)
γ RE

When the construction joint bears an axial tension force,

1
Vw ≤ (0.6 f y As − 0.8N ) (11.7.7-2)
γ RE

where,
N Design value of axial force at the horizontal construction joint
considering the earthquake effect combination;
As Section area of all vertical steel bars at the horizontal
construction joint of shearwall, including the total section area of
vertical distributed bars, additional vertical steel dowels and
longitudinal steel bars of boundary members (excluding wing
walls on both sides).
11.7.8 The bearing capacity of continuous girder at hole mouth of shearwall should
satisfy the following stipulations:

1. The aseismic bending bearing capacity of normal section of the

continuous girder should be computed according to the stipulations in
Sections 7.2 of this code, but the right term of the formula should be
multiplied by an appropriate aseismic adjustment coefficient γR E of
bearing capacity;

2. For continuous girder with span-height l0/h>2.5,

1) The shearing section of the continuous girder should satisfy the
following condition:

1
Vwb ≤ (0 .2 f c β c bh0 ) (11.7.8-1)
γ RE

2) The aseismic shearing bearing capacity of the diagonal section of

the continuous girder of the shearwall should satisfy the following
stipulation:

1 Asv
Vwb ≤ (0.42 f t bh0 + f yv h0 ) (11.7.8-2)
γ RE s

where, V wb is the design value of shearing force of the continuous girder

and shall be computed according to the stipulation for frame girders set
forth in Article 11.3.2 of this code.
Note: As for a continuous girder with span-height rate l0/h≤2.5, the
control conditions for its aseismic shearing section and the aseismic
shearing bearing capacity of its diagonal section should be determined
according to a special standard;
3. As to the continuous girder of any shearwall in various structures the
aseismic grade is Grade I or II, when the span-height ratio l0/h≤2.0 and

194
 the section width of the continuous girder is not less than 200mm, some
declinate-crossed constructional bars should be set in addition to
ordinary steel bars;
4. As for any continuous girder of inner tube and core tube in a tube-type
structure requiring Grade I or II aseismic grade, when its span-height
ratio is not larger than 2 and the section width is not less than 400mm, it
is advisable to adopt declinate-crossed embedded pillar for
reinforcement arrange, all the shearing force should be borne by the
longitudinal steel bars in the embedded pillar and some web
reinforcements should be set according to the constructional
requirements of the frame girder.

11.7.9 The thickness of a shearwall should satisfy the following stipulations:

1. Shearwall structure
The thickness of a shearwall requiring Grade I or II aseismic grade
should not be less than 160mm and not less than 1/20 of the st orey
height; the wall thickness of the reinforcing position at the bottom should
not be less than 200mm and not less than 1/16 of the storey height;
when there is no end pillar or wing wall at the wall end, the wall thickness
should not be less than 1/12 of the storey height. It should not be less
than 140mm and 1/25 of the storey height for any structure requiring
Grade III or IV aseismic grade.

2. Frame-shearwall structure and tube-type structure

The thickness of the shearwall should not be less than 160mm and 1/20
of the storey height, and the wall thickness at its bottom reinforcing
position should not be less than 200mm and 1/16 of the storey height.
The thickness of the wall body should not be changed for the bottom
reinforcing position of the tube body and its higher storey.

11.7.10 When the thickness of the shearwall is larger than 140mm, its vertical and
horizontal distributed bars should adopt two rows of steel bars; the interval of tie
bars between the two rows of distributed bars should not be larger than 500mm
and the diameter should not be less than 6mm. At the reinforcing position at the
bottom, the interval of tie bars in the wall body outside the boundary structure
should be densified.
11.7.11 The configuration of horizontal and vertical distributed bars in a shearwall
should satisfy the following stipulations:

1. The reinforcement rate of horizontal and vertical distributed bars in

a shearwall requiring Grade I, II or III aseismic grade should not be
less than 0.25%; that for a shearwall requiring Grade IV aseismic
grade should not be less than 0.2% and the interval of distributed
bars should not be larger than 300mm; the diameter should not be
less than 8mm;
2. As for the bottom reinforcing position of a shearwall in a partially
frame-supported shearwall structure, the reinforcement rate of
horizontal and vertical distributed bars should not be less than 0.3%
and the interval of steel bars should not be larger than 200mm.
11.7.12 The diameter of the horizontal and vertical distributed bars of the shearwall
should not be larger than 1/10 of the wall thickness.

195
11.7.13 As for any shearwall requiring Grade I or II aseismic grade, the bottom
reinforcing position of which is under the action of the representative gravity
load, the wall limb axle load ratio N/(ƒcA) should not exceed the limit value
given in Table 11.7.13.
Table 11.7.13 Limit Values of Axle Load Ratios of Wall Limb
Aseismic Grade (Aseismic
Grade I (90) Grade I (8 0) Grade II
intensity)
Limit value of axle load ratio 0.4 0.5 0.6
Note: A in the axle load ratio N/(ƒcA) of wall limb of shearwall is the section area
of the wall limb.

11.7.14 Some boundary members should be set on both ends of the shearwall and on
both sides of the hole mouth and they should satisfy the following requirements:
1. As for the shearwall in a shearwall structure and frame-shearwall
structure requiring the aseismic grade reaching Grade I or II, when it is
under the action of typical gravity load and the axle load ratio of the
bottom section of the wall limb is larger than the given value in Table
11.7.14, at its bottom reinforcing position and in the wall limbs in the
above storey should be set some constraint boundary members
according to the stipulation in Article 11.7.15 of this code; when this ratio
is less than the given value in Table 11.7.14, some constructional
boundary members should be set according to the stipulation in Article
11.7.16 of this code.
Table 11.7.14 Maximum Axle Load Ratio of Constructional Boundary
Member Set in Shearwall
Aseismic Grade (Aseismic
Grade I (90) Grade I (8 0) Grade II
intensity)
Axle load ratio 0.1 0.2 0.3
2. In a partially frame-supported shearwall structure, as for the wall limbs at
the bottom reinforcing position and in the above storey of the floor
shearwall requiring Grade I or II aseismic grade, the wing wall or end
pillar satisfying the requirements for constraint boundary members
should be set in the two ends of the shearwall according to the stipulation
in Article 11.7.15 of this code; As for any non-floor shearwall, some
constraint boundary members should be set at the two ends of the wall
limb of the bottom reinforcing position and in the upper storey of
shearwall;

3. As for the shearwall in a common position in a shearwall structure and

frame-shearwall structure requiring Grade I or II aseismic grade and the
shearwall in a shearwall structure or frame-shearwall structure requiring
Grade III or IV aseismic grade, the constructional boundary members
should be set according to Article 11.7.16 of this code;

4. In addition to satisfying the requirements set forth in Term 1 and 3 of this

article, the core tube of a frame ~ core tube structure and the inner tube
of a tube-in-tube structure should be reinforced for the boundary
members in the corner position of the tube body of Grade I or II aseismic
grade according to the following requirements: at the bottom reinforcing
position, the length of the constraint boundary member along the wall
limb should be taken to be 1/4 of the section height of the wall limb and
web reinforcements should be adopted in the whole scope of the

196
 constraint boundary member; In the full height range above the bottom
reinforcing position, constraint boundary members should be set as per
the corner wall shown in Figure 11.7.15 in this code, and the length of the
constraint boundary member along the wall limb still should be taken to
be 1/4 of the section height of the wall limb.

11.7.15 The constraint boundary members (embedded pillar, end pillar, wing wall and
corner wall) set at the end of a shearwall should satisfy the following
requirements (Figure 11.7.15):

Figure 11.7.15 Constraint Boundary Member of Shearwall

Note: The unit of the size in the figure is mm.

(a) Embedded pillar; (b) End Pillar; (c) Wing wall; (d) Corner wall

1 – Area with characteristic value of attached hoop being λv; 2 – Area with characteristic value
of attached hoop being λv/2

1. The length of constraint boundary member along the wall limb, lc, and the
characteristic value of attached hoop, λv, should satisfy the requirements in
Table 11.7.15. The web reinforcement arrangement scope and the
corresponding areas with characteristic value of attached hoop equal to λv
and λv/2 are as shown in Figure 11.7.15, and their volumetric reinforcement
rate ρ v should be computed by using the following formula:

fc
ρv = λv (11.7.15)
f yv

197
 In this formula, λv is the characteristic value of attached hoop, as for the
area with λv/2 in Figure 11.7.15, tie bars can be counted.
2. The section area of longitudinal steel bar in the constraint boundary
member in shearwall requiring Grade I or II aseismic grade should, as for
embedded pillar, respectively should not less than 1.0% and 1.0% of the
product of the length lc of the constraint boundary member along the wall
limb and the wall thickness bw; as for end pillar, wing wall and corner wall,
this area should not be less than 1.0% and 1.0% of the area of the shaped
part in Figure 11.7.15 respectively.

Table 11.7.15 Length lc of Constraint Boundary Member along Wall

Limb and Characteristic Value λv of its Attached Hoop
Aseismic grade
Grade I (90) Grade I (80) Grade II
(Aseismic intensity)
λv 0.2 0.2 0.2
Larger one among
Embedded Larger one among Larger one among
0.25h w, 1.5bw and
pillar 0.2h w, 1.5b w and 450 0.2h w, 1.5b w and 450
Lc 450
(mm) End pillar, Larger one among Larger one among
Larger one among
wing wall or 0.15h w, 1.5bw and 0.15h w, 1.5b w and
0.2h w, 1.5bw and 450
corner wall 450 450
Notes:
1. When the length of wing wall is less than 3 times of its thickness, it is regarded
as a shearwall without wing wall; When the section edge length of end pillar is less
than 2 times of the wall thickness, it is regarded as the shearwall without end pillar;
2. In addition to satisfying the requirement in Table 11.7.15, the length of the
constraint boundary member along the wall limb, lc, should not be less than the
thickness of the wing wall or the height of the end pillar along the wall limb direction
plus 300mm;
3. The interval of web reinforcement or tie bar of the constraint boundary member
should not be larger than 100mm for Grade I aseismic grade or not less than
150mm for Grade II aseismic grade;
4. hw is the length of wall limb of shearwall.

11.7.16 The range of constructional boundary members (embedded pillar, end pillar,
wing wall and corner wall) set at the end of shearwall should be taken
according to Figure 11.7.16. The longitudinal steel bars of the constructional
boundary member should satisfy the requirements in Table 11.7.16 in addition
to meeting the computation requirements.

Figure 11.7.16 Constructional Boundary Member of Shearwall

(a) Embedded pillar; (b) End pillar; (c) Wing wall; (d) Corner wall
Note: the size in this figure adopts mm.

198
 Table 11.7.16 Requirement for Constructional Reinforcement
Arrangement of Constructional Boundary Member
Bottom reinforcing position Other positions
Minimum Web reinforcement, tie Minimum Web reinforcement, tie
reinforcement bar reinforcement bar
Aseismic
rate of Maximum rate of Maximum
Grade Minimum Minimum
longitudinal vertical longitudinal vertical
diameter diameter
web interval web interv al
(mm) (mm)
reinforcement (mm) reinforcement (mm)
Larger one Larger one
among 0.01A c among 0.008A c
I 8 100 8 150
and 6 φ16mm and 6 φ14mm
steel bar steel bar
Larger one Larger one
among 0.008A c among 0.006A c
II 8 150 8 200
and 6 φ14mm and 6 φ12mm
steel bar steel bar
Lar ger one Larger one
among 0.005A c among 0.004A c
III 6 150 6 200
and 4 φ12mm and 4 φ12mm
steel bar steel bar
Larger one Larger one
among 0.005A c among 0.004A c
IV 6 200 6 250
and 4 φ12mm and 4 φ12mm
steel bar steel bar
Notes:
1. Ac is the shaded area shown in Figure 11.7.16.

2. As for other positions, the horizontal interval of tie bar should not be
larger than twice of the interval of longitudinal steel bar and some web
reinforcements should be set at the corner;

3. When the end pillar bears concentrated load, it should satisfy the
reinforcement arrangement requirements for frame pillar.

11.7.17 The shearwall in a frame-shearwall structure should satisfy the following

construction requirements:

1. Surrounding the shearwall, some end pillars and girders should be set as
the frame of the shearwall; when around the shearwall there is only
pillars but not girders, some embedded girders should be set and their
height should be 2 times of the wall thickness;
2. When opening holes on a shearwall, some boundary members should be
configured on both sides of the hole and some constructional vertical
steel bars should be set in the upper and lower edges of the hole.

11.8 Structural Member of Prestressed Concrete

11.8.1 Prestressed concrete structures can be used in the area with aseismic intensity
0 0 0 0
equal to 6 , 7 or 8 . When prestressed concrete structures are used in a 9 area,
there should be sufficient basis and some reliable measures should be taken.

199
11.8.2 A frame girder should adopt the mixed reinforcement arrangement mode using
post-tensioned cementing prestressing tendon and non-prestressing tendons.
11.8.3 As for the post-tensioned cementing prestressed concrete frame girder, the
height of its girder-end compression area considering compression steel bars
should satisfy the following requirements:

For Grade I aseismic grade,

x ≤ 0.25 h 0 (11.8.3-1)

For Grade II and III Aseismic grade,

x ≤ 0.35h0 (11.8.3-2)

11.8.4 As for post -tensioned cementing prestressed concrete frame beam, the
reinforcement strength rate at its beam end had better satisfy the following
requirements:
For Grade I aseismic grade,

f py Ap
≤ 0 .55 (11.8. 4-1)
f p y A p + f y As

For Grade II and III Aseismic grade,

f py Ap
≤ 0.75 (11.8. 4-2)
f p y A p + f y As

11.8.5 In the end section of post -tensioned cementing prestressed concrete frame girder,
the section area ratio of the bottom and top longitudinal non -prestressing tendons
should be determined through computation and should not be less than 1.0 for
Grade I, II or III aseismic grade. Moreover, the reinforcement rate of longitudinal
compression non-prestressing tendons should not be less than 0.2%.

200
 Appendix A Computation of Plain Concrete Structural
Member

A.1 General Stipulations

A.1.1 Plain concrete structural members are mainly used for compression members.
The plain concrete flexural member is only allowed to be laid on foundation and
set in the environment without active load.

A.1.2 The plain concrete structural member should be subject to the computation of
bearing capacity of normal section; any position bearing local load should be
subject to the computation of local compression bearing capacity.

A.1.3 The computational length l 0 of plain concrete wall and pillar can be taken
according to the following stipulations:

1. When two ends are supported on the rigid transverse structure, l 0=H;
2. When it has elastic mobile abutment, l 0=1.25H~1.50H;

3. As for free and independent wall and pillar, l0=2H;

H hereof is the height of the wall or pillar and computed as per the storey height.

A.1.4 Maximum interval of expansion joint composed of plain concrete structure can be
taken according to the stipulation in Table A.1.4.

Table A.1.4 Maximum Interval (m) of Expansion Joint of Plain Concrete

Structure
Indoor or
Type of Structure Open air
in soil
Assembled structure 40 30
Cast-in-situ structure (configured with
30 20
constructional steel bar)
Cast-in-situ structure (configured without
20 10
constructional steel bar)

A.2 Compression Member

A.2.1 When computing as per compression bearing capacity, not considering the work
of concrete of tension area and presuming that the normal stress diagram of the
compression area is a rectangle, the design stress value of the plain concrete
compression member should be taken to be the design value of the axial
compression strength. In this case, the application point of the axial force should
coincide with the application point of the joint force in the concrete of the
compression area.

201
The compression bearing capacity of the plain concrete compression member
should satisfy the following stipulations:
1. For section symmetrical to the acting plane of bending moment,

N ≤ ϕf cc A'c (A.2.1-1)

The height x of the compression area should be determined according to the

following condition:

ec = e0 (A.2.1-2)

In this case, the distance from the acting point of axial force to the gravity
center of the section, e0, should satisfy the following requirements:

e 0 ≤ 0 .9 y '0 (A.2.1-3)

Figure A.2.1 Computation of Compression Bearing Capacity of Plain

Concrete Compression Member of Rectangle Section

1 – Gravity center of section; 2 – Gravity axle of section

2. Rectangle section (Figure A.2.1)

N ≤ ϕf ccb (h − 2e c ) (A.2.1-4)

where,

N Design value of axial compression force;

ϕ Stability coefficient of plain concrete member, taken according
to Table A.2.1;
ƒcc Design value of axial compression strength of plain concrete.
This value is the design value of concrete axial compression
strength stipulated in Table 4.1.4 of this code, ƒ c, multiplied by
coefficient 0.85.
A'c Area of concrete compression area;
ec Distance from the acting point of joint force of concrete in the
compression area to the gravity center of the section;
y' 0 Distance from the gravity center of section to the edge of the
compression area;
b Section width;
h Section height.
According to the computat ion adopting Formula (A.2.1-1) or (A.2.1-4), some
constructional steel bars should be set in the tension area of concrete for any

202
 compression member with e0≥0.45y'0. Its reinforcement rate should not be
less than 0.05% of the section area of the member. However, when the
condition in Formula (A.2.2-1) or (A.2.2-1) in this code, this type of
constructional steel bars can be not configured.
Table A.2.1 Stability Coefficient ϕ of Plain Concrete Member
L 0/ b <4 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
L 0/i <14 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 76 83 90 97 104
ϕ 1.00 0.98 0.96 0.91 0.86 0.82 0.77 0.72 0.68 0.63 0.59 0.55 0.51 0.47 0.44

Note: When computing l0/b, b is taken to be the section height of the acting
plane of the bending moment for eccentric compression member and be the
size of the shorter edge of the section for axial compression member.

A.2.2 As for any plain concrete compression member not allowing crack (such as
compression member, parapet wall and so on under the action of hydraulic
pressure), when e0≥0.45y'0, the compression bearing capacity should be
computed by using the following formulas:

1. Section symmetrical to acting plane of bending moment,

γf ct A
N ≤ϕ (A.2.2-1)
e0 A
−1
W

2. Rectangle section,

γf ctbh
N ≤ϕ (A.2.2-2)
6 e0
−1
h

where,
ƒct Design value of axial tension strength of plain concrete. It is
the product of the design value of concrete axial tension
strength stipulated in Table 4.1.4 in this code, ƒt, multiplied by
the coefficient 0.55;
γ Plastic influence coefficient of resisting moment of section,
taken according to Article 8.2.4 in this code;
W Elastic resisting moment of tension edge of section;
A Section area.

A.2.3 In addition to the computation of compression bearing capacity of acting plane of

bending moment, the eccentric compression member made of plain concrete
should be subject to a check computation of compression bearing capacity
vertical to the acting plane of bending moment as per the axial compression
member. In this case, the action of bending moment shall not be considered, but
the influence of the stability coefficient ϕ should be considered.

203
 A.3 Flexural Member
A.3.1 The bending bearing capacity of plain concrete flexural member should satisfy
the following stipulations:

1. Section symmetrical to the acting plane of bending moment,

M ≤ γf ctW (A.3.1-1)

2. Rectangle section,

γf ct bh 2
M≤ (A.3.1-2)
6

In above formulas, M is the design value of bending moment.

A.4 Local Constructional Steel Bar

A.4.1 In the following positions of the plain concrete structure, local cons tructional steel
bars should be configured:
1. Where the section size of the section acutely changes;

2. Where the height of the wall changes (configured within the range not less
than 1m);
3. Surrounding the hole in the concrete wall.

Note: After local constructional steel bars have been configured, the interval of
expansion joints should be taken still as per the cast-in-situ structure not
configuring constructional steel bars as listed in Table A.1.4 in this code.

A.5 Local Compression

A.5.1 The local compression bearing capacity of the plain concrete member should
satisfy the following stipulations:
1. There is only local load acting on the local compression surface,

Fl ≤ ωβ l f cc Al (A.5.1-1)

2. There is non-local load acting on the local compression surface,

Fl ≤ ωβ l ( f cc − σ ) Al (A.5.1-2)

where,

Fl Design value of local load or local compression force acting

on the local compression surface;
Al Local compression area;

ω Influence coefficient of load distribution: When the load on the

local compression surface is symmetrically distributed, v=1;
when the local load is asymmetrically distributed (such as the
end supporting surface of girder, bridging girder and so on),

204
 ω=0.75;
σ Concrete compression stress produced by design value of
non-local load;

β Strength augmenting coefficient when concrete locally under

compression, computed by using Formula (7.8.1-2).

205
Appendix B Nominal Sectional Area, Area of Computation
Section and Theoretical Weight of Steel Bar

Table B.1 Computational Section Area and Theoretical Weight of Steel Bar
2
Computational Section Area (mm ) of Steel Bars of Different Theoretical
Nominal Number Weight of
Diameter Single
(mm) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Steel Bar
(kg/m)
6 28.3 57 85 113 142 170 198 226 255 0.222

6.5 33.2 66 100 133 166 199 232 265 299 0.260

8 50.3 101 151 201 252 302 352 402 453 0.395

8.2 52.8 106 158 211 264 317 370 423 475 0.432

10 78.5 157 236 314 393 4714 550 628 707 0.617

12 113.1 226 339 452 565 678 791 904 1017 0.888

14 153.9 308 461 615 769 923 1077 1231 1385 1.21

16 201.1 402 603 804 1005 1206 1407 1608 1809 1.58

18 254.5 509 763 1017 1272 1527 1781 2036 2290 2.00

20 314.2 628 942 1256 1570 1884 2199 2513 2827 2.47

22 380.1 760 1140 1520 1900 2281 2661 3041 3421 2.98

25 490.9 982 1473 1964 2454 2945 3436 3927 4418 3.85

28 615.8 1232 1847 2463 3079 3695 4310 4926 5542 4.83

32 804.2 1609 2413 3217 4021 4826 5630 6434 7238 6.31

36 1017.9 2036 3054 4072 5089 6107 7125 8143 9161 7.99

40 1256.6 2513 3770 5027 6283 7540 8796 10053 11310 9.87

50 1964 3928 5892 7856 9820 11784 13748 15712 17676 15.42

Note: The computational section areas and theoretical weights for diameter d=8.2mm are
applicable for ribbed heat -treated steel bars only.

206
Table B.2 Nominal diameter, Nominal Section Area and Theoretical Weight of
Steel Strand
Nominal diameter Nominal section Theoretical weight
Type 2
(mm) area (mm ) (kg/m)
8.6 37.4 0.295
1x3 10.8 59.3 0.465
12.9 85.4 0.671
9.5 54.8 0.432
11.1 74.2 0.580
1X7, standard type
12.7 98.7 0.774
15.2 139 1.101
Table B.3 Nominal diameter, Nominal Section Area and Theoretical Weight of
Steel Wire
2
Nominal diameter (mm) Nominal section area (mm ) Theoretical weight (kg/m)
4.0 12.57 0.099
5.0 19.63 0.154
6.0 28.27 0.222
7.0 38.48 0.302
8.0 50.26 0.394
9.0 63.62 0.499

207
 Appendix C Multishaft Strength and Constitutive Relation of
Concrete

C.1 General Rules

C.1.1 The multishaft strength and constitutive relation of concrete can be determined by
using the following methods:
1. Determine by means of producing test specimen and performing test;
2. Select reasonable mathematic model, and demarcate the values of required
parameters;

3. Adopt mathematic models that are proven feasible by test validation or

engineering experience.

C.1.2 Various mathematic models given in this Appendix are applicable to the following
conditions: concrete strength grade is between C20~C80; mass density of
3
concrete is between 2200~2400kg/m ; environment of normal temperature and
humidity; normal loading speed.

C.1.3 In this appendix, the stress-strain curve and multishaft strength of concrete
should be given as per relative values σ/ ƒ*c, ε/εc, σ/ ƒ*t, ε/ εt, ƒ3/ ƒ* c and ƒ1/ ƒ* t. In
these relative values, the denominators stand for the single-shaft strength (ƒ*c or
ƒ*t ) and corresponding peak strain (εc or εt ).
As required by the structure analysis method and the check computation of limit
state, the single-shaft strength (ƒ* c or ƒ*t ) can be taken to be standard value (ƒ ck
or ƒtk), design value (ƒ c or ƒt ) or mean value (ƒc m or ƒtm) respective. The mean
value should be computed by using the following formulas:

f cm = f ck (1 − 1 .645 δ c ) (C.1.3-1)

f tm = f tk (1 − 1.645δ t ) (C.1.3-2)

where,
δc, δt Variation coefficient of compression strength and tension strength
of concrete, determined according to experiment statistics.

C.2 Single-shaft Stress-Strain Relation

C.2.1 The stress -strain curvilinear equation for single-shaft compression concrete can
be determined by using the following formulas (Figure C.2.1:

208
 When x≤1,

y = αa x + (3 − 2α a ) x 2 + (α a − 2) x 3 (C.2.1-1)

When x>1,

x
y= (C.2.1-2
α d ( x − 1) 2 + x

ε
x= (C.2.1-3)
εc

σ
y= (C.2.1-4)
f c*

where,

α a, α d Parameter values of rising segment and falling segment of

single-shaft compression stress-strain curve, taken according to
Table C.2.1;
ƒ*c Single-shaft compression strength of concrete (ƒck, ƒ c or ƒ cm);

εc Peak compression strain of concrete corresponding to ƒ*c, taken

according to Table C.2.1.

Figure C.2.1 Single-shaft Compression Stress-Strain Curve

Table C.2.1 Parameter Values of Single -shaft Compression
Stress-Strain Curve of Concrete
ƒ* c(N/mm )
2
15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
εc (x10 )
-6
1370 1470 1560 1640 1720 1790 1850 1920 1980 2030
αa 2.21 2.15 2.09 2.03 1.96 1.90 1.84 1.78 1.71 1.65
αb 0.41 0.74 1.06 1.36 1.65 1.94 2.21 2.48 2.74 3.00
εu/ εc 4.2 3.0 2.6 2.3 2.1 2.0 1.9 1.9 1.8 1.8

Note: εu is the compression strain of concrete on the falling segment of the

stress -strain curve when the stress is equal to 0.5ƒ* c.

C.2.2 Then single-shaft tension stress-strain curvilinear equation of concrete can be

determined by using the following formulas:

209
 Figure C.2.2 Single-shaft Tension Stress-Strain Curve

When x≤1,

y = 1.2 x − 0.2x 6 (C.2.2-1)

When x>1,

x
y= (C.2.2-2)
α t ( x − 1) 1.7 + x

ε
x= (C.2.2-3)
εt

σ
y= (C.2.2-4)
f t*

where,
αt Parameter value of falling segment of single-shaft tension
stress -strain curve, taken according to Table C.2.2;
ƒ*t Single-shaft tension strength of concrete (ƒtk, ƒ t or ƒtm);
εt Peak tension strain of concrete corresponding to ƒ*t, taken
according to Table C.2.2.

Table C.2.2 Parameter Values of Single-shaft Tension Stress-Strain Curve

of Concrete
ƒ*t (N/mm )
2
1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
εt (x10 )
-6
65 881 95 107 118 128 137
αt 0.31 0.70 1.25 1.95 2.81 3.82 5.00

C.3 Multishaft Strength

C.3.1 As for local positions of 2D, 3D structure or a linkage structure at multi-dimension

stress state, after obtaining the stress distribution and principal stress σI of
concrete through linear elasticity analysis, non-linear analysis or experiment
methods, the multi-shaft strength check computation of concrete should satisfy
the following requirement:

| σ i |≤| f i | (i=1,2,3) (C.3.1)

210
 where,
σi Value of principal stress of concrete: positive for tension structure,
negative for compression structure, and σ1≥σ2≥σ3;

ƒi Multi-shaft strength of concrete: positive for tension structure,

negative for compression structure, and ƒ 1≥ƒ2≥ƒ3. This parameter
should be computed as per the relative values of multi-shaft
strength of concrete (ƒi/ƒ*t or ƒi/f* c) set forth in Articles
C.3.2~C.3.4.

C.3.2 At the biaxial (compression-compression, tension-compression, tension-tension)

stress state, the biaxial strength of concrete can be determined according to the
envelope diagram in Figure C.3.2.

Figure C.3.2 Envelope Diagram of Biaxial Strength of concrete

C.3.3 At a triaxial compression (compression-compression-compression) stress state,

the compression strength (ƒ 3) of concrete can be determined on the basis of the
stress ratio σ1/σ3, according to Figure C.3.3 and by using the interpolation method.
Its maximum strength value should not exceed 5ƒ*c.

C.3.4 At the triaxial tension-compression (tension-tension -compression,

tension-compression-compression) stress state, the multi-shaft strength of
concrete can not count the influence of σ2, and its value should be taken as per
the biaxial tension-compression strength.

At the triaxial tension (tension-tension-tension) stress state, the tension strength

of concrete (ƒt ) can be taken to be 0.9ƒ* c.

211
 Figure C.3.3 Triaxial Compression Strength of Concrete

C.4 Failure Criteria and Constitutive Model

C.4.1 The failure criteria for concrete at multi-shaft stress state can adopt the following
equations to express:

τ oct b − σ oct / f c* d
= α ( ) (C.4.1-1)
f c* c − σ oct / f c*
3 3
c = c t (cos θ ) 1.5 + c c (sin θ ) 2 (C.4.1-2)
2 2
f1 + f 2 + f 3
σ oct = (C.4.1-3)
3
1
τ oct = ( f1 − f2 ) 2 + ( f2 − f3 ) 2 + ( f3 − f1) 2 (C.4.1-4)
3
2 f1 − f 2 − f 3
θ = arc cos (C.4.1-5)
3 2τ oct

212
 where,
σoct Normal stress of octahedron computed as per
multi-shaft strength of concrete;

τoct Shearing stress of octahedron computed as per

multi-shaft strength of concrete;
a, b, d, c t, c c Parameter values, advisable to be demarcated via test;
When there is no test basis, the following parameter
values can be taken: a=6.9638, b=0.09, d=0.9297,
c t=12.2445, cc=7.3319.

C.4.2 The constitutive relation of concrete can adopt the nonlinear elastic v isomeric
model or adopt other proven constitutive model.

213
Appendix D Prestressing Loss of Post-tensioned Prestressed
Tendon of Typical Beam Type

D.0.1 The parabolic prestressed tendon can be approximately considered as a

compass curvilinear prestressed tendon. When its corresponding center angle
θ≤30 (as shown in Figure D.0.1), the prestressing loss σl 1 due to anchorage
0

deformation and inward shrinkage of steel bar in the influence length range lf of
reverse friction can be computed by using the following formula:

Figure D.0.1 Prestressing Loss σl 1 of Compass Curvilinear Prestressed Tendon

µ x
σ l 1 = 2σ conl f ( + κ )(1 − ) (D.0.1-1)
rc lf

The influence length of reverse friction can be computed by using the following
formula:

αE s
lf = (D.0.1-2)
1000σ con( µ / rc + κ )

where,
rc Curvature radius (m) of compass curvilinear prestressed
tendon;

µ Friction coefficient between prestressed tendon and passage

wall, taken according to Table 6.2.4 in this code;

κ Friction coefficient considering local deviation per meter of

passage, taken according to Table 6.2.4 in this code;

214
 x Distance (m) from tension end to computational section;
a Value (mm) of anchorage deformation and steel bar inward
shrinkage at the tension end, taken according to Table 6.2.2 in
this code;

Es Elastic modulus of prestressed tendon.

D.0.2 As for the prestressed tendon which has straight end (length of the straight line is
l0) and then is composed of two compass curves (center angle of compass θ≤30 ),
0

as shown in Figure D.0.2, the prestressing loss σl 1 in the reverse friction influence
length due to anchorage deformation and steel bar inward shrinkage can be
computed by using the following formulas:

Figure D.0.2 Prestressing Loss σl 1 of Prestressed Tendon Composed of Two

Compass Curves

When x≤l0,

σ l 1 = 2 i1 (l1 − l0 ) + 2 i2 (l f − l1 ) (D.0.2-1)

When l 0<x≤l1,

σ l 1 = 2i1 (l1 − x) + 2i 2 (l f − l1 ) (D.0.2-2)

When l 1<x≤lf,

σ l 1 = 2 i 2 (l f − x ) (D.0.2-3)

The influence length of reverse friction, lf(m), can be computed by using the
following formulas:

215
 αE s i (l 2 − l 2 )
lf = − 1 1 0 + l12 (D.0.2-4)
1000 i 2 i2

i1 = σ a (κ + µ / γ c1 ) (D.0.2-5)

i2 = σ b (κ + µ / γ c 2 ) (D.0.2-6)

where,
l1 Horizontal projection length from the starting point of tension
end of prestressed tendon to the inflecture point ;

i1, i 2 Approximate straight-line change slope of stress in first and

second segment of compass curvilinear prestressed tendon;

rc1, rc2 Curvature radius of first / second segments of compass

curvilinear prestressed tendon;
σa, σb Stress of prestressed tendon at a and b point.

D.0.3 When the anchoring loss of broken-line prestressed tendon disappears out of the
break point c (as shown in Figure D.0.3), the prestressing loss σl1 in the reverse
friction influence length lf due to anchorage deformation and steel bar inward
shrinkage can be computed by using the following formulas:

Figure D.0.3 Prestressing Loss σl 1 of Broken-line Prestressed Tendon

Composed

When x≤l0,

σ l 1 = 2σ 1 + 2i1 (l1 − l 0 ) + 2σ 2 + 2i 2 (l f − l1) (D.0.3-1)

216
When l 0<x≤l1,

σ l 1 = 2i1 (l1 − x) + 2σ 2 + 2i2 (l f − l1 ) (D.0.3-2)

When l 1<x≤lf,

σ l 1 = 2 i 2 (l f − x ) (D.0.3-3)

The influence length of reverse friction, lf(m), can be computed by using the
following formulas:

αE s i (l − l ) 2 + 2 i1l 0 (l1 − l0 ) + 2σ 1 l0 + 2σ 2 l1 2
lf = − 1 1 0 + l1 (D.0.3-4)
1000 i 2 i2

i1 = σ con (1 − µθ )κ (D.0.3-5)

i1 = σ con [1 − κ (l1 − l0 )](1 − µθ ) 2 κ (D.0.3-6)

σ 1 = σ conµθ (D.0.3-7)

σ 2 = σ con [1 − κ (l1 − l0 )](1 − µθ )µθ (D.0.3-8)

where,

i1 Approximate straight -line change slope of stress in bc

segment of prestressed tendon;
i2 Approximate straight-line change slope of stress out of the
break point c of prestressed tendon;
l1 Horizontal projection length from starting point of tension end
to the break point c of prestressed tendon.

217
 Appendix E Time-related Prestressing Loss

E.0.1 The limit value of the prestressing loss that the shrinkage and creepage of
concrete produces to the concrete can be computed according to the following
stipulations:
1. Limit value of prestressing loss of longitudinal prestressed tendon in tension
area, σl 5,

0.9α p σ pcϕ ∞ + E s ε ∞
σ l5 = (E.0.1-1)
1 + 15 ρ

where,

σpc Normal tension stress of concrete produced by pre-applied

force (deducting prestressing loss of appropriate stage) and
self weight of girder at the acting point of joint force of
prestressed tendon in the tension area. Its value should not
be larger than 0.5ƒ' cu; it is tak en to be the mean value for the
section in the span and the section at 1/4 span for
simply-supported girder; it can be taken to be the mean value
of several typical sections for continuous girder and frame;

ϕ∞ Limit value of concrete creepage coefficient;

ε∞ Limit value of concrete shrinkage strain;

Es Elastic modulus of prestressed tendon;

ap Ratio of elastic modulus of prestressed tendon and elastic

modulus of concrete;

ρ Reinforcement rate of prestressed and non-prestressed

tendons in tension area: ρ =(A p+A s)/A0 for pre-tensioned
member; ρ=(A p+As)/A n for post-tensioned member; for any
member with prestressed and non-prestressed tendons
symmetrically configured, the reinforcement rate ρ is taken to
be 1/2 of the total section area of the steel bars.

When there is no reliable information, the values of ϕ∞ and ε∞ can be taken

according to Table E.0.1. If the structure is placed in the environment the
annual average relative humidity of which is lower than 40%, the values listed
in the table should be increased by 30%.

218
 Table E.0.1 Limit Values of Shrinkage Strain and Creepage
Coefficients of Concrete
Limit value of creepage
Limit value of shrinkage strain
Limit value coefficient
ε∞ (x10-4)
ϕ∞
Theoretical thickness
100 200 300 ≥600 100 200 300 ≥600
(2A/u) (mm)
Age of 3 2.50 2.00 1.70 1.10 3.0 2.5 2.3 2.0
concrete 7 2.30 1.90 1.60 1.10 2.6 2.2 2.0 1.8
under 10 2.17 1.86 1.60 1.10 2.4 2.1 1.9 1.7
pre- applied 14 2.00 1.80 1.60 1.10 2.2 1.9 1.7 1.5
force 28 1.70 1.60 1.50 1.10 1.8 1.5 1.4 1.2
(d) ≥60 1.40 1.40 1.30 1.00 1.4 1.2 1.1 1.0
Notes:

1. The age of concrete under pre-applied force can be taken to be 3~7d for
pre-tensioned member and 7~28d for post-tensioned member;
2. A is the section area of the member and u is the perimeter length
contacting the air of that section;

3. When the theoretical thickness of an actual member and the concrete

age under action of pre-applied force are the mid values given in the
table, they can be determined by using the linear interpolation method.
2. Limit value of prestressing lose of longitudinal prestressed tendon in
compression area, σ'l 5,

0.9α p σ ' pc ϕ ∞ + Es ε ∞
σ 'l 5 = (E.0.1-2)
1 + 15 ρ '

where,
σ'pc Normal tension stress of concrete produced by pre-applied
force (deducting prestressing loss of appropriate stage) and
self weight of girder at the acting point of joint force of
prestressed tendon in the tension area. Its value should not
be larger than 0.5ƒ'cu; when σ' pc is a tension stress, σ' pc is
taken to be zero;

ρ Reinforcement rate of prestressed and non-prestressed

tendons in compression area: ρ '=(A'p+A's)/A'0 for
pre-tensioned member; ρ '=(A'p+A's)/A'n for post-tensioned
member.
Note: As for the member with prestressed tendon A'p and non-prestressed
tendon A's configured in the compression area, when computing σpc and σ' pc
in Formulas (E.0.1-1) and (E.0.1-2), they can be computed as per the whole
pre-applied force on the section.
E.0.2 The prestressing force loss due to concrete shrinkage and creepage considering
the time influence can be the product of the computed Prestressing Loss limit
values σl5 and σ'l 5 in Article E.0.1 in this appendix multiplied by the appropriate
coefficient in Table E.0.2.

219
The Prestressing Loss due to stress relaxation of prestressed tendon considering
the influence of time can be determined according to the product of the computed
prestressing loss value σl4 in the Article 6.2.1 in this code multiplied by the
appropriate coefficient in Table E.0.2.
Table E.0.2 Prestressing Loss Coefficient Changing with Time
Shrinkage and creepage
Time (d) Relaxation loss coefficient
loss coefficient
2 0.50 -
10 0.77 0.33
20 0.88 0.37
30 0.95 0.40
40 0.43
60 0.50
90 0.60
1.00
180 0.75
365 0.85
1095 1.00

220
Appendix F Computation of Bearing Capacity of Normal
Section of Member on any Section

F.0.1 As for the reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete member on any section,
the bearing capacity of it normal section can be computed by using the following
methods:

1. Divide the section into a limited number of concrete units, longitudinal

ordinary steel bar units and prestressed tendon units (as shown in Figure
F.0.1a) and assume that the stress and strain in the unit is approximately of
symmetrical distribution and the acting point of the joint force is at the gravity
center of the unit;
2. The strain of each unit can be determined according to the Section Strain
Keeps Plane assumption in Article 7.1.2 in this code and by using the
following formulas (Figure F.0.1b):

ε ci = φ u [ xci sin θ + y ci cos θ ) − γ ] (F.0.1-1)

ε sj = −φu [ x sj sin θ + y sj cos θ ) − γ ] (F.0.1-2)

ε pk = −φu [ x pk sin θ + y pk cos θ ) − γ ] + ε p 0 k (F.0.1-3)

3. The lim it corner angle φu when the section reaches the limit state of bearing
capacity should be determined according to the following two situations:

1) When the concrete compression strain εc of the outer edge of the

compression area of the section reaches the limit compression strain
εcu of the concrete and the strain εs1 of the steel bars in the outmost
row of the tension area is less than 0.01, this limit corner angle
should be computed by using the following formula:

ε cu
φu = (F.0.1-4)
xn

2) When the strain εs1 of the steel bars in the outmost row of the
tension area of the section reaches 0.01 and the concrete
compression strain εc of the outer edge of the compression area is
less than the limit compression strain εcu of the concrete, this limit
corner angle should be computed by using the following formula:

0.01
φu = (F.0.1-5)
h01 − xn

4. Compression stress of concrete unit and stresses of ordinary tendon unit and
prestressing tendon unit should be determined according to the basic
assumptions described in Article 7.1.2 in this code;

221
 Figure F.0.1 Computation of Bearing Capacity of Normal Section of Any
Sectional Member
(a) Section, Web Reinforcement and their Unit Division; (b) Strain Distribution; (c) Stress
Distribution

5. The bearing capacity of normal section of member should be computed by

using the following formula (Figure F.0.1):

l m n
N ≤ ∑ σ ci Aci − ∑ σ sj Asj − ∑σ pk Apk (F.0.1-6)
i =1 j =1 k =1

l m n
M x ≤ ∑ σ ci Aci xci − ∑ σ sj Asj xsj − ∑ σ pk Apk x pk (F.0.1-7)
i =1 j =1 k =1

l m n
M y ≤ ∑ σ ci Aci yci − ∑ σ sj Asj ysj − ∑ σ pk A pk y pk (F.0.1-8)
i =1 j =1 k =1

where,

N Design value of axial force. Positive when it is a compression

force and negative when it is a tension force;

Mx, M y Design value of bending moment at x axis and y axis of the

section after considering the additional bending moment due
to side shift of structure, bending deflection of member and
additional eccentric distance; My is positive when the
eccentricity produced by the compression force is on the
upper side of x axis; Mx is negative when the eccentricity
produced by the compression force is on t he right side of y
axis;

222
εci, σci Strain and stress No. i concrete unit; they are positive when it
is under compression; σci=0 when it is under tension; i=1,
2, …, and l in the formula is the number of concrete units;

A ci Area of no. i concrete unit;

x ci, yci Distance from No. i concrete unit to y axis and x axis; xci is
positive when it is on the right of y axis and yci is positive
when it is on the upper side of x axis;

εsj, σsj Strain and stress of No. j ordinary steel bar unit; they are
positive when it is under tension and stress σsi should satisfy
the conditions in Formula (7.1.5-5) of this code; j is 1, 2, …
and m in this formula is the number of ordinary steel bar unit;

A sj Area of No. j ordinary steel bar unit;

x si, ysi Distance from No. i ordinary steel bar unit to y axis and x axis;
x si is positive when it is on the right of y axis and y si is positive
when it is on the upper side of x axis;

εpk, σpk Strain and stress of No. k ordinary steel bar unit; they are
positive when it is under tension and stress σsi should satisfy
the conditions in Formula (7.1.5-6) of this code; k is 1, 2, …
and n in this formula is the number of prestressing tendon
unit;

εp0k Stress of No. k prestressing tendon unit when the concrete

normal stress at the gravity center of this unit is equal to zero.
Its value is σp k divided by the elastic modulus of prestressing
tendon and is positive when it is under tension; σpok shall be
computed by using Formula (6.1.4-3) or (6.1.5-6);

x pk, y pk Distance from No. l prestressing tendon unit to y axis and x

axis; x pk is positive when it is on the right of y axis and y pk is
positive when it is on the upper side of x axis;

x, y Rectangular axis with gravity center of section as origin point;

r Distance from the gravity center of the section to the central

axis;

h 01 Vertical distance from the outer edge of the compression area

of the section to the outmost row of ordinary steel bar of the
tension area;

θ Inclination between x axis and central axis; positive at

clockwise direction;

xn Distance from central axis to outmost edge of the

compression area.

223
F.0.2 When determining the position of the central axis, it is required that the inner and
outer acting planes by bending moment in the two-way flexural member should
coincide with each other and the acting point of axial force of the two-way
eccentric reinforcing member, the acting point of joint force of concrete and
compression steel bar and the acting point of joint force and tension steel bars
should be on the same straight line. When the above conditions are not satisfied,
the influence of twisting moment should be considered.

224
Appendix G Design Value of Equivalent Centralized
Counterforce for Computation of Plate Column Nodes

G.0.1 As for the plate column node under the action of vertical load and horizontal load,
the design value of equivalent concentrated counterforce used in the computation
of its die-cutting bearing capacity, Fl,eq , can be determined according to the
following situations:

1. For plate column node to transfer single-way unbalanced bending moment

When the acting plane of the unbalanced bending moment coincides with one
of the two axis line of the rectangle section of the pillar, it can be computed
according to the following two situations:

1) As for the single-way unbalanced bending moment α 0M unb transferred by

the node under shear, when its acting direction points to AB edge of
Figure G.0.1, the design value of the equivalent concentrated
counterforce can be computed by using the following formulas:

α 0 M unbα AB
Fl , eq = Fl + u m h0 (G.0.1-1)
Ic

M unb = M unb ,c − f l ,eg (G.0.1-2)

2) As for the single-way unbalanced bending moment α 0M unb transferred by

the node under shear, when its acting direction points to CD edge of
Figure G.0.1, the design value of the equivalent concentrated
counterforce can be computed by using the following formulas:

α0 M unbα CD
Fl , eq = Fl + um h0 (G.0.1-3)
Ic

M unb = M unb ,c + f l , eg (G.0.1-4)

where,

Fl Interlayer difference of design value of axial compression

force borne by pillar PLUS the design value of load borne by
the plate in the die-cutting failure cone range, under the action
of vertical and horizontal loads;

a0 Computational coefficient, computed according to Article G.0.2

of this code;
Munb Design value of unbalanced bending moment produced by the
vertical and horizontal loads to axis line No. 2 (Figure G.0.1);
Munb,c Design value of unbalanced bending moment produced by the
vertical and horizontal loads to axis No. 1 (Figure G.0.1);

225
a AB, a CD Distances from axis line No. 2 to AB and CD;
Ic Similar inertia moment to be computed as per critical section,
computed according to Article G.0.2 of this Code;

εg Distance from axis line No. 1 to axis line No. 2 in the acting
plane of bending moment, computed according to Article G.0.2
of this code; as for the section of the middle pillar and the
section of the side pillar with the acting plane of bending
moment in parallel to the free edge, εg=0.

Figure G.0.1 Rectangle Pillars and Geometric Parameters for Computation

of Die-cutting Bearing Capacity
(a) Section of middle pillar; (b) Section of side pillar (acting plane of bending moment
vertical to free edge); (c) Section of side pillar (acting plane of bending moment parallel to
free edge); (d) Section of corner pillar

1 – Axis line passing through gravity center G of pillar section; 2 – Axis line passing
through gravity center g of perimeter of critical section; 3 – Acting plane of unbalanced
bending moment; 4 – Free edge

226
 2. For plate column node to transfer two-way unbalanced bending moment,
When the unbalanced bending moments that the node transfers under shear
and at two directions are α 0xM unb,x and α 0yM unb,y, the design value of the
equivalent concentrated counterforce can be computed by using the following
formulas:

Fl , eq = Fl + τ unb, max um h0 (G.0.1-5)

α 0 x M unb, xα x α 0 y M unb, yα y
Funb,max = + (G.0.1-6)
I cx I cy

where,
τunb,max Design value of maximum shearing stress that the two-way
unbalanced bending moment produces on the critical section;

Munb,x, M unb,y Design value of bending moment produced by the vertical /

horizontal load onto x and y axis at the gravity center of the
perimeter of the critical section, determined by using the same
methods as shown in Formula (G.0.1-2) or (G.0.1-4);
a 0x, a0y Computational coefficient of x axis and y axis, determined
according to Articles G.0.2 and G.0.3 in this code;
Icx, Icy Similar inertia moment computed to x axis and y axis as per
critical section, determined according to Articles G.0.2 and
G.0.3 in this code;
a x, ay Distance from the acting point of maximum shearing stress
τmax to x and y axis.
3. When considering different load combinations, the larger one among the
values computed as per these combinations should be taken as the design
value of equivalent concentrated counterforce to be used in the computation
of die-cutting bearing capacity of the plate column node.

G.0.2 In the computation of die-cutting bearing capacity of the plate column node when
considering the single-way unbalanced bending moment transferred under shear,
parameters relating to design value Fl,eq of equivalent concentrated counterforce
and the geometric sizes shown in Figure G.0.1 in this Appendix can be computed
by using the following formulas:
1. Similar inertia moment, geometric size and computational coefficient of critical
section at the middle pillar can be computed by using the following formulas:

h0α t3 α
Ic = + 2 h0α m ( t ) 2 (G.0.2-1)
6 2
αt
α AB = α CD = (G.0.2-2)
2
e g= 0 (G.0.2-3)

227
 1
α0 =1− (G.0.2-4)
2 hc + h0
1+
3 bc + h0

2. Similar inertia moment, geometric size and computational coefficient of critical

section at side pillar can be computed by using the following formulas:

1) When the acting plane of bending moment is vertical to the free edge (as
shown in Figure G.0.1b),

h0α t3 α
Ic = + h 0α m α 2AB + 2h 0α t ( t − α AB ) 2 (G.0.2-5)
6 2

α t2
α AB = (G.0.2-6)
α m + 2α t

α CD = α t − α AB (G.0.2-7)

hc
eg = α CD − (G.0.2-8)
2
1
α 0 = 1− (G.0.2-9)
2 hc + h0 / 2
1+
3 bc + h0

2) When the acting plane of bending moment is parallel to the free edge (as
shown in Figure G.0.1c):

h0α t3 α
Ic = + 2 h0α t ( t ) 2 (G.0.2-10)
12 2
ht
α AB = α CD − (G.0.2-11)
2
eg = 0 (G.0.2-12)

1
α0 =1− (G.0.2-13)
2 hc + h0
1+
3 bc + h0 / 2

3. Similar inertia, geometric size and computational coefficient of critical section

of corner pillar can be computed by using the following formulas:

h 0α t3 α
Ic = + h0α mα 2AB + 2 h0α t ( t − α AB ) 2 (G.0.2-14)
6 2

228
 α t2
α AB = (G.0.2-15)
2(α m + 2α t )

αCD = αt − α AB (G.0.2-16)

hc
e g = α CD − (G.0.2-17)
2
1
α0 =1− (G.0.2-18)
2 hc + h0 / 2
1+
3 bc + h0 / 2

G.0.3 In the computation of die-cutting bearing capacity of the plate column node by
using Formulas (G.0.1-5) and (G.0. 1-6) in this Appendix and considering
transmission of two-way unbalanced bending moment, if regarding the values
stipulated in Articles G.0.2 of this appendix as the similar inertia moment,
geometric size and computational coefficient of x axis (or y axis), the
corresponding similar inertia moment, geometric size and computational
coefficient for y axis (or x axis) can be determined by displacing the
above -mentioned corresponding parameters for x axis (or y axis).
G.0.4 When there are cantilever plates at edge pillar and corner pillar, the perimeter of
the critical section can be computed as of the end of the plate vertical to the free
edge. This computed perimeter of the critical section should be compared with
the perimeter of critical section computed as per middle pillar, and the lesser one
of the two values shall be taken. On this basis, related parameters of the design
value F l,eq of equivalent concentrated counterforce used for computation of
die-cutting bearing capacity for plate column node considering transmission of
unbalanced bending moment under shear should be determined in the principles
set forth in Articles G.0.2 and G.0.3 of this code.

229
 Explanation to Terms and Expressions Used in This Code

1. In order to be convenient to make a difference between various articles of this code

during execution, we hereby describes various terms expressing different
requirement severities as follows:
1) Terms to express that the requirement is very strict and it has to be done so:

Positive term: Must; antonym: Forbid.

2) Terms to express that it is strictly required and should be done so in normal
circumstances:

Positive term: Should; antonym: Should not or have not to;

3) Term to express that is selectable and preferred to do so if the condition allows:
Positive term: had better; antonym: had better not.

2. In this code, when it is specified to execute according to other related standard or

codes, the description is "should comply with the stipulations set forth in …." Or
"should be executed according to…".

230
 National Standards of the People's Republic of China

Code for Design of Concrete Structures

GB 50010-2002

Interpretation to Articles

229
 Table of Contents

Interpretation to Articles.................................................................................... 229

1 General Provisions...................................................................... 231
2 Terms and Symbols ..................................................................... 232
3 Fundamental Design Stipulations........................................... 233
4 Materials ......................................................................................... 239
5 Structure Analysis ....................................................................... 244
6 Requirements for Computation of Prestressed Concrete
Structural Members..................................................................... 250
7 Computation of Limiting State of Bearing Capacity........... 255
8 Checking Computation of Normal-use Limiting State ....... 283
9 Construction Stipulations.......................................................... 291
10 Basic Stipulations on Structural Members........................... 301
11 Aseismic Design of Concrete Structural Member............... 320
Appendix A Computation of Plain Concrete Structural Member........... 341
Appendix B Nominal Sectional Area, Area of Computation Section and
Theoretical Weight of Steel Bar ............................................... 342
Appendix C Multishaft Strength and Constitutive Relation of Concrete
.......................................................................................................... 343
Appendix D Prestressing Loss of Post-tensioned Prestressed Tendon of
Typical Beam Type....................................................................... 347
Appendix E Time -related Prestressing Loss............................................... 348
Appendix F Computation of Bearing Capacity of Normal Section of
Member on any Section ............................................................. 349
Appendix G Design Value of Equivalent Centralized Counterforce for
Computation of Plate Column Nodes..................................... 350

230
 1 General Provisions

1.0.1~1.0.3 In order to implement the unification of design methods to solve the general
technical issues for concrete structures of buildings, railways, highways, ports,
water conservancy projects and hydraulic power projects, the reversion team for
this reversion is composed of concrete structure experts from various professions,
so as to communicate information with each other and for some common
technical issues involved in this code to be able to be recognized by various
industrial codes. It is necessary to implement the unification of design methods
relating to common technical issues of various professions, but this needs time.
This reversion is the first step to implement this goal. According to the instructions
of the Standard Quota Department of the Ministry of Construction, the codes for
design of concrete structures for various professions in present stage still keeps a
relative integrality, which is favorable for smooth transition.
The bearing condition, material performance and other basic conditions of the
structure have any deviation from the preparation basis of this code, it should be
solved according to the actual situations and through a special experiment or
analysis.

It should be pointed out that as for any non-cementing prestressed concrete

structure, its materials and the computation of normal-section bearing capacity
and crack width all are different those of the cementing prestressed concrete
structure. These contents are stipulated in dedicated procedures. As for any
concrete structure using haydite, floatstone, coal slack and so on as aggregate, it
should be designed according to a dedicated standard.
When designing the following structures, related stipulations in a dedicated
standard should be additionally followed:
1. Structures to be built in collapsible loess land, expansive soil land or
underground digging area;

2. Structures with surface temperature higher than 100 0C or structures with

productive heat source and with surface temperature often higher than 600C.

3. Structure subject to vibration computation.

231
 2 Terms and Symbols

2.1 Terms

Terms are the newly -added contents of this code and are given mainly according to
existing national standard Basic Terms and General Symbols for Design of
Engineering Structures (GBJ132), Standards for Terms and Symbols for Design of
Architectures (GB/T50083), United Standards for Reliability Design of Architectures
(GB50068), Code for Loads of Architectures (GB50009), etc..

2.2 Symbols

Symbols are stipulated mainly according to the Code for Design of Concrete
Structures (GBJ10-89, hereinafter "the Original Code"). Due to modification of
terms, some symbols are accordingly modified; for example, in this code the
long-term effect combination is changed into quasi -permanent combination, so the
symbol Nl in the original code is changed into Nq in this code.

232
 3 Fundamental Design Stipulations
3.1 General Stipulations

3.1.1 This code adopts load breakdown coefficients, material performance breakdown
coefficients (for convenience, expressed directly by design value of material
strength) and structure importance coefficients for design according to existing
national standard United Standards for Reliability Design of Architecture.

The breakdown coefficients of load in this code should be taken according to the
stipulations in the existing national standard Code for Load of Architecture
(GB50009).

3.1.2 The classification of limiting states is determined according to the stipulations set
forth in the existing national standard United Standards for Reliability Design of
Architecture (GB50068).

3.1.3~3.1.5 The requirements for computation and check computation of structural

members are basically the same as those in the original code but the floating
check computation is added and the fatigue check computation is modified
largely.

Cranes given in Code for Loads of Architecture (GBJ 9-87) are graded into
lightweight, middleweight, heavyweight and overweight work systems. At present,
the load code reversion team takes use of the utilization grade U and load state Q
stipulated in the national standard Code for Design of Cranes to divide cranes
into 8 (A1~A8) work grades, and the four-grade work system in the original load
code into an eight -grade work system. In this code, the related stipulations are
accordingly revised.

The fatigue-related issues in the original code covers cranes adopting lightweight,
middleweight and heavyweight work systems but not the cranes adopting
overweight work system. The cranes mentioned in this code still exclude the
cranes adopting overweight work system. When designing the crane girder
bearing cranes adopting overweight work system, it is suggested to adopt steel
structures according to the engineering experience.

When there is load effect spectrum and concrete and steel bar stress spectrum,
the fatigue check computation can be performed according to related stipulations
in a special standard.

3.1.6 When local failure occurs in the structure, if no large-scale collapse will be
induced, it can be believed that the structure has the global stability. The ductility
of structur e, the multiplicity of load transferring force and the hyperstaticity of
structure system all can improve the global stability of the structure. To set
full-length steel connecting rods at the vertical and horizontal directions to
connect the structure into an integrity is one of the method to provide the global
stability of the structure. On the other hand, to design according to the specific
load combination of local failure state also is one of the measures to guarantee
the global stability of the structure.

233
 When any occasional event produces a giant load, it is required to design
according to the occasional combination of load effect (as described in Article
3.2.3) so as to keep the structure complete without defect, but this method is
economically expensive and sometimes even cannot be implemented. In this
case, it should be designed in the principle allowing local failure of structure due
to local explosion or shock but no continuous collapse occurring in the whole
structure.

3.1.7 The working life of the design of various architectures should not be unified and
should be taken according to the stipulations in United Standards for Reliability
Design of Architectures , while the corresponding load design value and durability
measures should be determined on the basis of the designed working life.

3.1.8 The change of usage and application environment of any structure will affect the
performance and durability of the structure, so such modification is subject to
technical appraisement and must be permitted by the designer.

3.2 Stipulations on Computations of Limiting State of Bearing Capacity

3.2.1 The design unit can select the safety grades of architecture given in Table 3.2.1 in
this code depending on the actual engineering situations and the design traditions.
The safety grade of most of architectures belongs to Grade II.

3.2.2 Due to the combination newly added in the Code for Load of Architecture
(GB50009) and under the control of permanent load effect, the safety of the
structural member mainly bearing constant load is somewhat improved. Moreover,
this code cancels the bending compressive strength ƒc m of concrete in the original
code and unitedly adopts the compressive strength ƒc, which somewhat improves
the safety of the structural member focusing on concrete compression, and
therefore, this code cancels the stipulation in the original code that the safety
grade of roof truss, bracket and pillar mainly bearing constant load should be
improved for one grade.

The engineering practice shows that because the concrete structure is easy to
happen with quality problem during construction, it cancels the stipulation in the
original code that the safety grade of any prefabricated member can be reduced
for one grade during construction.

3.2.3 In the Code for Load of Architecture (GB50009), symbol S stands for the design
value of the load effect combination; in the Code for Aseismic Design of Building
(GB50011), it stands for the fundamental combination of earthquake effect and
other load effect, also named as design value of internal force combination of
structural member.

234
 When the changeability of geometric parameters has obvious influence to the
performance of the structure, its unfavorable influence should be considered. For
example, the changeability of effective height of the section of a thin plate has
obvious influence to the bearing capacity of the normal section of the thin plate,
so when computing the effective height of the section, the unfavorable influence
that the deviation allowable for construction brings.

3.3 Stipulations on Checking Computation of Limiting State of Normal Use

3.3.1 As for the limiting state of normal use, the original code stipulated to take two
combinations depending on the durability of the load, i.e., the short-term effect
combination and long -term effect combination of load. According to the
stipulations in the United Standards for Reliability Design of Architecture
(GB50068), this code renames the short -term and long-term effect combinations
of load as characteristic combination and quasi -permanent combination of load
effect. the characteristic combination contains a standard value effect of variable
load playing the control role; the quasi-permanent combination contains a
quasi -permanent value effect of variable load. Thus, the name of the load effect
combination matches the name of the representative load value.

As for the computation of crack width and rigidity of members, this code adopts
the characteristic combination of load effect and considers the long-term action
influence, the meanings of which are the same as those in the original code.

3.3.2 The limit values of bending deflection of bending member listed in Table 3.3.2
follow the stipulations in the original code. A cantilever member is the member
easy to happen with accident in the engineering practice, so its bending
deflection should be strictly controlled in the design.

3.3.3~3.3.4 This code divides the crack control grade into Grade I, Grade II and Grade
III. The grade refers to the severity degree of crack control, and the designer
should select different grade depending on the actual situations. As to the division
of crack control grade of members, it is generally considered according to the
functional requirements of structures, erosion influence of environmental
conditions to steel bars, sensibility of steel bar to erosion, acting time of load and
other factors internationally. The crack control grade division in this code
considers the above factors.

1. When actually dividing the crack control grade and determining related limit
values, this code mainly refers to the following information: (1) historic
background on related stipulations in the Code for Design of Concrete
Structures (1997) and the original code; (2) engineering practice and
experience and investigation statistics of actual design crack resisting
strength and crack width of domestic common members; (3) investigation
achievements of the durability special study team made for projects in typical
areas in China, and the results from long-term exposure experiment and
fast-speed experiment; (4) related stipulations in foreign codes.

235
2. When determining the limit value of crack width of concrete structural
member adopting hot rolled reinforced bars for reinforcement arrangement,
related stipulations in existing domestic and foreign codes are considered and
the crack investigation results from the durability study team are referred.

The results of the sectional observation of maximum crack of reinforced

concrete member in normal indoor environment shows that no matter what
the crack width, the service time and the regional humidity are, if there is no
dew or water film on the steel bar, basically no obvious rust is seen on the
steel bar at the crack; some foreign engineering survey results also show the
same opinion.

As for the roof truss, bracket and main roof bearing structural member made
of reinforced concrete, the limit of their crack width had better be strictly
controlled according to the past engineering experience.

The limit value of crack width of reinforced concrete crane girder in the
original code is stipulated to be 0.2 and 0.3mm respectively for the crane
adopting heavyweight and middleweight work system. In this code, the
names of heavyweight and middleweight have been cancelled, so this value
for any crane girder subject to fatigue check computation is unitedly stipulated
as 0.2mm.

As for any reinforced concrete member in open air or in an indoor humid

environment, the sectional observation results show that there are some
surface rust of different degree on the steel bars at the cracks; when the
crack width is less than or equal to 0.2mm, there only is slight surface rust on
the steel bar at the crack. According to the above situations and with
reference to related domestic and foreign information, the limit value of
maximum crack width is taken to be 0.2m as stipulated.

As for any environment adopting deicing salt, since the rust experiment and
the engineering practice shows that the width of the vertical bearing crack
width of the reinforced concrete structural member has not too larger
influence to durability, bearing cracks are still allowed for existence. With
reference to related domestic and foreign codes, the stipulated limit value of
maximum crack width is 0.2mm.

3. In the original code, since the di ameter of the steel wire is relatively small and
the heat-treated steel bar is sensitive to rust so that the appearance of crack
will severely affect the durability of the structure, so it is stipulated to adopt
Grade II crack control for the prestressed concrete member adopting
prestressed steel wire, steel strand and heat -treated steel bar in the normal
indoor environment, and adopt Grade I crack control for an open-air
environment. Because this aspect of stipulation is too strict, in 1993 the local
revision in the original code proposed as follows: if there is reliable
engineering experience, the crack resisting requirement for various types of
prestressed concrete members can be suitably loosened.

4. According to the actual engineering and use experiences, mainly according to

the experiences to widely popularize and apply cast-in-situ post-tensioned
prestressed frames and building roof structures in our country in over ten
recent years and with reference to the stipulations in related domestic and
foreign codes, while considering the development trend of partial prestressed
concrete members, this revision prepares the stipulations mainly focusing on
considering the influence of environmental conditions to corrosion of steel
bars for crack control of prestressed concrete structure and considering the

236
 functional requirements, load acting time and other factors. Meanwhile, this
code cancels the concrete tension stress limitation coefficient and the plastic
influence coefficient of concrete in the tension, which is set forth in the
original code, so as to simplify the computation as possible as it can. As for
any general member in the normal indoor environment, which is described in
the original code, its crack control grade is relaxed from Grade II to Grade III
(that for floor plate and roof board still is Grade II), that for a member in
open-air environment is relaxed from Grade I to Grade II (crane girder still
adopts Grade I); it is newly stipulated for any member under Class III
environment not mentioned in the original code to adopt Grade I crack control
grade.

3.4 Stipulations on Durability

3.4.1 This article stipulates the basic principle for durability design of concrete structure
and it stipulates to design the concrete structure depending on the type of the
environment and the designed working life. The environment types listed in Table
3.4.1 are basically the same as those in CEB Model Code MC-90. The main
difference between Class -II environments a and b in this table is whether they
have frost. Among Class-III environments, the environment necessary to adopt
deicing salt refers to fly-over bridges and similar environments in north cities that
need to spray salty water to deice; coastal outdoor environment refers to the area
near the ocean that may be sprinkled by wave, but before them there is no
building for retaining. The detailed division and durability design methods for
Class -IV and Class-V environment should follow such standards as Technical
Code for Design of Port, Code for Anticorrosion Design of Industry Building
(GB50046) and so on.

A bitter code area and a cold area are defined in Procedures for Pyrology Design
of Civil Building (JGJ 24-86) as follows:

Bitter cold area: the area in which the perennial average temperature of the
0
coldest month is lower than or equal to –10 C.

Cold area: the area in which the perennial average temperature in the coldest
0 0
month is higher than –10 C or lower than or equal to 0 C.

Here, Perennial refers to recent 30 years; if less than 30 years, the actual number
of years is taken but the statistic year number should not be less than 10 years.
The climatic region that the local region belongs to can be determined according
to the weather parameters provided by local weather station, or according to the
parameters given in Standards of Weather Parameters for Building.

3.4.2 This article gives the stipulations for concrete to be used for concrete structure
with designed working life being 50 years in Class-I, Class -II and Class-III
environment.

237
 The cement content listed in Table 3.4.2 is the lower limit value and the suitable
cement content should be determined according to the construction situation.
Refer to the stipulations in Standards for Limit Values of Alkali Content in
Concrete (CECS53:93) for computation methods of alkali content in concrete.

3.4.3 This articles gives dedicated stipulations for concrete structures with designed
working life being 100 years and used in Class-I environment.

According to the domestic investigation on durability state of concrete structure, it

basically can be guarantee for concrete structure to work in Class -I environment
for 50 years. However, domestic concrete structures that can work in Class -I
environment for over 100 years are rare. The durability investigation finds that the
investigated concrete members having worked in Class -I environment for 70-80
years are now working well basically, the concrete cube compression strength of
2
these members is about 15N/mm and the thickness of their protection layer is
15~20mm. Therefore, the chlorion content in concrete should be limited; the
strength grade and the thickness of the protective layer of concrete should be
suitably increased; especially, it is stipulated to perform periodical maintenance,
thus the designed working life of 100 years for concrete structures in Class -I
environment can be guaranteed.

3.4.4 The situations of Class-II and Class -III are complicated, it is required that in the
design: confining the water-cement ratio of the concrete, suitably increasing the
strength grade of concrete; guaranteeing the freezeproof performance of
concrete; improving the infiltration -proof ability of concrete, using steel bars with
epoxy coating; paying attention to avoiding the structure from water accumulation;
adding protective layer on member so as to avoid member from directly suffering
the action of the environment, etc.. All these are feasible measures; especially,
the stipulation on maintenance time interval or local replacement can prolong the
actual working life of the main structure.

3.4.5~3.4.6 The freezeproof performance and infiltration-proof performance test

methods, grade division and mixing ratio limitation of concrete should be
executed according to related codes and standards. The infiltration-proof and
freeze-proof design of concrete can refer to the stipulations in the Code for
Design of Concrete Structures for Water Power Engineer (DL/T5057) and the
Technical Specifications for Water Proof of Underground Projects (GB50108).

3.4.7 The epoxy coating steel bar is to adopt the electrostatic painting technology to
spray epoxy powder on the surface of the steel bar to form an epoxy
anticorrosion coating of a certain thickness. This kind of can separate the steel
bar from its surrounding concrete, so that the corrosive media (such as chlorion)
cannot contact the surface of the steel bar for avoiding the steel bar from
corrosion.

Since the Ministry of Construction had issued the industrial standard Steel Bar
with Epoxy Coating (JG3042) and some use experiences have been obtained
from the application in projects for this product, this revision adds the stipulation
on the application of steel bars with epoxy coating.

238
 4 Materials

4.1 Concrete

4.1.1 The principle to determine the concrete strength grade is as follows: the mean
value of population distribution of concrete grade PLUS 0.645 times of the
standard difference (assurance rate: 95%). The strength grade of concrete is
determined according to the standard value of cube compression strength and
the standard value of cube compression strength is the basic typical value of
various mechanical indexes of concrete in this code.

4.1.2 This article stipulates the lowest concrete strength grade of the concrete structure.
The concrete strength grade for foundation bed can adopt C10.

4.1.3~4.1.4 The mean strength grades of concrete and steel bars to be adopted in
building projects in our country are lower than those of developed countries. The
overall structure safety of our country is lower than the international level but the
material usage is not less. The reason is that the international higher safety level
is implemented by using higher strength materials. To change this situation, some
new contents relating to high-strength concrete are added into this code.

1. Compression strength of concrete

This code cancels the bending compression resisting strength ƒcmk and ƒc m
stipulated in the original code.

The ratio of prismatic strength and cube strength, ac1, is 0.76 for common
concrete and is larger than 0.76 for high-strength concrete. In this code, acl is
taken to be 0.76 for C50 and lower grade and to be 0.82 for C80, this value
for any concrete strength grade between the two grades changes as per a
linear law.

In view of the difference between the concrete strength of the structure and
the concrete strength of test part, according to past experiences and in
combination the analysis of experimental data and with reference to related
stipulations of other countries, a correction coefficient equal to 0.88 is used
for the concrete strength of test part.

The standard value and design value of axial compression strength in this
code is computed by using the following formulas:

f ck = 0.88α c1α c 2 f cu ,k

f c = f ck / γ c = f ck / 1 .4

239
 The parameter ƒc in this code is determined under the following four
preconditions:

1) According to the stipulation of the load code, newly add the combination
under the control of permanent load effect;

2) Cancel the stipulation of the original code to increase the safety grade of
roof truss, backed and axle load and small eccentricity compression pillar
mainly bearing constant load;

3) Retain the additional stipulation on the eccentric distance ea.

4) Take the breakdown coefficient of concrete material to be 1.4.

2. Tension strength of concrete

The standard value and design value of the axial tension strength in this code
is computed by using the following formulas respectively:

f tk = 0.88× 0.395 f cu0.,55

k (1 − 1.645δ )0.45× α c2

f t = f tk / γ c = f tk / 1.4
In the above formulas, the coefficient 0.395 and the index 0.55 are obtained
according to united analysis on the experimental data of tension strength to
be determined according to the original code and on the experimental data
from the high-strength concrete study in our country for many years.

Based on the statistic and survey achievements of concrete strength in ten

provinces, cities and autonomous regions of our countries from 1979 to 1980
and the estimation and judgment of concrete with strength grade over C60,
this code adopts the variation coefficients in the following table for the cube
strength of concrete:

ƒcu,k C15 C20 C25 C30 C35 C40 C45 C50 C55 C60~80

δ 0.21 0.18 0.16 0.14 0.13 0.12 0.12 0.11 0.11 0.10

4.1.5 According to the research results from the special study on high-strength
concrete, the elastic modulus of high-strength concrete still can adopt the
computation formula in the original code for computation. In this code, the elastic
modulus of concrete is computed by using the following formula:

10 5
Ec = (N/mm )
2
34 .7
2 .2 +
f cu ,k

In the above formula, substituting ƒcu,k with the strength grade value (in N/mm ) of
2

the concrete can obtain the elastic modulus corresponding to the standard value
of the cube compression strength.

4.1.6 In this code, the bending compression strength ƒ c m is cancelled, so the correction
coefficient γρ of fatigue compression strength of concrete is accordingly increased
by 10%. However, since the correction coefficient γρ of concrete fatigue strength
in the original code is originated from the design value γρR f of fatigue strength in

240
 the Code for Design of Reinforced Concrete Structure (GJ10-74) that is changed
into γρƒt while Rf/ ƒt≈1.5, while considering that the power coefficient of crane
stipulated in the Code for Load of Architecture (GBJ9 -87) is about 7% less than
that in the load code TJ9-74 and other factors, γρ in the original code is 40%
higher than that in the design code GJ10-74, i.e. it is adjusted as per
Rf/(ƒtx1.07)=1.4. This is applicable for tension fatigue strength of concrete only,
but it is not applicable to increase the correction coefficient of the compression
fatigue strength by 1.4 times. In addition, the compression fatigue strength of
concrete generally has no control action for normal reinforcement arrangement.
Therefore, taking the above factors into comprehensive consideration, for the
convenience for design, the fatigue strength correction coefficients of concrete
compression and tension strength are not given out respectively, but taken to be
the value of γρ according to the stipulation in the original code.

The findings of the domestic special fatigue study team and the foreign
experimental results of fatigue strength for high-strength concrete show that there
is no obvious difference between the discounting coefficient of fatigue strength of
high-strength concrete and the fatigue strength discounting coefficient of ordinary
concrete, so this code widens the application of fatigue strength correction
coefficient of ordinary concrete into the high-strength concrete, which well
complies with the experimental results. According to the experimental results of
the special fatigue research team, this code supplements the fatigue deformation
modulus of high-strength concrete.

The fatigue index (including design value of fatigue strength of concrete, fatigue
deformation modulus of concrete and amplitude limit value of fatigue stres s of
steel bar) refers to the index to be obtain through 2 millions of times of
constant-amplitude fatigue tests, excluding variable-amplitude fatigue.

4.2 Steel Bar

4.2.1 This code suggests adopting HRB400 (i.e. new Grade III) steel bars as the
principal steel bars of reinforced concrete structures in our country and using
high-strength prestressed steel strand and steel wire as the principal steel bars of
prestressed concrete structures in our country, so as to urge the engineering
practice of our country to leverage the strength grade of steel bars.

Since the issuance and execution of the original code, the varieties and
performance of steel bars, steel wires and steel strands used for concrete
structures have got a further development, and a batch of new varieties of steel
bars have been successfully researched and produced, and we therefore revise
the original steel bar standards. Main modifications are as below: replace the
2
original steel bars of yield point being 370N/mm with the steel bars of yield poi nt
2
being 400N/mm ; adjust the varieties and performance of steel wires and steel
strands used for prestressed concrete.

241
 Steel Bar Standards as Basis of this Code

No. Type of Steel Bars Code No. of Standard

GB1499 -98

1 Hot rolled reinforced bar GB13013-91

GB13014-91

2 Prestressed steel wire GB/T5223-95

3 Prestressed steel strand GB/T5224-95

4 Heat -treated steel bar GB4463 -84

The prestressed steel wires listed in the table includes plain carbon stress-relief
steel bars in the original code and the newly-listed spiral ribbed steel wires and
the steel wires notched in three surfaces.

In recent years, our country has sufficient supplies of prestressed steel bars
(steel wires, steel strands) of high strength and high performance, so cold-drawn
mild steel wires and cold-drawn steel bars are not listed in this code and
cold-rolled ribbed steel bars and cold-rolled torsion steel bars are also not listed
in this code since there is special procedures. Not listing in this code does not
means not allowing to use these steel bars, but means that when using
cold-drawn mild steel wires, cold-rolled ribbed steel bars, cold-rolled torsion steel
bars and welded steel bar nets, the stipulations in such special procedures as
Design and Construction Procedures for Prestressed Concrete Members
Reinforced with Cold-drawn Steel Wires (JGJ95), Technical Procedures for
Concrete Members Reinforced with Cold-rolled Torsion Steel Bars (JGJ115) and
Technical Procedures for Concrete Structures Reinforced by Welded Steel Bar
Nets (JGJ/T114). When using cold-drawn steel bars, the strength of the steel bar
after being cold-drawn should comply with the stipulation in the original code
(partially revised in 1996).

4.2.2 According to the standards for steel bars mentioned in descriptions of 4.2.1, this
article modifies the types, specifications and standard strength values of steel
bars.

4.2.3 The design values of HPB235 and HRB400 steel bars are taken according to the
original code. the design value of the strength of HRB335 steel bars is changed
to be 300N/m , so that the material breakdown coefficient γs of the three grades
2

of steel bars can be taken to be a consistent value (1.10).

As for the steel wires, steel strands and heat -treated steel bars for prestressed
structures, the original cod e selects 0.8σb (σb is the limit tension strength of steel
bars stipulated in the national standards) as the conditional yield point, which in
this code is changed to be 0.85σb so as to be consistent with the national steel
bar standard. The breakdown coefficient γs of steel bar materials is taken to be
1.2. For example, the strength design value for the prestressed steel wires of
ƒ ptk=1,770N/mm , is ƒ py=1,770x0.85/1.2=1,253N/mm , rounded to be 1,250N/mm ,
2 2 2
2
which about 4% higher than 1,200N/mm given in the original code (partially
modified in 1996).

242
4.2.5 Domestic and foreign fatigue experiment information shows: the key factor
affecting the fatigue strength of steel bars is the fatigue stress amplitude of steel
bar, i.e., σ max-σ min, therefore, this code, according to the design value of fatigue
f f

strength o steel bar in the original code, gives the limit value of fatigue stress
amplitude of steel bars taking the stress ratio into consideration.

The limit value of fatigue stress amplitude of steel strand is the newly-added
content in this revision, and it mainly refers to the Code for Design of Reinforced
Concrete and Prestressed Concrete Structures for Railway Bridges and Culverts
(TB10002.3-99) of our country. The limit value of fatigue stress amplitude given in
2
that code is 140N/mm , and its experiment is based on high-strength steel strand
with ƒ ptk=1,860N/mm . Since this code contains the steel strand strength grade of
2

ƒ ptk=1,570N/mm and there is the influence of such factors as prestressed steel

2

bars laid in curve pipes, the safer limit values in the table are taken.

The blank unit in the table of limit values of fatigue stress amplitude for ordinary
steel bars, Table 4.2.5-1, is due to lack of related experimental data.

243
 5 Structure Analysis

This chapter is a newly-added chapter and it supplements the insufficiency of

structure analysis contents in previous code for design of concrete structures of our
country. The articles in this chapter reflect our country's present design situations of
concrete structures and the achievements and progress obtained in engineering
experience, experiment study and other aspects. Its preparation also refers to
related contents in foreign standards and codes.

This code only lists the basic principles of structure analysis and the application
conditions of various analysis methods. The detailed contents of various structure
analysis methods are stated in related standards and can be executed according to
these standards.

5.1 Basic Principles

5.1.1 In any circumstance, the entire structure is subject to analysis. More detailed local
analysis must be separately made for any important position of the structure, any
position with shape acutely changed or any position with internal force and
deformation abnormally changed (such as surrounding of large hole, node and its
nearby area, abutment, near concentrated load, etc.).

When analyzing the two limit states of the structure, appropriate load combination
should be taken.

5.1.2 In different working stage of the structure, such as production, transportation and
installation stages of prefabricated, construction period, inspection and
maintenance period and application period of structure, and when an occasional
accident occurs, it is possible for various unfavorable reinforcing situations to
occur; in such cases, separate structure analysis should be made and the
possible most unfavorable action effect combination should be determined.

5.1.3 The structure analysis should be based on the actual working condition and
strained state of the structure. The res ults of structure analysis should have
appropriate construction measures as assurance. For example: ability of fixed
end and rigid node to bear bending moment and their deformation limitation;
sufficient rotating ability of plastic hinge; reinforcement rat e of reinforcement
arrangement section or limitation of compression area to relative height.

The structure analysis should have reliable basis and sufficient computation
accuracy.

5.1.4 The establishment of all structure analysis method is based on three types of
basic equations, i.e., mechanical balance equation, deformation coordination
(geometric) conditions and constitutive (physical) relation. The mechanical
balance condition must be satisfied; some methods cannot strictly satisfy the
deformation coordination condition but should meet this condition to some degree;
the constitutive relation should be reasonably selected.

244
5.1.5 Presently there are five types of structure analysis methods. Main characteristics
and application scope of various methods are described as follows:

1. Linear elastic analysis method is the most fundamental and most mature
structure analysis method and is the basis and special case of other
analysis methods. It is fit to analyze various types of structure and to
check-compute two limit states of the structure. Till now, the design of most
of concrete structures in and out of China is based on this method.

The combination of linear elastic analysis of internal force of the structure

and the limit state design of bearing capacity of section is practically simple
and feasible. The structure to be designed by using this method has safer
bearing capacity in general. A small number of structures will happen with
redistribution of internal force due to the reduction of rigidity of the cracking
part of the concrete, which may affect the cracking and deformation
situations of other parts.

Since the rigidity after the concrete structure is cracked is reduced, different
discounting rigidity values are to be taken respectively for girder member
and pillar member. However, the rigidity of various members (sections) does
not vary with the size of load effect, so the internal force and deformation of
the structure still can adopt the linear elastic method for analysis.

2. Using the analysis method considering redistribution of plastic internal force

to design hyperstatic concrete structure has such advantages as: able to
take full use of potential capacity of the structure, saving materials,
simplifying the design, convenient for construction and so on.

3. The plastic limit analysis method is also named as plastic analysis method
or limit balance method. The engineering design and construction practice
experiences prove that the computation and structure design using this
method are simple and feasible and they can guarantee the safety.

4. Non-linear analysis method is based on the actual mechanical performance

of the reinforced concrete, and after importing appropriate non -linear
constitutive relation, it can exactly analyze various load effects of the
structure in the whole bearing course. It is an advanced analysis method
and has been adopted in domestic and foreign design of some important
structures and moreover, some domestic and foreign leading design codes
have incorporated this method. However, this analysis method is relatively
complicated, the computation work load is large, various non -linear
constitutive relations have not been complete and united, so its application
is still limited at present and is mainly used to analyze some important and
large structures such as dam, structures of nuclear power station,
earthquake structure analysis and so on.

245
 5. When a structure or other parts has irregular shape and complicated
strained state and there is no suitable and simple analysis method, the
experiment analysis method can be adopted. For example, shearwall and
surroundings of its hole, main nodes of frame and truss frame, fatigue of
member, dam of plane strain state, and so forth.

5.1.6 The computerized analysis method is more and more frequently used in structure
design. Any commercial and self-compiled computerized analysis program must
ensure the computation reliability. Moreover, every computerized computation
result is subject to necessary judgment and checking.

5.2 Linear Elastic Analysis Method

5.2.2 Any structure composed of members the length of which is 3 times larger than
the section height can be regarded as a rod structure for analysis.

The simplifying assumption listed here is proved feasible by many years'

engineering experience. It is subject to additional consideration in some cases,
for example, some spatial structure system cannot be or is not suitable to be
decomposed into plane structures for analysis; the influence that the rod
deformation due to axial force and shearing force produces to the internal force of
the structure cannot be ignored for any high-rise building structure; second-order
effect should be considered for any thin, long and flexible structure or rod, and so
on.

5.2.3 The computational diagram had better be reasonably simplified according to the
actual shape of the structure, the strained state and deformation of member,
connection and supporting conditions between members and various construction
measures. For example, the fixed end of abutment or pillar bottom should have
appropriate construction and attached bar for guaranty; the position of fixed end
of bottom-layer pillar of a building with a basement also depends on the rigidity of
the basal plate (girder); the entirety of the connection structure at node decides
the section of rigid connec tion or hinge connection, and so on.

5.2.4 When computing the inertia moment of the section as per the full section of the
structure, the transformation area of the steel bars is not counted and the area of
the prestressing tendon passage is not deducted.

5.2.5 The computerized analysis program is programmed by using an exact analysis

method in general and the simplified analysis method is suitable for manual
computation.

246
5.2.7 Various structure systems and two-way plates under different supporting
conditions and load states can adopt linear elastic method for analysis. Among
the regularly-arranged two-way plates in a structure system, the plate with
surrounding supports and the plate column system can respectively adopt the
methods listed in Articles 5.3.2 and 5.3.3 for computation, which are simpler and
more convenient.

5.2.8 With the aid of mechanical analysis or model experiment, the internal stress but
not the internal force (bending moment, axial force, shearing force, torsion
moment) of the section can be obtained for 2D and 3D structures. The limiting
state of their bearing capacity had better be ensured by setting steel bars in the
tension area and by multi-shaft concrete strength check computation for the
compression area. The former is seen in the Code for Des ign of Concrete
Structures for Water Engineering (DL/T5057) but generally not considering the
tension strength of concrete; the latter is seen Appendix C of this code. The
combination of linear elastic stress analysis of structure and limit state
computation of attached bars can make the design result of its bearing capacity
safer.

5.3 Other Analysis Methods

5.3.1 The bending moment amplitude modulation method is one of the analysis
methods considering the redistribution of plastic internal force in reinforced
concrete structure. This method is simple and convenient in computation and has
been widely used in our country for many years. The principles, methods and
design parameters for bending moment amplitude modulation method are
stipulated in Design Procedures for Reinforced Concrete Continuous Girder and
Frame Considering Redistribution of Internal Force (CECS51:93). Attention
should be paid to the limiting conditions of use of this method.

5.3.2 When analyzing any reinforced concrete two-way plate with girders or walls
supported around, the plastic hinged line method (upper-limit resolution of limit
analysis) can be adopted. This method is to compute the bending moments of
grid plates in various areas in turn according to the basic limit balance equation of
the plate and the ratio of unit limit bending moments at two directions, or to
determine the bending moment by directly using appropriate computational
diagram. The stripe method is to obtain the lower-limit resolution of the limit
analysis; if the load is already known, you can use the balance condition to
determine the design value of the bending moment of the plate; the design
adopting this method is always safer.

5.3.3 As for any plate column system of the structure with regular layout, the bending
moment coefficient met hod can be directly used to compute the bending
moments of various abutment and in-span sections of the plate stripe on the pillar
of the plate stripe in the span. When the layout of the structure is irregular, the
plane but not frame can be taken to be as the computational diagram for analysis
and then distribute the bending moment of various abutment and in-span sections
according to the plate strips on the pillar and in the span.

5.3.4 As for the non -linear analysis of any rod-system (linear) structure and 2D/3D
structure, the analysis method can be selected according to the type and shape
of the structure and the required computation accuracy and so on. Different
discrete scales should be taken according to the actual situations; appropriate

247
 constitutive relation should be determined, such as the stress -strain relation at a
point, bending moment ~ curvature relation of the section of a rod part, internal
force ~ deformation relation of rod part, constitutive relation of finite units of
different shapes, and so on. And the basic equations should be deduced the
computation process should be determined based on this.

When performing the non-linear analysis to the structure, the sizes and material
performance indexes of various parts of the structure must be preset. If there is
any difference between the material performance indexes (such as strength,
elastic modulus, peak -value strain and yield strain) of the used concrete and steel
bar or their performance ratios and the appropriate values in the actual structure,
the computed results for the whole strained process (including the stress
distribution, deformation, failure state, limit load, etc.) of the structure will have
deviations of different degrees.

When determining the material constitutive relation, strength and deformation

values of concrete and steel bars, it had better carry out some tests in advance
for measurement. If there is no testing conditions, the proven mathematic models
(as described in Appendix C) can be adopted, the parameter values of which
should be demarcated or have reliable basis. The strength and characteristic
deformation value of the material had better adopt the mean values and can be
computed by using the formulas in Appendix C or taken from the values listed in
the table.

Similar to the determination of material performance indexes, when

check-computing the limiting state of bearing capacity of a structure, the design
value of the fundamental load effect combination should be multiplied by a
correction coefficient, the value of which should be determined according to the
strained characteristics and failure state of the structure or member but had better
not be less than the following values:

For control failure of tension steel bar (such as axial tension, bending, eccentric
tension, large eccentric compression, etc.) 1.4;

For control failure of compression concrete or diagonal section (such as axle load,
small eccentric compression, shearing, torsion, etc.) 1.9.

When check -computing the limiting state of normal use, the characteristic
combination of load effect can be taken without correction in general.

The stress, strain, curvature, deformation, crack interval and width in the structure
analysis can be taken to be the mean value in the range of a certain length or
area, so as to simplify the computation. After the concrete is cracked under
tension, when determining the deformation (curvature) and rigidity of the member,
it had better consider the tension rigidification effect of the concrete.

The computerized computation program for non-linear analysis of the structure

should be validated through experiment in addition to strict theoretical textual
research.

5.3.5 The experiment for concrete structures should be subject to a special design. The
shape, size and quantity of test sample, varieties and performance indexes of
material, supporting and boundary conditions, load mode, value and process,
measurement items, arrangement of measurement points and so on should be
thoroughly considered, so as to ensure the effectiveness and accuracy of the
experimental results.

248
 During the testing process of the structure, various measured and recorded data
and phenomena should be handled and judged. After the test is over, these data
should be analyzed and computed so as to determine various performance
index es of the test sample and the required design parameter values and to
estimate the accuracy of the test, and finally draw a reasonable conclusion.

5.3.6 The temperature-humidity deformation and shrinkage, creepage and other factors
of concrete mainly affect the normal-use limiting state and durability of the
structure but have minor affection to the limiting state of bearing capacity of the
structure. When necessary, analysis and check computation should be carried.
The temperature stress analysis is seen in the Code for Design of Concrete
Structures of Water Engineering (DL/T5057).

249
 6 Requirements for Computation of Prestressed Concrete
Structural Members

6.1 General Stipulations

6.1.1 The fundamental combination of load effect under limiting state of bearing
capacity and c haracteristic combination short-term effect combination in the
original code) and quasi-permanent combination (long-term effect combination) of
load effect under limiting state of normal use for prestressed concrete member
are determined according to relat ed stipulations in Code for Load of Architecture
(GB50009) an adding the prestressing force effect item. The design value of
prestressing force effect is given in computation formulas in concerned chapters
and sections of this code. The prestressing force effect includes the minor
bending moment and minor shearing force produced by the pre-applied force.
Under the limiting state of bearing capacity, the breakdown coefficient of the
prestressing force action should be taken to be 1.0 or 1.2 depending on whet her
the action of the prestressing force is favorable or unfavorable. When it is
unfavorable (such as the tension control force of the local compression area of
the anchorage head of the post -tensioned prestressed concrete member), the
breakdown coefficient of the action of prestressing force is generally taken to be
1.0. The above statement retains the stipulations in the original code and pays
attention to the coordination with related foreign codes.

As for the limiting state of bearing capacity, when the prestressing force effect is
listed into the left term of the formula to participate in the load effect combination,
according to the engineering experience, the prestressing force effect term
participating in the combination generally adopts the importance coefficient of the
structure γ 0 to be 1.0 (γ 0=1.0).

6.1.2 This article adopts the mixing reinforcement arrange and design method in which
prestressed tendons and non-prestressed ordinary steel bars are used and it also
adopts the design theory of partially prestressed concrete.

6.1.3 Compared with the original code, the limit of tension control stress σcon of
post-tensioned prestressed tendon is increased by 0.05ƒptk for stress -relief steel
wires and steel strand. The reason is that the high stress in the tension process
falls very quickly after the prestressing anchorage and the material quality of such
type of steel bar is relatively stable, so that the prestressed tendon is generally
not easy to be broken in the tension process. At present, many domestic
companies or units have been adopting the σcon values higher than the limit value
in the original code. Therefore, in order to increase the economic benefit of
prestressed tendon, the value of σcon can be suitably increased. However, higher
σcon may increase the loss of prestressing force, so the suitable tension control
stress should be determined depending on actual situation of the member.

250
6.1.5 In the post-tensioned prestressed concrete hyperstatic structure, there is such
redundant restriction as abutment. When the structural deformation that the
pre-applied force produces to the hyperstatic girder is restricted by the abutment,
the abutment will produce a counterforce that can further produce minor bending
moment M2 to make the axis line of the prestressed tendon inconsistent with the
compression line. Therefore, when computing the normal stress of concrete that
the pre-applied force produces in the section, the influence of the said minor
bending moment M 2 should be considered.

Any unfavorable influence that any constraint member such as pillar or wall
produces to the prestressing force effect of the girder and plate had better be
solved by taking appropriate measures in the design.

6.1.6 When setting non-prestressing tendons in a prestressed concrete member, due to

the influence from concrete shrinkage and creepage, some internal force will be
produced in these non-prestressing tendons. Such internal force reduces the
normal pre-compressive stress of the concrete in the tension area and reduces
the crack resisting performance of the member, so such influence should be
considered in the computation. In order to simplify the computation, it is assumed
that the stress of the non-prestressing tendon is equal to the Prestressing Loss
due to concrete shrinkage and creepage. However, strictly speaking, this kind of
simplified computation has a certain error when the gravity centers of the
prestressing tendon and the non-prestressing tendon do not coincide.

6.1.7~6.1.8 Generally for prestressing tendon, the inner bending moment N pe pn due to
geometric layout eccentricity is expressed by M1, the abutment counterforce that
this bending moment produces to the continuous girder is called as minor
counterforce and the bending moment that the minor counterforce produces to
the girder is called as minor bending moment M2. In the prestressed concrete
hyperstatic girder, the total bending moment Mr that the pre-applied force
produces to any section is the sum of the inner bending moment M1 and the
minor bending moment M 2, i.e., Mr=M1+M2.

The test and research achievements on prestressed concrete continuous girder

by domestic and foreign scholars show that when performing crack resisting
check computation of normal section and diagonal section for prestressed
concrete hyperstatic structure, the influence of the minor bending moment and
minor shearing force of the prestressing force should be counted and the
prestressing force breakdown coefficient of the minor bending moment and the
minor shearing force should be taken to be 1.0. In the crack resisting check
computation of normal section, in order to consider the action of the minor
bending moment into the computation, the total bending moment produced by the
equivalent load of the pre-applied force (after deducting the Prestressing Los s in
the appropriate stage and considering the influence of non-prestressing tendon)
on the section of the structure should be taken for computation. When computing
the bending bearing capacity of normal section, the minor shearing force in the
design value of shearing force should participate in the combination. When the
minor bending moment and minor shearing force participating in the combination
is unfavorable to the structure, the breakdown coefficient of the prestressing force
should be taken to be 1. 2; it should be taken to be 1.0 when favorable to the
structure.

251
 In recent years, some tests and studies on the redistribution of internal forces in
post-tensioned prestressed concrete continuous girder have been done in China,
which have explored the influence of minor bending moment to the redistribution
of internal force. These testing laws provide basis for the preparation of this
article.

According to the above-mentioned tests and studies and the analysis and
suggestions in related references, as for the post-tensioned prestressed concrete
hyperstatic structure existing minor bending moment, the redistribution law of its
bending moment can be described as (1-β)M d+aM 2≤M u, in which, a is the
disappearance coefficient of minor bending moment.

The amplitude modulation coefficient of direct bending moment is defined as

β=1-M a/M d, in which Ma is the bending moment after adjustment and Md is the
design value of load bending moment to be computed after the elastic analysis;
its variation amplitude is 0≤β≤β max (βmax is the maximum amplitude modulation
coefficient). The minor bending moment will gradually disappear when the rigidity
of the structural member changes and the plastic hinge rotates and its variation
amplitude is 0≤a≤1.0; when β=0, a=1.0; when β=β max, a can be approximately
taken to be 0. Moreover, β can be positive or negative. When β is positive, it
means that the direct bending moment at the abutment modulates the amplitude
to the span; when β is negative, it means that the direct bending moment in the
span modulates the amplitude to the abutment. On the basis of the above testing
results, analysis and study, this article stipulates that as for the prestressed
concrete frame girder and continuous girder under the action of the gravity load,
when the height of the compression area x≤0.30h0, a limited redistribution is
allowable for bending moment and its amplitude modulation value should not
exceed 10% at most; meanwhile, the influence of minor bending moment to the
internal force of the section can be considered, but the total amplitude modulation
value had better not exceed 20%.

6.1.9 The prestressing force transfer length of notched steel wire, spiral ribbed steel
wire, three-folded and seven-folded steel strands should be adjusted on the basis
of the prestressing force transfer length stipulated in the original code and
depending on the test and study achievements, and it should be computed by
using the appropriate formula and substituting its effective prestressing force
value into the formula. The external form coefficient of the transfer length of
prestressing tendon is dependent on the external form of the steel bar relating to
anchorage.

6.1.11~6.1.13 In order to ensure the construction safety of prestressed concrete

structure, this article clearly stipulates that the check computation of limiting state
of bearing capacity should be performed in the construction stage. The limit value
condition for normal stress of concrete at the edge of the section is obtained after
being corrected according to related domestic and foreign codes and based on
the domestic engineering experiences. The limit value for normal stress of
concrete is expressed according to the standard values of tension strength and
compression strength corresponding to concrete compression strength ƒ' cu in
every construction stage.

The reinforcement rate for longitudinal steel bars in the pre-tensioning area
should be consistent with the minimum reinforcement rate given in Article 9.5.1 in
this code in principle.

252
6.1.14 The computation of shearing bearing capacity, torsion bearing capacity and crack
width of pre-tensioned and post-tensioned prestressed concrete member all need
to adopt the joint force Np0 of prestressing tendon when the normal prestressing
force of concrete is zero, therefore, this article is stipulated.

6.2 Computation of Prestressing Loss

6.2.1 The stress relaxation test of steel wires and steel strands used in prestressed
concrete shows that the stress relaxation loss is related to the initial stress and
limit strength of the steel wire. The formula using to compute the relaxation loss
of ordinary relaxation and low relaxation prestressed steel wire and steel strand
given in the table is the united computation formula synthesizing the values
stipulated in steel bar standards GB/T5223 and GB/T5224, so as to be
convenient for use. When σcon/ ƒ ptk≤0.5, the actual relaxation loss is very small, so
the relaxation loss is taken to be zero for simplifying the computation. A small
number of existing test data shows that it is safer to take the stress relaxation loss
stipulated in the code for heat -treated steel bar. In the future, after a systematic
test, more accurate stipulation can be formulated.

6.2.2 In the original code, the stipulations on allowable shrinkage amount of

prest ressing tendon at the tension end in the anchorage stage are given for
anchorage with screw cap, heading anchorage of wire cable, steel conical
anchorage of wire cable, JM12 anchorage and conical anchorage of single piece
of cold-drawn low-carbon wire cable, but not including all anchorages. This code,
according to the different anchoring theory, divides anchorages into three types:
supporting anchorage, tapered plug anchorage and clamping-piece anchorage.
Moreover, this code gives appropriate stipulations for each anchorage type.

In the original code, values are not given for deformation of anchorage of such
group anchorage as QM, XM and OVM and for shrinkage value of steel bars.
However, these anchorages and JM anchorage all belong to clamping -piece
anchorage, so this revision gives the stipulated values of such kind of anchorage
according to whether they have top pressure or not.

6.2.4 The prestressing loss due to friction between prestressing tendon and the
passage wall includes two parts: the loss due to local position shift along the
length of the passage and the loss due to the frication of curve bend. In the
computation formula, the value of x is the passage length from the tension end to
the passage wall. However, in an actual project, the height -length ratio of the
member often is very small. Therefore, in order to simplify the computation, the
projection length of this segment of passage on the longitudinal axle is taken to
replace the passage length; the value of θ is the sum of the bent -up angles (in
degree of arc) of the prestressing tendons on the length from the tension end to
the computational section.

253
 The research shows that the friction coefficient k of local deviation of the passage
is in relation to the following factors: surface shape of prestressing tendon;
molding quality of passage; external shape of joint of prestressing tendon; contact
degrees between prestressing tendon and passage wall (passage size, size of
gap between prestressing tendon and passage wall, and eccentric distance of
prestressing tendon in passage) and so on. In the friction loss of curved
prestressing tendon, the loss due to friction between prestressing tendon and the
curve bend is the determinant factor.

6.2.5 The findings of domestic and foreign test and research on concrete shrinkage
and creepage show that the influence of reinforcement rate of prestressing
tendon and non-prestressing tendon to σl 5 should be considered and the
influence can be reflected by the total reinforcement rate of the member,
ρ(ρ=ρ p+ρ s). Formulas (6.2.5-1) and (6.2.5-4) respectively give out the
prestressing loss due to concrete shrinkage and creepage at the prestressing
tendon in the tension area and compression area of pre-tensioned and
post-tensioned members. These formulas reflect the influence of various
above-mentioned factors. This computation is more reasonable than the method
to compute the prestressing loss only according to the normal stress of concrete
at the acting point of joint force of prestressing tendon. Since the time that the
cast-in-situ post-tensioned prestressed concrete applies the stress is earlier than
the 28d age, this code adjusts the values of concerned terms in the above
formulas used to compute shrinkage and creepage. The adjustment basis is as
below: when pre-applying the force, the concrete age is taken to be 7d for
pre-tensioned concrete and 14d for post -tensioned concrete; the theoretical
thickness is taken to be 200mm; the duration after pre-applying the force and
before using the load is 1 year and is obtained through comparing with the
computed result in Appendix E. Meanwhile, this code deletes the formula to
compute the coefficient β of the influence tat the time from pre-applying the stress
to bearing external load onto the concrete shrinkage and creepage loss.

254
 7 Computation of Limiting State of Bearing Capacity

7.1 General Stipulations for computation of Bearing Capacity of Normal Section

7.1.1 This article definitely points out the applicable conditions of Sections 7.1~7.4 in
this chapter, while stating that the deep flexural member should be commutated
according to the stipulation in Section 10.7 in this code.

7.1.2~7.1.3 Detailed stipulations are made for the basic assumptions of the
computation method of bearing capacity of normal section:

1. Assumption on plane section

The test shows that before the stress of the longitudinal tension steel bar
reaches the yield strength and at the moment it reaches the yield strength,
the mean strain of the section basically complies with the assumption on
plane section. Therefore, it is reasonable to establish the limit condition
judging whether the longitudinal tension steel bar yields or not and to
determine the stress σs of the steel bar before yielding according to the
plane-section assumption. The plane-section assumption, as a computation
measure, is feasible even when the steel bar reaches the yield strength and
even enters the strengthening stage; the computed value relatively well
complies with the testing data.

The plane-section assumption can link the computation of normal-section

bearing capacity of various types of sections (including the surrounding
reinforcement arrangement section) in the cases to bear force at one or two
directions, it improves the logicality and reasonability of the computation
method, and it makes the computation formula have definite physical concept.
The plane-section assumption provides an indispensable deformation
condition to take use the computerized method to implement the full-range
analysis and the non-linear analysis.

The plane-section assumption is adopted in related codes of some countries

in the world.

2. Stress-strain curve of concrete

Since the concrete strength rises, the stress-strain curve of concrete under
compression will gradually vary, and its ascent stage will gradually tend to a
linear change and the strain corresponding to the peak stress will slightly rise;
its descent stage tends to become steep and the limit strain is reduced
somewhat. In order to comprehensively reflect the characteristics of
low-/mid-strength concrete and high-strength concrete, some modification
and supplementation are made on the basis of the stress -strain curve of the
original code, and the following expressions are taken in this code with
reference to the stipulations in foreign related codes:

255
 εc
For ascent stage: σ c = f c [1 − (1 − )n] (εc≤ε0)
ε0

For descent stage: σ c = f c (ε0< εc≤εcu)

According to the domestic test results on eccentric compression short pillar of

mid/low -strength concrete and high-strength concrete, such rel ated
parameters as n, ε0 and εcu are given in the article, which are close to the test
results. To implement the combination with international codes and the
unification of domestic codes and to suitably improve the reliability of the
computation of bearing capacity of normal section, this code cancels the
bending compression strength ƒ cm and takes the axial compression strength
ƒ c for the peak stress σ0.

In the computation of bearing capacity, appropriate compression stress

diagram can be adopted as soon as the computed bearing capacity can
comply with the reliable testing results. In order to simplify the computation,
this code adopts the equivalent rectangle compression stress diagram; in this
case, the stress in the rectangle stress diagram is taken to be the product of
ƒ c and the coefficient a1, and the height of the rectangle stress diagram can
be taken to be equal to the product of the height xn of the central axis
determined according to the plane -section assumption multiplied by the
coefficient β 1. as for mid/low-strength concrete, when n=2, ε0=0.002; when
εcu=0.0033, a1=0.969 and β 1=0.824; in order to simplify the computation, a1 is
taken to be 1.0 and β1 is taken to be 0.8. As for any high-strength concrete, its
characteristics is reflected by the coefficients a1 and β1 that are gradually
reduced as the concrete strength is increased. This kind of processing
method can satisfy the requirement to further improve the concrete strength
and also the processing method adopted in most of national codes. Th e
above simplified computation and testing results are close on the whole. It
should be noted that when the above stipulations on simplification of
computation are applied for the compression area of triangle section and
circular section, a certain error may occur.

3. The limit tension strain of longitudinal tension steel bar is stipulated to be 0.01,
which is one of the signs indicating that the member reaches the limiting state
of bearing capacity. As for any steel bar that has physical yield point, it means
that the steel bar gets into the yielding stage; as for any steel bar without yield
point, the strength to be used in the design is the basis of conditional yield
point, and the stipulation on limit tension strain is to limit the reinforcing
strength of the steel bar, while it also stands for the steel bar used in the
design, the symmetric elongation rate of which shall not be less than 0.01 so
as to ensure that the structural member has required elongation performance.
As for any prestressed concrete structural member, its limit tension strain
should be computed starting from the stress σ0 of the prestressing bar when
the compression force of concrete is relieved.

As for non-symmetric compression member, the limit compression strain of

concrete should reach εcu or the limit tension strain of the tension steel bar
should reach 0.01, that is to say, as soon as there is one among the two limit
strains, it can imply that the member reaches the limit state of bearing
capacity.

256
7.1.4 The boundary state that a member reaches refers to the failure state occurring
when the tension steel bar yield on the normal section and the concrete failure in
the compression area simultaneously happen. Corresponding to this failure state,
the strain of the concrete in the compression edge reaches εcu; as for the
reinforced concrete member configured with yield point steel bar, the strain of
longitudinal tension steel bar is taken to be ƒy/Es. The ratio of the height xb of the
boundary compression area and the height xnb of the boundary central axle is β 1;
according to the plane-section assumption, Formula (7.1.4-1) for computing the
height ξb of the relative boundary compression area of the section is obtained.

As for any prestressed concrete member or prestressed concrete member

configured with steel bars without yield point, according to the definition of
conditional yield point, 0.2% of residual strain should be considered, the strain for
ordinary steel bar is taken to be (ƒy/Es+0.002) and the strain of prestressing
tendon is taken to be [(ƒ py-σp0)/Es+0.002]. According to the plane-section
assumption, Formulas (7.1.4-2) and (7.1.4-3) can be obtained.

The ordinary steel bar without yield point generally refers to ribbed steel bars with
small specifications. The characteristics of t he steel bar without yield point mainly
depend on the rolling and straightening technologies of the steel bar.

7.1.5 The formula to compute the steel bar stress σs uses the limit compression strain
σcu that the concrete reaches as the sign indicating that the member reaches the
limit state of the bearing capacity.

Formula (7.1.5-1) used to computed the stress σsi of ordinary steel bar at any
position of the section and Formula (7.1.5-2) used to compute the stress σpi of
prestressing tendon are given according to the plane-section assumption.

In order to simplify the computation and according to a lot of test data and
computation analysis from our country, the stress σs of the measured lesser
tension or compression edge under the lesser eccentric compression
circumstance and ξ approximately have a straight -line relation. Since ξ= ξb and
ξ= β 1 are the boundary conditions, the relation between σs and ξ is taken to be a
linear relation and therefore we can obtain Formulas (7.1.5-3) and (7.1.5-4).

According to the above linear relational expression, when computing the bearing
capacity of the normal section, it generally is a quadratic equation.

The analysis indicates that after replacing the coefficient 0.8 in the formula in the
original code with β1, the error produced when using the approximate formula to
compute the steel bar stress will be approximately equivalent to that for ordinary
concrete.

7.2 Computation of Bending Bearing Capacity of Normal Section

7.2.1~7.2.6 These articles basically retain the practical computation method stipulated
in the original code. According to the stipulations in Section 7.1 of this code, the
design value ƒc m of concrete bending compression strength used in the original
code is unitedly changed into the product of concrete axial compression strength
design value ƒc multiplied by the coefficient a1.

257
 7.3 Computation of Compression Bearing Capacity of Normal Section

7.3.1 This article basically retains the stipulation of the original code. In order to keep a
reliability close to that of the computation of baring capacity of normal section of
an eccentric compression member, the coefficient 0.9 is multiplied in the right
term of Formula (7.3.1) in the text.

When it needs to use the formula to compute the value of ϕ, ϕ=[1+0.002( b0 -8) ]
l 2 -1

can be approximately taken for the rectangle section instead of taking the value
from the table. When l 0/b dose not exceed 40, the error between the value to be
computed by using formula and the value listed in the table will not exceed 3.5%.
As for any section, b can be taken to be 12 ⋅i; as for any circular section, b can
be taken to be 3 ⋅d/2.

7.3.2 This article basically retains the stipulations in the original code. according to the
domestic and foreign testing results, when the concrete strength grade is larger
than C50, the constraint of indirect steel bars to concrete will be reduced; for this
reason, in the range 50N/mm <ƒ cu,k≤80N/mm , the discounting coefficient a is
2 2

given. Due to the same reason described in Article 7.3.1, the coefficient is
multiplied in the right term of Formula (7.3.2-1).

7.3.3 The uncertainness of acting position of load, nonuniformity of concrete quality,

construction deviation and other factors actually existing during construction all
possibly produce additional eccentric distance. The codes of many countries have
concrete stipulations relating to additional eccentric distance, so this article, with
reference to the experiences of foreign codes, stipulates the requirements for
absolute value and relative value of additional eccentric distance ea and the larger
one of the two values is taken for computation.

7.3.4 Eccentric compression member of rectangle section

1. As to any compression member of asymmetrically-set steel bars and small

eccentricity, when the eccentric distance is very small, in order to avoid As
from producing compression failure, it is additionally subject to the check
computation by using Formula (7.3.4-5). In this case, the augmenting
coefficient for eccentric distance is not considered and the initial eccentric
distance ei=e 0-e a is imported, which considers the additional eccentric
distance at the unfavorable direction. The computation shows that only when
N>ƒc bh, the reinforcement rate of steel bar As can possibly be larger than the
minimum reinforcement rate.

2. Approximate computation method for reinforced concrete member with steel

bars symmetrically set and of small eccentric compression

When using the basic formulas of eccentric compression members, Formula

(7.3.4-1), (7.3.4-2) and (7.1.5-1), to compute the bearing capacity of a
reinforced concrete member with symmetrically-set steel bars and small
eccentric compression, a cubic equation of ξ will appear. In the simplified
formula in Item 4 of Article 7.3.4, ξ is taken to be
(1-ξ/2)(ξb- ξ)/(ξb-β 1)≈0.43(ξb- ξ)/(ξb-β 1), so the equation of ξ is converted into a
linear equation, convenient to directly compute the reinforcement area of the
small eccentric compression member. Changing the coefficient 0.45 of the
original code into 0.43 is to make the formula suitable for high-strength
concrete.

258
 Similarly, the above simplification method also can be extended and then
used for the member of T-shaped or I-shaped section.

7.3.5 On the basis of the corresponding articles of the original code, this article gives
the formula to compute the compression bearing capacity of normal section of an
eccentric compression member of I-shaped section, while the T-shaped and
reverse-T-shaped section can be computed according to the notes in the article;
meanwhile, a check computation formula and its approximate conditions are
given for small-eccentricity compression members with steel bars asymmetrically
set.

7.3.6 As for any eccentric compression member that has rectangle, T-shaped or
I-shaped section and has longitudinal steel bars asymmetrically set along the
abdomen of the section (steel bars with identical diameter and identical interval
set along the abdomen of the section), the bearing capacity of its normal section
can be computed by using the balance equation deduced according to the basic
assumptions for general computation methods in Article 7.1.2. However, because
the computation formula is relatively complicated, it is inconvenient for application
in design. For this reason, necessary simplification is made and Formulas
(7.3.6-1)~(7.3.6-4) are given.

According to the basic assumption in Article 7.1.2, the distance from the fiber
where the strain of the steel bar of symmetrical reinforcement arrangement
reaches at the yield point to the central axle is βξh0/ β1, in which β=ƒ yw/(E s εcu).
The analysis indicates that, the variation amplitude of β for commonly-used steel
bars is not large and its influence to internal force of symmetrically -set steel bars
is very small. Therefore, the internal force expressions (Nsw and Msw) of
symmetrically-set steel bars given according to the plane-section assumption is
approximately fitted by using straight line and quadric curve, and two simplified
formulas (Formula 7.3.6-3 and 7.3.6-4) are obtained.

The computation and analysis indicate that when steel bars centrally configured
on the two opposite edges and symmetrically configured in the abdomen have a
certain proportion, the error between the simplification computation result and the
accurate computation result is not high, and moreover, the simplification
computation can save a lot of computation work load.

7.3.7~7.3.8 Computation of bearing capacity of normal section in an eccentric

compression member of annular and circular section

The bearing capacity of normal section in an eccentric compression member that

has steel bars symmetrically set and has annular or circular section can be
computed by using the balance equation obtained according to the basic
assumptions described in Article 7.1.2, but this computation is too complicated
and is inconvenient to be used in the design. Formulas (7.3.7-1)~(7.3.7-6) and
Formulas (7.3.8-1)~(7.3.8-4) are used to simplify the stresses of the compression
and tension steel bars of echelon stress distribution along the sections into an
equivalent rectangle stress diagram, and their relative steel bar areas
respectively are a and a1. When computing, whether the eccentricity is large or
small is unnecessary to be determined, the result obtained by using the simplified
formulas has less error with that from the accurate computation. As for an annular
section, when a is relatively small the actual compression area is the arched area
in the ring, the simplified formula may underestimate the bearing capacity of the
section; in this case, it can be regarded as a circular section for computation.

259
7.3.9 The second-order effect generally refers to the additional internal force produced
by the axial compression force in the structural member that has had inter-layer
displacement and bending deformation. Tak ing frame structure as example, in a
frame with side shift, the second-order effect mainly refers to the additional
internal force produced by the vertical load in the frame with side shift, generally
named as P-∆ effect. in every column segment of such frame, the P-∆ effect will
increase the bending moment of the pillar-end control section; in a frame without
side shift, the second-order effect refers to the additional internal force produced
by the axial compression force in the pillar segment with bending deformation,
which is generally called as the P-δ effect and possibly increase the bending
moment of the middle part of the pillar segment. However, except for the
bottom-layer pillar bottom, it generally not wall increase the bending moment of
the pillar-end control section. Because in our country various structures is
generally designed according to the side-shift assumption, Articles 7.3.9~7.3.12 in
this code mainly cover the second-order effect issues under the side-shift
assumption. In any individual case without side shift, the second-order effect still
can be computed according to the stipulation in Article 7.3.10.

The second-order effect computation originally belongs to the content of the

structure analysis. However, because the structure analysis considering the
second-order effect needs to describe the bending deformation state of various
rod parts, before there is no the structure internal force analysis method
applicable for engineering and considering the second-order effect, the design of
section bearing capacity for eccentric compression member only can adopt the
approximate method to consider the unfavorable influence of the second-order
effect. In the section design for eccentric compression member in the original
code, the method to estimate the second-order bending moment by using the
eccentric distance augmenting coefficient η obtained for standard eccentric
compression pillar (compression rode the two end hinges of which has identical
eccentric distance) and the computational length l0 of the structural pillar segment
in combination; this method is also named as η-l 0 method. As with the
development of computer technologies, use the elastic rod -system finite element
method for structure analysis and replace the initial elastic rigidity with discounted
elastic rigidity considering limit state so that it can reflect the characteristics of the
structure deformation of reinforced concrete structure under the limit state of
bearing capacity, and the internal force of various rod parts in the structure
including the second-order internal force can be accurately computed and the
inaccuracy existing many cases when adopting the η-l 0 method can be overcome.
This method is called as the elastic analysis method considering second-order
effect in this code. The most unfavorable internal force obtained under various
load combinations by using this method can be directly used in the section design
of various members without the need to separately consider the second-order
effect issues in the section design.

The main differences between the revised articles (Articles 7.3.9~7.3.12) relating
to second-order effect and the original code is that the original code only
recommends the η-l 0 approximate method while this code gives both the η-l 0
approximate method and the more accurate elastic analysis method considering
the second-order effect for choice by the design.

260
7.3.10 This article stipulates the contents relating to the computation which adopts the
η-l0 approximate method to consider the influence of second-order effect in the
bearing capacity design for eccentric compression member.

In the η-l 0 approximate method, η is defined as the eccentric distance

augmenting coefficient of the section at the center point of the height of standard
eccentric compression pillar, and its meaning is as follows:

M + ∆M M / N + ∆M / N e0 + α f αf
η= = = =1+
M M /N e0 e0

In this expression, M is the bending moment of the center point of the pillar height
not considering the second-order effect, i.e., the product of axle load N of the
standard eccentric compression pillar and the eccentric distance e0 of the pillar
end; ∆M is the additional bending moment that the axial compression force
produces at the center point of the height of the bending deformation pillar, i.e.
the product of the axial compression force N multiplied by the side bending
deflection af at the center point of the pillar height.

The computational length l 0 of every pillar segment in the structure is the

equivalent standard length of the computed pillar segment corresponding to the
actual reinforcing pillar segment. In other words, the η to be computed according
to a standard pillar that is l0 long and the axial compression force, rod-end
eccentric distance and section characteristics are completely the same as those
of the control section of the pillar segment of the structure should be able to
reflect the actual ratio of (M+∆M) and M of the control section of the considered
pillar segment. Therefore, the computational length l0 is equivalent to an
equivalent length.

In this article, the augmenting coefficient of eccentric distance still adopts the
computational formula of the original code. That formula reflects the augmenting
coefficient of eccentric distance corresponding to the "limit curvature" when the
eccentric compression member reaches the maximum axial compression force.
Its basic expression is as follows:
1 l 02
η =1+ ( )ζ 1ζ 2
ei βγ c
In this formula, ei is the initial eccentric distance and its is stipulated in Article
l2
7.3.4 in this code; ( βγ0 )ζ1 ζ2 is the side bending deflection corresponding to the
c

limit curvature of the member; in which β is the shape-related coefficient of the

deflection line of the pillar, as for any supporting pillar with hinges at both ends,
the tested deflection line basically comply with a sine curve, so β can be taken to

be p 2≈10.

261
The analysis results show that the "limit curvature" 1/rc for any large-eccentricity
compression members of different eccentric distance can be approximately taken
to be as follows:

1 φεcu + ε y
=
γc h0

In the above expression, εcu and εy is the limit compression strain of boundary
concrete of the section and the yield strain of tension steel bars. In order to keep
consistent with the original code, εcu is taken to be 0.0033 and εy is taken to be
the strain corresponding to the standard tension strength of HRB335 steel bars,
which is between the strain values of HPB235 and HRB400 steel bars. In order to
simplify the computation, no stipulation to differentiate the types of steel is given
in this code. φ in the above expression is the creepage coefficient. It should be
noted that, in an actual project, the side displacement of a frame with side shift is
generally due to a short-term wind load or earthquake, so it is unnecessary to
consider the unfavorable influence that the long-term action of horizontal load
increases the side shift into the second-order bending moment; that is to say φ is
taken to be 1.0; only when the side shift of frame is produced by long-term action
of horizontal load such as static water pressure or soil pressure, can a creepage
coefficient φ larger than 1.0 be considered for use. In order to simplify the
computation, the revised article does not differentiate whether the acting time of
the horizontal load is long or short and φ is unitedly taken to be safer value
according to the stipulation of the original code, i.e., 1.25. Substitute the above
value into the above -mentioned expression of 1/rc and take β=10 and h/h0=1.1,
and the practical expression of the standard Formula (7.3.10) can be obtained on
the basis of the basic expression of η given above.

In a compression member of small eccentricity, the stress of its longitudinal

tension steel bar cannot reach the yield strength and the strain of the boundary
concrete in the compression area can reach up to or be less than εcu, so the
section curvature correction coefficient ζ1 is imported, which can be expressed as
follows in principle with reference to foreign codes and testing and analysis
results:

Nb
ζ1 =
N

In the above expression, Nb is the design value of boundary compression bearing

capacity of the member when the height of compression area x=xb; for sake of
practicality, this code approximately takes N b=0.5ƒ cA and obtains Formula
(7.3.10-2) based on this.

262
 In addition, in order to count the influence of the slenderness ratio of member to
section curvature, the correction coefficient ζ2 is imported; then according to the
analysis on testing results, Formula (7.3.10-3) is obtained.

It should be noted that when l0/ h≤30, the computation result of Formula (7.3.10-1)
well comply with the testing result; when l0/h>30, because the strain value of the
control section decreases, the steel bar and concrete cannot reach up to their
respective strength design values, the pillar belongs to a slender column, and
when failure, it approximates an elastic failure, the error of the computation by
using Formula (7.3.10-1) is relatively large; it is suggested to adopt the model
column method or other reliable method for computation.

The formula listed in this article had been proven suitable through the test on a lot
of eccentric compression members of rectangle sections in China; as for any
member of I-shaped or T-shaped section, the computation result of this formula is
slightly safer; as for any member of circular section, in forei gn countries the
model column method has been adopted for computation and its suitability is also
proven; as for any eccentric compression member of prestressed concrete, it is
on the safer side in general cases.

The original code ever stipulated that, when the member slenderness ratio l0/h (or
l0/d)≤8, the influence of second-order effect can be not considered, i.e., η is taken
to be 1.0. In this revision, according to the coordination with related codes, with
reference to practices of related foreign codes and in combination with the used
l0 values in codes of our country, the boundary condition not considering the
second-order effect is modified to be l 0/h (or l0/d)≤5.0 and the generalized
boundary condition is taken to be l0/i≤17.5, so as to suit to different section
shapes. The check computation shows that when this condition is satisfied, the
additional bending moment produced by the second-order effect in the section of
the member averagely will not exceed 5% of the linear bending moment of the
section.

7.3.11 In the original code, the stipulation relating to the computational length of the
trestle stand pillar is digested from Code (TJ10-74) published in 1974 and the
value of the computational length is determined according to the then elastic
analysis and engineering experience. The actual use in many years shows that
this computational length value is feasible. In recent years, the computational
length of trestle stand has not been subject to more accurate modification, so
Table 7.3.11-1 in this article continues to use the stipulation of the original code.

The domestic and foreign analysis and study on second-order law of frame
structures in recent years show that, the P-∆ effect that the vertical load produces
in the frame with side shift only increases the linear bending moment M h
produced by the horizontal load onto the pillar-end control section and it in
principle will not increase the linear moment Mv produced by vertical load onto
this section. Therefore, the total bending moment in the pillar-end control section
of the frame considering the second-order effect should be expressed as follows:

263
 M=Mv+ηsMh

In this formula, ηs is the bending moment augmenting coefficient reflecting the

second-order effect augmenting Mh amplitude, the computational length which
takes in principle can be the distance from the frame without side supporting point
and with vertical load acting on girder column node to the countraflexure point of
the deflection line when the frame is under the critical instability state. Its
approximate expressions are Formulas (7.3.11-1) and (7.3.11 -2) listed in this
article and its value is the lesser computation result of the two formulas. However,
the result of the traditional η-l 0 method used in the original code is to use η to
simultaneously increase the bending moments produced by horizontal and
vertical loads, i.e.:

M=η(Mv+Mh)

This shows that, to obtain the same total bending moment, η must be taken to be
less than ηs, and l0 corresponding to η therefore must be less than the l0 value
corresponding to η s and expressed by Formulas (7.3.11-1) and (7.3.11 -2).

The check computation results show that, when the ratio of M v and M h is the ratio
of the multi-layer frame structure in a project and the pillar/girder line rigidity ratio
at various nodes of the frame (ratio of the rigidity sum of various pillar segment
line at the node junction and the rigidity sum of various girder segment line at the
junction) is the common ratio in the common multi-layer frame, the difference
between the total bending moment computed using η and M=η(Mv+M h) obtained
by using the simplified computation solution of computational length of side-shift
frame pillar, which is given in Subitem 1 of Item 1 in Article 7.3.1 in the original
code, and the total bending moment obtained when only using η s increases M h is
not large. Therefore, in order to simplify the design, this code continues to use the
computational length of the side-shift frame in the original code (i.e. the
computational length l 0 in Table 7.3.11 -2 in this article) to compute η and
continues to the method multiplying η by (M v+M h) to determine the total bending
moment. The concept of this method is not exact but the computation is simple
and it reduces the complicated steps that the eccentric distance augmenting
coefficient must be adjusted by using the proportion of Mv and Mh since η s only
corresponds to the increment of section curvature due to η sM h. However, When
the ratio of M v and Mh is obviously less than or obviously larger than the
frequently-used ratio of Mv and M h to be considered when determining the
computation length in Table 7.3.11 -2, this kind of method to compute total
bending moment will undoubtedly bring a too large error; when the Mv and M h
ratio is on the lower side, the error is slightly unsafe. Therefore, Item 3 is given in
this article of stipulation relating to computational length, requiring to use the
lesser one among the computation results of Formula (7.3.11-1) and (7.3.11 -2) as
the basis to take the value of computational length in this case, so as to reduce
the unreliability when using the computational length in Table 7.3.11-2 when the
Mv and Mh ratio is too low.

264
 Because in the design of reinforced concrete multi-storey and high-rise
architectures in our country, the structure analysis is made generally based on
the side shift assumption, this article cancels the stipulation of Subitem 2 of Item
2 of Article 7.3.1 in the original code on taking smaller computational length for
the structure with relatively large lateral rigidity. Another reason to cancel this
stipulation is that it is not rigorous theoretically.

Because it is not very reasonable for the code to adopt the method to multiply η
by (M v+M h), and the influence of pillar/girder line rigidity ratio is not considered
when determining the value of l0, the η-l0 method may bring a high error in some
cases. In addition that when M v is relatively small Formulas (7.3.11-1) and
(7.3.11-2) can be modified to determine the computational length l 0 and therefore
to reduce the unreliability that the η-l 0 approximate method produces in this case,
as described above, the η-l 0 approximate method in this article can produce
obvious error in the following cases:

1. Since the value of computational length l0 in Table 7.3.11-2 in this article is

roughly suitable for the case of common section sizes of common multi-layer
frame, too large or too small pillar-girder line rigidity ratio will make the value
of l0 not suitable for the actual situation. When the pillar-girder line rigidity
ratio is too large, the application of the η-l0 method is not safe.

2. Since η in the η-l 0 method is computed respectively according to the control

section of various pillars, it does not consider to meet the basic condition for
the side displacement of various pillars in the same layer to be identical,
using the η-l 0 method will lead to a relatively large error when the proportions
of vertical loads of various pillar columns have relatively large difference from
the regular cases due to unequal spans of various spans in the frame and
unequal loads.

3. To use the η-l0 method in such complicated frame structures as composite

frame also will produce a relatively large error in part of member sections.

4. In a frame-shearwall structure or a frame ~ core tube structure, because the

distribution low of inter-layer displacement in the frame part along the height
has already been different that in common regular frame structure, so it is
possible to lead to a relatively large error by using the η-l0 method. The check
computation shows that, compared with the more accurate structure analysis,
the error of total bending moment of pillar-end control section to be computed
by using the η-l0 method in part of sections may be up to over 25%.

As for the above cases with relatively large error, the effective method to
obviously reduce the error is the elastic analysis method considering
second-order effect, which is stipulated in Article 7.3.12 in this code.

7.3.12 The elastic analysis method considering second-order effect is a method of

relatively high accuracy and efficiency and considering second-order effect and
has been recommended in the codes of USA, Canada and other countries in
recent years. This kind of rod-system finite element method considering
geometric non-linearity is a theoretically deliberate analysis method. The most
unfavorable internal force to be computed by using this method for the control
section of various rod system can be directly used for the design of section
without using the eccentric distance augmenting coefficient η to augment the
initial eccentric distance ei of the appropriate section, but in the section design, it
is still required to consider the additional eccentric distance ea stipulated in Article
7.3.3 in this code.

265
 Both two methods considering second-order effect stipulated in Article 7.3.9 are
subordinate to the bearing capacity limit state, so in the elastic analysis method
considering second-order effect, the rigidity corresponding to that limiting state
should be taken for the structural member. In view of the complexity of rigidity
diversification law in different member sections in the various reinforced concrete
structure, this method adopts a united rigidity discounting coefficient to discount
the elastic rigidity of all frame girder (including shearwall hole-mouth continuous
girder), all frame pillars and all shearwall limbs (while the section inertia moment
in the elastic rigidity is computed still according to the gross concrete section of
the steel bar). Taking different rigidity discounting coeffici ents for different types of
members is to reflect different rigidity discounting levels of different types of
members under the bearing capacity limit state. The principle to determine the
rigidity discounting coefficient is to make the inter -layer displac ement to be
computed for various layers by using the rigidity discounting elastic analysis for
different load combinations of the structure and its distribution law along the
height equivalent to the results obtained by using the non-linear finite element
analysis method; meanwhile, the internal forces to be obtained by using the two
methods for various members also should be approximate. This ensures that this
method not only can reflect the distribution law of actual internal force in the
structure under the limit state of bearing capacity but also can reflect the
deformation law and second-order effect law of the structure under this limit state.

Because the rigidity of the shearwall limb before the cracking of the bottom
section is largely different from that after the cracking and in the actual project,
the shearwall limb is possible to crack or not under the limit state of bearing
capacity, in order to avoid the check computation that must be done to determine
whether the shearwall cracks or not for eac h design, this article gives the rigidity
discounting coefficient regarding the shearwall as already -cracked shearwall
(taken the comprehensive estimated value approximate the rigidity after cracking);
this processing method is safe as a whole. As interpreted in the notes of this
article, if the check computation indicates that the shearwall limb does not crack,
the larger discounted rigidity in the nodes can be taken.

7.3.14 This article stipulates the computation of bearing capacity of normal section for
symmetrical two-way eccentric compression members:

1. This article stipulates the formulas to compute ei and η for x and y axis when
computing by using the general methods in Appendix F in this code; when
there is reliable testing basis, more reasonable other formulas also can be
adopted.

2. This article gives the N.v. Nikitin Formula for two-way eccentric compression
members and states the computation principles for two reinforcement
arrangement modes.

266
 7.4 Computation of Tension Bearing Capacity of Normal Section

7.4.1~7.4.4 Corresponding articles of the original code are retained in this code.

As for any rectangle, T-shaped or I-shaped section and annular and circular
sections symmetrically configured along the section height or perimeter, the
bearing capacity of its normal section basically comply with the varying law:

N M
( + = 1 )=1, and it is slightly on the safer side; the revised form of this
N u0 M u

formula is Formula (7.4.4-1). The test results indicate that is also applicable for
any two-way reinforced concrete eccentric tension member with steel bars
symmetrically configured and of rectangle section. Formula (7.4.4-2) is the
formula given in article interpretations of the original code.

7.5 Computation of Bearing Capacity of Diagonal Section

7.5.1 The limitation condition for any shearing section in this code still adopt the
expression used in the original code. it considers the characteristics of
high-strength concrete and imports the discounting coefficient βc used to reduce
the limitation value of shear section when the concrete strength is improved.

The purpose to stipulate the section restriction condition of bending members

firstly is to avoid damage by declinate compression (or web plate failure by
compression) and then is to restrict the width of diagonal crack in the use stage,
which also is the maximum reinforcement rate condition under which the diagonal
section is damaged by shearing force.

This code gives the dividing line to divide the section restriction conditions for
common members and thin-web member and the transition methods of two
section restriction conditions.

7.5.2 The computational section for designed shearing force mentioned in this article is
the position easy to happen with diagonal section failure in general cases, and it
is in relation to the arrangement of web reinforcements and bent -up steel bas.

7.5.3~7.5.4 There are many factors affecting the shearing failure of concrete bending
member, the failure forms are complicated, and the shearing mechanism of
concrete members has not be sufficiently known, a set of complete theory system
like that for normal section bearing capacity computation has not been

267
established till now. In various principal codes in foreign countries and in various
industrial codes in China, the methods to compute the bearing capacity of
diagonal sections are different and their computation schema are also different.

The computation method for diagonal sections in the original code is simple in
form and convenient for use. However, in the computation of shearing bearing
capacity of diagonal section, the following issues exist: first of all, the design
index ƒ c for concrete strength is not safe for the computation of high-strength
concrete member, while if using the concrete tension strength ƒt as the main
parameter, it can suit to the change from low -strength concrete member to
high-strength concrete member; secondly, it had better consider the influence of
such factors as reinforcement rate of longitudinal tension steel bars and height
size effect of section; additionally, the value that the formula in the original code
takes for the computation of a continuous member is on the high side.

To solve the above problems, through analyzing the testing data and further
studying the shearing transfer mechanism and considering improving the design
2
value of tension strength of web reinforcement to 360N/mm , this code, based on
the computation methods in the original code, adjusts the methods using to
compute the shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section of concrete bending
members and suitably improves the reliability.

The following will interpret the contents revised in Articles 7.35.3~7.5.4 in details:

1. Computation formula of bearing capacity of diagonal section of bending

member without web bar:

1) According to the obtained testing data from a lot of simply-supported

shallow beams without web bar, simply-supported short beam without
web bar, simply-supported deep beams without web bar and continuous
shallow beams without web bar under the action of
symmetrically-dist ributed load and according to the analysis based on
shearing force at the abutment, the following formula to compute the
hyponastic value of shearing bearing capacity Vc of general flexural
member without web bar and mainly bearing symmetric load can be
obtained:

Vc=0.7β hβ ρƒtbh 0

2) The test indicates that the shear -span ratio has an obvious influence to
the shearing bearing capacity of any beam without web bar and under
the action of a concentrated load. According to a lot of testing data
obtained from simply-supported shallow beams without web bar,
simply-supported short beam without web bar, simply-supported shallow
beams without web bar and continuous deep beams without web bar
under the action of a concentrated load and after considering such main
factors affecting the shearing bearing capacity of any beam without web
bar as concrete tension strength ƒt, shear-span ratio a/h0, reinforcement
rate ρ of longitudinal tension steel bars and section height size effect, this
code adjusts the formula of the original code and puts forward the
following formula to compute the hyponastic value of the shearing
bearing capacity V c:

268
 1 .75
Vc= β hβ ρƒtbh 0
λ +1

In this formula, the applicable range of the shear-span ratio is extended

to: 0.25≤λ≤3.0, so as to satisfy different requirements for shallow beams
and deep beams. The reason to adopt the shear-span ratio of
ε
computational section λ= h0 but not adopt the generalized shear-span

ratio λ= M
Vh0
is that it is convenient for computation and safer. As for any

flexural member with span -height ratio not less than 5, its applicable
range is 1.5≤λ≤3.0.

3) Through summarizing all domestic and foreign testing results and the
stipulations in codes, the computation of shearing bearing capacity of
reinforced concrete plate without web reinforcements and bent -up steel
bars reasonably reflects the influence of section size effect. In the
formula in Article 7.5.3, it is expressed by the coefficient βh=(800/h0) ;
1/4

meanwhile, it gives the applicable range of the section height; when the
effective height of the section exceeds 2,000mm, its shearing bearing
capacity will fall somewhat, but because the evidence obtained from this
test and study is not sufficient, there is no further stipulation given.

The common plate-type flexural members mentioned in Article 7.5.3 mainly

refers to the members of single-way and two-way plates under the action of
symmetrical load and in need of computation as per a single-way plate. The
test research indicates that, as for any thicker reinforced concrete plate, in
addition to configuring two-way steel bar nets on the upper and lower
surfaces of the plate according to the computation or construction, to
configure two-way steel bar nets in the central position of the plat e according
to the stipulation in Article 10.1.11 in this code will well improve its shearing
bearing performance.

4) According to the analysis on the testing data, the influence that he

reinforcement rate ρ of longitudinal tension steel bars imposes to the
shearing bearing capacity Vc of the beam without web bar can be
expressed by the coefficient βρ=(0.7+20ρ ); generally, only when ρ is
larger than 1.5%, the influence that the reinforcement rate ρ imposes
onto the shearing bearing capacity of the beam without web bar is
obvious, so the coefficient β ρ is not incorporated into the formula.

5) Here it should be noted that, although the computation formula for

shearing bearing capacity of beam without web bar is analyzed above, it
does not mean that the designed beam does not need to configure web
reinforcements. Since the shearing failure, especially the diagonal -pull
failure, has obvious brittleness, and the beam will be broken by shearing
once diagonal cracks appear, so it is not safe for the structure to bear the
shearing force only depending on concrete. Except the beam the section
height of which is not larger than 150mm, any general beam, even
satisfying V≤Vc, still should be configured with web reinforcements upon
the construction requirements.

269
2. Shearing bearing capacity of reinforced concrete flexural member only
configured with web reinforcements

As for any reinforced concrete flexural member only configured with web
reinforcements, the computation formula of shearing bearing capacity Vcs of
its diagonal section still should adopt the equation of the original code, i.e.,
the form with two terms added together:

Vcs=Vc+Vs

In the above equation, Vc stands for the shearing bearing capacity of concrete
and Vs stands for the shearing bearing capacity of web reinforcement.

The concrete shearing bearing capacity of a member with web reinforcement

will be weakened due to the influence of the section height, so the V c term in
the computation formula to compute the shearing bearing capacity of flexural
member without web bar does not consider the influence of βh any longer; in
order to suitably improve the reliability, through comprehensive analysis on
the testing data and considering that the value of ƒyv can be increased to
2
360N/mm and upon the requirement to control the diagonal crack width
under the limit state of normal use, this code decreases the coefficient of the
web reinforcement shearing bearing capacity Vs by about 20% compared
with that in the formula in the original code; as for the flexural member under
the action of a concentrated load, this adjustment not only considers the
computation of simply-supported beam but also considers the computation of
continuous beam; at the same time, the coefficient of Vs is not the parameter
to indicate the horizontal projection length of the diagonal crack but the
parameter to indicate the degree that the computed shearing bearing capacity
can be improved when web reinforcement configured.

3. Shearing bearing capacity of prestressed concrete flexural member

The test and study shows that, the prestressing force is favorable for the
shearing bearing capacity of a member, mainly because the prestressing
force can obstruct the appearance and development of diagonal cracks,
increase the height of the shearing compression area of the concrete and
therefore improves the shearing force borne by the shearing compression are
of the concrete.

According to the test analysis, the improvement of shearing bearing capacity

of prestressed concrete beam mainly has a relation with the size of the
pre-applied force and the position of the acting point of this force. Additionally,
the test analysis also shows that it should restrict the role of the pre-applied
force to improve the shearing bearing capacity of beam.

When computing the shearing bearing capacity of a prestressed concrete

beam, the design value of shearing bearing capacity that the pre-applied
force has improved, Vp=0.05N p0, can be added as a term into the
computation formula for non -prestressed beam; when Np0>0.3ƒcA 0, N p0 is
taken to be 0. 3ƒcA 0 only so as to implement the goal of restriction. Meanwhile,
it is suitable for prestressed concrete simply-supported beam only, and is
considered only when the bending moment that N p0 produces onto the beam
is opposite to the outer bending moment. N o further research has been made
for any prestressed concrete continuous beam in this aspect; additionally, as
for any prestressed concrete simply-supported beam permitting cracks, when
the member reaches the bearing capacity, the prestressing force may
disappear, so before there is sufficient testing basis, the favorable action of

270
 prestressing force is not considered temporarily.

4. Applicable scope of formula

Formula (7.5.4-2) in this code is applicable to such common flexural members

as simply-supported beam, continuous beam and restrained beam of
rectangle, T-shaped or I-shaped section; Formula (7.5.4-4) is applicable to
independent beam of rectangle, T-shaped or I-shaped section under the
action of concentrated load (including several types of loads, the shearing
force that the concentrated load among which produces on the boundary
section of the abutment or the edge of the node is 75% of the total shearing
force). Therefore, compared with the original code, the applicable scope of
the formulas in this code is extended to some degree. The independent beam
mentioned here refers to the beam that is not subject to one-piece casting
together with the floor board. It should be noted that when the frame structure
bears a horizontal load (such as wind load), the shearing force that this load
produces onto the independent beam in the frame also comes under the
shearing force produced by a concentrated load.

It should be specified that in this code, the words "under the action of
concentrated load" mean that there are several types of loads, the shearing
force that the concentrated load among which produces on the boundary
section of the abutment or the edge of the node is 75% of the total shearing
force.

7.5.5~7.5.6 The test indicates that the non-prestressed bent -up steel bars and
prestressed bent -up steel bars intersecting with the failure diagonal section
can improve the shearing bearing capacity of the diagonal section, so in
addition to web reinforcements vertical to the axis line of the member, the
bent -up steel bars also can be used as the shear reinforcement of the
member. Formula (7.5.5) is the computation formula used to compute the
shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section when both web reinforcements
and bent -up steel bars are simultaneously used. In vi ew of the uncertainness
of the intersecting position between the bent-up steel bars and the failure
section, its stress may be unable to reach the yield strength, so the stress
ununiformity coefficient 0.8 of bent-up steel bar is imported into Formula
(7.5.5).

Because each piece of bent-up steel bar can only bear a shearing force in a
certain range, when determining the design value of shearing force according
to the stipulation in Article 7.5.6 and computing the bent-up steel bar by using
Formula (7.5.5), its construction should comply with the stipulation in Article
10.2.8 in this code.

7.5.7 The test indicates that the web reinforcement can restrain the development of
diagonal cracks and the sudden formation of diagonal cracks in a beam without
web reinforcement may lead to brittle diagonal-pull failure. Therefore, this code
stipulates that when the design value of shearing force is less than the shearing
bearing capacity of the beam without web bar, it is required to configure the
minimum quantity of web reinforcements according to related stipulations in
Section 10.2 of this code; these web reinforcements additionally can improve the
ability of the member to resist overload and to bear the stress produced due to
deformation.

271
7.5.8 As for any flexural mem ber with tension edge inclined, its shearing failure form is
similar to that of the flexural member with identical height; but when it fails in
shear, the stress of the inclined tension steel bars may be brought into well play
and it will cover a high proportion in the shearing bearing capacity. According to
the analysis based on the testing results this code puts forward Formula (7.5.8-2)
and in combination with the formula for computing the shearing bearing capacity
of a flexural member of identical height, this code gives Formula (7.5.8-1).

7.5.9~7.5.10 The formula of bending bearing capacity of diagonal section of a flexural

member is given under the precondition that the longitudinal reinforcing bars
reach the yield strength, and in this case, the horizontal projection length c of
diagonal section required in Formula (7.5.9-1) can be determined by using
Formula (7.5.9-2).

If the related stipulations in Chapters 9~10 in this code are followed, the
computational requirements in Article 7.5.9 can be satisfied, so the computation
of bending bearing capacity of diagonal section can be not performed.

7.5.11~7.5.15 The findings from the test and study indicate that the axial
compression force plays a favorable role for the shearing bearing capacity of the
member, this is mainly because that the axial compression force can restrain the
appearance and development of diagonal cracks, which increases the height of
the shear -compression area of concrete and therefore increase the shearing
force borne by the concrete. Within the limit value of axle load ratio, the horizontal
projection length of diagonal section basically keeps unchanged, compared with
that of the beam without axle load but with the same parameters, so the web
reinforcements have no obvious influence to the borne shearing force.

The favorable action of the axial compression force to the shearing bearing
capacity also is limited. When the axle load ratio N/(ƒ cbh)=0.3~0.5, the shearing
bearing capacity reaches the maximum value; if the axial compression force
further increases, it may reduce the shearing bearing capacity and turn to lead
the normal section with inclined crack to suffer a small eccentricity failure in
compression, so the improvement range of shearing bearing capacity due to the
axial compression force should be restricted.

Based on the above considerations and through analyzing the testing data of
eccentric compression members and frame pillars, when computing the shearing
bearing capacity of diagonal section of any reinforced concrete eccentric member
of rectangle section, the design value of the shearing bearing capacity improved
by the axial compression force, VN=0.07N, can be added into the computation
formula for independent beam of rectangle section and under the action of a
concentrated load; moreover, when N>0.3ƒ cA, N can be taken to be 0.3ƒcA only;
this value is equivalent to the hyponastic value of the testing result.

As for any frame pillar of a frame structure bearing an axial compression force,
because the two ends of the pillar is restrained, when the inflection point is within
the layer height range, the shear -span ratio of its computational section can be
approximately taken to be λ=H n/(2h0); as for the frame pillar of various other
structures, λ=M/Vh 0.

272
 The characteristics of an eccentric tension member to bear the force is as follows:
under the action of axial tension force, some initial vertical cracks crossing the
whole section may be produced in the member; after a transverse load is applied,
the cracks on the top of the member close while the bottom cracks are widened,
and the diagonal cracks may directly go through the initial vertical cracks and
develop upwards, or they may extend along the initial vertical cracks and then
develop along the inclined direction. Inclined cracks have larger width and dip,
the height of the shear-compression area at the end of the inclined crack reduces
and even there is no shear-compression area, so its shearing bearing capacity is
obviously less than that of a bending member. According to the testing result and
for reliable consideration, the design VN=0.2N of the shearing bearing capacity
reduced by the axial compression force is subtracted in this code. In addition, this
code stipulates the lower limit value of the total design value of its shearing
bearing capacity and the minimum reinforcement characteristics of web
reinforcements.

The section shearing restriction conditions required for reinforced concrete

eccentric compression and eccentric tension member of rectangle section are the
same as stipulated in Article 7.5.1, which are more strict that those in the original
code.

Compared with the formula in the original code, the formula of shearing bearing
capacity of diagonal section of an eccentric load-bearing member only changes
the conc rete-associated term of the computation formula in the original code and
the applicable scope is extended from the rectangle section to T-shaped and
I-shaped section, while the coefficient for the web reinforcement term is taken to
be 1.0. Compared with the testing data, the computed values of the shearing
bearing capacity formula (7.5.12) for eccentric compression member and the
shearing bearing capacity formula (7.5.14) for eccentric tension member are also
taken to be the hyponastic value of the testing results.

7.5.15 Based on the analysis of domestic and foreign testing data for a certain quantity
of flexural members of circular sections and with reference to concerned
stipulations in foreign codes, this article puts forward a method to tae the
equivalent inertia moment principle to determine the equivalent section width and
the equivalent section height. As a result, a flexural and eccentric compression
member of circular section can be computed directly by using the formula for
shearing bearing capacity of flexural and eccentric compression members that
are configured with vertical web reinforcements and have rectangle section.

7.5.16~7.5.18 The test results indicate that, the shear-resistant performance of a

reinforced concrete pillar of rectangle section under the action of the inclined
horizontal load has obvious difference from the shearing performance under the
single-way horizontal load. According to foreign research data and the analysis on
domestic testing results for test sample configured with surrounding web
reinforcements, the shearing bearing capacity approximately follows the elliptic
law:

Vx 2 Vy 2
( ) +( ) =1
Vux Vuy

Formulas (7.5.17-1) and (7.5.17-2) in Article 7.5.17 in this code essentially are the
design expressions converted from the above elliptic equation and equivalent to
the shearing bearing capacity formula for single-way eccentric compression
member. When rechecking the section, the check computation can be performed

273
 directly by using the formulas; when carrying out the section design, the Vux/V uy
ratio in Formula (7.5.17-1) and (7.5.17-2) can be approximately taken to be 1.0
and then the section area of web reinforcements can be computed. The design
had better enclosed web reinforcements, and when necessary, single-limb web
reinforcements also can be configured. When the length of the superposed part of
the composite enclosed web reinforcement is less than the length of the longer or
shorter edge of the web reinforcement surrounding the section, the section are of
the web reinforcement at the shorter direction of that web reinforcement should
not be counted into A svx or A svy.

Articles 7.5.16 and 7.5.18 also adopt the expressions based on the shearing
bearing capacity equation of elliptic law and linked with the section shearing
requirem ents for single-way eccentric compression member.

7.6 Computation of Bearing Capacity of Contorted Section

7.6.1~7.6.2 The section restriction condition for bearing capacity computation of torsion
section is based on the test when hw/b≤6. The stipulations for Formula 7.6.1-1
and 7.6.1-2 are to guarantee that the concrete will not be crushed firstly when the
member fails. The test and study on super-reinforcement pure-torsion member
including high-strength concrete member indicate that, the safety of
corresponding formulas of the original code is slightly lower. For this reason, in
the section restriction condition of pure-torsion member in Formulas 7.6.1-1 and
7.6.1-2, T=(0.16~0.2)ƒcW t is taken; when T=0, Formulas 7.6.1-1 and 7.6.1-2 can
coordinate with the formula in Article 7.5.1.

Based on the stipulations in the original code, Formulas 7.6.2-1 and 7.6.2-2 are
given, in which some contents relating to section restriction conditions of member
of box -type section and the conditions for configuring longitudinal steel bars and
web reinforcements according to the construction requirements.

7.6.3 This article gives the detailed stipulations on the frequently-used computation
methods of torsion plastic resisting moment for T-shaped, I-shaped and box-type
sections.

The method to divide T-shaped and I-shaped sections into rectangle sections is
as below: firstly, determine the web plate section as per the total height of the
section; then divide the compression wing edge and tension wing edge.

The formula provided in this article to compute the section torsion plastic resisting
moment is an approximate formula and it mainly is to facilitate the computation of
torsion bearing capacity.

274
7.6.4 Formula 7.6.4-1 is given after the analysis according to the test statistics and
taking the hyponastic value of the testing data. The test for high-strength concrete
pure-torsion member proves that this formula is still applicable.

The test indicates that, when the value of ζ is within the range of 0.5~2.0, the
longitudinal steel bars and web reinforcements of the reinforced concrete torsion
member basically can reach the yield strength when the member fails. For sake
of reliability, the restriction condition is taken to be 0.6≤ζ≤1.7. when ζ>1.7, ζ=1.7
is selected; ζ=1.2 or so is the optimal value for the steel bar to reach the yield
point. Due to the need of internal force balance of steel bar, as for the section
area of asymmetrically-set longitudinal steel bar, only the section area of the
symmetrically-set longitudinal steel bar is taken for the computation.

The test on prestressed concrete pure-torsion members indicates that the

precondition for prestressing for to improve the torsion bearing capacity is that the
longitudinal steel bar cannot yield, and when the normal compression stress that
the pre-applied forced produces in the concrete does not exceed the stipulated
limit value, the torsion bearing capacity of a pure-torsion member can be
improved by 0.08(Np0/A 0)W t. In view of such unfavorable impacts as
non-uniformity of actual stress distribution, the improvement value in the article is
taken to be 0.05(N p0/A 0)W t and this value is only for the case when eccentric
distance ep0≤h/6; when computing ζ, the action of the prestressed steel bar is not
considered.

The test also indicates that the favorable action of prestressing force to the
bearing capacity should be restricted somewhat, so when Np0>0.3ƒ cA 0, Np0
should be taken to be 0.3ƒ cA 0.

7.6.6 As for any box -type section member under the action of pure torsion, the test
indicates that the torsion capacity of a box -type section of a certain wall thickness
is similar to that of a solid section. The concrete torsion bearing capacity in
Formula 7.6.6 adopts the same method as a solid section to take value, i.e.,
taking 50% of the crack ing torsion moment of the box -type section, in addition to
multiplying by the wall thickness influence coefficient of box -type section,
ah=2.5t w/ bh; the torsion bearing capacity of steel bar is taken to be the same as
that for a solid rectangle section. Comparing domestic an foreign testing results,
the value to be taken by using Formula 7.6.6 is reliable.

7.6.7 The test and research findings indicate that the axial compression force has an
very obvious influence to the strain of longitudinal steel bars; the axial
compression force can make the concrete work well and it can improve the
mechanical bond of concrete and the bolt-pin effect of the longitudinal steel bar,
so it improves the torsion bearing capacity of the member. The formula in this
code takes this favorable factor into consideration and safely takes the
improvement value of torsion bearing capacity to be 0.07NW t/A.

275
 The test indicates that when the axial compression force is larger than 0.65ƒcA,
the torsion bearing capacity of the member will gradually fall, so this article gives
a reliable stipulation on the upper limit of the axial compression force.

7.6.8 The test on shear-torsion member without web bar indicates that, the correlation
of dimensionless shear-torsion bearing capacity can follow the quarter-circle law;
as for any shear -torsion member with web bar, if assuming that the concrete
portion has the same contribution to shear-torsion capacity as that of a
shear-torsion member without web bar, it also can follow the quarter-circle law.

The formula in this article is applicable to prestressed concrete and prestressed

concrete shear-torsion member. It is an approximate fitting formula using the
correlation curve of a quarter-circle shear-torsion bearing capacity of the member
with web bar as the calibration line and adopting the concrete partial correlation
and the steel bar partially uncorrelation; in this case, the concrete torsion bearing
capacity reduction coefficient βt of the shear-torsion member can be obtained,
and its value is slightly larger than the testing result for the member without web
bar. After applying this βt, it is more approximate to the quarter-circle correlation
curve of the member with web bar.

According to the analysis, when computing β t of prestressed concrete member,

the computation formula the same as that for non -prestressed member can be
approximately taken without considering the influence of the joint prestressing
force Np0.

7.6.9 This article stipulates the computation method of bearing capacity of

shear-torsion member of T-shaped or I-shaped section. The web plate portion
shall bear all shearing force and the torsion moment distributed to the web plate,
and such stipulation should coordinate with the computation of shearing bearing
capacity of a flexural member; the wing edge only bears the torsion moment
distributed to it, but the web reinforcements configured in the web edge should go
through the whole wing edge.

7.6.10 By using Formula 7.6.6 to compute the torsion bearing capacity for a reinforced
concrete pure-torsion member of box-type section and with the aid of the same
method for shear-torsion member in Article 7.6.8, Formulas 7.6.10-1~7.6.0-3 can
be deduced; compared with the testing results for test samples of box-type
section, the provided method is very reliable.

7.6.11 As for a bending-shear -torsion member, when V≤0.875ƒ tbh 0/ (λ+1), the influence
that the shearing force produces to the bearing capacity of the member can be
not considered; in this case, the web reinforcements of the member can be
computed to determine by using he bending bearing capacity and torsion bearing
capacity of the normal section; similarly, when T≤0.175 ƒtW t or T≤0.175a hƒtW t, the
influence that the torsion moment produces to the bearing capacity of the
member can be not considered; in this case, the web reinforcements of the
member should be computed and determined by using the bending bearing
capacity of normal section and the shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section.

276
7.6.12 The analysis indicates that, when adopting the web arrangement method
stipulated in this article, the bending bearing capacity, shearing bearing capacity
and torsion bearing capacity has a correlation and the resting results are roughly
consistent.

7.6.13~7.6.15 In the computation of shear -torsion bearing capacity of reinforced

concrete frame pillar of rectangle section, the favorable action of the axial
compression force is considered. The analysis indicates that, the influence of the
axial compression force can be ignored in the computation formula of βt and it
should be computed still by using Formula 7.6.8-5.

When T≤(0.175ƒt+0.035N/A)W t, the influence of torsion to the bearing capacity of

the frame pillar can be ignored.

7.6.16 The retortion of reinforced concrete structures can be divided into two different
types:

1. Balance retortion: it refers to the retortion due to balance conditions, the

torsion moment of which will not produce redistribution of internal force in the
girder.

2. Coordinate retortion: it refers to the retortion produced in the supporting beam

for the reason that the curved rotation of adjacent members is constrained by
the supporting beam, the torsion moment of which will reduce due to the
redistribution of internal force produced due to cracking of supporting beam.
The principle and requirement for considering the influence of the
redistribution of internal force are given in the article.

The testing results indicate that as for independent supporting beam, when the
taken torsion moment amplitude modulation does not exceed 40%, the bearing
capacity computation satisfies the requirements and the construction of steel bars
comply with the stipulations in Articles 10.2.5 and 10.2.12 of this code, the
appropriate crack width can satisfy the requirements given in the code.

In order to simplify the computation, some foreign codes often takes the retortion
rigidity to be zero, i.e., configuring web reinforcements while taking the torsion
moment to be zero. In this case, in order to ensure that the supporting member
has sufficient extensibility and control crack width, some constructional bars
satisfying the demand on crack torsion moment must be configured.

7.7 Computation of Die-cut Bearing Capacity

7.7.1~7.7.2 The formula that is used to compute die -cutting bearing capacity in the
original code is simple in form and convenient for computation. However,
compared with some foreign codes, it is somewhat conservative in most of cases
and the factors it considers are not complete enough. According to the analysis
on testing data relating to reinforced concrete without web reinforcements or
bent-up steel bars configured and with reference to reasonable contents in
concerned codes in and out of China, this code retains the format of the formula

277
of the original code and, based on this, revise and supplement the following
aspects of the original code:

1. Increase the coefficient in the formula of the original code from 0.6 to 0.7

The reliable analysis on a lot of domestic and foreign testing data for
reinforced concrete plates and foundations without web reinforcements or
bent -up steel bars configured indicates that, the computation result obtained
by using Formula 7.7.1 is better than that by the formula of the original code.
That is to say, after increasing the coefficient of the concrete term in the
formula of the original code from 0.6 to 0.7, the reliability index of the
die-cutting bearing capacity formula of this code becomes somewhat lower
than that of the original code, but it still satisfy the stipulated requirement for
desired reliability index.

2. Supplement the section height size effect

As for a thick plate, this code supplements the influence of section height size
effect to die-cutting bearing capacity. For this purpose, the section height
influence coefficient βh is introduced into Formula 7.7.1, so as to consider this
unfavorable influence.

3. Supplement the computation of die-cutting bearing capacity of prestressed

concrete plate

The test and research data indicate that a two-way prestressing force plays a
favorable role for the die-cutting bearing capacity of plate column nodes,
mainly because the existence of prestressing force restrains the appearance
and development of diagonal cracks and increases the height of the concrete
shear-compression area. Formula 7.7.1 given in this code stipulates the
computation of die-cutting bearing capacity of prestressed concrete plates
mainly with reference to practices described in USA ACI318 and out country's
Technical Procedures for Non-cementing Prestressed Concrete Structures.
The comparison with domestic and foreign testing data indicates that the
computations by using Formula 7.7.1 are relatively reliable.

Due to lack of testing data, the favorable action of prestressing force is

temporarily not considered for any single-way prestressed concrete plate.

4. With reference to the stipulations in such related codes as USA ACI318, this
code gives two adjusting coefficients η 1 and η 2 for Formulas 7.7.1-1 and
7.7.1-3. It restricts the edge length ratio of rectangle loading area. Since an
edge length ratio larger than 2 will reduce the die-cutting bearing capacity, the
adjusting η 2 is introduced. Meanwhile, in view of reliability, a necessary
restriction that the edge length ratio of loading section had better not be larger
than 4 is given. Additionally, when the relative perimeter um/ h0 of the critical
section is too large, it also will reduce the die-cutting bearing capacity. It
should be necessarily specified that, Formula 7.7.1-2 is given according to
the computation basis shown in USA ACI code and after a slight adjustment.
The coefficient η of Formula 7.7.1-1 can be taken to be the lesser one of η 1
and η 2, so as to ensure it reliable.

5. Consider the influence of hole in the plate

In order to satisfy the functional requirements of the building, sometimes it is

necessary to open vertical holes near the pillar edge. Holes in the plate can
reduce the most unfavorable die-cutting perimeter and therefore reduce the
die-cutting bearing capacity of the plate. The stipulation in this article is given

278
 with reference to foreign codes.

It should be specified that, as for the perimeter of critical section of a pillar of

non-rectangle section (oddshaped cross section pillar), the perimeter um of
the section the shape of which is convex broken line had better be selected,
0
the break angle of which should not be larger than 180 . Thus, the minimum
perimeter can be obtained. In this case, the distance from local perimeter
segment to the edge of the pillar is allowed to be larger than h0/2.

The critical section mentioned in this section is the section to be set for simple
expression, and it is the vertical section of the plate at the mean perimeter um
between the bottom line and the top line of the most unfavorable failure cone:
for isopachous plate, it is the section vertical to the central plane of the plate;
for the plate of variable height, it is the section vertical to the tension surface
of the plate.

7.7.3 When the thickness of the concrete plate is insufficient to ensure the die-cutting
bearing capacity, some die-cutting resisting steel bars can be configured. The test
indicates that the failure state and force-bearing characteristics of a reinforced
concrete plate with die-cutting resisting steel bars configured are similar to those
of a girder with web bar; when the number of the die-cutting steel bars reaches to
a certain value, the die-cutting bearing capacity of the plate almost not increases
any longer. In order to take full use of the die-cutting resisting steel bars or
bent-up steel bars, this code stipulates the formula (7.7.3-1) used to compute the
restriction conditions of die-cutting section of the plate, i.e., the die-cutting bearing
capacity of the plate after die-cutting steel bars are configured is not larger than
1.5 times of the die-cutting resisting bearing capacity of the concrete plate without
die-cutting resisting steel bars configured; meanwhile, this is the restriction to the
quantity of die-cutting resisting web reinforcements or bent-up steel bars, so as to
avoid that it cannot be used fully and avoid too large diagonal crack near the
partial load in the application stage. The comparison on testing results indicates
that the value computed by using the die-cutting bearing capacity formula for
plates configured with die-cutting resisting steel bars is on the reliable side.

The testing indicates that, under the action of die-cutting load, the formation of
diagonal cracks of reinforced concrete plate is basically the same as that of a
girder, and the diagonal cracks appear when it is at 65% of the testing limit load.
In a reinforced concrete plate configured with die -cutting resisting steel bars, due
to diagonal cracking, the die-cutting ability of the concrete is reduced somewhat.
Similar to the original code, the die-cutting resisting bearing capacity of the
concrete term in Formulas 7.7.3-2 and 7.7.3-3 is taken to be 1/2 of the limit
bearing capacity of the plate without die-cutting resisting steel bars configured.

7.7.4 The die-cutting failure of a step-like foundation may appear at the junction of the
pillar and the foundation or where the steps of the foundation varies, which is in
relation to the shape and sizes of the step-like foundation. Therefore, associated
stipulation is given in this article. The height influence coefficient βh described in
Article 7.7.1 is also introduced into the formula of die-cut bearing capacity of
step-like foundation. When determining Fl of the foundation, the maximum
foundation counterforce is taken, and it is on the safe side to do so.

279
7.7.5 As for the computation of die-cut bearing capacity when unbalanced bending
moment exists at the plate column node, because when the plate column node
transfers the unbalanced bending moment, its force-bearing characteristics and
failure state are more complicated, for sake of safety, this article gives a
fundamental stipulation with reference to the stipulations in USA ACI318 and our
country's Technical Procedures for Non-cementing Prestressed Concrete
Structures, and the detailed stipulations are given in Appendix G.

7.8 Computation of Local Compre ssion Bearing Capacity

7.8.1 This article stipulates the restriction conditions for the section sizes of local
compression area of a concrete structural member configured with indirect steel
bars, this is because:

1. The testing data indicate that, when there are too many web reinforcements
in the local compression area, the concrete under the bottom of the local
compression plate will sink and deform; when satisfying Formula 7.8.1-1, the
sinkage and deformation should be restricted, avoiding too much sinkage and
deformation. In order to suitably improve the reliability, the resisting force term
at the right of the formula should be multiplied by the coefficient 0.9, while the
coefficient 1.35 in this formula is the coefficient 1.5 in the formula of the
original code multiplied by 0.9.

2. In order to reflect the influence that the improvement of concrete strength

grade imposes to the local compression, the concrete strength influence
coefficient β c is introduced.

3. In the computation to compute the strength improvement coefficient βl (also

including βcor in Article 7.8.3 of this code) when the concrete is locally in
compression, the passage area should not be deducted. The test proves that
this computation method is relatively suitable.

4. In the computation of local compression bearing capacity below the

prestressed anchor head, according to the stipulation in Article 6.1.1 in this
code, when the prestressing force is the load effect and unfavorable to the
structure, the breakdown coefficient of its load effect is taken to be 1.2.

7.8.2 The computation of basal area A b adopts the "concentricity and symmetry"
principle. It is required that the computational basal area A b and the local
compression area Al have the same gravity center position and are symmetric;
the effective distance to extend outwards along various edges of Al (as for circular
bearing plate, it can be enlarged by 1d along the perimeter) does not exceed the
size b of the shorter edge of the compression plate. This method is easy to be
remembered.

The test on local compression test sample of various types of liner plate indicates
that the tested value and the computed value coincide with each other very well
and they are on the safe side. The test indicates that when the structural member
is under the local compression of the edge corner, the value of βt fluctuates
around 1.0 and its discreteness is relatively high. For sake of easy -to-use, united
form and safety guaranty (temperature, concrete shrinkage and horizontal force
have relatively large influence on the local compression bearing capacity of the

280
 edge corner), it is suitable to take β t=1.0 when the edge corner is locally in
compression.

7.8.3 As for the computation of local compression bearing capacity of the structure
configured with square-grid net or spiral indirect steel bars, the test indicates that,
it can be the sum of the concrete bearing capacity and the bearing capacity of
indirect steel bar. The bearing capacity of indirect steel bar is in relation to its
volumetric reinforcement rate; and as with the improvement of the concrete
strength grade, this bearing capacity has a downtrend. In order to reflect this
nature, the coefficient a is introduced into the formula. To be convenient for use
and to ensure the safety, the coefficient b is taken to be the same value as
specified in Article 7.3.2 of this code. For the same reason stated in Article 7.8.1
of this code, Formula 7.8.3-1 also considers the coefficient 0.9.

This article additionally stipulates the requirement that A cor can only be taken to
be Ab in the computation when A cor>A b. This stipulation is to ensure to take full
use of the indirect steel bars and it can ensure the safety.

In order to avoid that the strength of the steel bar cannot be fully utilized since the
reinforcement rate difference at the shorter edge and longer edge directions,
restriction condition against the reinforcement rate is stipulated in Formula
7.8.3-2.

7.9 Checking Computation of Fatigue

7.9.1 This article retains the basic assumption of the original code. It is affirmed by the
test and is as the basis for Articles 7.9.5 and 7.9.12 to deduce the formulas to
compute the fatigue stress of bearing capacity of normal section of prestressed
concrete and prestressed concrete flexural structures.

7.9.2 This article is the stipulation given according to Art icle 3.1.4 of this code and
possible situations when a crane works on the crane beam with span not larger
than 12m.

7.9.3 This article definitely stipulates that appropriate stress or stress amplitude
computation should be conducted for the position that controls the fatigue check
computation of normal section and diagonal section of a reinforced concrete
flexural member.

7.9.4 The domestic and foreign test and research indicate that, the key factor affecting
the fatigue strength of steel bars is the stress amplitude, i.e., (σmax-σ min), so the
fatigue stress of steel bar covered in this section is computed as per the stress
amplitude.

7.9.5~7.9.6 The fatigue check computation for diagonal section of a reinforced concrete
flexural member is divided into two cases: the first case is that, when the shearing
stress τ to be computed by using Formula 7.9.8 satisfies Formula 7.9.7-1, the
f

shearing stress can be borne by the concrete on the section and the web
reinforcements can be configured according to the construction; the second case
is that, if the shearing stress τ does not satisfy Formula 7.9.7-1, the shearing
f

stress of this segment should be borne jointly by the concrete and the vertical
web reinforcements. The test indicates that, the shearing stress τ borne by the
f

concrete in the compression area is in relation to the load value, shear-span ratio,
reinforcement rate and other factors. It is suitable to take τ c=0.1ƒ t.
f f

281
 As for the above two cases, according to the past experiences in China, the
f f
shearing stress of (τ -τ c) should be borne jointly by the vertical web
reinforcements and bent-up steel bars. However, the domestic tests indicate that,
when fatigue failure occurs on the diagonal section configured with both vertical
web reinforcements and bent-up steel bars, the bent -up steel bars are always
0
fatigued to break firstly; according to the strain coordinate relation of 45 truss
frame and cracking section, the relational expression between the stress σsb of
densely -placed bent -up steel bars and the stress σsv of vertical web
reinforcements can be deduced as follows:

σsb= σsv (sinα+cos α)

2

In this formula, α is the bent-up angle of the bent-up steel bar. Obviously,
according to the above formula, we can draw the following conclusion: σsb> σsv.

In order to avoid fatigue failure due to a small quantity of bent -up steel bars being
configured, which may greatly reduce the shearing force that the vertical web
reinforcements can bear. Therefore, this code does not encourage to adopting
bent-up steel bars as the fatigue-resisting shear reinforcement (except
densely -placed diagonal web reinforcements), so Article 7.9.9 only gives the
formula to compute the member configured with vertical web reinforcements.

7.9.10~7.9.12 These articles basically retain the fatigue check computation methods
for the prestressed concrete flexural members that does not permit cracks in the
original code. as for non-prestressed steel bars and prestressed steel bars, this
code turns to use the stress amplitude check computation method. Since the
prestres sed concrete crane beam subject to fatigue check computation and
stipulated in Article 3.3.4 in this code should be design upon the requirement
forbidding cracks, this code deletes the fatigue strength check computation
formula for prestressed concrete flexural member now allowing cracks.

The concrete stresses computed by using the formulas in these articles, σ c,min
f

and σ c,max, are the minimum stress and maximum stress at the same fiber
f

computation point of the section in one cycling process. Its minimum and
maximum value should be judged by using their absolute values, while the
tension stress is positive and the compression stress is negative; when
computing ρ c=σ c,min/ σ c,max, attention should be paid to the signs (+/-) and the
f f f

value of the maximum and minimum stresses.

282
 8 Checking Computation of Normal-use Limiting State

8.1 Checking Computation of Crack Control

8.1.1 According to the stipulation in Article 3.3.4 of this code, this article gives the
check computation formula for crack control of reinforced concrete and
prestressed concrete member.

It is necessary to be indicated that according to the point of view of probability

statistics, the member satisfying Formula 8.1.1-2 does not means that cracks
absolutely will not appear in the member; similarly, when the member satisfies
Formula 8.1.1-4, the probability for the maximum width of the crack produced by
the load of the member is larger than maximum crack limit value approximately is
5%.

8.1.2 In this code, the basic formula to compute the maximum crack width still adopts
the formula of the original code:

σsk
wma x = τ lτ sα cψ lcr
Es

The testing data relating to mean crack intervals of various load-bearing

members is counted and analyzed. When the thickness c of the protective layer
of the concrete is not larger than 65m m, the mean crack interval in a concrete
member configured with ribbed steel bars can be computed by using the following
formula:

d
lcr = β (1.9 c + 0.08 )
ρ te

In the above formula, β is taken to be 1.1 for an axial tension member and be 1
for other load-bearing members.

When steel bars with different types and different diameters are configured, d in
the above formula should be replaced with the equivalent diameter deq and can
be computed and determined by using Formula 8.1.2-3 in the text of this code, in
which different steel types used in the reinforced concrete and prestressed
concrete members, the surface of the steel bar, different construction
technologies such as pre-tensioned or post -tensioned (grouting) method adopted
for prestressed steel bars. The cem enting performance between them and the
concrete is different and this difference is reflected by the equivalent diameters.
For this reason, the relative cementing performance coefficients are given in
Table 8.1.2-1 in the text of this code according to domestic related testing data for
steel bars used for reinforced concrete and according to the stipulation in the
European concrete bridge code ENV1992-2 for prestressing tendons. The value
of di for cementing prestressing tendon can be computed by using di=4A p/u p, in
which up originally should be taken to be the actual contact perimeter between
the prestressing tendon and the concrete; the analysis indicates that the di value
to be computed by using the above method is approximate to that to be
computed as per the nominal diameter of the prestressing tendon. For sake of

283
simplification, di is taken to be the nominal diameter. The relative cementing
characteristic coefficient for the steel bar with epoxy coating is determined
according to the testing result.

According to the test law, the basic formula for strain nonuniformity coefficient of
longitudinal tension steel bar between cracks of flexural member is given as
follows:

M cr
ψ = ω1 (1 − )
Mk

This is the basis for the code to simplify the formula and expand its application to
other members. The coefficient ω 1 in the above formula is in relation to the bond
force between the steel bar and the concrete. As for plain round steel bars, ω 1 is
approximate to 1.1. According to the testing data of eccentric tension member
and eccentric compression member and in order to match with the computation
formula of axial tension member, ω 1 is unitedly taken to be 1.1. Meanwhile, in
order to simplify the computation and to be convenient to coordinate with the
computation of an eccentric load-bearing member, expand and simplify the above
formula and Formula 8.1.2-2 with the steel bar stress σsk as the main parameter
can be obtained.

According to the testing data, the coefficient αc reflecting the influence that the
elongation of the concrete among cracks imposes to the crack width is unitedly
taken to be α c=0.85.

According to the testing analysis, the short -term crack width augmenting
coefficient τs is taken to be 1.66 for flexural moment and eccentric compression
member and taken to be 1.9 for eccentric tension member and axial tension
member. The assurance rate of the augmenting coefficient τs is taken to be about
95%.

According to the testing result, the augmenting coefficient τl considering the

long-term action influence is taken to be 1.5.

The test indicates that the crack width for eccentric compression member is
relatively small when e0/h 0≤0.55 and can meet the requirement, so this article
stipulates that it is unnecessary for check computation.

The reinforcement ρ te of longitudinal steel bars computed as per the effective

tension concrete area is introduced into the computation of mean crack interval lcr
and ψ. Its effective tension concrete area Ate is taken to be 0.5bh+(b f-b)hf. By
doing so, the ψ formula can be simplified and it can be applicable for flexural
member, eccentric tension member and eccentric compression member. After
being calibrated by using the testing results, it additionally can satisfy various
load-bearing situations.

284
 There is less testing data for crack width of members when the reinforcement rate
is relatively low, so when ρ te<0.01, ρ te is taken to be 0.01 so as to restrict the
application scope of the maximum crack width and reduce the situation that the
computed value of maximum crack width is on the low side.

It must be specified that, when the protective layer of concrete is relatively thick,
the thicker protective layer of concrete is favorable to prevent the steel bar from
being rusted although the computed value of crack width is also large. Therefore,
as for any member with relatively thick protective layer of concrete, if its
appearance permits to do so, the allowable value of crack width stipulated in
Table 3.3.4 of this code can be suitably increased according to the practical
experience.

There is no sufficient research as the basis for the computation of crack width of a
member with longitudinal steel bars symmetrically configured on the upper and
lower part of the section or around its perimeter, so no definite stipulation is given
in this code for this. However, it must be specified that under the characteristic
combination of load, the stress of the tension steel bars of such members is very
high and even possibly exceed the design value of tension strength of steel bars.
To this end, when computing by using Formula 8.1.2-1, the principle to take the
value of steel bar stress σsk and Ate is that it should be computed by using more
reasonable method.

8.1.3 The equivalent stress of longitudinal tension steel bars of reinforced concrete
member and prestressed concrete member given in this Article refers to the steel
bar stress produced on the crack section of the member under the characteristic
combination of the load effect. They are hereunder interpreted according to the
load-bearing characteristics:

1. The stress σsk of steel bars for reinforced concrete axial tension and
compression members is still computed by using the methods of the original
code. the internal force arm coefficient of crack section of a flexural member
is still taken to be η b=0.87.

2. The stress computation formula 8.1.3-2 for steel bars in a reinforced concrete
eccentric tension member is determined while taking the moment for the
acting point of joint force of steel bars in the compression area depending on
the external force and the section internal force. This implies that no matter
the axial force is imposed between or out of A s and A's, the internal force arm
is taken to be an approximate value, i.e., z=h0-α's.

3. The equivalent stress of longitudinal tension steel bars of prestressed

concrete member refers to the stress increment in the steel bar produced
when the pre-compression stress of the concrete at the acting point of joint
force of the steel bar and it can be regarded as being equivalent to the steel
bar stress σsk in the reinforced concrete member.

Formula 8.1.3-9 to compute the equivalent stress of longitudinal tension steel

bars of prestressed concrete axial tension member is given on the basis of
the above assumption.

285
4. The stress and equivalent stress of longitudinal tension steel bar of a
reinforced concrete eccentric-compression member and prestressed concrete
flexural member can be given depending on the same concept. In this case,
the joint force Np0 of prestressing tendon and non-prestressing tendon can
be regarded as a compression force and imposed on the section together
with the bending moment M k; thus, the prestressed concrete flexural member
is equivalent to the reinforced concrete eccentric compression member. After
being coordinated with Article 6.1.7 of this code, the influence of minor
bending moment M2 in the post-tensioned prestressed concrete hyperstatic
structure is reflected in Formula 8.1.3-10 and 8.1.3-11.

According to the balance condition to take moment for the joint force in the
compression area by establishing internal and external forces, Formula
8.1.3-4 and 8.1.3-10 can be obtained for the stress and equivalent force of
crack section of longitudinal tension steel bars.

The distance between the acting point of joint force of longitudinal tension
steel bar and the acting point of joint force in the compression area, z=ηh0,
can be determined approximately according to the basic assumptions in
Section 7.1 of this code. In view of the complexity of the computation and
through the computation and analysis, the following fitting formula for internal
force arm coefficient can be adopted:

M0 2
η=ηb-(η b-η 0) ( )
Me

where,

η Internal arm coefficient of crack section of reinforced concrete

flexural member in the application stage;

η0 Internal arm coefficient of section when the stress of the concrete

at the gravity center of the longitudinal tension steel bar is zero;

M0 Compression -relief bending moment when the stress of the

concrete at the gravity center of the section of the tension steel
bar: M 0=N kη 0h0 is taken for eccentric compression member;
M0=N p0(η 0h0-ep) is taken for flexural member of prestressed
concrete;

Me Moment that the external force imposes to at the acting point of

joint force of tension steel bars: Me= N ke is taken for eccentric
compression member; M e=Mk+N p0e p or Me= Np0e is taken for
flexural member of prestressed concrete.

The above formula can be further simplified as follows:

286
 h0 2
η=ηb-α ( )
e

Through analysis, it suitably considers the plastic influence of concrete, and

after being proofread by using the testing results of associated members, this
code gives the simplified formula 8.1.3-5 based on the above fitting formula.
Of course, this code does not exclude adopting more accurate method to
compute the internal force arm of prestressed concrete flexural member.

As for reinforced concrete eccentric compression members, when l0/h>14,

the testing results indicate that the influence that the deflection of the member
imposes to the eccentric distance of axial force shou ld be considered.
Approximately take 1/2.85 of the curvature used for the computation of
bearing capacity in Article 7.3.10 in Chapter 7 and not consider the additional
eccentric distance, and Formula 8,.1.3-8 can be deduced.

8.1.4 In the crack resistance check computation, The computation formula of normal
stress of edge concrete is given according to the elastic stress.

8.1.5 The purpose to conduct the check computation for the principal tension stress of
the concrete in the diagonal section of a prestressed concrete flexural member
made upon the crack control requirements is to avoid the appearance of diagonal
crack and to differentiate them according to different crack grades; in order to
avoid concrete tension strength from being reduced too much and cracks from
appearing too early due to too large compression stress, the check computation
for principal compression stress of concrete is performed.

8.1.6~8.1.7 In Article 8.1.6, we provides the methods to compute the principal tension
stress and principal compression stress of concrete. Article 8.1.7 provides a
practical method to consider the vertical compression stress produced by the
concentrated load to the concrete and the its influence on shearing stress
distribution and it is given through the elastic theoretical analysis and by being
simplified and after being validated through test.

8.1.8 When carrying out the crack resistance check computation for normal section and
diagonal section within the range of prestress transfer length at the end part of
the pre-tensi oned prestressed concrete member, after adopting the assumption
given in this article on the approximate linear variation law of effective prestress
within the prestress transfer length range, it is favorable to simplify the
computation.

8.2 Checking Computation of Bending Deflection of Flexural Member

8.2.1 The bending deflection of a concrete flexural member under the limiting state of
normal use mainly depends on the rigidity of the member. This code assumes
that the rigidities in the segment in which the bending moments have the same
sign and takes the rigidity corresponding to the maximum bending moment point
in this segment; as for any member allowing cracks, it is the minimum rigidity in
this segment; these stipulations are on the safe side. When the rigidity ratio of the
abutment section and the in-span section is within the range stipulated in this
code, the error of bending deflection to be computed by adopting identical rigidity
will not exceed 5%.

8.2.2 Based on the short-term rigidity Bs of the flexural member, only the augmenting
influence that the long-term action of the quasi-permanent combination of load

287
 effect imposes to the bending deflection is considered. On this basis, this article
gives Formula 8.2.2.

8.2.3 The short -term rigidity of reinforced concrete flexural member and prestressed
concrete flexural member offered in this article is given on the basis of the
combination of theory and test.

1. Short-term rigidity of reinforced concrete flexural member

Theoretical relational expression of section rigidity and curvature is as

follows:

M k ε sm + ε cm
=
Bs h0

Where,

εsm Mean strain of longitudinal tension steel bar;

εcm Mean strain of boundary concrete in compression area of

section.

According to the strains and corresponding mean strains of t tension steel

bars of the crack section and the boundary concrete of the compression area,
the following relational expression can be deduced:

Mk
εs m=ψ
E s Asηh0

Mk
εc m=
ζ Ec bh02

Substitute the above mean strain into the above expression and the basic
formula for short -term rigidity can be obtained as follows:

E s As h02
Bs =
ψ αE ρ
+
η ζ

The coefficient in the above formula is determined according to the analysis

on testing data.

1) The computation of the coefficient ψ adopts the formula the same as that
for computation of crack width. When ψ<0.2, ψ is taken to be 0.2, which
can better satisfy the testing result.

2) According to the regression of testing data, the coefficient α Eρ/ ζ can be

computed by using the following formula:

288
 αE ρ 6α E ρ
= 0 .2 +
ξ 1 + 3 .5γ ' f

The force arm coefficient η is approximately taken to be 0.87.

Substitute the above coefficient and its expression into the above formula
for B s and Formula 8.2.3-1 can be deduced.

2. Short-term rigidity of prestressed concrete flexural member

1) The short -term rigidity for any member without cracks is unitedly taken to
be 0.85E c I0, which is relatively stable.

2) Short-term rigidity for member allowing cracks

As for any prestressed concrete flexural member that has had cracked
during the application stage, assuming that the curve of bending moment
and curvature (or bending moment and bending deflection) is composed
of double-folded straight lines and the junction of the double-folded lines
is at the cracking bending moment Mcr, the basic formula for short-term
rigidity can be obt ained as follows:

Ec I0
Bs =
M cr
− 0 .4
1 Mk 1 1
+ ( − )
β 0 .4 0 .6 β cr β 0.4

In the above formula, β0.4 and β cr respectively are the rigidity reduction
coefficients when Mcr/M k=0.4 and 1.0. Take βcr to be 0.85 and take 1/β0.4
to be the approximate fitting value according to the testing data, and the
following formula can be deduced:

1 0.15
= (0.8 + )(1 + 0 .45γ f )
β 0.4 αE ρ

Substitute β cr and 1/ β 0.4 into the above formula for Bs and Formula
8.2.3-3 in this code can be deducted after the adjustment.

8.2.4 This article slightly adjust the value of the plastic influence coefficient γ of
resisting moment on concrete section. The sole point that this article differs from
the basic assumptions of the original code is that the stress diagram of concrete
tension area used in this article is trapezoid but not rectangle, while other aspects
are the same. In order to simplify the computation, with reference to and after
proofreading according to the stipulations in the industrial codes for hydro
structures, this article gives the approximates γ values for common section
shapes for reference.

8.2.5~8.2.6 The deflection augmenting influence coefficient of long -term action to

reinforced concrete flexural member, θ, is given according to the long-term testing
results obtained by some domestic organizations and with reference to
stipulations of some foreign codes.

289
In the antiarch computation of a prestressed concrete flexural member during the
application stage, the computation of short-term antiarch computation and the
antiarch augmenting coefficient of long -term action of pre-applied force still follow
the stipulation of the original code, i.e. it is taken to be 2.0. Because this
stipulation cannot reflect the influence of such factors as concrete shrinkage,
creepage loss, reinforcement rate and so forth, the long-term antiarch value can
not follow this stipulation if there is special testing analysis or shrinkage or
creepage theory for computation and analysis.

290
 9 Construction Stipulations
9.1 Expansion Joint
9.1.1 According to the experiences from engineering practice in many years, the
stipulation on maximum expansion joint interval in Table 9.1.1 is found no obvious
unfavorable influence on bearing capacity and crack development, so the
maximum expansion joint interval required in the original code is not changed.
However, according to the investigation and research, in recent years the
strength grade of concrete is somewhat increased, its liquidity is improved, the
solidification process of concrete is of such characteristics as fast solidification,
early reinforcement and large heat value, and the volumetric shrinkage of
concrete has an augmenting trend, so the requirement for expansion joint interval
is modified from "can" in the original code into "had better".

This revision makes the following modifications to the Notes to the table in the
original code:
1. Added Note 1 relating to building of assembled monolithic structure and Note
2 relating to the stipulation on expansion joint interval for buildings of
frame~shearwall structure and frame~core-tube structure.
2. In order to avoid crack due to temperature, in Note 4 to the table, the
requirement for expansion joint interval for such externally-exposed structures
as creasing, rain shield and so on.

9.1.2 This article lists several situations in which temperature change and concrete
shrinkage produce more unfavorable influence to the structure and gives the
requirement that it is necessary to suitably reduce the expansion joint interval on
the basis of the stipulations set forth in Table 9.1.1.

9.1.3 This article is the newly-added content and lists the situations and conditions
allowing increasing the maximum interval of expansion joint as well as associated
precautions.
To take crack-resisting measures during the construction stage of the structure is
the general and effective method to reduce the unfavorable influence of concrete
shrinkage in and out of China. The commonly-used practice in our country is to
set post -grouting belt. According to the experiences from the engineering practice,
the interval of post-grouting belts is generally not larger than 30m; the interval
time for grouting concrete generally is over two months. The post-grouting belt
here mentioned is to keep the concrete of all structural members apart from each
other temporarily. It also should be noted that if effective post-grouting belt is
reasonably set and there is reliable experience, the expansion joint interval can
be suitably increased but the expansion joint cannot be replaced with the
post-grouting belt.
To apply appropriate prestress onto the structure can reduce the tension stres s to
be produced in the concrete due to temperature variation and concrete shrinkage
and therefore relieve or eliminate the probability for concrete to crack. The
"measure to pre-apply stress" mentioned in this article refers to the measure to
pre-apply the stress to offset the temperature stress and shrinkage stress.

291
 Other measures in this article include: the measure to strengthen the heat
preservation and insulation performance of building roof to reduce structure
deformation due to temperature; the measure to reinforce the week positions of
the structure to improve their crack-resisting performance; the measure to
practically strengthen maintenance and protection for any cast-in-situ structure
during the construction so as to reduce shrinkage deformation; reliable sliding
measure taken to be reduce the friction constraining the structure deformation;
the measure to reasonably select materials so as to reduce the shrinkage of
concrete and so on.

In addition, as for the wall body, the measure to set cont rol crack to adjust the
expansion joint interval can also be taken. The measure to set control crack is to
guide the appearance of shrinkage cracks by embedding ribbands at building
mold, panel, convex corner and so on, cover them through building construc tion
treatment and conduct good penetration-proof and water-proof treatment. The
interval generally is about 10m, set according to the building treatment. As for any
wall body with control crack set, the expansion joint interval can be suitably
increased.

This article especially stresses, "When increasing the interval of expansion joint,
the influence of temperature variation and concrete shrinkage onto the structure
should be considered." This is because the deformation and displacement
caused by such indirect action as temperature change and concrete shrinkage
onto any hypostatic concrete structure may cause very large constraint stress,
cause the structural member to crack and even change the load-bearing state of
the structure. The designer should not take some simple measures to increase
the expansion joint interval but should cautiously consider the influence of various
unfavorable factors onto internal force and cracks of the structure through
effective analysis or computation, so as to determine reasonable expansion joint
interval.

The words "sufficient basis" used in this article should be not only understood as
"there already is a small quantity of engineering samples without problems found"
but also means that some analysis and judgments with scientific basis have been
made for the influence equation and degree of various favorable and unfavorable
factors, on which the increase and decrease of expansion joint interval are
determined.

9.1.4 This article stipulates that the foundation of two columns formed due to the
setting of expansion joint bears very tiny temperature and shrinkage influence, so
its independent foundation can have not cracks set. The engineering practice
proves that this practice is feasible.

292
 9.2 Protective Layer of Concrete

9.2.1 The stipulat ion on thickness of protective layer is to satisfy the durability
requirement for structural members and the requirement for effective anchorage
of load-bearing steel bars. In this article, more definite definition is given for the
thickness of the protective layer. The stipulated thickness of protective layer of
concrete is increased somewhat higher than that in the original code.
In view of the durability requirement, this article stipulates the minimum thickness
of protective layer for the concrete in Cl ass I, II and III environment. The following
modifications are made to the original code:

1. The stipulation for Class I and II(a) environment is approximate to "indoor

normal environment" and "open-air and indoor high-humidity environment"
respectively; in view of the influence of freeze-thawing and light corrosive
environment, Class II(b) and Class III environment is added.
2. The thickness values of protective layers in the table are stipulated with
reference to our country's engineering experience and the durability
requirements, which are more strict that those in the original code; the
appropriate concrete strength grades in the table is somewhat enlarged.

3. In the notes, the stipulation on thickness of protective layer of foundation is

added, which is determined according to the engineering practice
experiences obtained in a long time. As for any foundation in the environment
with corrosive media, the thickness of its protective layer should satisfy the
stipulations in related standards.

9.2.2 The stipulation on thickness of protective layer of steel bars in any prefabricated
member is the same as that in the original code. This stipulation is proved
feasible by the engineering practice experiences obtained in many years.
9.2.3 The stipulations on thickness of protective l ayer of distributed bars in plates, walls
and shells, web reinforcements in girders and pillars and constructional bars are
basically the same as those in the original code, but more strict depending on the
environment conditions. The constructional bars refer to erection bars, distributed
bars and tie bars not considering load-bearing state. The engineering practice
proves that the stipulations in this article are effective to ensure the durability of
structures.

9.2.4 For the case that the thickness of protective layer of longitudinal reinforcing bars
in girders and pillars is larger than 40mm, this article suggests taking effective
crack -resisting construction measures. The common practice is to fully set
constructional bar nets composed of concrete reinforcement wires in the
protective layer of the concrete a certain distance away from the surface of the
member. In addition, the requirement for taking protective measures for the upper
surface of cantilever plate in an open-air environment is added in this article,
because the reinforcing bars in that position are easy to corrode due to cracks in
concrete.
9.2.5 Class IV and V environments are not common and such environment for port
projects should comply with related stipulations set forth in the Code for Design of
Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Structures for Ports (JTJ267) and that for
industrial buildings should comply with related stipulations in the Code for
Anti-corrosion Design of Industrial Buildings (GB50046).

293
 In order to satisfy the fire-prevention requirements for buildings, the thickness of
protective layer also should satisfy the requirements set forth in the Code for Fire
Prevention of Buildings (GBJ16) and the Code for Fire-prevention Design of
High-rise Civil Buildings (GB50045).

9.3 Anchoring of Steel Bar

9.3.1 The anchorage design of the original code adopts the table look-up procedure,
but the method to take values by rounding with 5d as the interval cannot exactly
reflect the influence that the change of anchorage conditions to the anchorage
strength and is difficult to coordinate with the international practices. In China, the
steel bar strength is continuously improved, the external appearance is
increasingly diversified and the structural patterns are also diversified, which
make the anchoring conditions changed greatly, so the table look -up method is
very difficult to reflect the actual values exactly. According to the findings from
systematic tests and studies and reliable analysis in recent years and with
reference to foreign standards, this code gives the method to determine the
anchorage length through simple computation. In the practical application, the
basic anchorage length la obtained through computation should be multiplied by a
correction coefficient for different anchoring conditions and the product should not
be less than the stipulated minimum anchorage length.
la depends on steel bar strength ƒ y and concrete tension strength ƒ y and is in
relation to the external appearance of the steel bar. The influence of external
appearance is reflected by the external appearance coefficient α. Formula 9.3.1-1
is the general equation to compute anchorage length, in which the denominator
stands for the cementing anchorage influence of concrete and is expressed by
the tension strength of concrete; however, when the concrete strength grade is
higher than C40, it is still taken to be C40 so as to control the anchoring length of
high-strength concrete and make it be not too short. The external appearance
coefficient α for different steel bars in Table 9.3.1 is obtained through systematic
cementing anchorage experimental investigation and reliable analysis on various
steel bars.

In order to reflect the influence imposed to the anchoring effect reduction by the
reduction of relative rib height when the diameter of ribbed steel bar, the
anchorage length for steel bars with diameter larger than 25mm should be
suitably increased by multiply by the correction coefficient 1.1.

In order to reflect the unfavorable influence to anchorage due to surface state of

the steel bar with epoxy coating, its anchoring length should be multiplied by a
correction coefficient 1.25, which is determined according to the test and analysis
results and with reference to related stipulations in some foreign standards.
The unfavorable influence of construction disturbance to anchorage is reflected in
the influence coefficient of construction disturbance and is equivalent to that in
the original code, taken to be 1.1.

294
 In a ribbed steel bar, the anchoring action is weakened often due the longitudinal
split-of of peripheral concrete. When the thickness of the concrete protective layer
or the steel bar interval is relatively large, the bond force rises, so the anchorage
length can be suitably shortened. According to the experimental investigation and
reliability analysis and based on the experience from the engineering practice,
when the thickness of the protective layer is larger than 3 times of the anchoring
steel bar and there are constraint steel bars, it is feasible to suitably shorten the
anchorage length; in this case, the anchorage length can be multiplied by the
correction coefficient 0.8.
When designing web reinforcements, the actual reinforcement area is generally
larger than the computed value for construction reason, so the actual stress of
the steel bar is lower than the design strength. Therefore, when it is surely safe,
the anchorage length of the reinforcing bar can be shortened and its value is
proportional to the size of the reinforcement arrangement allowance. The same
method is also used in foreign codes. However, its applicable scope is somewhat
limited, i.e. it cannot be used for any member requiring aseismic design and
directly bearing power load.

When adopting the construction technology to suddenly relax the prestressing

tendon, the possibility of end damage should be considered at the starting point
of its anchorage, and 0.25ltr should be inwards shifted.
Various above correction coefficients can be simultaneously multiplied, but due to
the construction requirement, the correc ted anchorage length of the reinforcing
bar cannot be les than the minimum limit (minimum anchorage length) and its
value in any case should not be less than 0.7 times of the computed value of
Formula 9.3.1 and than 250mm.

9.3.2 Mechanical anchorage is the effective method to reduce the anchorage length.
According to the experimental investigation and the construction practices in our
country, three mechanical anchorage methods are recommended: adding hooks,
welding anchorage plates and welding anchor bars. The correction coefficient for
total anchorage length in the mechanical anchorage, 0.7, is determined on the
basis of tests and reliability analysis, which is equivalent to related value in
foreign codes but safer. In order to offer constraint for concrete in the mechanical
anchorage area to retain its anchoring ability, construction requirements for
diameter, interval and quantity of web reinforcements in anchorage area are
added. When the thickness of the protective layer is very large, the anchorage
constraint action is relatively strong, so no requirement is given for web
reinforcements.
9.3.3 Compression steel bars in pillar, upper chord of truss frame and other members
also have anchorage problems. The anchorage length of compression steel bars
is 0.7 times of corresponding tension anchorage length, which is determined
according to the experimental investigation and with reference to foreign codes.

9.3.4 According to engineering practical experience, this article stipulates the anchoring
measures for steel bars in prefabricated members bearing repeated load.

9.4 Connection of Steel Bar

9.4.1 The performance of the steel bar to transfer the force via the joint is always not as
good as a whole piece of steel bar, so the principle to set connection of steel bars
is as below: the jo int should be set at the place bearing smaller force; as possible
as few joints should be set for the same piece of steel bar. In order to reflect the

295
 technical advancement, the contents of the original code are supplemented, with
mechanical joints added. The types and quality control requirements of
mechanical joints are seen in the General Technical Procedures for Mechanical
Connection of Steel Bars (JGJ107) and those for welding joints are seen in the
Welding Procedures for Steel Bars JGJ18.
9.4.2 This article, according to the engineering experience and the quality of joints,
restricts the application scope of lapping bonding lapping joints for steel bars: any
tension member should not adopt the bonding lapping joint and large-diameter
steel bars had better not adopt the bonding lapping joints.

9.4.3 This article uses diagrams and texts to definitely define the bonding lapping joint
of steel bars in the same connection area. This definition is more exact than the
description of the original code, "lapping joint of the same section". The center
interval of lapping steel bar joint is not larger than 1.3 times of the lapping length
or the end-part distance of lapping steel bars is not larger than 0.3 times of the
lapping length, which both belong to the lapping joint in the same connection
segment. When lapping steel bars are staggered for arrangement, between the
end surfaces of different joints there should be a certain interval. The end-to-end
connection may cause stress concentration and local crack at the junction, which
should be avoided. This article gives the control conditions for the area
percentage of lapping joint of tension steel bars in such members as girders,
plates, walls and pillars. When lapping bar reinforcements and concrete
reinforcement wires together, the area percentage of the joint should be
computed as per the section area of the bar reinforcement and the lapping length
should be computed as per the diameter of the concrete reinforcement wires.
This article also gives the computation method of lapping length of bonding
lapping joint of tension steel bars, which reflects the influence of joint area
percentage. This is determined according to related experimental investigation
and reliability analysis and with reference to practices in related codes in foreign
countries. The lapping length increases when the joint area percentage increases,
because after the lapping joint bears the force, two pieces of steel bars lapped
together with each will oppositely slip and moreover, the shorter the lapping
length is, the larger the slip is. In order that the rigidity is not too bad
simultaneously when the joint bears the force sufficiently, the lapping length must
be accordingly increased. This stipulation solves the defect of the original code
that the stipulat ion for area percentage of lapping joint is too strict, while for any
case with relatively large joint area percentage, the method to increase the
lapping length is taken, which is convenient for design and construction.
9.4.4 The lapping length of compression steel bar is stipulated to be 0.7 times of that of
tension steel bar, which solves the lapping problem of the compression area of
girder and compression steel bar in pillar. This stipulation continues to use the
practice of the original code.

9.4.5 The construction measure to place web reinforcements in the lapping area is of
critical importance for ensuring the lapping joint to transfer force. On the basis of
the article in the original code, this article adds the requirement for the diameter
of web reinforcement s in the lapping area. In addition, this article puts forward the
requirement that web reinforcements must be increased at the end of the
compression lapping joint of bar reinforcements, so as to avoid local extrusion
cracks, which is stipulated according to the findings of the experimental
investigation and the engineering experience.

296
9.4.6 This article stipulates that the length of the mechanical connection segment
should be 35d. It also stipulates its application principle: joints had better be
staggered and separated from any position bearing relatively larger force. Due to
the importance for the tension steel bar to transfer the force at the place with
largest force borne, the connection area percentage of mechanical joint at that
position had better not be larger than 50%.

9.4.7 This article gives the application scope and design principle when applying
mechanical joint onto a member bearing fatigue load.

9.4.8 This article is the requirement of protective layer thickness and steel bar interval
for mechanical joint. Because the diameter of mechanical connection sleeve is
increased, the requirement of protective layer thickness and interval is suitably
relaxed, changed from "should" for steel bar into "had better" for sleeve.

9.4.9 This article gives the definition of connection segment of welding joint. The
requirement for joint area percentage is the same as that in the original code,
which is proven feasible by engineering practice.

9.4.10 This article gives the requirement for welding of reinforcing bars in related
members such as crane beam to bearing fatigue load, which is the same as
related contents of the original code and is proven feasible by the engineering
practice.

9.5 Minimum Reinforcement Rate of Longitudinal Reinforcing Bar

9.5.1 For a relatively long time, our country adopts the stipulation in the code
formulated in 1960s in USSR for minimum reinforcement rate of concrete
member of architecture, in which the minimum reinforcement rate for tension
steel bars of various members is obviously lower than that of other countries'
codes and is far from the level the tension steel bar will not immediately yield
after the concrete in the tension area cracks. Although the original code increases
the minimum reinforcement rate of the tension steel bars by a small amplitude,
but it cannot essentially change the situation that the minimum reinforcement rate
is on the low side.

This revision suitably improves the minimum reinforcement rates of tension steel
bars in a flexural member, eccentric tension member and axial tension member
and adopts the expression relating to the characteristic value of reinforcement
(ƒt/ ƒy), i.e. the minimum reinforcement rate increases accordingly when the
concrete strength grade is improved and reduces when the tension strength of
steel bar increases; meanwhile, this article stipulates the lower limit of minimum
reinforcement rate of tension steel bars.

297
 The purpose to stipulate the minimum reinforcement of compression member is
to improve its brittleness characteristics so as to avoid the concrete from being
suddenly collapsed by compression and make the compression member having
necessary rigidity and the ability revisiting occasional eccentric action. This
revision slightly improves the minimum reinforcement rate of longitudinal steel
bars of compression members, i.e., keeping the minimum reinforcement rate of
longitudinal steel bars in one side of the compression member, 0.2%, but
adjusting the minimum reinforcement rate of all longitudinal steel bars of the
compression member from 0.4% to 0.6%. As for any expression in which the
minimum reinforcement rate of compression member does not adopt the
characteristic value but the brittleness of concrete when the strength grade is on
the high side is more obvious, this article stipulates that when the concrete
strength grade is C60 and higher, the minimum reinforcement rate increases by
0.1%; when HRB400 and RRB400 steel bars are used for longitudinal steel bars,
the minimum reinforcement rate decreases by 0.1%. It should be noted that, this
adjustment is only for all longitudinal steel bars on the section, but the minimum
reinforcement rate of longitudinal steel bars on one side of the compression
member still keeps being not less than 0.2%.

9.5.2 As for thick reinforced concrete plates horizontally set on the foundation, their
reinforcements are mostly controlled by the minimum reinforcement rate. The
minimum reinforcement rate can be suitably reduced according to actual
load-bearing situation but the lowest limit value is stipulated to be 0.15%.

9.5.3 This article stipulates the minimum reinforcement for various prestressed
reinforcing bars in prestressed members. Its basic principle is that "the tension
prestressing bar should not immediately fail when the section is cracked." Its
purpose is to make the test sample having the basic tensility and avoid brittle
failure without advanced indication.

9.6 Construction Stipulations for Prestressed Concrete Member

9.6.1 When it is difficult to adopt single-piece reinforcement for prestressed concrete

wires in a pre-tensioned prestressed member, the combined reinforcement mode
can be adopted. The combined reinforcement mode is commonly used in
concrete members in foreign countries and generally adopted in such cases in
which the reinforcement arrangement in a web reinforcement densifying area is
difficult. The influence that the combined reinforcement imposes onto anchorage
and prestress transfer performance is reflected by equivalent diameter. The said
equivalent diameter is taken to be the diameter of the circular sections with
identical section area: it is √2d for double combined reinforcement and √3d for
triple combined reinforcement, in which d is the diameter of a single piece of steel
wire; after rounding, the approximate value is 1.4 and 1.7 times of the diameter of
a single piece of steel wire. As for the combined reinforcements, the thickness of
protective layer, the interval of steel bars, the anchorage length, the prestress
transfer length, the bending deflection and the crack width check computation are
all considered as per the equivalent diameter. The result of the above
simplification processing is equivalent to the value stipulated in foreign standards
and codes but the computation is simpler.

298
 According to the engineering practice in our country, the combined reinforcement
for prestressed steel wire had better not exceed 3 pieces. Since there is lack of
sufficient engineering experience for heat -treated steel bars and steel strand,
some reliable measures should be taken when combining reinforcements, such
as placing additional spiral reinforcements or adopting the technology to slowly
relax the prestress and so on.

9.6.2 According to the anchoring and prestress transfer performance of pre-tensioned

prestressing tendons, this article puts forward the requirement for net interval of
web reinforc ements. Its value is determined according to the experimental
investigation and the engineering experiment.

9.6.3 The annular tension stress produced due to local extrusion within the
pre-tensioned prestress transfer length range is easy to lead the end concrete of
the member to be split off. Therefore, some construction measures should be
taken for the end part, so as to guarantee the local bearing capacity from the
anchorage end. The measures suggested in this article for single-piece
prestressing tendon including single -piece steel strand or single -piece combined
reinforcement beam are concluded according to the findings from long-term
engineering experience and experimental investigation.

9.6.4~9.6.6 In order to avoid cracks from appearing at the end of a prestressed

member and in the pre-tension area, according to the engineering practice
experience in several past years and the execution of the original code, these
articles put forward the measures to configure crack -resisting steel bars for
various prefabricated members (channel slabs, rib plates, roof boards, crane
beams and so on).

9.6.7 Prestressing anchorages should be selected according to related stipulations set

forth in the Anchorage, Fixtures and Connectors for Prestressing Tendons (GB/T
14370) and should satisfy the appropriate quality requirements.

9.6.8 In order to avoid the post-tensioned prestressed member from happening with
crack and failure along the passage after bearing the force during the
construction stage, appropriate construction measures are suggested for
post-tensioned prefabricated members and frame beams. The stipulated control
values and construction measures are concluded from the engineering
experience of our country in many past years.

9.6.9~9.6.10 Longitudinal horizontal cracks often will appear in the anchorage are of
post-tensioned prestressed concrete member and in the middle of the end
surface of the member after being tensioned during the construction. In order to
control the development of these cracks, based on the experimental investigation,
some detailed stipulations on strengthening web reinforcements are given in this
article. These stipulations require reasonably configuring prestressing tendons
and trying to symmetrically place the anchorages along the end of the member so
as to reduce transverse tension force. When it is difficult for symmetrical
arrangement, in order to avoid too wide cracks on the end surface, according to
the theoretical analysis and the experimental results, the computation formula for
section ar ea of vertical additional steel bars restricting cracks and appropriate
construction measures. This original code restricts that additional steel bars only
adopt plain steel bars, while in this revision, hot -rolled ribbed steel bars of high

299
 strength are allowed for application and the design value and coefficient of steel
bar strength in the computation formula are appropriately adjusted.
9.6.11 In order to ensure the strength and crack control performance of the end
anchorage area of post -tensioned prestressed concrete member with local recess
on the end surface, this article, according to the experiment and engineering
experience, stipulates the measures to prevent cracks by adding broken-line
construction steel bars.

9.6.12 This article specifies to use the finite element analysis method as the way to
solve the end design of special member.
9.6.13 The curvature radius of curve prestressing reinforcement had better not be less
than 4m, which is concluded according to the engineering experience.
9.6.14~9.6.15 According to requirements for local extrusion, construction
technologies and durability, appropriate construction measures are given in these
articles for pre-tensioning area, pre-compression area, turning point of prestress,
embedded steel plate on end surface and exposed anchorage of a
post-tensioned prestressing member.

300
 10 Basic Stipulations on Structural Members

10.1Plates

10.1.1 What is given in this article only is the minimum thickness of a cast-in-situ plate
required in view of construction. The reas onable thickness of a cast-in-situ
should be selected in the economically-reasonable principle and under the
precondition of satisfying the requirement for limit state of bearing capacity and
limit state of normal use, while considering the requirement for fire prevention
and explosion prevention, but it should not be less than the stipulated value in
Table 10.1.1.

10.1.2 The analysis results indicate that, when the length ratio of longer and shorter
edges of a quadrangular supporting plate is larger than or equal to 3.0, the
plate can be computed as per a single-way plate to bear the force along the
direction of the shorter edge; in this case, it is already sufficient to configure the
distributed steel bars stipulated in Article 10.1.8 of this code along the longer
edge's direction. When the length ratio of the longer and shorter edges is
between 2~3, the plate still can be computed as per a single-way plate to bear
the force along the shorter edge's direction, but configuring distributed bars only
along the longer edge's direction is non sufficient to bear the bending moment
at that direction so that the reinforcement quantity should be suitably increased.
When the length ratio of the longer and shorter edges is less than or equal to 2,
computation and reinforcement arrangement should be conducted as per a
two-way plate.

10.1.3 Single-way plates and two-way plates can adopt the separate bar arrangement
or bent-up type bar arrangement. Due to convenience for construction, the
separate bar arrangement method has become the principal bar arrangement
mode for projects. This article gives the construction principle of separate bar
arrangement mode.

10.1.4 This article stipulates the interval of reinforcing bars in plates in common cases
according to the engineering experience.

10.1.5 This article stipulates the anchorage length of steel bars at abutment. It is
stressed in this article that when the temperature and shrinkage stress in a
continuous plate are relatively high, the length that the lower longitudinal steel
bars of the plate stretches into the abutment had better be suitably elongated.

10.1.6 This article, according to the engineering experience, stipulates the

configuration method of construction steel bars at the junction of the beam
plate.

10.1.7 This article stipulates the configuration method of construction steel bars at
edges of the plate when the perimeter of a cast -in-situ plate is supported on the
reinforced concrete beam, reinforced concrete wall or embedded into the
masonry bearing wall. When any pillar of relatively large section or a positive
corner of a wall is stretched into the plate, some plate-edge construction steel
bars also should be set along the pillar perimeter and the positive wall corner
edges stretched into the plate; otherwise, the plate may crack along the pillar
edge or the edge of the positive wall edge. The purpose of this article is to

301
 control the negative bending moment crack around the plate perimeter or
corner part.

10.1.8 Since temperature and shrinkage stress exists in a cast-in-situ plate, the
section area ratio of distributed bar and reinforcing bar is increased from 10%
of the original code to 15% according to the engineering experience, the
stipulation that the section area of distributed bars should not be less than
0.15% of the section area of the plate is newly added, the maximum interval of
distributed bars is reduced from 300mm to 250mm, and the requirement that
the diameter of distributed bar had better be not less than 6mm. Moreover, it
should be noted for the designer that the quantity of distributed bars should be
suitably increased for any case with relatively large concentrated load.

10.1.9 In recent years, the problem for cracks to appear in cast-in-situ plates is
relatively severe. One of the important reasons is that the concrete shrinkage
and temperature change cause constraint tension stress in the cast-in-situ floor
plate. To set thermal contraction steel bars is helpful to reduce this kind of
cracks. Reinforcing bars and distributed bars has a certain action to resisting
temperature and shrinkage stress, some thermal-contraction steel bars should
be configured in positions without steel bars configured or with insufficient web
reinforcements configured along two orthogonal directions (especially the
principal acting direction of temperature and shrinkage stress). At present, it is
not easy to exactly compute the temperature and shrinkage stresses in a plate.
This article gives the configuration principle and minimum quantity of thermal
contraction steel bars according to the engineering experience. If there is
reliable experience on computing temperature and shrinkage stress, the
computation result also can be used as the reference for determining the
quantity of additional steel bars.

The comprehensive construction measures for plate to be incorporate by

stipulations in Article 10.1.5, 10.1.7, 10.1.8 and this article are to reduce the
possibility of the cast-in-situ concrete plate to crack due to temperature and
shrinkage.

10.1.10 The findings of domestic and foreign experimental investigation indicate that
bent -up steel bars or web reinforcements configured on the junction of die-cut
failure planes of a plate can improve the die-cut resisting bearing capacity of
the plate. The construction stipulation in this article is to ensure that the
strength of bent -up steel bars and web reinforcements can be taken full use of.

10.1.11 Setting steel bar nets along the thickness direction of a thick concrete plate, in a
certain interval and in parallel to the plate plane can not only reduce the
influence of large-volume concrete thermal contraction but also facilitate
improving the shear resisting bearing capacity of the member.

10.1.12 In this revision of code, stipulates on welded frame and welded mesh are not
given. When any welded mesh is used, it should comply with the related
stipulations in the Technical Procedures for Concrete Structures of Reinforced
Welded Mesh (JGJ/T114).

302
 10.2Beams

10.2.1 The stipulation on web reinforcement construction of assembled framework beam

is basically the same as that in the original code, which is proven effective by the
engineering practice.

10.2.2 As for the simply-supported abutment supported on reinforced concrete beam or

prefabricated reinforced concrete beam supported on concrete packing blocks of
brick wall and brick pillar in a building of hybrid structure, this article stipulates the
requirement for anchoring length at the abutment and for web reinforcement
configuration within the range of the abutment.

10.2.3 In the span of a continuous beam and a frame beam, when the tension steel bar
of negative bending moment in the abutment are stretched into the span, they
can be cut at appropriate position according to the bending moment diagram.
When the shearing force acting on the end of the beam is relatively large, some
vertical and diagonal cracks caused by negative bending moment may be formed
within the elongation segment of the steel bars of negative bending moment in
the abutment, which will increase the tension stress of the longitudinal steel bar
due to the action of diagonal bending and the cementing deterioration and may
produce split-off cracks at the frontal end of the diagonal crack area along this
steel bar. The findings of domestic and foreign experimental investigation
indicates that, in order that the cutting of the steel bar of negative bending
moment will not affect its buckling resistance in various section, two conditions
should be used to control the cutting point of the steel bar of negative bending
moment. The first control condition (i.e. the length of the steel bar unnecessary to
stretch out of the section) is that after this batch of steel bars is cut, the steel bar
continuously stretching forward should ensure that the diagonal section over the
cutting point has enough bending bearing capacity; the second condition (i.e. the
length stretching forward while taking full use of the section) is that the steel bar
of negative steel bar must have necessary anchoring length under the special
anchorage condition at the top of the girder. According to the results of the actual
measurement for load-bearing state of the stretching area of cut longitudinal steel
bars of negative bending moment, this code adjusts part of the stipulations in the
original code.

When the shearing force acting at the beam end is relatively small (V≤0.7ƒt bh0),
the two conditions to control the position of cutting point of steel bars are the
same as those in the original code.

When the shearing force acting at the beam end is relatively large (V>0.7ƒtbh0)
and the relative length of the negative bending moment area is not long, the
second control condition given in the original code can be used continuously; the
first control condition in the original code is modified as follows: based on the
stipulation that the section stretching-out length of this steel bar should not be
less than 20d, the requirement for not being less than h0 is added.
If the relative length of the negative bending moment is relatively large and when
the cutting point to be determined according to the above two conditions is still
located in the tension area of negative bending moment corresponding to the
maximum bending moment of the abutment, the stretching length should be
further increased. The increased stretching length is the larger one among the
stretching length of the section that is fully used and the stretching length of the
section that never needs this batch of steel bars.

303
10.2.4 The test indicates that in the cantilever beam under relatively large stress, the
dip of the critical diagonal crac k is obviously on the small side because the
whole length of the beam is under the action of the negative bending moment,
so it had better not cut off the steel bar of negative bending moment. In this
case, the steel bars of negative bending moment can be downward bent as per
the indication of the bending moment diagram in batch, but there must be no
less than two pieces of steel bars stretching into the beam end while downward
bending the anchorage.

10.2.5 The stipulation on minimum reinforcement rate of longitudinal torsion steel bars
is fitted and given based on Formula 7.6.4-1 for torsion bearing capacity of
pure-torsion member and the control condition without bearing capacity
computation but only configuring steel bars upon construction requirements
under the shear-torsion condition. This article additionally gives the principle to
arrange longitudinal torsion steel bars around the perimeter of the section and
the requirements for anchorage at the abutment. For the sake of higher safety,
it adopts the same construction requirements as those for members of solid
sections for any member of box-type section.

10.2.6 This article, according to the engineering experience, gives the construction
stipulation on configuring longitudinal steel bars on the upper part of the girder
end with partial constraint and according to the computation as per a
simply-supported beam.

10.2.7~10.2.8 The construction requirements in the original code and relating to

starting or end bent -up point of bent -up steel bars, angle and anchorage length
are still effective, so they are kept untouched in these articles.

10.2.9 This article stipulates the construction and web reinforcement configuration
requirements for beams without the need to configure web reinforcements
according to the computation. This article keeps the corresponding stipulations
in the original code.

10.2.10 Matching up to the adjustment (suitably increasing the usage of shear-resisting

steel bars) to computation formula of shearing bearing capacity of diagonal
section described in Section 7.5 of this code, the minimum reinforcement rate
for shearing web reinforcements in a beam is also suitably increased on the
basis of the original code.

10.1.11 This article stipulates the requirement for diameter of web reinforcement in a
beam.

10.2.12 Matching up to the suitable increase of minimum reinforcement rate of shear

web reinforcements stipulated in Article 10.2.10 of this code, this article suitably
increases the minimum reinforcement rate of shear-torsion web reinforcements
accordingly. As for any member of box-type section, for the sake of higher
safety, this article adopts the same construction requirements as those for
members of solid sections.

10.2.13 When the concentrated load is transferred within the height range of the beam
or from the lower part of the beam, in order to avoid the lower part of concrete
in the acting area of the concentrated load from being pulled off and to make up
the reduction of shear bearing capacity of diagonal section of the beam due to
indirect load, some additional transverse steel bars should be added in the
range of the affection area s of the concentrated load. In the design, it is not
allowed to replace the additional transverse steel bars with the shear web
reinforcements placed in the affection area of the concentrated load.
Additionally, when the width d of the minor beam transfer the concentrated
force is too large, the arrangement width of additional transverse steel bar to be

304
 determined as per 3b+2h1 should be suitably reduced. When the height
difference h1 between the minor beam and the principal beam is too small, it
had better increase the arrangement width of additional transverse steel bars.
When the principal and minor beams bear the vertical load from the upper wall
and pillar, the value for additional transverse steel bars had better be suitably
increased on the stipulation of this article.
When there is symmetrically-distributed load acting on the lower part of the
beam, the quantity of additional suspending steel bars should be determined by
using the method described in Article 10.7.12 of this code for determining the
suspending steel bars for deep beam.

When there are two concentrated loads, along the length direction of the beam
and with short distance between them, acting in the height range of the beam, a
joint pull-off effect and a joint pull -off failure surface may be formed. The more
reliable practice is to respectively and suitably increase the quantity of
additional transverse steel bars out of the acting point of the two concentrated
loads while not reducing the quantity of additional steel bars that should be
configured between the two concentrated loads.
This revision also makes the following supplementations to the stipulations of
the original code:
1. When using bent -up steel bars as additional steel bars, it is definitely
stipulated that As w in the formula should be the sum of section areas of
the left and right bent-up segments.

2. The bent -up segment of additional bent-up steel bars should be

stretched into the upper edge of the be am and, at its end part, a
horizontal anchoring segment should be set according to the stipulation
in Article 10.2.7 of this code.
10.2.14 This article adjusts the construction stipulation on the beam with inward-bent
angle in the tension area, changing the "longitudinal tension steel bars not
stretching into the compression area" in the original code into the "longitudinal
tension steel bars not anchored in the compression area". The "anchorage in
the compression area" mentioned here should be to determine its anchoring
length according to the anchoring mode for steel bars in the compression area
(straight -line anchorage or bending anchorage) and respectively according to
Article 9.3.1 or 10.4.1 of this code. The height of the compression area can be
taken to be the actual compression area height to be determined by
computation.

10.2.15 This article stipulates the diameter of the erection bars of the beam, which is
determined according to the engineering experience and is the same as that in
the original code.
10.2.16 When the section size of the beam is relatively large, some shrinkage cracks
vertical to the axis line of the beam may occur on the side of the beam. For this
reason, some longitudinal constructional bars should be placed on the two
sides of the beam and along the length direction of the beam. Because more
and more projects are using cast-in-situ concrete beams of large section sizes,
some stipulations stricter than those in the original code are given in this
revision for maximum interval and minimum reinforcement rate of longitudinal
construction steel bars according to the engineering experience. The minimum
reinforcement rate of longitudinal construction steel bars should be determined
as per the section are of girder web plates deducting the compression and
tension wing edges.

10.2.17 This article gives the construction measures for reinforcing the lower

305
 longitudinal steel bars for thin-webbed girder and the beam subject to fatigue
check computation, which are the same as those of the original code.

10.3Pillars

10.3.1 This article adds the stipulation on the minimum number of longitudinal steel bars
in circular pillars and the stipulation that longitudinal steel bars of circular pillar
should be symmetrically placed around the perimeter of the section.

10.3.2 When the reinforcement rate of all longitudinal steel bars in the pillar is larger
than 3%, the same practice as that taken for the end of web reinforcements in an
0
aseismic pillar (making 135 hooks, with length of the straight segment of hook
end not less than 10d) is suggested being used for web reinforcements, or
adopting welding enclosed-ring web reinforcements; however, for welding
enclosed-ring web reinforcements, the onsite welding should not damage the
reinforcing bars and the flash resistance butt welding method and other reliable
welding method had better be adopted so as to ensure the welding quality.
10.3.3 When spiral hoops are adopted, considering its indirect action, appropriate
construction measures are stipulated in this article. The detailed stipulation is the
same as that in the original code.

10.3.4 This article increases the minimum thickness of wing edge and web plate of a
pillar of I-shaped section. The minimum section area of additional steel bars on
the edge of the hole when any hole is opened on the web plate are stipulated in
this article.
10.3.5 As for any pillar of I-shaped section and with hole opened on the web plate,
different design and computation principles are given according to the size of the
hole, which are the same as those set forth in the original code.

10.4 Nodes of Beams and Pillars

10.4.1 Depending on the section height of the pillar and the diameter of the steel bar, the
longitudinal steel bars on the upper part of the girder at the end node of the
intermediate layer of the frame can adopt the straight-line anchorage mode or the
0
anchoring mode with 90 bending segment at the end. When the section of the
pillar is not enough for setting straight anchorage segment and instead adopts the
0
anchoring method with 90 bending segment, it is stressed to st retch the steel
bars of the girder into the opposite edge of the pillar and then bends downward.
The experimental investigation indicates that the anchoring ability of this
anchorage end depends on the cementing ability of the horizontal segment and
the bending anchoring effect of the bending arc and the vertical segment. When
the steel bar mainly bears a static load, the cementing ability of the horizontal
segment plays a principal action. The findings of domestic and foreign tests
indicates that when the projection length of the horizontal segment is not less
than 0.4la and that of the vertical segment is 15d, the anchorage strength and
rigidity of the steel bar in the girder can be reliably ensured, so the requirement
for the total anchorage length not less than the length of the tension anchorage is
cancelled.
In the local revision contents made in 1992 for the original code, it was ever
allowed that when the transverse short steel bars on the inner side of 900 bending

306
 arc, the horizontal projection length could be reduced by 15%. However, the
recent test indicates that, this transverse short steel bar is ineffective under the
common load-bearing situation in which the steel bar in the bending segment
does not deform, so this code does not adopt this prac tice to set transverse short
0
steel bars on the inner side of the 90 bending arc to reduce the length of the
horizontal anchorage segment.
When at the end node of the intermediate layer of the frame there is a cantilever
girder stretching outward and the top surface of the cantilever and the top surface
of the frame girder are in the same elevation, part of steel bars in the frame girder
that are used as the negative bending moment steel bars of the cantilever girder
can be stretched into the cantilever, while other frame girder steel bars are still
anchored in the end node according to the stipulation in Article 10.4.1. When at
other elevation there is any cantilever girder or short cantilever (corbel) stretching
out from the frame pillar, the negative bending moment steel bars of the
cantilever girder or short cantilever (corbel) also should be anchored into the
frame pillar according to the anchoring stipulation for the end node of
intermediate layer of upper steel bars in the frame girder, that is to say tat the
projection length of the horizontal segment should not be less than 0.4la and the
projection length of the vertical segment after bending should be taken to be 15d.

10.4.2 As for the lower girder steel bars at the middle and end nodes of the intermediate
layer and the lower girder steel bars at the middle and end nodes of the top layer,
their anchoring requirements at appropriate nodes still follow the stipulation of the
original code relating to the longitudinal steel bars of the girder under different
load-bearing cases. When there are many lower steel bars in the girder and they
are anchored into the middle nodes from both sides, the lower steel bars of the
node are crowded and therefore increase the nodes for the lower girder steel
bars to go through the middle node and lapping them at the position of relatively
small bending moment out of the node.
When the upper surfaces of left and right beams at the middle node of the
intermediate layer is not in the same elevation, the upper steel bars in the left and
right beams can be anchored into the node respectively according to the
stipulation in Article 10.4.1.

When the usage difference of upper steel bars in left and right girder ends at the
middle node of the intermediate layer is relatively large, except t he part of left and
right steel bars with the same quantity go through the node, other girder steel
bars can be anchored into the node according to the stipulation in Article 10.4.1.

10.4.3 All pillar bars stretched into the middle node of the top layer and the pillar bars
stretched into the inner side of the end node of top layer should be reliably
anchored in the node. It also stresses that the pillar steel bars should be
stretched into the top of the pillar. When the height of the node in the top layer is
not enough to accommodate the straight anchorage length of the pillar steel bar,
the pillar steel bar can be bent inward the node at the top of the pillar or outward
the node when cast-in-situ is adopted. When taking full use of the tension
strength of the pillar steel bars, the test indicates that, its anchoring condition is
not as good as that of horizontal steel bars, so the vertical projection length of the
anchorage segment of the pillar bar before bending should not be less than 0.5la,
and the horizontal project length after bending had better not be less than 12d, so
as to ensure reliable load-bearing.

10.4.4 In a frame mainly bearing static load, both the girder and pillar at the end node of
the top layer mainly bear the action of negative bending moment, equivalent to a
0
segment of 90 bending girder. When the quantity of upper steel bars in the girder
match with that of steel bars in the outer side of the pillar, the longitudinal steel

307
 bars within the range of the girder section width and in the outer side of the pillar
can be directly bent into the top of the girder and used as the steel bars of
negative bending moment. Or, you can lap the upper steel bars of the girder with
the steel bars in the outer side of the pillar near the end node of the top layer.
This code recommends two lapping solutions. The lapping solution with 900
bending at the outer side of the node and on the top surface of the girder end (as
shown in Figure 10.4.4a) is applicable for civil or public building frames in which
the quantity of upper steel bars in the girder and steel bars on the outer side of
the pillar is not too much; its advantage is that the upper steel bars of the girder
will not be stretched into the pillar, which is favorable to set concrete construction
joint for the pillar at the beam bottom elevation. However, when there are too
many upper steel bars in the girder and too many steel bars in the outer side of
the pillar, this solution may make steel bars on the top of the node too crowded,
which is unfavorable to grout concrete from up to down. In this case, it had better
change to adopt the straight lapping method for girder and pillar steel bars, in
which the joint is located in the outer side of the pillar top (as shown in Figure
10.4.4b).

At the end node of the top layer, it is not allowed to stretch the pillar steel bars
into the pillar top and anchor the upper steel bars of the girder into the node
according to the stipulation in Article 10.4.1 of this code, because this practice
cannot ensure the lapping joint of the girder and pillar steel bars at the node to
transfer the force so that the girder and pillar end cannot bring the required
normal-section bending bearing capacity into play.

10.4.5 The test indicates that when the reinforcement rate of upper steel bars of the
girder and outside steel bars of the pillar is too high, diagonal compression failure
may occur in the concrete in the core area of the end node of the top layer, so the
reinforcement rate should be appropriately restricted according to the stipulation
in this article.

The test indicates that when the bending arc radius of upper steel bar of the
girder and the outside steel bars of the pillar at the upper corner of the end node
in the top layer is too small, local compression failure may occur in the concrete
under the bending arc, so appropriate stipulation should be given for the
minimum value of the bending arc radius of the steel bar.

10.4.6 The construction stipulation on arrangement of horizontal web reinforcements at

pillar column node of any non-aseismic frame is given according to our country's
engineering experience and with reference to related codes of foreign countries.
When there are girders on four sides of the node, there is no risk for longitudinal
steel bars in the pillar around nodes excluding four corners to yield under
compression too early, so composite web reinforcement can be not set.

10.5 Wall

10.5.1 This article stipulates that only the member the section length of which is 4 times
larger than its thickness can be regarded as "wall" for section design and
consideration of bar arrangement; other members should be regarded as a
pillar for section design and consideration of bar arrangement. The stipulation in
this article is given according to engineering experience and with reference to
related codes in forei gn countries.

308
10.5.2~10.5.7 This part of stipulation in the original code, including stipulation on
minimum thickness of shearwall, section design stipulation for shearwall,
section design stipulation for hole-mouth continuous beam of shearwall, is
given with reference to the Procedures for Design and Construction of High-rise
Reinforced Concrete Architecture JGJ3-79 and according to the experimental
investigation as well as the design experience in China. Its contents are not
changed in this code. Due to lack of sufficient experimental investigation
findings for hole-mouth connecting beam with span-height ratio not larger than
2.5, there is still no formula for shearing bearing capacity, restriction condition
for shearing section, construction of bar arrangement and so on, which is
specified in the notes.

10.5.8 This article gives that construction requirement for longitudinal steel bars on
both sides of the wall and the tie bars set along these longitudinal steel bars
and also gives that requirements for minimum configuration quantity and
anchorage of upper and lower longitudinal steel bars at the mouth of hole.

10.5.9~10.5.11 The minimum reinforcement rate for horizontal and vertical distributed
bars in a shearwall, which is stipulated in these articles, is the minimum
reinforcement rate determined upon the construction requirement. As for any of
the following two cases, the reinforcement rate for distributed bars in the
shearwall should be respectively improved suitably:

1. Shearwall in important position of the structure. This shearwall mainly

refers to the shearwall in a frame ~ shearwall structure and the core tube
wall body in a frame ~ core tube structure, for which the reinforcement
rate of distributed bars in the wall body should be suitably increased
according to the engineering experience.
2. Temperature and shrinkage stress. This is the main reason to cause
cracks on the wall body. As for any shearwall with relatively large
temperature and shrinkage stress and some positions of such shearwall,
the reinforcement rate of distributed bar in the wall body, especially that
of the horizontal distributed bars, should be suitably increased according
to the engineering experience.
This article additionally stipulates the diameters, interval and bar arrangement
modes of horizontal and vertical distributed bars.

10.5.12 This article stipulates the anchorage or lapping of horizontal distributed bars of
a shearwall at the wall end or in the wing wall at wall corner. The detailed
practices and requirements are determined according to engineering
experience and related testing results.
10.5.13~10.5.14 This article gives lapping methods for horizontal and vertical distributed
bars for a shearwall and the construction stipulations for hole-mouth connecting
beam of a shearwall.

10.5.15 When adopting welded steel bar nets for bar arrangement, related stipulations
in the existing standard Technical Procedures for Concrete Structures Adopting
Welded Steel Bar Nets (JGJ/T114).

309
 10.6Buildup Flexural Member

10.6.1 Buildup flexural members are mainly used in assembled monolithic structures.
According to the difference of construction and load-bearing characteristics,
buildup flexural members can be divided into two types: buildup flexural members
with reliable support and additionally set during construction (also named as
"first-stage reinforcing buildup member") and buildup flexural member without
support and set during construction (also named as "second-stage reinforcing
buildup member").

Except that the first-stage reinforcing buildup member should be regarded as a

buildup flexural member for shearing bearing capacity computation of diagonal
section and shearing bearing capacity computation of buildup plane and make its
buildup plane comply with the construction requirements set forth in Articles
10.6.14 and 10.6.15, other design contents are the same as those for common
flexural members. The design of the second-stage buildup member should
comply with the stipulations given in Articles from 10.6.2 to 10.6.15.

As for any second-stage reinforcing buildup member with the height ratio of
prefabricated member and buildup member h1/h<0/.4, due to bas reinforcing
performance and economic effect they are not recommended for use.

10.6.2 This article gives the loads that the "second-stage reinforcing buildup bending
member" should consider the first stage before the concrete in the buildup layer
reaches the designed strength and in the second stage after reaching the
designed strength. In the second stage, the active construction load still can exist
after the concrete in the buildup layer reaches the designed strength and the load
effect it produces is possibly larger than the load effect produced by the variable
load during the application stage, so the design should be made as per the larger
value of the two load effects.

10.6.3 This article gives the method to compute the bending bearing capacity of normal
sections of prefabricated member and a buildup member. When the height ratio
h1/h of prefabricated and buildup members is relatively small, in the computation
of bending bearing capacity of normal section of a prefabricated member, ξ> ξb is
possible to occur; in this case, ƒy and ƒ yp of longitudinal tension steel bars should
be replaced with σs and σp. σs and σp should be computed according to Article
7.1.5 of this code, or they can be computed by taking ξ= ξb.

10.6.4 Because the experimental investigation data for shearing bearing capacity of
diagonal section of the second-stage reinforcing buildup beam is not sufficient,
this code stipulates that the shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section of a
buildup girder should be computed still by using the shearing bearing capacity
formula for common reinforced concrete beam. In a prestressed concrete buildup
girder, the prestress effect only affects the prefabricated member, so the
unfavorable influence of prestress is temporarily not considered in the
computation of shearing bearing capacity of diagonal section. In the computation
of shearing bearing capacity, the concrete strength is, for the sake of safety,
taken to be the lower value of that for prefabricated girder and the buildup layer;
meanwhile, the shearing bearing capacity should not be less than the shearing
bearing capacity of the prefabricated girder.

310
10.6.5 The buildup surface of a buildup member may reach the limit state of its shearing
bearing capacity earlier than its diagonal section. The computation formula for
shearing bearing capacity of buildup surface is based on the shear-friction force
transfer model and given according to the testing results of buildup member and
shear-friction test sample. The steel bars in a buildup flexural member should be
configured depending on the larger value of shearing bearing capacity
computation of diagonal section and shearing bearing capacity computation of
buildup surface.

The shearing bearing capacity of the buildup surface without steel bars
configured has relatively large discreteness, so in this code the shearing bearing
capacity formula used for such buildup surface does not consider the concrete
strength grade temporarily, which is similar to the processing method in foreign
codes.

10.6.6~10.6.7 Since the load -bearing states of buildup flexural member in the
construction stage and the application stage are different, this reversion suitably
increases the crack-resisting req uirement for prestressed concrete buildup
flexural members, i.e., stipulating that crack resistance check computation
should be respectively made for prefabricated member and buildup member,
while requiring that the concrete stress of the crack resistance check
computation edge should not be larger than the standard value of concrete
tension strength of prefabricated member. The prefabricated member and
buildup layer may adopt the concrete of different strength grade, so in the crack
resistance check comput ation for normal section and diagonal section, the
elastic resisting moment, inertia moment and area moment of the member after
buildup should be determined as per the discounting section.

10.6.8 During the construction stage the buildup member adopts the prefabricated
member of small section height to bear all the load in this stage so that the
stress in the tension steel bar is larger than that when assuming the full section
of buildup member bearing the same load. This phenomenon is generally called
"stress of tension steel bar leading". When the concrete in the buildup layer
reaches the strength and forms a buildup member, in addition to producing
stress increment in tension steel bar and producing compression stress in
concrete in compression area for the first time, under the action of the load
during the application stage the whole section will produce additional tension
force at these positions due to offsetting the original compression stress in the
compression area of the prefabricated member. This additional tension force
will reduce the stress leading phenomenon in the reinforcing bar to some
degree, but it still will increase the tension stress and curvature of the steel bar
of the buildup member, larger than those of an ordinary flexural member of the
same section; moreover, it can make the tension steel bar reach the yield point
too early under the action of the standard bending moment M k=M 1Gk+M 2k. Such
case should be avoided in the design. Therefore, the stress control condition for
tension steel bars for Formula 10.6.8-1 is given. This condition is the additional
check computation condition for normal-use limit state of buildup flexural
member. This check computation condition and the crack width control
condition and the deformation control condition cannot be replaced with each
other.

311
10.6.9 On the basis of the crack width computation formula of ordinary reinforced
concrete flexural member and in combination with the characteristics of
second-stage reinforcing buildup flexural member, through a local adjustment
the crack width computation formula for reinforced concrete buildup flexural
member is given in this article. If the load borne by the first-stage prefabricated
member is relatively small, the bending cracks in the tension area may not fully
appear in the first stage; when the buildup section subsequently bears M 2k, the
ρ te of buildup section is relatively on the low side, so it is possible for the final
crack interval to be on the large side. Therefore, when computing the crack
interval of buildup flexural member, the crack interval should be multiplied by an
augmenting coefficient 1.05. This is equivalent to increasing the value of α c r in
Formula 8.1.2-1 in this code from 2.1 of the ordinary reinforced concrete girder
to 2.2. In addition, the ρ teσsk in the formula to compute ψ of ordinary reinforced
concrete girder should be replaced with ρ tel σs1k+ρ te σs2k so as to approximately
consider the second-stage load-bearing characteristics of the buildup member.

10.6.10 The bending deflection of a buildup flexural member should be computed by

adopting the equivalent rigidity B given in Formula 10.6.10 -1 and considering
the second -stage reinforcing characteristics and according to the characteristic
combination of load effect and considering the influence of long-term action of
load. When the formula for equivalent rigidity B is deduced under the
precondition assuming that the long-term influence of the load to bending
deflection leads to the second load-bearing stage and according to the relation
between bending moment and curvature in the first and second stages.

10.6.11~10.6.13 The second-stage short-term rigidity of the second-stage reinforcing

buildup flexural member made of reinforced concrete is given on the basis of
the formula for short-term rigidity of ordinary reinforced concrete flexural
member and through simplifying this formula while considering the lagging
effect formed by the second-stage force to the concrete stress in the
compression area of the buildup section. As for any prestressed concrete
second-stage reinforcing buildup flexural member not allowing cracks, the
coefficient 0.7 in the second-stage short-term rigidity formula is determined
according to the test results.

These articles give the computation principles for second-stage short-term

rigidity in the segment of negative bending moment and antiarch value of
prestressing force in the application stage.

10.6.14~10.6.15 The shearing bearing capacity of buildup section of buildup flexural

member is ensured through the aggregate clutching effect of buildup section
and the tensioning force produced on the buildup section after the web
reinforcements passing through the buildup section slip on the buildup section.
Therefore, it is required not to smoothen the concrete surface of the
prefabricated member after vibrating the concrete so as to form a natural rough
surface, and an aggregate particle diameter should be selected so as to form
the roughness stipulated in these articles. On the buildup section with
transverse steel bars, it should adopt the length that the web reinforcement
stretches into the buildup layer, necessary concrete thickness in buildup layer
an concrete strength grade to ensure that the web reinforcements can be
effectively anchored into the concrete of the buildup layer.

312
 10.7Deep Flexural Member

10.7.1 According to the analysis and testing results, the simply-supported girder with
l0/h≤2.0 and continuous girders with l0/h≤2.5 all are regarded as deep beam in
and out of China, and some special stipulations are given for their section design
methods and bar arrangement construction. The recent resting results indicate
that as for any beams with l 0/h larger than that of a deep beam but less than 5.0
(domestically called as "short beam"), its load -bearing characteristics are
somewhat different from those of common beams with l0/ h≥5.0, which is
equivalent to the transition state between deep beam and common beam. For the
section design methods for these beams, some special stipulations different from
those for deep beams and general beams also should be given.

This article generally calls flexural members with l 0/h<5.0 as "deep flexural
members", including deep beams and "short beams". In this section, any article
for "deep flexural member" is applicable to deep beams and "short beams", but
the article for "deep beams" is not applicable to "short beams".

In Articles 10.7.3~10.7.5 of this code, in order to simplified the computation, the

boundary of a deep beam and a "short beam" in the computation formula is
unitedly taken to be l 0/h=2.0. The definition given in Article 10.7.1 that
simply-supported beams with l0/ h≤2.0 and continuous beams with l0/h≤2.5 are
called as deep beams is only adopted when selecting internal force analysis
method in Article 10.7.2 and when defining the deep beam in Articles
10.7.6~10.7.13.

10.7.2 The internal force computation of a simply-supported beam is the same as that of
an ordinary beam; the internal force value of a continuous deep beam and its
distribution law along the span are different from those of an ordinary beam; its
positive bending moment in the span is generally larger than that of the
continuous beam, while the negative bending moment at the abutment is smaller,
and varies with the change of span-height ratio and the span number. In the
engineering, the internal force of a continuous deep beam should be determined
according to the 2D elastic analysis and had better not consider the redistribution
of internal forces. The actual value of internal force can be determined by using
the elastic finite element method or through looking up the internal force table of
continuous deep beam prepared according to the 2d elastic analysis results.

10.7.3 The bending bearing capacity of normal section of a deep flexural member should
be computed by using the expression of internal force arm, and when l0/h=5.0,
this expression can be linked up with the computation formula of ordinary beams.
The test indicates that the contribution of horizontal distributed bars to the
bending bearing capacity covers about 10%~30%. The action of this part of steel
bars is ignored in the computation formula for normal section. This process is on
the safe side.

10.7.4 This article gives the control condition for shearing section applicable to all deep
flexural members with l0/h<5.0. When l0/h=5, this condition is linked up with the
control condition for shearing sections of ordinary flexural members.

313
10.7.5 In the formula for computing the shearing bearing capacity of a deep flexural
member, the term relating to concrete reflects such as change law that when l0/h
reduces, the shear failure model transits from shear-compression type to
diagonal-compression type and the proportion of the concrete-associated term in
the shearing bearing capacity continuously increase. The terms of vertical
distributed bars and horizontal distributed bars respectively reflect such a
transition law from only vertical distributed bars (web reinforcements) participating
in shearing when l0/h=5.0 to only horizontal distributed bars able to take limited
shearing effect into play when l0/h is relatively small. When l 0/h=5.0, this formula
is linked up with the formula for computing shearing bearing capacity of common
beams.

In the formula for computing shearing bearing capacity of a deep flexural member
mainly bearing concentrated load, there are two parameters: span-height ratio l0/h
and computational shear-span ratio λ. As for a deep beam with 0l / h≤2.0, λ is
unitedly taken to be 0.25; however, in a common flexural member with l0/h≥5.0,
the upper and lower limit values of shear-span ratio is respectively taken to be 3.0
and 1.5. In order for continuous transition of shearing bearing capacity of
computation formulas of deep beam, short beam and common beam, this article
gives the linear transit law of upper and lower limit values of λ of deep flexural
member when 2.0<l 0/h<5.0.

It should be noted that because the action of horizontal and vertical distributed
bars in a deep bam to the shearing bearing capacity is limited, when the shearing
bearing capacity of the deep beam is insufficient, the shearing bearing capacity
requirement should be satisfied through adjusting the section sizes or improving
the concrete strength grade.

10.7.6 The test indicates that, when the shear-san ratio decreases, the crack-resisting
capacity of diagonal section of a deep beam somewhat increases. In order to
simplify the computation, this article gives the check computation condition
avoiding diagonal cracks appearing in a deep beam according to the hyponastic
value of the testing result, which reasonably softens the stipulations set forth
before the revision. When the requirements in Formula 10.7.6 in this article are
satisfied, the shearing bearing capacity may not be computed according to Article
10.7.6 of this code any longer.

10.7.7 There is the possibility for local compression failure to occur in the concrete in the
supporting surface of abutment of deep beam and the acting surface of
concentrated load on the top of the deep beam, so the local compression bearing
capacity check computation should be conducted and when necess ary, indirect
steel bars also should be configured. According to the stipulation in Article 10.7.8
in this code, to stretch the pillar of the supporting deep beam into the top of the
deep beam can effectively reduce the possibility for local compression failure to
occur on the load-transfer surface of the abutment of the deep beam.

10.7.8 To ensure the stability of the outlet plane of the deep beam, this article restricts
the height -thickness rate (h/b) or span-thickness ratio (l 0/b) of the deep beam. In
addition, the top of a simply-supported deep beam and the top and bottom of the
continuous deep beam should be linked with other members with relatively large
horizontal rigidity (such as floor cover), so as to further strengthen the stability of
its outlet plane.

314
10.7.9 In the elastic reinforcing stage, the distribution law of normal stress in the
abutment section of a continuous deep beam varies with the span-height ratio.
When l 0/h>5, the compression area is in the range 0.2h above the beam bottom,
the higher area is the tension stress area and the maximum tension stress is on
the top of the beam; when l0/h decreases, the maximum tension stress position
moves downward; when l0/h=1.0, the relatively large tension stress exists in the
range 0.2h`0.6h from the beam bottom, and the tension stress of the beam top is
relatively on the low side. When the limit state of bearing capacity is reached, the
stress redistribution due to cracking on abutment section will increase the tension
force of upper steel bars on the abutment section of the deep beam. The
stipulation given in Figure 10.7.9-3 in this article on division and distribution of
tension steel bars of negative bending moment on abutment section along the
section height well complies with the load-bearing characteristics on abutment
section at normal -use limit state. This division and distribution stipulation for
horizontal steel bars has not sufficiently reflected the load-bearing characteristics
under the limit state of bearing capacity, but is favorable for the crack control of
abutment section under limit state of normal use, while it does not affect the
safety of the deep beam under the limit state of bearing capacity. This article
retains the control condition of the original code for minimum usage of horizontal
steel bars in the range 0.2h~0.6h from the beam bottom, so as to reduce the
possibility for cracks to occur too early in this height range in the abutment
section.

10.7.10After vertical cracks and diagonal cracks appear in the deep beam, a tension bar
arch force trans fer mechanism will be formed; in this case, the tensioning force
from the lower tension steel bars to near the abutment is still relatively large, so it
should be reliably anchored into the abutment. Under the joint action of "arch rib"
compression force, the vertical hooks at the anchorage end of the steel bars
possibly cause the abutment area of the deep beam to split off along the middle
surface of the deep beam, so the bending practice for the anchorage end of steel
0
bar is suggested being changed for lying flat and being anchored in form of 180
bending.

10.7.11The test indicates that, when only two layers of steel bar nets are configured and
no tie bars are placed between nets, the steel bar net is possible to suffer with
laterally split-off diagonal compression failure along the middle surface of the
deep beam when the diagonal compression in the arch rib of the tie bar arch is
relatively large because the deformation at the outlet plane of the deep beam is
under no special constraint. Therefore, between two rows of steel bar nets there
should be configured with tie bas. Moreover, in the range near the abutment of
deep beam and indicated by dotted line in Figures 10.7.9-1 and 10.7.9-2 in Article
10.7.9 in this code, there should be suitably added more tie bars.

10.7.12When in the lower part of the deep beam there is concentrated load or
symmetrically-distributed load, the tension capacity of the suspending steel bars
had better not be taken full use of, the reason for which is to control the width of
cracks caused by the suspending action. When the computational shear-span
ratio of the concentrated load acting on the lower part of the deep beam λ is
larger than 0.7, the suspending steel bars set according to the stipulation in this
article and the vertical distributed bars set according to Article 10.7.13 of this
code still cannot completely avoid the occurrence of diagonal-pull shear failure,
so the quantity of vertical distributed bars should be suitably increased in the
shear-span.

315
10.7.13The action that the horizontal and vertical distributed bars of a deep beam plays
on the shear bearing capacity is limited, but it can restrict the development of
diagonal sections. When the distributed bars adopt relatively small diameter and
interval, this action is more obvious. In addition, the distributed bars can
effectively control the occurrence of temperature and shrinkage cracks in the
deep beam. The minimum reinforcement rate given in this article for distributed
bars is the minimum quantity required by construction, and the designer should
reasonably select the configuration quantity of distributed bars according to actual
situations.

10.7.14This article gives the general construction stipulations on "short beams" the
parameters of which are between those of deep beams and shallow beams.

10.8Corbel

10.8.1 The load-bearing characteristics of a corbel (short cantilever) can be described by

using the simple truss frame model composed of tie bars formed by horizontal
longitudinal reinforcing bars in the top and concrete diagonal compression bars in
the corbel. The vertical load is borne by the tensioning forces of the horizontal tie
bar and diagonal compression bars; the horizontal tension force acting out of the
top of the corbel is borne by the horizontal tie bars.

It is required that no diagonal cracks in parallel to the direction of the diagonal

compression bar will appear due to relatively large compression force of diagonal
compression bar, so the section size of the corbel often makes it a condition that
no diagonal cracks will occur, i.e., it is controlled by Formula 10.8.1 in this article,
and it considers different crack-resisting requirements for the corbel by
considering different conditions through using the coefficient β. The term
(1-0.5Fhk/F vk) in the formula is determined according to the condition that the
diagonal crack width in the corbel under the joint action of vertical force and
horizontal tension force should not exceed 0.1mm.

The corbel satisfying the requirement set forth in Formula 10.8.1 needs no
shearing bearing capacity check computation any longer because taking a/h0=0.3
when a/h0<0.3 and controlling the minimum reinforcement rate of upper horizontal
steel bars on the corbel can ensure the corbel to have enough shearing bearing
capacity.

Formula 10.8.1 additionally restricts the effective height h0 of the corbel section
0
along the lower pillar edge because when a is larger than 45 , the actual effective
height of the corbel will not further increase with the increase of a.

10.8.2 This article stipulates the computation method of the tension steel bar bearing the
vertical force and the section area of the anchoring steel bar bearing the
horizontal force, which are the same as those in the original code.

316
10.8.3 Compared with the original code, this article more definitely stipulates the
anchorage requirements for stretching the upper longitudinal tension steel bars of
the corbel into the pillar. It also stipulates the construction measures that should
be taken to ensure the top tension steel bars of the corbel and the outer
longitudinal steel bars of the pillar can reliably transfer the force when the corbel
is set on the top of the pillar.

10.8.4 Setting horizontal steel bars in the corbel, especially setting a certain quantity of
horizontal steel bars on the upper part of the corbel, can reduce the possibility for
diagonal cracks to occur in that position too early. Setting a certain quantity of
bent-up steel bars in the corbel is the traditional practice in projects in our country.
However, the test indicates that, it has no obvious action for improvi ng the
shearing bearing capacity of the corbel and for reducing the possibility of diagonal
cracking. It is decided in this revision of the code to retain the practice to arrange
bent-up steel bars in the corbel depending on the construction, but it suitably
reduces the quantity of bent -up steel bars.

10.9Embedded Parts and Hoisting Rings

10.9.1 The engineering practice proves that the computation formula and construction
requirements for anchorage of an embedded member are effective, so this
revision does not modify them.

The shearing bearing capacity of an embedded member bearing the shearing

force has relation to the strength grade of concrete, tension strength of anchor
bar, section area of anchor bar and its diameter. Under the precondition to ensure
the anchoring length of anchor bar and reasonable distance from anchor bar to
edge of the member, this article, according to the testing results, give the
semi-rational and semi-empirical formula to determine the section are of the
anchor bar. This formula considers the influence of the row number of anchor
bars through the coefficient α r and considers the influence of anchor bar diameter
and the ratio of concrete compression strength and anchor bar tension strength
(ƒc/ ƒy) by using the coefficient α v. As for any embedded member bearing normal
tension force, bending deformation generally happen on its steel plates. In this
case, the anchor not only bear the tension force but also bears the shearing force
due to bending deformation of steel plates, as a result, the ancho r bar is under
the action of composite force. The influence of bending deformation of anchor
plate is considered by using the discounting coefficient α b.

According to the testing results, the bearing capacity of anchor bars in the
embedded member bearing both tension force and shearing force and both
tension force and bending moment is processed as per a linear correlation.

According to the testing results, the shear -bending bearing capacity linear
correlation is taken for the embedded member only bearing shearing force and
bending moment when V/Vu0>0.7; when V/Vu0≤0.7, it is processed as per the
irrelevance between the shearing bearing capacity and the bending bearing
capacity. Vu0 is the bearing capacity of the embedded member independently
bearing the shearing force.

317
 As for the embedded member bearing the shearing force, compression force and
bending moment, its anchor bar section area computation formula is on the
reliable side. M-0.4Nz=0 can taken to be approximately as the boundary condition
for computation of compression-shear bearing capacity and
compression-bending-shear bearing capacity when N<0.5ƒcA, so the precondition
of appropriate computation formula in this article is N≤0.5ƒcA.. The coefficient 0.3
in the first term in the right of the inequality 10.9.1-3 in this article reflects the
influence degree of compression force to the shear-resisting capacity of the
embedded member. Compared with the testing results, its value is safer.

As for any embedded member bearing shearing force, normal tension force and
bending moment, the resisting force in the tension force term in the formula of
section area of its anchor bar is multiplied by the discounting coefficient 0.8 in
view of the importance of the embedded member and the complexity of its
load-beari ng situations. However, as for the most unfavorable load-bearing state
(bearing tension force), the measure to improve the safety is taken.

10.9.2 When the shearing force in an embedded member is borne jointly by the straight
anchor bar and bending anchor bars symmetrically placed at the load-bearing
direction, the section area of the required bending anchor bars can be computed
by using the following formula:

Asb≥(1.1V-αv ƒyAs)/0.8ƒy

The above expression means that the force with the shearing force borne by the
straight anchor bar subtracted from the acting shearing force is the shearing force
requiring the bending anchor bar to bear. After adjusting the above expression,
we can obtain Formula 10.9.2 in this article. According to related foreign codes
and the testing results made in China on bending anchor bars in steel and
concrete combined structure, the angle of bending anchor bar has not large
influence to the shearing bearing capacity. In view of the general practice in
projects, the notes in this article indicate that the angle of a bending anchor bar
0
had better be taken to be 15~45 . In the range of this bending angle, the section
area of the anchor bar can be computed by using the above expression without
further discounting the tension strength of the anchor bar. The coefficient 1.1 that
is multiplied by into the acting shearing force term of the above expression is the
reciprocal of the nonuniformity coefficient 0.9 when straight anchor bars and
bending anchor bars jointly work. The embedded member also can have only
bending steel bars set to bear the shearing force, and in this case, straight anchor
bars can be not set or may be set only according to the construction, As in the
formula is taken to be 0.

10.9.3~10.9.6 These articles give the construction requirements for commonly-used

embedded members according to the engineering experience. These
construction stipulations also are the basic precondition of the computation
formula of section area of anchor bar in an embedded member.

10.9.7 When it is surely di fficult to set the anchoring length of the anchor bars in an
embedded member bearing the joint action of tension force, shearing force and
bending moment according to the tension anchorage length set forth in Article
9.3.1 in this code, other effective anc horage measures are allowed to be adopted
for it. When a relatively anchoring length is taken, the parameter ƒy in terms N
and M in the right nominator of Formulas 10.9.1-1 and 10.9.1-2 in Article 10.9.1 of
this code can be replaced by α aƒy, in which α a is the anchorage discounting

318
 coefficient (taken to be the ratio of actual anchoring length and the anchoring
length of tension steel bar stipulated in Article 9.3.1 in this code); the value of α a
should not be less than 0.5 and the anchoring length should not be less than the
anchorage length 15d stipulated in this article for shearing and compression
straight anchor bars. However, this method cannot be used for any embedded
member directly bearing the power action or earthquake effect.

10.9.8 When determining the required area of suspending-ring steel bar, the design
value of tension strength of the steel bar should be multiplied by the discounting
coefficient. Factors to be considered in the discounting coefficient are: breakdown
coefficient of self weight of member (taken to be 1.2), overload coefficient due to
adsorption (taken to be 1.2), discounting coefficient of stress concentration after
bending of steel bar to the strength (taken to be 1.4), power coefficient (taken to
be 1.5), and influence coefficient of wire rope angle to suspending ring bearing
capacity, so when taking the design value of tension strength of HPB235 steel bar
to be ƒy=210N/mm , the allowable stress actually taken for the suspending-ring
2
2
steel bar is 210/(1.2x1.2x1.4x1.5x1.4)=210/4.23≈50N/mm .

10.10 Connection of Prefabricated Members

10.10.1~10.10.6 These articles give some fundamental stipulations on connecting joints

of prefabricated members according to the engineering experiences of our
country. Many years' engineering practices prove that these construction
measures are effective, so they are adopted according to the stipulations in
the original code. The steel bar connection at the assembled monolithic joint
had better adopt the mechanical connection that can reliably transfer forces.
When adopting the welding connection, the unfavorable influence of welding
stress to the joint should be considered.

10.10.7 According to the experimental investigation and engineering practice

experience and with reference to the foreign successful desi gn methods in
similar structures, this article puts forward the supporting measures to
improve the wholeness of prefabricated assembled roof. These measures
include: cancel diagonal smooth edge and single-toothed edge but instead
adopt double-toothed edge or other forms that can effectively transfer the
shearing force; cancel cement mortar but adopt pea gravel concrete with
strength not lower than C20 to grout the edge joint between plates; suitably
increase the width of edge joint and adopt microswelling c oncrete to grout the
joint; configure construction steel bars in the edge joint; reliably connect or
anchor anchorage steel bars stretching out at the end of plate with the
supporting structures around them; additionally set cast-in-situ layer on the
surface of the plate and pave steel bar nets to reinforce the connection
between the plate and surrounding members, etc.. After adopting these
measures, the wholeness of the prefabricated assembled roof can be
obviously strengthened.

319
 11 Aseismic Design of Concrete Structural Member

11.1General Stipulations

11.1.1 Our country is a country where earthquake frequently occurs and aseismic design
should be made for architectures in many regions. Concrete structures are the
structures most widely used in architectures in our country, so the aseismic
design of this kind of structure should be fully thought of.

Chapter 11 of this code mainly stipulates the aseismic bearing capacity

computation and aseismic construction measures for main members in concrete
0 0
structures in those areas with aseismic intensity being 6 ~9 , including frame
beams, frame pillar, beam column node, shearwall and single-stored roof trestle
in reinforced concrete structure as well as prestressed concrete beam. When
performing the aseismic design of a reinforced concrete structure, related
stipulations in existing national standard Code for Aseismic Design of Architecture
(GB50011).

11.1.2 The Code for Aseismic Design of Architecture stipulates that any architecture with
0
aseismic intensity being 6 only needs to satisfy the requirements for aseismic
measures and does not need aseismic check computation of structure. However,
0
as for any high-rise architecture to be built on Class IV environment requiring 6
of aseismic intensity, its earthquake influence coefficient is possibly higher than
0
that of the same structure in Class II environment requiring 7 aseismic intensity,
so it is required that any architecture under such conditions is still subject to the
aseismic check computation of structure and the aseismic bearing capacity
computation of member. For this reason, the stipulations on aseismic bearing
capacity computation that this chapter gives for various structural members
consider the requirement of this situation.

11.1.3 This revision stipulates the maximum practical height of cast-in-situ reinforced
concrete building with different aseismic intensities. The stipulated building height
limit value is the maximum height that the building is allowed to reach when the
aseismic design of this structure complies with related stipulations in the Code for
Aseismic Design of Architectures (GB50011) and the bearing capacity
computation of the structural member and the construction measures satisfy the
requirements in this chapter. When the height of the building to be designed
exceeds the stipulated value in this article, its design method should satisfy the
stipulations in related standards or be determined through a special study.

11.1.4 According to the aseismic intensity, structure type and building height, various
types of aseismic architectures are divided into four aseismic grades: Grade I, II,
III and IV. According to different aseismic grades, appropriate aseismic
performance requirements are suggested for various members in different types
of structures, mainly including extensibility requirements, while also considering
the requirements for energy consumption. The requirements for Grade I aseismic
grade are highest, while Grade IV has the lowest requirements. The difference of
requirements for various aseismic grades mainly lies on the difference value
selection and determination methods of bending moment augmenting coefficient
of pillars and shearwalls in the "Strong pillar and weak girders" measures, the
difference of shearing force augmenting measures for girders, pillars, walls and
nodes in the "Strong shear and weak bending" measures and the difference of
construction measures to ensure the extensible and plastic energy consumption

320
 capacity of various structural members.

The detailed requirements for different aseismic grades are given according to
earthquake risk experience, research findings and engineering experience
obtained in China and foreign countries in many years and with reference to
foreign and domestic related codes.

This revision adds the stipulation on aseismic grades for tube structures into the
aseismic grade table for cast -in-situ reinforced concrete structures.

11.1.5 This article stipulates the shearwall of various structure systems and the height of
the reinforcing part at the bottom floor shearwall in partially frame-supported
shearwall structures. In order to simplify the stipulation, only the height factor is
considered in the stipulation. In addition to stipulating that the height of the
reinforcing position at the bottom can be taken to be 1/8 of the total wall limb
height, this code additionally stipulates that the height of the reinforcing position
in the shearwall of various structure systems must be not less than the height of
two basal layers since the height of reinforcing position of a structure with less
storeys had better be too small. As for the floor shearwall in a partially
frame-supported shearwall structure, it additionally should satisfy the stipulation
that the height o the reinforcing position should not be less than the height of the
two storeys above the frame-supported storey. Additionally, in view of the
characteristics of a high-rise building, this article adds the stipulation that the
height of the reinforcing position at the bottom should not exceed 15m.

11.1.6 The aseismic adjustment coefficient of bearing capacity of various members listed
in Table 11.1.6 is given according to the stipulations in the Code for Aseismic
Design of Architectures (GB50011). The aseismic adjustment coefficient of
bearing capacity of various members listed in the table is based on the
earthquake effect values and earthquake effect breakdown value under
commonly-seen earthquake, which are taken in this code. These coefficients can
be used to work out those adjusted measures to ensure that the bearing capacity
of various members under the common earthquake effect combination reaches a
suitable safety level.

11.1.7 During the acting course of relatively strong earthquake effect, the longitudinal
reinforcing bars in the end sections of girders and pillars and the shearwall limb
bottom sections may alternately bear tension force and compression force.
According to the testing results, the cementing and anchorage performance of the
steel bar with surrounding concrete in this case may more unfavorable that it is
under single tension. Therefore, this article, according to different aseismic
grades, gives the stipulation to increase the tension anchorage length of steel bar.
The lapping length of tension steel bars is accordingly increased.

321
 The longitudinal steel bars in the position where plastic hinges possibly appear on
the basal section of the pillar, pillar end and shearwall limb may have severe
plastic deformation after reaching the yield point and the tension yield and
compression yield may alternately appear and the forces in the plastic hinging
area are relatively complicated, which may cause damage under a strong
earthquake, so it is suggested that various connection joints should avoid the web
reinforcement densifying area. When this area can not be avoided due the
engineering reason, only mechanical connection is allowable for use and strict
quality requirement should be given for such joint, while it is stipulated that the
section area of the steel bars with joint in the same connection segment should
not be larger than 50% of the section area of all steel bars.

11.1.8 The construction requirement for hoops at the end of web reinforcements is the
prerequisite to ensure the web reinforcement to effectively constrain the concrete
core.

11.2 Materials

11.2.1 According to the basic material performance of concrete, this article gives the
restriction conditions for highest and lowest concrete strength grades required by
the aseismic design of members so as to ensure that under the action of the
earthquake force the member has necessary bearing capacity and extendibility. In
recent years in our country a lot of experimental investigations have been
completed for high-strength concrete and some engineering experiences have
also been obtained. Due to the brittleness of high-strength concrete, some
restrictions should be given to the application of high-strength concrete in
high-intensity earthquake area.

11.2.2 The deformation of longitudinal reinforcing bars in structural members directly

affects the extendibility of the structural members under the action of the
earthquake force. This article stipulates that the longitudinal reinforcing bars in
such structural members as frame girder, frame pillar and shearwall requiring
aseismic design had better adopt HRB400 and HRB335 hot -rolled steel bars; the
web reinforcement had better adopt HRB335, HRB400 and HPB235 hot-rolled
steel bars.

11.2.3 As for various frames requiring Grade I and II aseismic design, when adopting
ordinary steel bars, it is required that the strength-yield ratio to be determined
according to the actual strengt h measurements from the longitudinal reinforcing
bar test should not be less than 1.25 so that the structure has enough rotating
capacity when plastic hinge appears in a certain position; meanwhile, it is
required that the ratio between the yield strength measurement of the steel bars
and its standard value should not be larger than 1.3, otherwise such design
requirements as "strong pillar and week girder" and "strong shear and weak
bending" are uneasy to be ensured.

322
 11.3 Frame Girder

11.3.1 The testing data indicates that, under the action of low-cycle repeated load the
bending bearing capacity of normal section of a frame girder is approximate to
that in the first loading, so the bending bearing capacity of normal section under
the earthquake effect combination can be computed by using the static force
formula divided by an appropriate bearing capacity aseismic adjustment
coefficient.

When designing a frame girder, the goal to control the height of concrete
compression area is to control the girder-end plastic hinge area and make it have
a relatively large plastic rotating capacity, so as to ensure that the frame girder
has enough curvature extendibility. According to domestic testing results and with
reference to foreign experiences, when the relative compression area height is
controlled to be 0.25~0.35, the displacement extendibility coefficient of the girder
can reach 3~4. When determining the height of the concrete compression area,
the compression steel bars in the section can be considered.

11.3.2 In the design of frame structure, it should try to form a plastic energy consumption
mechanism focusing on plastic hinge at girder end in the frame under the action
of rare earthquake. This needs to avoid the plastic hinge area at the end of the
girder from happening with brittle shearing failure before sufficient plastic rotation.
For this reason, the "strong shear and weak bending" design concept is put
forward for frame girder.

In order to implement the above requirements, first of all, the augmentation of

bending moment at girder end is considered when determining the design value
0
of shearing force. At the same time, as for various frame requiring 9 aseismic
intensity and the frame structure requiring Grade I aseismic grade, the
overconfiguration of longitudinal tension steel bars at the end of the girder is also
considered in the engineering, and it is required to take the section area and
standard strength value of the actually-configured steel bars for left and right
ends of the girder. The bending moment M bua corresponding to the bending
bearing capacity considering the bearing capacity aseismic adjustment coefficient
can be computed by using the following formula:

M buk 1
M bua = ≈ f yk Asa ( h0 − α ' s )
γ RE γ RE

The design value of any frame girder requiring other aseismic grade should
directly use the balance shearing force of the design value of bending moment at
the girder end and considering the earthquake effect combination, which should
be multiplied by different augmenting coefficients.

11.3.3 As for any frame girder of rectangle, T-shaped or -Ishaped section, the control
condition for section under shear is determined based on the static force shearing
requirements and in consideration of the unfavorable influence of the repeated
load effect. The section control condition also considers the strength influence
coefficient of the concrete of relatively high strength.

323
11.3.4 Domestic and foreign tests on shearing bearing capacity of reinforced concrete
continuous girder and cantilever beam under the action of low -cycle repeated
load indicate that, the action of a low-cycle repeated load reduces the shearing
bearing capacity of diagonal section of the girder; the main reason is that the
shearing strength of the concrete shear -compression area is reduced and the
bonding force of concrete between diagonal crack and the doweling force of
longitudinal steel bars is reduced. The reduction of bearing capacity of web
reinforcement is not obvious. Therefore, this code still use the lower enveloping
curve of the experimental value of total shearing bearing capacity of the section
as the computation standard of the computation formula, in which the value for
concrete is taken to be 60% of the concrete shearing bearing capacity in the
non-aseismic case, while that for web reinforcement does not consider the
reduction of the repeated load. At the same time, in order to be convenient for the
design application, the same aseismic shearing bearing capacity formula is taken
for various aseismic grades.

11.3.5 In order to guarantee the constraint action of frame girder to the frame node, the
section height of the frame girder had better be too small. In order to reduce the
lateral destabilization risk of frame girder under the nonlinear reaction, the
height -width ratio of the section of the girder is restricted.

Since the ability of a girder with the ratio of net span and girder height less than 4
to accommodate a relatively large plastic deformation is relatively poor, this article
restricts the span-height ratio of the frame girder.

11.3.6 This revision of the code increases the minimum reinforcement rate of
longitudinal tension steel bars in a flexural member adopting non-aseismic design
and introduces the characteristic value parameter (ƒt/ƒ y) relating to the design
values of tension strength of concrete and steel bar. Therefore, according to the
different positions of tension steel bars located in the girder and according to
different aseismic grades, the aseismic design gives the stipulation on minimum
reinforcement rate of longitudinal tension steel bars in which different allowance
is reserved for non-aseismic design.

In the web reinforcement densifying area at the end of the girder, the quantity of
lower longitudinal steel bars had better be too less and the section areas of lower
and upper steel bars should meet a certain proportion, considering that a
relatively large positive bending moment may occur at the end of the girder under
a strong earthquake due to the randomicity of earthquake effect and that this
positive bending moment possibly is obviously larger than the positive bending
moment considering the common earthquake effect combination at girder end. if
in the lower part of the girder end there are too few longitudinal steel bars, the
lower steel bars are easy to yield and break too early. Increasing the quantity of
lower longitudinal steel bars at the end of the girder is also helpful to improve the
extendibility of girder -end plastic hinge area under the action of negative bending
moment. The minimum reinforcement rate stipulated in this article for lower steel
bars at the end of the girder is determined according to the testing results and
design experiences in our country and with reference to the stipulations in foreign
codes.

In addition to meeting the computation requirements, the construction

requirements for web reinforcements in the plastic hinge area at the end of the
girder is also very important to the aseismic design of frame girder. This code
stipulates the requirements for the length of web reinforcement densifying area at
the end of the girder, maximum distance of web reinforcement and minimum

324
 diameter of web reinforcement, the goal of which is to set constructional
constraint to the compression concrete in the plastic hinge area of the frame
girder and to constrain the longitudinal compression steel bars, avoiding them
from yielding too early after the concrete of the protective layer is peeled off and
ensuring that the plastic hinge at the girder end has enough rotating ability.

11.3.7~11.3.9 Since the inflecture point of the frame girder may change during the ac ting
process of earthquake, a certain quantity of full-long steel bars should be set
along the whole length of the girder. The term "full-long" here means that the part
of steel bars in various positions of the girder is ensured to take full use of their
tension bearing capacity.

Since the girder-end web reinforcements are too dense so as to be difficult for
construction, this revision suitably softens the stipulation on web reinforcement
limb distance in the length range of web reinforcement densifying area of the
girder, while considering the correlation between web reinforcement diameter and
limb distance.

In the local revision for the original code in 1993, the reinforcement rate of web
reinforcements along the whole length of the girder, ρ sv, is interpreted as "the
frame girder mainly bearing the earthquake effect" should satisfy the stipulation
on reinforcement rate ρ sv". Since this stipulation is not very definite in concept,
this code stipulates that the reinforcement rate ρ sv of web reinforcements along
the whole length of the girder should satisfy the requirements set forth in the code
and its value should be suitably increased based on the non-aseismic design
requirement.

11.4Frame Pillar and Frame Support

11.4.1 The frame pillar considering earthquake effect adopts the same method as that
for the frame girder for normal section computation, i.e. the computation methods
for eccentric compression and eccentric tension bearing capacity of normal
section of such frame pillar are the same as those for frame pillars not
considering the effect of earthquake, but the right of the computation formula
should be divided by the bearing capacity aseismic adjustment coefficient.

11.4.2 Due to bearing the axial compression force, the extendibility of the frame pillar is
generally smaller than that of a girder, so if not taking the "strong pillar and weak
girder" measure, at the pillar end there not only may appear plastic hinge but also
possibly appear too large plastic rotation, and the "pillar hinge mechanism" of
plastic hinge even may appear on the upper and lower end of various pillars in
the same layer simultaneously. Therefore, in the design of frame pillar,
purposively increasing the design value of bending moment at pillar end and
reducing the yield possibility of pillar is the key measure to ensure the aseismic
safety of the frame.

Because the bending moment augmenting measures for pillar given in the
original code are on the unreliable side, this revision suitably increases the
bending moment augmenting coefficient of pillars requiring various aseismic
grades. However, Mbua and adjusted pillar-end bending moment for frame pillar
requiring 80 aseismic intensity are not determined as per the section area of
actual web reinforcements at the end of the beam but determined by using the
design value of girder -end bending moment considering the earthquake effect

325
 multiplied by an augmenting coefficient, so when the actual steel bars quantity at
the end of the girder is much more than the computed quantity due to the
constructional reason, the pillar bending moment augmenting coefficient to
implement the "strong pillar and weak girder" measure should take the value that
is further suitably increased.

Since the inflecture point of design value of bending moment in the pillar at the
bottom of a high -rise architecture is possibly not in the storey height range of the
pillar, the design value of the pillar-end bending moment can be taken to be the
product of the design value of the bending moment considering the earthquake
effect combination multiplied by a augmenting coefficient.

11.4.3 In order to postpone the appearance of plastic hinge on the section at the lower
end of the bottom-layer pillar of a frame structure, the upper -end section of the
top pillar of the frame-supported pillar and the low er-end section of the
bottom-layer pillar, the method to multiply by the augmenting coefficient is
adopted to determine the design value of bending moment of the pillar at this
position, so as o increase the bearing capacity of its normal section.

11.4.4 Since the pillar bending moment augmenting measure stipulated in our country's
design code only can moderately postpone the appearance of the pillar -end
plastic hinge but cannot avoid its appearance, the "strong shear and weak
bending" requirement also should be imposed for the pillar end so as to ensure
that no shear failure will appear in the pillar-end plastic hinge area before the
pillar-end plastic hinge reaches the expected plastic rotation. As for various frame
structures requiring 90 aseismic intensity and frame structures requiring Grade I
aseismic grade, the actual bar arrangement situation of longitudinal steel bars at
the end of the pillar and the standard value of material strength are considered

1
and it is required taking the bending moment Mcua , M cua = M cuk .Mcuk
γ RE

corresponding to the aseismic bending bearing capacity of normal section

considering the bearing capacity aseismic adjustment coefficient. Mcuk is the
standard value of bending bearing capacity of normal section of the pillar and is
computed by taking the section area and material strength of acturally-configured
steel bars and using the related formula in Chapter 7.

The bending bearing capacity Mcuk of normal section of the end of the large
eccentric compression pillar with symmetric bar arrangement and of rectangle
section while considering bearing capacity aseismic adjustment coefficient can be
computed by using the following formulas:

According to the condition ∑x=0, the following formula is obtained:

N=( γ 1 )α 1ƒcb x)
RE

According to the condition ∑m=0, the following formula is obtained:

'
Ne=N[ηei+0.5(h 0-α x)]

326
 =( γ 1RE )[α1ƒ ckbx(h0-0.5x)+ƒ' ykA s (h 0-a' s)]
a'

Cancel the term x in the above two expressions and take h=h0+a s and as=a' s, and
the following formula can be obtained:

γ RE N
Mcua= ( γ 1RE )[0.5λRENh( 1 − )+ƒ'yk Asa ' (h0-a' s )]
α 1 f ck bh

Where,

N Design value of axial compression force of pillar considering the

earthquake effect combination;

ƒck Standard value of axial compression strength of concrete;

ƒ' yk Standard strength value of ordinary compression steel bar;

a'
A s Section area of actually configured ordinary compression steel
bar;

As for the frame pillar of other bar arrangement mode or section shape, their Mcua
can be determined with reference to the above method.

11.4.5~11.4.6In order to ensure that the frame-supported pillar can bear a certain
quantity of earthquake shearing force, these articles stipulate the condition that
the frame-supported pillar should satisfy for bearing minimum earthquake
shearing force. Meanwhile, they stipulates that the additional axial force caused
by the earthquake effect to the frame-supported pillar requiring Grade I or II
aseismic grade should be multiplied by the augmenting coefficient so as to
guarantee the compression bearing capacity of the frame-supported pillar.

11.4.7 Since all previous strength earthquakes had done relatively severe harm to frame
corner pillars and moreover, the corner pillar bears the unfavorable influence from
torsion shear and two-way shear, in the design the design values of its bending
moment and shearing force should be taken to be the adjusted bending moment
and shearing force design values multiplied by an augmenting coefficient not less
than 1.1.

11.4.8 This article stipulates the upper limit value of shearing bearing capacity of a frame
pillar, i.e. giving the section size restriction condition according to the shearing
requirement. This value is obtained based on the non-aseismic shearing
requirements and considering the influence of the repeated load.

11.4.9 The domestic test on shearing bearing capacity in the plastic hinge area of an
eccentric compression pillar under the action of a repeated load indicates that the
shearing bearing capacity of a member under the action of a repeated load is
about 10~30% lower than that of under the action of a single load, mainly
because that the repeated load can reduce the shearing bearing capacity of
concrete. Therefore, according to the processing principle the same as that for
frame girder, this article gives the shearing bearing capacity formula of the frame
pillar the aseismic shearing bearing capacity of concrete in which is equivalent to
60% of the concrete shearing bearing capacity under non-aseismic situation, the

327
 web reinforcement shearing bearing capacity has no reduction in comparison with
that in the non-aseismic situation and considering the earthquake effect
combination.

10.4.10When tension force appears on the frame pillar, the computation of bearing
capacity of diagonal section considers the unfavorable action of the tensioning
force.

10.4.11 This article gives the reasonable section size restriction condition according to the
aseismic performance consideration.

10.4.12The minimum reinforcement rate of longitudinal steel bars in a frame pillar is the
important control index in the engineering. This revision suitably increases the
minimum reinforcement rate of longitudinal reinforcing bar in the frame pillar.
Meanwhile, since the high-strength concrete has unfavorable influence to the
aseismic performance of pillars, this code stipulates that the minimum
reinforcement rate for concrete with strength higher than C60 should be
increased by 0.1; that for HRB400 steel bars should be reduced by 0.1. However,
in order to avoid that the steel bars placed on each side are too less, the
reinforcement rate of steel bars on each side should be not less than 0.2.

In order to improve the extendibility of the pillar -end plastic hinge area, provide
constrain to the concrete, avoid compression yield of longitudinal steel bars and
ensure the shearing bearing capacity, this article stipulates the maximum interval
and minimum diameter of web reinforcements in the web reinforcement
densifying area at the upper and lower end of the pillar.

10.4.13In order to avoid configuring too many longitudinal steel bars, this article
stipulates the maximum reinforcement of all longitudinal reinforcing bars of the
frame pillar according to the engineering experience.

The test on short pillar with the ratio of net height of pillar and section height
being 3~4 indicates that, the cementing shear failure and digonal diagonal -pull
shear failure are easy to occur in such frame pillar. In order to reduce such brittle
failure, the reinforcement rate of longitudinal steel bars in such pillar had better be
not too large. Therefore, the reinforcement rate of longitudinal tension steel bars
on each side of a frame pillar requiring Grade I aseismic grade and with
shear-span ratio not larger than 2 is stipulated to be not larger than 1.2%. No
stipulation is given for other aseismic grade, but their reinforcement rate had
better be suitably controlled.

11.4.14~11.4.15 The length of web reinforcement at the end of a frame pillar is

determined by suitably augmenting the length of the pillar-end plastic hinge area
obtained according to the test and earthquake risk. In this length range, the web
reinforcements should be densified. Meanwhile, these articles also stipulate the
web reinforcement limb distance so as to improve the constraint effect of web
reinforcements in the plastic hinge area to the concrete.

11.4.16 Domestic and foreign experimental investigation indicates that when the axial
compression force increases the displacement extendibility of the compression
member accordingly decreases. In order to satisfy the displacement extendibility
requirement of different frame pillar and frame-supported pillar of different
structure types under the earthquake effect combination, this chapter stipulates
the axle load ratio limit value for pillars in different structure systems.

328
 In the structure design, the axle load ratio directly affects the section size of a
pillar. Based on the limit value of the original code, this revision suitably adjust the
limit value for different structure systems. Since the frame ~ shearwall structure
and tube type structure bear horizontal earthquake force mainly depending on
shearwall and inner tube, the axle load ratio reflection the extendibility
requirement of the frame as the second defense line can be moderately widened;
however as for any frame-supported pillar in a frame-supported shearwall
structure, the extendibility requirement and the axle load ratio must be improved.

The domestic and foreign experimental investigat ions in recent years indicate that
such methods as increasing the reinforcement rate of pillar, using composite web
reinforcement, spiral reinforcement and continuous composite rectangle spiral
reinforcement, and setting rectangle core pillar in the section all can improve the
displacement extendibility of the pillar. The reason is that composite web
reinforcement, spiral reinforcement and continuous composite rectangle spiral
reinforcement strengthen the constraint of web reinforcement to the concrete,
improve the tension strength of core concrete of the pillar and increase its limit
compression strain, and therefore improve the extendibility and energy
consumption ability. Setting rectangle core pillar in the section of a pillar not only
increases the compression bearing capacity of the pillar but also can improve the
deformation ability of the pillar, and moreover, this is helpful to avoid collapse due
to giant deformation. To some degree, it is similar to the effect of the profile steel
in the concrete st ructure adopting profile steels. Therefore, this revision of the
code considers these effective measures to improve the extendibility of the pillar,
and suitably softens the limit value of axle load ratio of the pillar while not
reducing the extendibility requirement of the pillar in principle. However, the
minimum volumetric reinforcement rate of its web reinforcement densifying area
should satisfy the reinforcement rate of web reinforcements of softened axle load
ratio.

0
As for any common architectures re quiring 6 aseismic intensity, this code allows
not performing section aseismic check computation for them, and the axial force
in the computation of axle load ratio can be taken to be the design value of the
axial force without earthquake effect combination; as for any high-rise
0
architecture requiring 6 aseismic intensity and to be built on Class IV site, the
axle load ratio computation in the aseismic design should adopt the design value
of axial force considering the earthquake effect combination.

11.4. 17 In order to increase the constraint action of web reinforcements in pillar -end
densifying area to the concrete, this article stipulates its minimum volumetric
reinforcement rate. This revision gives the characteristic value of minimum
reinforcement rate of web reinforcements with axle load ratio between 0.3 and
1.05, and then computes the minimum volumetric reinforcement rate of web
reinforcements by using the formula ρ v= λvƒc/ ƒyv, so as to consider the influence of
concrete of different strength grade and the influence of steel bar of different
grade.

11.4.18 This article stipulates the web reinforcement configuration requirement for web
reinforcement non-densifying area of a frame pillar.

11.5Hinged Trestle Stand Pillar

11.5.1~11.5.2 The domestic earthquake hazard investigation indicates that at corbels

329
 are often damaged at the pillar top of roof truss or the junction of roof girder and
the pillar of a single-storey workshop and at the unction of high-low span
workshop and the earthquake hazard often happened at the position of the upper
and lower pillars where the sections vary (at the root of the upper pillar) for a
steplike pillar and the junction position with the upper wing edge of the crane
girder. In order to avoid the shearing failure from occurring in the above segments
of a trestle stand pillar and to make the trestle stand pillar have sufficient
extendibility after the plastic hinge is formed, the web reinforcements in these
segments should be densified. Any hinged trestle stand having web
reinforcements configured according to this construction requirement can not take
computation of aseismic shearing bearing capacity.

According to the load-bearing characteristics of the trestle stand structure, there

is no need to consider the "strong pillar and weak girder" measure and the
"strong shear and weak bending" measure for a trestle stand structure. If any
working platform is set or in other special cases, the shearing bearing capacity of
diagonal section may play a control role in the hinged trestle stand pillar with
relatively small shear-span ratio. In this case, an aseismic shearing bearing
capacity can be performed by using Formula 11.4.9 in this code.

11.5.3 The earthquake hazard investigation indicates that the trestle stand pillar chapiter
with the highest damage frequency is the pillar the lateral deformation of which is
restricted, such as the pillars near the living room of penthouse, or the pillar with
transverse bulkhead. Such situation changes the side displacement rigidity of the
pillar and makes the chapiter under the load-bearing state of a short pillar.
Because the side displacement rigidity of such pillar is larger than that of various
adjacent pillars, when the roof bearing horizontal earthquake action wholly
side-sifts, such pillar actually bears a horizontal shearing force much larger than
that of various adjacent pillars so that a shearing failure occurs on the pillar top.
The testing results on aseismic performance at connecting node of roof truss and
pillar top indicate that, different pillar top connection modes only affect the
extendibility of the node but does not affect the shearing bearing capacity of the
pillar chapiter; the size of embedded steel plate on the pillar top and its position
on the pillar top have a certain influence on the horizontal bearing capacity. When
the length of the embedded steel plate is equal to the section height of the pillar,
the horizontal shearing bearing capacity approximately is 1.65 times of the halve
of the section height. Therefore, this article stipulates the requirements for the
length of the embedded steel plate and for the straight anchor bars. The testing
results additionally indicate that the axial force eccentric distance at the horizontal
shear direction also has influence to the shearing bearing capacity, which is
required not being larger than h/4. when h/6≤e0≤h/4, it is generally required
setting four limbs of hoops on the pillar chapiter and different volumetric hoop
arrangement rates should be stipulated according to different aseismic grades, so
as to satisfy the shearing bearing capacity requirements.

11.5.4 The pillar corbel (pillar shoulder girder) in a unequal-height workshop to support
the low-span roof also is one of the positions suffering severe earthquake hazard.
The frequently-seen hazard is that the corbel supporting the low span is
tensioned broken. The testing results and engineering practice prove that in order
to improve the ability of a corbel and shoulder girder to resist the horizontal
earthquake effect, some horizontal anchor bars can be set under its top steel
blocks so as to directly bear and transfer the horizontal force; this is a relatively
good construction measure. The section area of longitudinal tension steel bars to
bear vertical force and that of the horizontal anchor bars to bearing horizontal
tension force should be computed still by using Formula 10.8.2; their anchorage
length and anchorage construction can be taken according to the stipulations in

330
 Section 10.8 of this code but l a should be replaced with the aseismic anchorage
length l aE of tension steel bars.

11.6Nodes of Frame Beam/Pillar and Embedded Parts

11.6.1~11.6.2 The earthquake hazard analysis indicates that under the action of
earthquake effect of different intensity, the damage degree of the node of
reinforced concrete frame is different. Any node not designed according to the
0
aseismic requirement may suffer less damage under the action of 7 earthquake;
0
under the action of 8 earthquake, part of nodes, especially the corner pillar
nodes, may suffer different degrees of damage; when the earthquake intensity
0
reaches 9 , most of frame nodes may be severely damaged. Therefore, different
aseismic shearing bearing capacity requirements should be set for nodes so that
they can satisfy the plastic rotation requirements for the girder end connecting it
and the pillar-end plastic hinge area. These articles stipulate that any frame node
requiring Grade I and II aseismic grade must be subject to aseismic shearing
bearing capacity computation, while any frame nodes requiring Grade III or IV can
be configured with construction web reinforcements according to related
stipulations without taking aseismic shearing bearing capacity computation any
longer.

As for the junction nodes of longitudinal and transverse frames, computation can
be made as per their respective directions.

The shearing force that the earthquake effect produces to the node has relation
to the extendibility and energy consumption degree of the frame. As for various
0
frames with high extendibility requirement and requiring 9 aseismic intensity and
any frame structures requiring Grade I aseismic grade, since plastic hinges
already appear at the girder end on the side edge of the node, the shearing force
of the node should be decided completely depending on the yield bending
moment at the girder end, and in the computation of its shearing force design
value, the girder-end bending moment should be taken to be the bending moment
corresponding to the actual aseismic bending bearing capacity.

11.6.3~11.6.6 The purpose for these articles to stipulate the section restriction
conditions for nodes is to avoid the concrete at the node from being firstly
crushed and failed due to the concrete in the core area bearing too high diagonal
compress stress due to too small node section.

The aseismic shearing bearing capacity of a frame node includes two parts:
shearing bearing capacity of concrete diagonal -compression bar and shearing
bearing capacity of horizontal web reinforcements.

According to the test, the section area of the concrete diagonal -compression bar
in the core area of the node can slightly increase when the axial force at the end
of the pillar increases so that when the shearing force at the node is relatively
small, the increase of pillar-axle compression force is somewhat favorable to the
aseismic performance of the node; however, when the shearing force of the node
is relatively large, since the diagonal compression stress in the concrete in the
core area is already very high, the increase of the axle compression force instead
will produce unfavorable influence to the aseismic performance of the node. In
view f the above factors, this revision moderately reduces the favorable action of
axle compression force.

331
 When the node has girders at two orthogonal directions , the constraint to
concrete in the core area is increased, which therefore improves the shearing
bearing capacity of the node. However, if the section of the girders at the two
directions is relatively small, its constraint influence will be not ob vious. Therefore,
it is stipulated that only when there are girders at two orthogonal directions and
the girder width and height can satisfy a certain requirement and there is a
cast-in-situ plate, can the constraint influence of the girders and the cast-in-situ
plate to the node be considered, and the aseismic shearing bearing capacity of
the node should be multiplied by a constraint coefficient larger than 1.0. As for
any intermediate node, edge node and corner node with relatively small girder
section or with orthogonal girders only at one direction, the constraint influence of
the girder to the node will not be considered.

According to foreign data, the aseismic shearing bearing capacity computation

method is given for the node of a frame of cylinder section.

11.6.7 This article modifies and supplements the bar arrangement and construction
stipulations for aseismic frame nodes as follows:

1. The recent full-size node tests made in China indicate that, when the
non-elastic deformation is relatively large, it is still unavoidable that the yield
area of steel bars at the girder end penetrates to the node and the girder-bar
cementing degradation and slippage through the node are sharpened so as
to make the frame rigidity and energy consumption performance further
degraded. This conclusion is consistent with the foreign testing result.
Therefore, it is required that the diameter of each piece of girder bar through
the node had better be not larger than 1/20 of the section height of the pillar.
Meanwhile, this article supplements the condition to restrict the ratio of
longitudinal bar diameter of cylinder node and the throughout length.

2. As for any upper girder steel bars stretching in to the end node of the
intermediate layer of the frame, the original code suggests that when the
horizontal anchorage length is insufficient, more transverse short bar
0
reinforcements can be set in the inner side of the 90 bending arc. The
domestic recent test proves that such steel bars only can bring into partial
play when relatively large cementing slippage occurs on the horizontal
anchoring segment, so they are cancelled. Additionally, the recent domestic
test proves that the horizontal anchoring length equal to 0.4l aE can satisfy the
bearing capacity and rigidity requirements for as eismic anchorage end, so the
horizontal anchorage length is changed from not less than 0.45laE to not less
than 0.4l aE.

3. At the intermediate node of the top layer, the plastic hinge is allowable to and
very possibly appear at the pillar end (because the axle compression of the
upper end of intermediate pillar in the top layer is small but its bending
moment is relatively large). Therefore, according to domestic testing results
obtained recently, this article gives the stipulation on pillar bar anchorage at
the intermediate node in the top layer, requiring that the longitudinal steel
bars of the pillar had better be stretched into the pillar top; when adopting the
straight anchoring mode, the length starting from the bottom edge of the
girder should reach laE; when the straight anchorage length is insufficient, it is
required stretching the longitudinal steel bars into the pillar top and after
meeting 0.5laE, bending inward for 12d; when the floor plate is made of
cast-in-situ concrete, the concrete strength grade is not lower than C20 and
the plate thickness is not smaller than 80mm, the steel bars can be inward
bent.

332
333
 The recent domestic test on intermediate nodes of top layer proves that, the
upper girder bars through the intermediate nodes in the top layer is easier for
cementing degradation and slippage than the upper girder bars through the
intermediate node in the intermediate layer, which will, when the non-elastic
deformation of the structure due to earthquake is relatively large, obviously
reduce the energy consumption ability of the node area. Therefore, this code
adopts the method with higher requirement than that for intermediate node in
intermediate layer to restrict the diameter of steel bar.

4. According to the domestic testing results on aseismic performance of end

node in full -size top layer, this article gives appropriate construction measures
for the end node in top layer. When the upper longitudinal steel bars of the
girder are lap-connected with the longitudinal steel bars in the outer side of
the pillar at the node, two practices are given for use by engineering
designers. The first practice is to stretch the upper steel bars of the pillar to
the outside of the node, bend them downward to the lower edge of the girder,
while stretch pillar bars not less than 65% of pillar bars in the outer side to the
pillar top and horizontally stretch them into the upper edge of the girder. The
lapping length of the broken-line segment from the lower edge of the girder
via the outer edge of the node to the inside of the girder should not be less
than 1.5l aE. Here, the steel bars are 100% lapped. The reason why the
lapping length is small is that all lapping steel bars in the girder pillar have a
900 bending in the lapping length range and this bending plays an important
role for bringing the force transfer action of the lapping into effective play.
With this lapping method, the negative bending moment plastic hinge at the
node will appear at the end of the pillar. In the lapping method, the girder bar
is not stretched into the pillar, favorable for construction. The other practice is
to stretch the outside pillar bar to the pillar top, horizontally bent inward for no
less than 12d, stretch the upper longitudinal bars of the pillar to the outside of
the node and then bend downward, cut the steel bars after these steel bars
and outside steel bars of the pillar form a sufficient straight lapping length.
The test proves that the straight lapping length in this method should be taken
to be not less than 1.7l aE. The advant age of this solution is that the quantity of
horizontal longitudinal steel bars in the pillar top is relatively less (there only
are girder bars), so convenient for up-down concrete grouting. The anchorage
method in the node between inside pillar bars and lower girder bars at end
node of the top layer is the same as that at the intermediate node of the top
layer. It should be additionally stressed that at the end node of the top layer,
the same anchorage method as that at the end node in the intermediate layer
for upper girder bars can not be adopted because this practice cannot satisfy
the aseismic bending bearing capacity requirement at the end node of the top
layer.

11.6.8 This article stipulates the maximum web reinforcement interval in the core area of
the node, minimum web reinforcement diameter, bar arrangement characteristic
value of web reinforcement at the node and the minimum reinforcement rate. The
purpose of this stipulation is to constructionally ensure to provide necessary
constraint for the core area of the node when the shear-compression rate of the
core area under action of earthquake and vertical load is on the low side and to
make the node keep basic shear resistance in any unexpected unfavorable case.

11.6.9 The test on repeated load for embedded part indicates that the mean reduction
value of shearing bearing capacity of anchor bar under bending-shear,
tension-shear and compression-shear situations is about 20%. As for any
embedded part, it is stipulated to taken λR E to be 1.0, so the section area of

334
 anchor bar of an embedded part considering the earthquake effect combination
should be 25% larger the computed value in Chapter 10 of this code. The
construction requirement is that a piece of enclosed web reinforcement with
diameter not less than 10mm should be set around the anchor bar near the
anchor plate, so as to constrain the end concrete and improve the shearing
bearing capacity.

11.7 Shearwall

11.7.1 The experimental investigation on shearwall structures indicates that, the

compression bearing capacity of the normal section of a large-eccentricity
compression shearwall under the action of repeated load is approximate to that
under the action of a single load. Therefore, the normal-section aseismic bearing
capacity and the local compression bearing capacity of the shearwall considering
the earthquake effect combination are computed still by using related formulas in
Chapter 7 of this code, but the computed result should be multiplied by an
appropriate bearing capacity aseismic adjustment coefficient.

11.7.2 This code stipulates that the design value of the bending moment of wall limb
section combination of a shearwall requiring Grade I aseismic grade should be
adjusted, the purpose of which is to utilize bar arrangement to force the plastic
hinge area located at the bottom of the wall limb. In the past, it was required that
the design value of bending moment of the shearwall limb section combination
above the reinforcing position at the bottom should linearly vary. This practice will
increase the bending moment of a part of shearwall section of a relatively high
building too much. In order to simplify the design, this revision stipulates that the
design value of bending moment of the reinforcing position of the bottom and the
upper layer should be taken to be the design value of the combined bending
moment of the wall bottom section, while that for other position is taken to be the
design value of combined bending moment of the wall limb section multiplied by
the augmenting coefficient 1.2.

11.7.3 According to the req uirement of "strong shear and weak bending" for shearwall,
the design value of shearing force of the reinforcing position at the bottom should
0
be increased. As for 9 aseismic intensity, in addition to considering the bending
moment augmenting coefficient, the ratio of bending moment Mwus
corresponding to the bending bearing capacity when plastic hinge appears at the
bottom of the wall and the design value of bending moment to augment the
design value of shearing force. As for any case with different aseismic grade but
0
not 9 aseismic intensity, the design value of shearing force of the reinforcing
position at the bottom is taken to be the design value V of the shearing force
under the earthquake effect combination multiplied by a different augmenting
coefficient.

11.7.4 The shearing bearing capacity of shearwall should have an upper limit value. The
shearwall shearing bearing capacity tests in and out of China indicate that, when
the shear-span ratio λ is larger than 2.5, the upper limit of shearing bearing
capacity of most of walls is approximate 0.25ƒc bh 0; under the action of a repeated
load, it should be considered to reduce the upper limit of shearing bearing
capacity by 20%.

11.7.5 The comparison on shearing bearing capacities of shearwall under the action of

335
 repeated load and a single load indicates that, the shearing bearing capacity
under repeated load is 15~20% lower than that under a single load. Therefore,
after multiplied by the coefficient 0.8, the computation of aseismic shearing
bearing capacity is used as the formula for computing the shearing bearing
capacity of normal section of eccentric compression shearwall, which is used in
the aseismic design. There is lack of experimental investigation for shearing
bearing capacity under the action of high axle compression force, the formula
gives necessary restriction for favorable action of axle compression force, i.e.
taking N=0.2ƒ cbh when N>0.2ƒ c bh.

11.7.6 No test is carried out for aseismic shearing bearing capacity of an eccentric
tension shearwall. This article, according to the load-bearing characteristics and
wither reference to the computation formula of shearing bearing capacity of
eccentric compression shearwall, gives the formula of aseismic bearing capacity
of eccentric tension shearwall.

11.7.7 The quantity of vertical steel bars configured in the horizontal construction joint
should satisfy the shearing requirement. The requirements in this article are given
according to the shear-friction theory for horizontal joint and the experimental
investigation on slippage issues of shearwall construction joint and with reference
to related foreign codes.

11.7.8 The bearing capacity and extendibility of multi-limb shearwall have close relation
to those of a hole-mouth connecting beam. In order to avoid that the continuous
girder after failure due to shear causes the extendibility reduction of the shearwall.
It is stipulated that any connecting beam with span-height ratio larger than 2.5
must satisfy the aseismic shearing bearing capacity requirement in addition to
satisfying the requirement for aseismic bearing capacity of normal section. As for
the connecting beam with span-height ratio not larger than 2.5, the present
experimental investigation achievements are not sufficient, so its computation and
construction requirements can temporarily adopt a special standard.

The test indicates that, setting diagonal-crossing steel bars in a hole-mouth

connecting beam in a shearwall has obvious effect for improving the aseismic
performance of the connecting beam. As for any tube type structure requiring
Grade I or II aseismic grade, when the span -height of the connecting beam is not
larger than 2.0 and it section width is not less than 400mm, some
diagonal-crossing embedded pillar reinforcements had better be set and all
shearing force is borne by the embedded pillar; as for any ordinary shearwall
requiring Grade I or II aseismic grade, when the span-height ratio of the
connection beam is not larger than 2.0, some diagonal-crossing construction bars
also can be set to improve the shear resistance of the connecting beam.

11.7.9 In order to ensure the bearing capacity of the shearwall and its lateral stability
requirements, appropriate stipulation on shearwall thickness for various structure
systems are given in this article.

The normal-section load-bearing performance, deformation ability and lateral

stability of any shearwall with end pillar or wing wall at the end are much poorer
than those of the shearwall with end pillar or wing wall at then end; the test
indicates that the limit displacement will be one half lower and the energy
consumption ability will be about 20% lower. Therefore, this revision moderately
increase the wall thickness of the bottom reinforcing position of a shearwall
without end pillar or wing wall at the wall end and requiring Grade I or II aseismic
grade, and stipulates that the wall thickness should not be less than 1/12 of the

336
storey height.

337
11.7.10In order to improve the lateral stability and bending bearing capacity of the
shearwall, this article stipulates that when the shearwall thickness is larger than
140mm, two rows of steel bars should be adopted for it.

11.7.11According to the experimental investigation and the design experience and with
reference to stipulations in related foreign codes, this article stipulates the limit
value of the minimum reinforcement rate for horizontal and vertical distributed
bars according to different structure systems and different aseismic grades. This
revision moderately increases the minimum reinforcement rate of distributed bars
in a shearwall. It is taken to be 0.25 for frame-shearwall structure.

11.7.12~11.7.16 The test indicates that, the plastic deformation ability of a shearwall
under the action of a repeated load is in relation to the web reinforcement of
longitudinal steel bars on the section, scope of end boundary member,
distribution of longitudinal steel bars and web reinforcements in boundary
member at the end, section shape, axle load ratio of section and other factors,
while the axle load ratio of wall limb is the more important influence factor. When
the axle load ratio is relatively small, even not setting constraint boundary
member at the end of the wall, the shearwall also can have relatively good
extendibility and energy consumption ability; when the axle load ratio exceeds a
certain value, the extendibility and energy consumption ability of the shearwall
without constraint boundary member will reduce. Therefore, as for the shearwall
in various structure systems requiring Grade I or II aseismic grade, a limit value of
wall limb axle load ratio under the action of typical gravity load is stipulated for the
bottom reinforcing position where the plastic hinge may appear.

In order to ensure the extendibility and energy consumption ability of the plastic
hinge area at the bottom of shearwall limb, it is stipulated that when Grade I or II
aseismic grade is required and the axle load ratio of the area with plastic hinge
possible appearing at the bottom of the shearwall is relatively large, sufficient
constraint should be offered to for the concrete at both ends of the wall limb
through constraining the boundary member. And as for other positions of the wall
limb and the shearwall limb requiring Grade III or IV aseismic grade, moderate
constraint can be offered for the concrete at both ends of the wall limb through
the boundary member.

Since the corner of the inner tube or the core tube is under a more unfavorable
stage at where there is diagonal earthquake force, the sizes of the boundary
constraint members at its four corners should be larger than those for common
wall limbs and the constraint that the web reinforcement provides also should be
stronger.

11.7.17 The shearwall with frame is the main member to resist lateral force in a
frame-shearwall structure and it bears most of the earthquake effect. In order to
ensure its extendibility and bearing capacity, this article stipulates the section size
of the edge frame pillar and the edge frame girder and gives the construction
measures for surrounding of the wall body and the hole mouth.

11.8 Structural member of Prestressed Concrete

338
11.8.1 The original code does not mention the application of prestressed concrete
structures in earthquake area. According to the study made on aseismic
performance of prestressed structure in recent years and the investigation on
earthquake hazard, it is proven that, as soon as the design of the prestressed
concrete structure is appropriate, it still can obtain good aseismic performance.
As soon as the prestressed concrete structure adopts part of prestressed
concrete, selects reasonable prestress strength ratio and construction; thinks
highly of the conceptual design; takes measures to ensure extendibility and
elaborately construct, it can be used in the earthquake area. Therefore, this
revision adds the design content for aseismic prestressed structural members
and stipulates that the prestressed concrete structures can be applied for the
0 0 0
areas with 6 , 7 or 8 aseismic intensity. Because in the area of 90 aseismic
intensity the earthquake reaction is intense, the application of prestressed
structures should be thoroughly considered. When it is necessary to adopt
0
prestressed concrete members in a 9 earthquake area, a dedicated study should
be performed and some effective measures should be taken to ensure that the
structure has necessary extendibility.

11.8.2 A frame girder is the main load-bearing member of a frame structure and it should
be ensured that it has necessary bearing capacity and extendibility. Meanwhile,
the test indicates that the mixed bar arrangement method to set a certain quantity
of non-prestressed steel bars in a prestressed concrete frame girder can
obviously improve the crack distribution and improve the bearing capacity and
extendibility. Therefore, this article stipulates that the frame girder in an
earthquake area had better adopt post-tensioned cementing prestressing tendons
while configuring a certain quantity of non -prestressing tendons.

11.8.3 In order to guarantee the extendibility requirement of prestressed concrete frame

girder in the aseismic design, according to the experimental investigation result, a
certain restriction should be given for the height x of the relative compression
area of the concrete section in the girder and the reinforcement rate of
longitudinal tension steel bars. The limit value of reinforcement rate of longitudinal
steel bars is obtained according to the computation results of design value of
tension strength of HRB400 steel bars; when adopting HRB335, its limit value
can be softened to 3.0%.

11.8.4 The prestress-strength ratio has an important influence on the aseismic

performance of the frame girder. The selection of this ratio should depend on the
actual engineering condition and fully consider the requirements for the
application stage and the aseismic performance. As for the application stage, it is
better for this ratio to be larger; as for aseismic performance, the value of this
ratio had better be not too large. The study indicates that when the
prestress-strength ratio is moderate (0.5~0.7), the aseismic performance of the
girder is relatively well coordinational to its application performance. Therefore, it
is suggested that this value should not be larger than 0.55 for Grade I aseismic
grade and not larger than 0.75 for Grade II or III aseismic grade. The
requirements in this article are obtained when the relative compression area
height, reinforcement rate, area (A s, A's) of non-prestressed bars are satisfied.

11.8.5 In the web reinforcement densifying area of the girder end, the section area of the
lower longitudinal non-prestressing tendons at the girder end and that of the
upper non-prestressing tendons should satisfy a certain proportion. The reason is
the same as that for non-prestressed aseismic frame. The stipulation on limit

339
value of area ratio of lower and upper non-prestressing tendons at the end of
prestressed concrete frame girder is determined after a comprehensive analysis
with reference to the present experimental investigation and the stipulations
relating to reinforced concrete frame girder in this code.

340
 Appendix A Computation of Plain Concrete Structural
Member

The contents of this appendix are basically the same as those in Appendix II of the
original code, but this appendix modifies the design values of axial compression and axial
tension strength of plain concrete.

In the original code, the computation of bearing capacity of normal section of reinforced
concrete eccentric compression member adopts ƒ cm but in this code it is replaced with ƒ c;
the original code adopts ƒ c to compute the bearing capacity of normal section of
reinforced conc rete axial compression member but in this code it is replaced with ƒc
multiplied by the coefficient 0.9. These modifications improve the safety of the reinforced
concrete structure. The safety of plain concrete structure is also accordingly improved, ƒ cc
in the original code is taken to be 0.95ƒc, while in this code it is taken to be 0.85ƒ c,
making the improvement amplitude of the safety of plain concrete structure equivalent to
that of reinforced concrete structure.

341
 Appendix B Nominal Sectional Area, Area of Computation
Section and Theoretical Weight of Steel Bar

This appendix, according to the existing national standard, adds the contents relating to
prestressing steel strand wires and steel wires.

342
 Appendix C Multishaft Strength and Constitutive Relation of
Concrete

This appendix is the newly -added appendix, specially used for nonlinear analysis of
concrete structure and for the bearing capacity check-computation of 2D and 3D
structures. The computation equations and parameter values given in this appendix are
based on our country's experimental investigation achievements and in compliance with
the testing results from foreign countries.

C.1 General Rules

C.1.1 Since concrete materials are of endemicity and are prepared on the side and
their strength and deformation performance have relatively high discreteness,
the method to determine its strength and constitutive relation had better adopt
the order of priority listed in this article.

C.1.2 Both concrete strength and constitutive relation are the short-term testing
results based on normal environment. If the concrete material type,
environment, load-bearing condition of the structural concrete are greatly
different the standard testing conditions, such as application of light concrete or
heavy concrete, concrete of full-grade arrangement or large aggregate and
large volume, variation of age, high temperature, asymmetric load-bearing of
section, long-term continuous load, fast loading or impact load and so on, the
strength and constitutive relation of concrete will vary in a different degree.
Therefore, they should be determined by through test or appropriately corrected
according to related references.

C.1.3 As for any structure analyzed by using linear elastic analysis method, when
check-computing the limit state of bearing capacity or the limit state of normal
use, the strength and deformation indexes of the concrete can be taken
according to Article 5.2.8 of this code.

In the nonlinear analysis on the structure, in order to ensure the exactness of

the computation, the strength and deformation indexes of the concrete had
better be taken to the actual measurement or the man value, see details in
Article 5.3.4 of this code and the notes to appropriate articles.

C.2 Single-shaft Stress-Strain Relation

The contents in this section are mainly used for nonlinear analysis on
rod-system structure and also can be used as the equivalent single-shaft
stress~strain relation of the multi-shaft constitutive relation of concrete.

343
C.2.1 The single-shaft compression stress – strain curve of concrete is divided into
ascending and descend segments, and both segments are continuous at the
peak. The geometric characteristics of the theoretical curve are completely
consistent with the testing curve. In the curve equation of each segment there is
a parameter respectively, which can suit to the curve shape change of the
concrete of different strength grade.

The parameter value of the curve, i.e. peak compression strain (εc ), ascending
and descending segment parameters (α a, α d), descending segment strain (εu)
2
all vary with the single-shaft compression strength of the concrete (ƒ*c, N/mm ),
and its computation formula is as follows:

εc=(700+172 f c* )x10- 6

α a=2.4-0.0125 f c
*

α d=0.157 f c*
0.785
-0.905

1
εu/εc= (1 + 2α d + 1 + 4α d )
2α d

The concrete in a structure often is often influenced by such factors as

transverse and longitudinal strain gradient, web reinforcement constraint,
linking deformation of longitudinal bars and so on, so its stress – strain relation
has difference from the prismoid axial compression testing result of the
concrete. The compression strength of concrete, peak strain and curve shape
(α a, α d) can be suitably corrected according to the mechanical performance
testing results of member or structure.

C.2.2 The single-shaft concrete tension stress – strain curve is divided into ascending
segment and descending segment. Its peak tension strain (εt ) and the
parameter of descending segment (α t ) can be computed by using the following
formulas:

εu= ƒt
*0.54 -6
x65x10

αt=0.312ƒt
*2

where, ƒ t is the single-shaft tension strength of concrete (N/mm ).

* 2

C.3 Multishaft Strength

C.3.1 The multi-shaft strength (ƒ I, I=1~3) of concrete is given according to the ratio
between it and the si ngle-shaft strength (ƒ c or ƒ t ), and the value of single-shaft
* *

strength is seen in Article C.1.3 of this code.

Check computation can be made for the structure by using Formula C.3.1 and

344
 according to the results of the linear elastic analysis method or nonlinear
analysis methods.

C.3.2 The envelope diagram of biaxial strength of concrete is determined to be a

simple broken -line shape, the value of which is lower than the testing result and
can ensure the safety. The compression-compression area of the envelope
diagram and its tension -tension area are the same as those in the
Tasuji-Slate-Nilson standard; the strength in its tension-compression after a
slight adjustment is approximate to the Kupfer-Gerstle standard.

C.3.3 The triaxial compression strength (ƒ3, as shown in Figure C.3.3) of concrete is
obviously lower than the testing value and slightly lower than the stipulated
value in some foreign design codes. Moreover, it has the restriction of
maximum strength (5ƒ* 3). Therefore, it can ensure the structure safety when it
is used in the bearing capacity check computation.

In order to simplify the computation, the triaxial compression strength does not
consider the influence of the intermediate principal stress (σ2). If it is necessary
to take more full use of the triaxial compression strength of the concrete, the
computation can be separately made according to the failure standard listed in
Article C.4.1 of this code.

The triaxial compression strength of concrete can be computed by using the

following formula:

− f3 σ 1.8
=1.2+33( 1 )
fc*
σ3

C.3.4 The influence that the triaxial tension-tension-compression and

tension-compression-compression strength of concrete bears and comes from
the intermediate principal stress (σ2) is not large (<10%), and can be computed
as per the biaxial tension-compression strength (σ2=0), i.e. the
tension-compression area in Figure C.3.2 in this code.

The triaxial tension stress state of concrete is rare in actual structures, and
testing data is very less, taking ƒ 1=0.9ƒ*t approximately as the mean testing
value.

C.4 Failure Criteria and Constitutive Model

C.4.1 The geometric characteristics of concrete failure standards (Formula C.4.1 of

this code) are consistent to the testing envelope camber. The suggested
parameter values are demarcated based on a lot of domestic and foreign
testing data in the full stress scope. When the stress range of specific concrete
material or structure is relatively narrow, the parameter values can be
separately computed by using an iteration method and according to the
concrete multi-shaft strength testing data or given characteristic strength values,
so as to improve the computation accuracy.

345
 The computation formula for concrete failure standard is a transcendental
equation, and it is difficult for obtaining explicit solution, so the multi-shaft
strength can be computed by using a computer.

C.4.2 In various references, there are many types of nonlinear constitutive models of
concrete, their concepts and forms, simplicity and complexity degrees and
computation results are greatly different an difficult for unification. Till now,
among the design codes of various countries, only the CEB-FIP MC90 model
code gives the physical concrete constitutive relation model, i.e., Ottosen (3D)
and Darwin-Pecknold (2D) models, which both belong to a nonlinear elastic
model. Such kind of model is single and practical but it also has a certain
limitation and a certain error in some stress range.

This article in principle suggests adopting nonlinear elastic orthogonal

heterologous constitutive model, the advantage of which is that it is based on
the testing result, simple in concept, and complying with the material
performance and load-bearing characteristics of concrete. The designer and
analysis persons can select other constitutive models.

346
Appendix D Prestressing Loss of Post-tensioned Prestressed
Tendon of Typical Beam Type

When the curve prestressing tendons of post-tensioned member are relaxed, the
impediment that the curve prestressing tendon suffers from the counter-friction on the
curve passage must be considered due to the prestress loss caused by anchorage
deformation and steel bar shrinkage. According to the deformation coordinate theory, the
deformation of anchorage at the tension end and the shrinkage value of prestressing
tendon are taken to be the steel bar deformation value caused by the counter-friction.
Under different conditions, the value of σl1 at different position in the same curve
prestressing tendon is different. In the original code, only the computation formula for
common arc curve prestressing tendon is given. When deducing this formula, it is
assumed that the normal friction coefficient is equal to the counter-friction coefficient
while not considering the case that there is a straight segment at the tension end of the
prestressing tendon.

This revision adds the computation formula of prestress loss σl 1 of curve bar and
broken-line bar composed of two arc curves of the prestressing tendon the end of which
is straight line and the straight line length is equal to l0. This formula is applicable to the
case that the friction loss influence in the length l 0 is ignored.

347
 Appendix E Time-related Prestressing Loss

The computation method of prestress loss due to concrete shrinkage and creepage
considering the influence of several factors such as age, theoretical thickness when
pre-applying the force is deduced with reference to "Suggestions on design of partially
prestressed concrete structure" and through comparison with the computation results of
Formulas 6.2.5-1~6.2.5-4 in this code. The use method considers the influence of the
prestress loss caused by concrete shrinkage and creepage of non-prestressing tendons,
considers the influence of prestressing tendon relaxation to the computation value of
creepage loss and discount the creepage loss by 0.9. The final value of concrete
shrinkage strain and creepage coefficients considering the influence of age and
theoretical thickness when pre-applying force and the coefficient of relaxation loss and
shrinkage and creepage intermediate values are taken from the Code for Design of
Reinforced Concrete and Prestressed Concrete Structures for Railway and Culverts
(TB10002.3). It is generally applicable to such situations with cement content being
3
400~500kg/m , water-cement ratio between 0.34~0.42 and relative humidity of
surrounding air between 60% and 80%. As for any structure to be used in the
environment with annual mean relative humidity lower than 405, the final value of
shrinkage strain and creepage coefficient should be increased by 40%. When there is
reliable data, the final value of concrete shrinkage strain and creepage coefficient can be
taken according to Table E.0.1. As for pumping concrete with large slump constant or in
the case w here the relative humidity in the surrounding air is between 40% and 60%, the
influence of prestress loss increase due to concrete shrinkage and creepage according to
actual situations, or adopting other reliable data.

Any member with prestressing tendon A' p and non-prestressing tendons A's configured in
the compression area can be approximately computed by using Formula E.0.1-1; in this
case, A'p=A's=0; σ'l 5 is computed by using Formula E.0.1-2. When computing σpc and σ' pc
in Formulas E.0.1-1 and E.0.1-2, the whole pre-applied force should be adopted. The
computation method to compute the prestress loss due to concrete shrinkage and
creepage, which is listed in this appendix, is for use in some important engineering
design requiring considering the influence of concrete age and theoretical thickness when
applying prestress and requiring computing the intermediate value of time-associated
change of relaxation and shrinkage and creepage loss.

348
 Appendix F Computation of Bearing Capacity of Normal
Section of Me mber on any Section

This appendix gives the general formula to compute the bearing capacity of normal
section of a member of arbitrary section and arbitrary web reinforcements.

With the popularization and application of computers, the bearing capacity of normal
section of a member of arbitrary section, external force and web reinforcements can be,
based on the basic assumptions in Article 7.1.2, computed by using the numerical
integration method and through repeated iteration. When computing the strain of various
units, it generally should draw a straight line parallel to the central axis via the top point of
the compression area with limit concrete strain being εcu; in the other case, a straight line
should be additionally drawn in parallel to the central axis and via the top point with the
limit tension strain equal to 0.01 of the outmost longitudinal tension steel bars, and then
drawing a straight line vertical to the central axis; then, the strain of various unit and
corresponding stress should be determined with this straight line as the datum line and
according to the plane section assumption.

When establishing the formula, in order to simplify the formula, the origin of coordinates
is taken to be the gravity center of the section; when actually computing or preparing the
computation program, an appropriate coordinate system can be selected according to the
need of the computation.

349
 Appendix G Design Value of Equivalent Centralized
Counterforce for Computation of Plate Column Nodes

G.0.1 When under the action of vertical load and horizontal load, the node of plate
column node transfers unbalanced bending moment, the design value of its
equivalent concentrated counterforce is composed of two parts:

a) Design value of the axial compression force borne by pillar MINUS the
design value of the load borne by the plate in the die-cut failure cone
range, i.e. F l;

b) Design value of additional concentrated counterforce obtained from the

discounted value of the maximum shearing stress to be produced on the
critical section due to the node shear-transferring unbalanced bending
moment, i.e., τmaxumh0.

Formulas G.0.1-1, G.0.1-2 and G.0.1-3 in this article are given according the
above method.

The unbalanced bending moment that vertical load and horizontal load
produces on the axis line 2 in Figure G.0.1 is taken to be the algebraic sum of
the unbalanced bending moment that the vertical and horizontal load produce
on the axis line 1 and F leg, in which eg is the distance between axis line 1 and
axis line 2. Formulas G.0.1-2 and G.0.1-4 are obtained as per this principle;
when applying the above formulas, attention should be paid to the acting
directions of the two bending moments; when the two bending moments have
the same direction, the sign should be +; when their directions ar e opposite, the
sign should be -.

G.0.2~G.0.3 These articles give the computation formulas for computing the geometric
parameters of the critical sections of mid pillar, edge pillar and corner pillar as
shown in Figure G.0.1. These parameters are given according to the
stipulations in the Technical Procedures for Prestressed Concrete Structures
without Cementing; among them, the formula for similar inertia moment ignores

the influence of h 03 term, i.e. the term αt h 03 /6 is omitted in Formulas G.0.2-1 and

G.0.2-5; the term α t h 03 //12 is omitted in Formulas G.0.2-10 and G.0.2-14; this

means that the action of the horizontal shearing stress on the critical section is
ignored, this is feasible for the plat e thickness of common plate column
structure.

G.0.4 When there is a cantilever plate on the edge pillar or corner pillar, the
computation of die-cut bearing capacity may take the perimeter of the critical
section of the edge pillar or corner pillar or take the perimeter of the critical
section formed due to die-cut failure of mid pillar. Computation and comparison
should be made so as to take the most unfavorable value as the design
computation basis.

350